ROB Specifications PDF

Tender No. DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.
214 & 220
For
Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches

complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan
and Dangarwa stations and L.C. No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-4 between
Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations of Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of
Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway.
TECHNICAL BID
(PACKET-A)
TENDER DOCUMENT
March, 2016
Employer:
DEDICATED FREIGHT CORRIDOR CORPORATION OF INDIA LIMITED
CPM-AHMEDABAD UNIT
(A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE)
UNDER
MINISTRY OF RAILWAYS
DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.214 & 220
INDEX
PART/CHAPTERS DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
PART - I
Chapter I Notice Inviting Tender 4
Chapter II General Information / Data sheet 8
Chapter III Preamble and General Instructions to Tenderers 9
Chapter IV General Conditions of Contract 25
Chapter V Special Conditions of Contract 75
PART - II Technical Specifications 88
PART – III (A) Additional Technical Specifications-I 166
PART – III (B) Additional Technical Specifications-II 180
PART – III (C) Additional Technical Specifications-III 185
PART - IV
Chapter I Milestones and Time Schedule 315
Chapter II Tender Forms (including Schedule of Prices) 318
PART - V Drawings 352
Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

Date Page 2
PART- I
Chapter I
NOTICE INVITING TENDER

Date Page 3
PART- I
Chapter I
DEDICATED FREIGHT CORRIDOR CORPORATIONOFINDIALIMITED
(AGOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE)
No: DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/ LC.NO.214&220 DATE:10.03.2016
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
National Competitive Bidding

Dear Sirs,
Name of Work: Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over Bridge including approaches

complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa
stations and L.C. No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations of
Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway.
1.1.1 Chief Project Manager, Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Ltd. Ahmedabad,
First Floor, Old DRM Office building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad - 380002, India,
invites sealed tenders on two packet system on prescribed forms from firms/ Companies/
Joint Ventures having requisite experience and financial capacity for execution of the
following work:
Table 1
S. Name of work Tender cost Earnest Completi

N ( Rs) money on
o. (Rs) Period
1. Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over 63,62,76,000/- 63,63,000/- 20
Bridge including approaches complete in months
lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2
between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa
stations and L.C. No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-
4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations
of Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of
Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway.
* As per works manual
1.1.2 Eligibility shall be assessed on applicants, fulfilling the technical capability and
competence as well as for financial and organizational resources as specified inclause no.
1.3.13 (i) A & B of Preamble and General instruction to tenders (Part-I,ChapterIII).

Date Page 4
1.1.3 Tender document can be obtained from 10:30 hours to 17:00hrs on all working days from
14.03.2016 to 16.04.2016 from the office of Chief Project Manager, Dedicated Freight
Corridor Corporation of India Ltd. Ahmedabad, First Floor, Old DRM Office
building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad - 380002, India on payment of non-refundable amount
of Rs 25,000 through Banker's Cheque/Demand Draft drawn in favour of DEDICATED
FREIGHT CORRIDOR CORPORATION OF INDIA LIMITED, New Delhi towards the
cost of one set of tender documents. The Banker's Cheque/ Demand Draft shall be from
State Bank of India or any of the nationalized Bank or by Indian Scheduled Bank. Tender
document can also be obtained by post for which an amount of Rs.500/- shall be charged
extra. DEDICATED FREIGHT CORRIDOR CORPORATION OF INDIA LIMITED shall
not be responsible for any postal delay in receiving of tender document. The tender
documents shall be sold only to the person authorised in writing by the Firms / Company/
Joint ventures. Tender documents can also be downloaded from DFCCIL’s web site
www.dfccil.gov.in. In such case tenderer shall deposit the cost of tender document (non-
refundable) along with the submission of the tender failing which his tender shall not be
opened. The cost of tender documents shall be deposited in the form of Banker's
Cheque/Demand Draft and enclosed in the envelope containing the earnest money deposit.
Tenderer are advised not to make any correction /addition /alteration in the downloaded
tender documents. If any such correction /addition /alteration in downloaded tender
documents are made such tenders shall not be considered.
1.1.4 DFCCIL may issue addendum(s)/corrigendum(s) to the tender documents. In such cases the
addendum(s)/corrigendum(s) shall be issued and placed on DFCCIL’s website:
www.dfccil.gov.in at least three days in advance of date of opening of tender. The tenderer
who have purchased tender documents or downloaded the tender documents from the
website before issue of addendum(s)/ corrigendum(s) must visit the website and ensure that
such addendum(s)/corrigendum(s)(if any) is also downloaded by them. Such
addendum(s)/corrigendum(s)(if any) shall also be submitted duly stamped and signed along
with the submission of tenders. Any tender submitted without
addendum(s)/corrigendum(s)(if any) shall be summarily rejected.
1.1.5 The tender documents shall be in two separate sealed packets viz Packet - A containing
TECHNICAL BID and Packet- B containing FINANACIAL BID. Detailed credential as
per the requirement of eligibility criteria and all tender papers except Bill of Quantities are
to be submitted in Technical Bid. Summary of Prices (Form No.3) with % age above or
below or at par on the amount of various schedules "A", "B", "C", “D”, “E”, “F”, duly
filled in along with Schedule of Prices (Form - 4) are to be submitted in “Financial Bid”.
1.1.6 Tender shall be submitted as per “General Instruction to Tenderers” forming as part of the
complete tender documents.
Completed tender documents should be deposited in the tender box at DFCCIL office at
address given in Para 1.1.1upto 15.00 hours of 18.04.2016. Tenders shall be opened
(Technical Bids Only) at 15:30 hours on the same day i.e.18.04.2016 in the presence of
tenderers or their representative intending to attend the opening. The financial Bid shall be
opened only after accessing suitability as per the Technical Bids by DFCCIL. Complete
tender documents can also be sent through Registered post / Speed post so as to reach in
this office not later than the time and date of opening of tenders. Any tender received
Date Page 5
later than the time and date of opening of tenders shall be rejected and returned to the
tenderer unopened.
1.1.7 Any tender received without Earnest money and cost of tender documents (in case of
downloaded tenders) in the form as specified in the tender documents shall not be
considered and shall be summarily rejected.
1.1.8 DFCCIL reserves right to cancel the tender before submission /opening of tender, postpone
the tender submission/ opening date and to accept/reject any or all tenders without assigning
any reason thereof. DFCCIL's assessment of suitability as per eligibility criteria shall be
final and binding.
1.1.9 Tenderers may note that they are liable to be disqualified at any time during tendering
process in case any of the information furnished by them is not found to be true.EMD of
such tenderers shall be forfeited. The decision of DFCCIL in this regards shall be final and
binding.
1.1.10 Information as required as per various Forms to tender document should be submitted by
the tenderers without fail strictly as per formats provided.
1.1.11 The validity of offer shall be 90 days from the date of opening of the tender.
1.1.12 Transfer of the tender document purchased by intending tenderer to another tenderer is not
admissible. Tenderer can submit tenders only on the documents purchased / downloaded
from DFCCIL website: www.dfccil.gov.in by them.

Date Page 6
PART - I
Chapter II
GENERAL INFORMATION / DATA SHEET

Date Page 7
PART - I
Chapter II
GENERAL INFORMATION/DATA SHEET
TENDER NOTICE NO. DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.214 & 220
Date : 10.03.2016
Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over Bridge including
approaches complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2
between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa stations and L.C. No. 220,
Name of the work IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dang.arwa and Jhulasan stations of
Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of Ahmedabad Division of
Western Railway.
(a) Tender Value Rs. 63,62,76,000 /-
(b) Completion Period 20 months
(c) Earnest Money Rs. 63,63,000/-
(d) Date and Time of Issue of From 14.03.2016 to 16.04.2016on all working days from
Tender 10:30hrs.to17:00hrs.against the prescribed fee of Rs. 25,000
which is not refundable.
(e) Last date and Time of 18.04.2016 upto15:00 hrs
submission of Tender
(f) Date and Time of On 18.04.2016 at 15:30 hrs

Opening of Tender
(Technical Bids -Packet
A)
(g) Validity of offer 90 days
(h) Retention Money / 5 % of Contract Value

Security Deposit
(i) Performance Bank Performance Guarantee (PG) have to be submitted within
Guarantee 30(thirty) days from the date of issue of Letter Of Acceptance
(LOA), amounting to 5% of the contract value in the form as
give in clause 16.4 of GCC

Date Page 8
PART- I
Chapter- III
PREAMBLE & GENERAL

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS

Date Page 9
PART- I
Chapter- III
PREAMBLE & GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONSTOTENDERERS
1.3.1 Introduction
(i) General
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Ltd. (DFCCIL), a public sector

undertaking has been set up under the Indian Companies Act, 1956 for implementation of
Dedicated Freight Corridor Project. Government of India is the sole shareholder of the
DFCCIL.
Ministry of Railways (MOR), Government of India has planned to construct Dedicated

Freight Corridor (DFC) covering about3338routeKilometres on Eastern and Western
Corridors. The coverage of Eastern Corridor is from Ludhiana to Dankuni and Western
Corridor is planned from Jawaharlal Nehru Port, Mumbai to Rewari / Tughlakabad /
Dadri near Delhi. There will be a linkage between two corridors at Dadri.
(ii) Dedicated Freight Corridor
Eastern DFC Route will be approximately 1839 Km long from Dankuni to Ludhiana via
Dankuni– Asansole– Dhanbad– Gaya– Sonnagar - Mughalsarai- Allahabad- Kanpur-
Tundla- Aligarh- Khurja- Bulandshahr–Meerut– Saharanpur– Ambala- Ludhiana.
Western DFC Route will be approximately 1520Kmlong from Dadri to JNPT via Rewari
– Iqbalgarh - Vadodara-JNPT.
Proposed alignment of DFC has been generally kept parallel to existing Indian Railway
line except provision of detours at some stations where the existing yards/cities are
congested.
Level Crossings (LC's) are generally unsafe locations and also a congestion points for
road/rail’s users. These LC's are operational bottlenecks for Railways / DFCCIL in terms
of loss in punctuality and reduction in line capacity. Construction of ROB(s)/ RUB(s) is
financially and operationally beneficial apart from the fact that it improves the safety of
Rail/ Road users.
Road over bridges (ROB) are being constructed on the level crossings falling on Western
Corridor of DFCCIL. These ROBs shall span over the existing railway lines, the
proposed DFCC lines and on approaches. The ROBs shall be constructed in Railway and
Date Page 10
DFCCIL portion with composite girders/ Bow string girders/ Through girders based on
Railway GADs and design, and on approach portion, RE wall, RCC girders/ PSC girders
etc. based on State Government GADs and detail Designs, and suitably designed RCC
abutments, piers and foundations including staircases and other allied components. Depth
of type of foundation shall be decided/ designed based on detailed geotechnical
investigation at ROBs sites. Before execution or during execution, if there is a
modification/correction in approved GADs of Railways/State Government, the Agency
has to execute the work as per modified/corrected GADs, for which Contractor shall not
be entitled to any extra payment or claims.
(iii) Scope of Work
On behalf of President of India, Chief Project Manager herein after referred to as

'DFCCIL' is inviting sealed tenders from Firms / Companies / Joint Ventures having
requisite experience and financial capacity for execution of the following work:
" Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches complete in lieu of L.C.
No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa stations and L.C. No. 220,
IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations of Palanpur-Ahmedabad section
of Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway.”
a) Railway Portion arrangement as per approved GAD :

b) For Approach portion of work as per approved GAD of Gujarat State government.
SL. Level Crossing Chainage of Appox Rly.Span Approx. Approach

No. No ROB configuration Span configuration
(km) (m) (m)
1. 214 IR Km. 735/1-2 3x36 (Composite 17x24 (RCC Girder )
DFC Ch. 29885 Girders)
2. 220 IR Km. 743/3-4 1x36+1x30+1x12 13x24 (RCC Girder)
DFC Ch. 21650 (Composite Girders)
(iv) Scope of work is as per the requirements given in the Bid document but
Not limited to:
(a) Construction of RCC abutments and piers, for Composite girders RCC/PSC
girder as per IRC loading, including pile foundations/ open foundation as per
GAD/Design.
(b) Fabrication of composite plate girders/ Bow string girders /Open Web girders
(skew up to 450) of around 18m, 22m, 24m, 30m, 36m, 48m and 62m etc.
clear span including erection with traffic power block as per GAD.
(c) Construction of Approximate 12m/20m etc wide RCC deck slab on plate
girders (composite) RCC/PSC girder and 7.5m/ 15m etc. width on approaches
as per approved GADs.
Date Page 11
(d) Providing and fixing in position standard fixed type POT bearing, free sliding
type POT cum PTFE bearings/Elastomeric bearings as per approved drawing.
(e) Providing and laying cement concrete wearing coat, drainage spouts,
footpath, road markings, etc.
(f) Providing and fixing RCC crash barrier and RCC railing (As per MORTH
design) and electric lighting poles.
(g) Providing and fixing in position single strip seal elastomeric type expansion
joints.
(h) Construction of Inspection platform, railing, ladders, etc.
(i) Construction of RCC/Steel staircases, providing and fixing of protection

screens.
(j) Construction of approaches which includes constructing of RE wall, RCC

slab, piers, crash barrier, earthwork in bank, providing bituminous road & all
works related to constructing approaches complete.
(k) Other miscellaneous works for commissioning Railway/ DFCCIL portion and
approach portion of work.
(v) Cost of the work: The estimated cost of the tendered work is approximately
Rs. 63,62,76,000/-
(vi) The Tenderer shall be governed by General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Preamble and
General Instructions to Tenderers (ITT) and Special Conditions of Contract
(SCC).Wherever, there is a conflict in any condition between GCC and Special
Conditions of Contract mentioned in the tender documents, the condition mentioned in
Special Conditions of Contract will prevail. However, Engineer’s decision in this
connection shall be final and binding.
Part I, Chapter-IV and V of the tender document contains General Conditions of Contract
and Special Conditions of Contract specific to this work and shall be applicable in the
contract.
(vii) Location
Works are to be executed in the jurisdiction of Ahmedabad Division of Western

Railway with approaches of ROBs in State Government land However, DFCCIL
reserves right to change the site of work anywhere in adjacent / adjoining area of the
work defined in Para 1.3.1 (iii) above in the jurisdiction of CPM/DFC/ADI a n d the
contractor shall be bound to execute the work without any extra cost.
Date Page 12
1.3.2(a) Tender Bid
The Tender Bid shall be submitted in one sealed cover with two separate sealed
Packets as under:-
Packet - A
Eligibility/Qualifying e l e m e n t of the Tender Bid along with other documents

mentioned in para 1.3.2 (b) (i), here in after called “TECHNICAL BID “
Packet - B
Price elements of the Tender Bid as per para 1.3.2 (b) (ii), herein after called “FINANCIAL
BID”.
The TECHNICAL BID (Packet - A) shall be opened on the date of tender opening and the
detailed scrutiny of TECHNICAL BID shall be carried out. The “FINANACIAL BID”
(Packet - B) shall be opened only of those tenderers who qualify in "Technical Bid".
The Financial Bid of un-qualified tenderers shall be returned without opening the Packet
- B. The detailed procedure for tender opening and processing is given in Para 1.3.5.
1.3.2(b) Form of Tender
The Tender documents shall be in two separate sealed packets viz:-
"Packet - A" containing technical Bid and “Packet – B" containing financial Bid. Detailed
credentials as per the requirement of eligibility criteria and all tender papers except
Summary of Prices and Schedule of Prices are to be submitted in "TECHNICAL BID”
i.e. Packet-A . Summary of Prices and Schedule of Prices with percentage above/below/at
par duly filled in are to be submitted in “FINANCIAL BID”.
Completed tender documents in two packets viz. Packet-A and Packet-B shall be sealed
separately in envelopes superscribing as Packet-A (TECHNICAL BID) and Packet – B
(FINANCIAL BID) along with the name of the work. The “Earnest Money” for the work
and the cost of the tender document (in case of downloaded tenders) in the form as
prescribed in the tender document shall be submitted in Packet A (Technical Bid). These
two sealed Envelopes shall be further sealed in a larger envelope super scribing the name
of the work along with date and time of opening of tenders.
Any tender received later than the time and date of submission of tenders shall be
rejected and returned to the tenderer/s unopened.
Tenders not submitted in the proper Forms are liable to be rejected.

Date Page 13
(i) Documents to be enclosed with the TECHNICAL BID (Packet - A):-
S. No Description Documents
(1) Offer letter complete. Form No. 1
(2) Tenderer's credentials in accordance Form No. 2A, 2B & 2C

with para 1.3.13 (i) & (ii) of Preamble and
General Instructions to Tenderers.
(3) Earnest money in accordance with Para 1.3.8 and Cost of Tender
Document in case of downloaded tenders in accordance with Para
1.3.4.3 of Preamble and General Instructions to Tenderers in an
envelope.
(4) Written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the tender to commit
the tenderer and other documents as per format as applicable, in
accordance with para 1.3.6 of Preamble and General Instructions to
Tenderers.
(5) A copy of the tender papers duly signed in ink by the tenderer, on each
and every page in token of his having studied the tender papers carefully
shall be attached with the tender.
(ii) Documents to be enclosed with the FINANCIAL BID (Packet B):-
S. No Description Documents
(1) Summary of Prices, Schedule of Prices & Form No. 3 & 4
Total Prices
1.3.3 Tender Document

This tender document consists of following five parts:
CHAPTERS DESCRIPTION
PART - I
Chapter I Notice Inviting Tender
Chapter II General Information / Data sheet
Chapter III Preamble and General Instructions to Tenderers
Chapter IV General Conditions of Contract
Chapter V Special Conditions of Contract
PART - II Technical Specifications

Date Page 14
PART – III (A) Additional Technical Specifications-I
PART – III (B)

Additional Technical Specifications- II
Additional Technical Specifications- III
PART – III (C)
PART - IV
Chapter I
Mile Stones and Time Schedule
Chapter II Tender Forms (including Schedule of Prices)
Drawings
PART - V
1.3.4 Sale and Submission of Tender Document
1.3.4.1 Tender document can be purchased from the office of Chief Project Manager,
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, First Floor, Old DRM Office
building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002, India on any working day on payment of Rs.
25,000/- through Demand Draft / Banker's cheque payable in favour of "Dedicated
Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, Ahmedabad” The cost of the tender
form is not refundable and also not transferable.
1.3.4.2 Clause applicable for tender documents downloaded from Internet
Tenderer/s are free to download tender documents at their own cost, for the purpose of
perusal as well as for using the same as tender document for submitting their offer. Master
copy of the tender document will be available in the office Chief Project Manager,
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, First Floor, Old DRM Office
building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002, India. After award of the work, an agreement
will be drawn up. The agreement shall be prepared based on the master copy available
in the office of General Manager/ROB/ CPM, Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of
India Limited and not based on the tender documents submitted by the Tenderer. In case
of any discrepancy between the tender documents downloaded from the internet and the
master copy, later shall prevail and will be binding on the Tenderers. No claim on
this account shall be entertained.
1.3.4.3 Cost of Tender documents downloaded from internet
Tender documents are available on Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India

Limited website i.e. “www.dfccil.gov.in" and the same can be downloaded and used as
tender documents for submitting the offer. The cost of the tender document as indicated
above in para 1.3.4.1 above will have to be deposited by the tenderer in the form of
Demand draft/ banker's cheque payable in favour of ‘Dedicated Freight Corridor
Corporation of India Limited, Ahmedabad’ along with the Tender document. This
should be paid separately and not included in the earnest money. In case, tender is not
accompanied with the cost of the tender document as detailed above, tender will be
Date Page 15
summarily rejected.
1.3.4.4 Complete tender documents must be submitted duly completed in all respects in the tender
box in the office of the Chief Project Manager, Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation
of India Limited, First Floor, Old DRM Office building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002,
Gujarat, India up to 15.00 Hrs on 18.04.2016 The “Packet - A (TECHNICAL BID)”
will be opened at 15.30 Hrs on the same day and read out in the presence of such
tenderer(s) as is/are present. Tenders, which are received after the time and date
prescribed for submission of tenders shall not be considered. In case the intended date for
opening of tenders is declared a holiday, the tenders will be opened on the next working
day at the same time. Any modified date and time for submission of tenders shall be
uploaded on DFCCIL website www.dfccil.gov.in The detail procedure of tender opening
will be as per Para 1.3.5.
1.3.4.5 Tenders sealed and super scribed as aforesaid can also be sent by Registered post addressed
to the Chief Project Manager, Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited,
First Floor, Old DRM Office building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002, India. India.
Tenders which are received after the time and date specified in para above shall not be
considered. Tender delivered or sent otherwise will be at the risk of the tenderers.
1.3.4.6 The rates should be quoted in ink in figures as well as in words. If there is variation
between rates quoted in figures and in words, the rate quoted in ‘words’ shall be taken
as correct. If more than one or improper rates are tendered for the same item, the tender
is liable to be rejected.
1.3.4.7 Each page of the tender papers is to be signed by the tenderers or such person/s on
his/their behalf that is/are legally authorized to sign for him / them.
1.3.4.8 Care in Submission of Tenders – Before submitting a tender, the tenderer will be
deemed to have satisfied himself by actual inspection of the site and locality of the
works, that all conditions liable to be encountered during the execution of the works are
taken into account and that the quoted rates by tenderer in tender forms are adequate
and all inclusive in item of Taxes, Duties & Levies etc. in terms of General/Special
Conditions of Contract for the completion of works to the entire satisfaction of the
Employer .
1.3.4.9 Tenders containing erasures and/or alteration of the tender documents are liable to be
rejected. Any correction made by Tenderer(s) in his/their entries must be attested by
him/them.
1.3.4.9.1 Pre-Bid conference: There will be pre-Bid conference at 11.00 hours on 01.04.2016 in
Conference Room Chief Project Manager, Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of
India Limited, First Floor, Old DRM Office building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002, India.
Bidders should give their queries in writing at least 3 days prior to Pre-Bid conference.
All interested firms / contractors may attend the Pre-Bid conference. DFCCIL response to
queries as well as addenda to Bidding document will be posted on the DFCCIL’s
website. Non-attendance at the pre-Bid conference will not be a cause for
disqualification of the Bidder.

Date Page 16
All communication between the Employer and the tenderer shall be in writing. For the
purposes of seeking clarification, the Employer's address is:
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited

Attention: Mr. Sanjay Gupta, Chief Project Manager, DFCCIL Office,
First Floor, Old DRM Office building, Kalupur, Ahmedabad-380002, INDIA
Telephone: 91-7922175107, Facsimile number: :+91-07922163101
Electronic mail address: cpmdfcadi@gmail.com
1.3.5 Opening of Tender:
(a) Tender will be opened at 15.30 hrs. on 18.04.2016,in the Dedicated Freight
Corridor Corporation of India Limited, First Floor, Old DRM Office Kalupur
Ahmedabad-380002, India in the presence of the tenderers or their representatives
as may be present at the prescribed date and time.
(b) The outer sealed cover shall be opened at the time and date prescribed in tender
document. Thereafter the packet of ‘TECHNICAL BID (Packet- A)’ only of all the
tenderers shall be opened and the contents thereof i.e. qualification details shall be
read out. FINANCIAL BID (Packet-B) shall be kept in safe custody in sealed
conditions.
(c) After the opening of “TECHNICAL BID” (Packet-A) of all the tenderers, these
Bids shall be scrutinized and analyzed. If found necessary by the Employer, the
tenderers shall be asked to furnish clarifications and the Employer may also hold
discussions with the tenderers after giving due notice. The names of the tenderers
whose Bid are considered complete and meet eligibility criteria shall be short listed.
(d) The FINANCIAL BID (Packet –B) shall be opened on a subsequent date and time
duly notified well in advance. The Financial Bids of only those tenderers shall be
opened who are short listed after scrutiny of their Technical Bid. The Financial Bid
of the tenders who do not qualify during scrutiny of Technical Bid shall not be opened
and these shall be returned by the employer. The time of opening, date and venue shall
be advised to qualified tenderers well in advance to enable them to depute their
representative. The earnest money of non-qualifying tenderers will be returned back
within a reasonable period of completion of results of Technical Bid.
1.3.6 Constitution of the Firm:-
1.3.6.1 Tenderer shall clearly specify whether the tender is submitted on his own or on behalf of a
partnership firm / Joint Venture (JV) / Company. The tenderer(s) who is / are constituents
of the firm / Company, shall enclose self-attested copies of the constitution of their
concern, Partnership Deed and Power of attorney along with their tender. Tender
documents in such cases shall be signed by such persons as may be legally competent to
sign them on behalf of the firm / company as the case may be.
1.3.6.2 The tenderer shall give full details of the constitution of the Firm / JV / Company and
shall also submit following documents (as applicable), in addition to documents mentioned
above:
Date Page 17
(a) Sole Proprietorship Firm: The tenderer shall submit the notarized copy of the affidavit.
(b) Partnership Firm : The tenderer shall submit self-attested copies of (i) registered /
notarized Partnership Deed and (ii) Power of Attorney duly authorizing one or more
of the partners of the firm or any other person(s), authorized by all the partners to act
on behalf of the firm and to submit & sign the tender, sign the agreement, witness
measurements, sign measurement books, receive payments, make correspondences,
compromise / settle / relinquish any claim (s) preferred by the firm, Sign "No claim
Certificate", refer all or any dispute to arbitration and to take similar action in respect
of all tenders / contracts or said tender / contract.
(c) Joint Venture: The tenderer shall submit documents as mentioned in clause 65 of
GCC.
(d) Companies registered under Companies Act-1956: The tenderer shall submit (i) the
copies of Memorandum of Association (MOA) and Articles of Association (AOA) of
the company; and (ii) Power of attorney duly registered / notarized by the company
(backed by the resolution of Board of Directors) in favour of the individual, signing
the tender on behalf of company.
1.3.6.3 If it is mentioned in the tender submission that it is being submitted on behalf of / by a sole
Proprietorship Firm / Partnership Firm / Joint venture/registered Company etc. but above-
mentioned documents (as applicable) are not enclosed along with tender, the tender shall
be summarily rejected.
If it is NOT mentioned in the tender submission that it is being submitted on behalf of /

by a Sole Proprietorship Firm / Partnership Firm / Joint Venture / Registered Company
etc., then the tender shall be treated as having been submitted by the individual who has
signed the tender.
After opening of the tender, any document pertaining to the constitution of the Firm /
Joint Venture etc. shall neither be asked nor be entertained / considered by DFCCIL.
1.3.6.4 A tender from Joint Venture / Partnership Firm etc. shall be considered only where
permissible as per the tender conditions.
1.3.6.5 The DFCCIL will not be bound by any power of attorney granted by the tenderer or by
changes in the composition of the Firm made subsequent to the submission of tender. It
may, however, recognize such power of attorney and changes after obtaining proper legal
advice.
1.3.7 Validity of Tender:-
Tenderer shall keep his offer open for a minimum period of 90 days from the date of
opening of the tender or as mentioned in the Tender Notice.
1.3.8 Earnest Money:-

(a) The tender must be accompanied by Earnest Money in favour of ‘Dedicated
Date Page 18
Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, Ahmedabad deposited in any

of the forms as mentioned in 1.3.8(c), failing which the tender will not be considered.
(b) The earnest money shall remain deposited with the DFCCIL for the period of
validity of the offer prescribed in this tender i.e. 90 days from the date of opening
of tender. If the validity of the offer is extended, the validity of earnest money should
also be extended failing which the offer after the expiry of the aforesaid period may
not be considered by the DFCCIL.
(c) The Earnest money should be in any of the following forms:

FDR/Banker’s c h e q u e / Demand D r a f t executed by State bank of India or any of
the nationalized banks or any Indian Scheduled Bank.
(d) It shall be understood that the tender documents have been sold/issued to the tenderer
and the tenderer is permitted to tender in consideration of stipulation on his part,
that after submitting his tender he will not resile from his offer or modify the
terms and conditions, thereof in a manner not acceptable to the Employer. Should the
tenderer fail to observe or comply with the said stipulation, the aforesaid amount shall
be liable to be forfeited to the DFCCIL.
(e) The earnest money of the unsuccessful tenderer(s) will, save as herein-before
provided, be returned to the unsuccessful tenderer(s) within a reasonable time but the
DFCCIL shall not be responsible for any loss or depreciation that may happen for the
due performance of the stipulation to keep the offer open for the period specified in
the tender documents or to the earnest money while in their possession nor be liable to
pay interest thereon.
NOTE: No interest shall be paid by DFCCIL on earnest money amount.
1.3.9 Execution of Contract Agreement:-
The Tenderer whose tender is accepted shall be required to appear in person at the office
of Chief Project Manager, DFCCIL-Ahmedabad or if a firm or corporation, a duly
authorized representative shall so appear and execute the contract agreement within 30
days after notice that the contract has been awarded to him. Failure to do so shall constitute
a breach of the agreement affected by the acceptance of the tender in which case the full
value of the earnest money accompanying the tender shall stand forfeited without prejudice
to any other rights or remedies.
In the event of any tenderer whose tender is accepted refuses to execute the
contract agreement as here in before provided, DFCCIL may determine that such tenderer
has abandoned the contract and there upon his tender and acceptance thereof shall be
treated as cancelled and DFCCIL shall be entitled to forfeit the full amount of the Earnest
Money.
1.3.10 Security Deposit on Acceptance of Tender:

The security deposit / rate of recovery / mode of recovery on acceptance of tender shall
be as per the Para 16.(1) to 16.(3) of General Conditions of Contract (GCC).
Date Page 19
1.3.11 Tenderer’s Address

The tenderer should state in the tender his postal address legibly and clearly. Any
communication sent in time, to the tenderer by post at his said address shall be deemed to
have reached the tenderer duly and in time. Important documents should be sent by
registered post.
1.3.12 Right of DFCCIL to Deal with Tenders

(a) The DFCCIL reserves the right of not to invite tenders for any of DFCCIL work or
works or to invite open or limited tenders and when tenders are called to accept a
tender in whole or in part or t o reject any tender or all tenders without assigning
reasons for any such action.
(b) The authority for the acceptance of the tender will rest with the DFCCIL. It shall not
be obligatory on the said authority to accept the lowest tender or any other tender and
no tenderer(s) shall demand any explanation for the cause of rejection of his/their
tender nor the DFCCIL undertake to assign reasons for declining to consider or reject
any particular tender or tenders.
1.3.13(i) Eligibility Criteria
(A): Technical Eligibility Criteria

Criteria Compliance Requirement Documents
Requirement Single Joint venture Submission

Entity Requirements
The tenderer / JV firm or Lead Must meet Existing JV - The tenderer shall
Member of JV firm must have requirement Must meet submit the
satisfactorily completed at least requirement. completion
one single work in last three certificates /
previous financial years and the Or certified completion
current financial year upto the certificates from the
date of submission of tender, of Lead Member client(s) and or
construction of Bridge / Viaduct of proposed Photostat of original
of Railway / Metro Railway / JV-Must meet certificates of client.
ROB for a minimum value of requirement All documents
Rs.22.27 Cr. either original or
photocopy should
And be attested by
Notary.

Date Page 20
The tenderer / JV firm or any Must meet Existing JV - The tenderer shall
Member of JV firm must have requirement Must meet submit the completion
satisfactorily completed in last three requirement. certificates / certified
previous financial years and the completion
current financial year upto the date of Or certificates from the
submission of tender, at least one client(s) and or
single work having a component of Any Member Photostat of original
fabrication and erection of Open Web of proposed certificates of client.
/ Plate Steel /Bow string Girder for JV-Must meet All documents either
Railway / Metro Railway / Road requirement. original or photocopy
Bridge irrespective of cost of work should be attested by
done. Notary.
Note: The single work can be a

separate work or same as (i) above
Note: 1 . Value of completed work done by a member in an earlier JV Firm shall be reckoned
only to the extent of the concerned member’s share in that JV firm for the purpose of
satisfying his / her compliance to the above mentioned technical eligibility criteria in the
tender under consideration.
2. In case the tenderer/s is a partnership firm, the work experience shall be in the name of
partnership firm only.
(B): Financial Eligibility Criteria
Criteria Compliance Requirement Documents
Requirement Single Joint Venture Submission

Entity Requirements
The contractual payments Must meet Must meet TDS certificates/ Audited
received by the tenderer / JV firm Requirement requirement balance sheets and or
or the arithmetic sum of Photostat of TDS
contractual payments received by certificates/Audited
all the members of the JV firm in Balance sheets clearly
the previous three financial year indicating the contractual
and the current financial year up amount received. All
to the date of submission of tender documents either original
shall be at least 150% of or photocopy should be
advertised value of tender. attested by Notary.
Note: 1 . Contractual payments received by a Member in an earlier JV firm shall be reckoned only
to extent of the concerned member’s share in that JV Firm for the purpose of satisfying
compliance of the above mentioned financial eligibility criteria in tender for
considerations.

Date Page 21
2. In case the tenderer/s is a partnership firm, the turnover etc shall be in the name of
partnership firm only.
1.3.13 (ii) Credentials of Tenderer
The tenderer shall provide satisfactory evidence in support of their technical and financial
eligibility, which are acceptable to DFCCIL, as follows:
(a) For Technical eligibility criteria, the details will be submitted in Form No. 2A
along with supporting documents.
(b) For Financial eligibility criteria, the details will be submitted in Form No. 2B
along with supporting documents.
(c) The tenderer shall submit the completion certificates/certified completion certificates
from the client(s) or Photostat of original certificates of client. All documents either
original or photocopy should be attested by Notary. These certificates should indicate the
details of works carried out and successful commissioning of similar type of work
executed by the tenderer. Completion certificate from Govt. organisation /PSUs/Public
Limited Company will be accepted. The certificate from Private individual/Private
Company for whom such works are executed shall not be accepted. In case, the work is
executed for Public Limited Company, copy of work order, bill of Quantity, TDS
certificate payments received and copy of final/last bill paid by client shall be submitted.
The following will be applicable for evaluating the eligibility:
(i) Similar nature of work physically completed within the qualifying period, i.e. last
three financial year and current financial year (even though the work might have
commenced before the qualifying period) shall only be considered in evaluating the
eligibility.
(ii) The total value of similar nature of work completed during the qualifying period and
not the payment received within qualifying period alone, shall be considered. In case,
the final bill of similar nature of work has not been passed and final measurements
have not been recorded, the paid amount including statutory deductions is to be
considered. If final measurements have been recorded and work has been completed
with negative variation, then also the paid amount including statutory deductions is to
be considered.
However, if final measurements have been recorded and work has been completed
with positive variation but variation has not been sanctioned, original contract
agreement value or last sanctioned contract agreement value whichever is lower, shall
be considered for judging eligibility.
(iii) As proof of sufficient financial capacity and organizational resources, contractor

should have received total payments against satisfactory execution of all completed
/on-going works of all types (not confined to only similar works) during the last three
financial years and in the current financial year (up to the date of submission of the
Date Page 22
tender) of a value not less than 150% of advertised tender value.
(iv) Tenderer shall submit a statement of contractual payments received during last three
financial years and current financial year on the prescribed Performa as per Form No.
2B. The details shall be based on the form 16-A issued by the employer i.e. the
certificate of deduction of tax at source as per Income Tax Act 1961. The
photocopies of Form 16-A shall be enclosed duly attested by Notary Public with seal
and Notarial Stamp thereon or a certificate from auditor or audited balance sheet
certified by Chartered Accountant clearly indicating the contractual amount received
duly attested by Notary Public with seal and Notarial Stamp thereon.
(v) The tenderer shall be considered disqualified/in-eligible if:
(a) The Tenderer or any of its partners and/or subcontractors included in the tender
has been banned for business with Ministry of Railways/DFCCIL along with
any of its attached and subordinate offices through an order issued by Ministry of
Railways as per list available on Web site
(http://www.indianrailways.gov.in/railwayboard) of Railway Board pertaining to
banning of Business, with the banning being valid as on the date of submission the
Tender.
(b) The Tenderer or any of its partners has suffered bankruptcy / insolvency or it
is in the process of winding-up or there is a case of insolvency pending before
any Court on the deadline of submission of application.
(vi) For the purposes of conversion of foreign currency to Indian rupees (INR) Bank
Currency(BC) selling exchange rates as published by State Bank of India on the date
28 days prior to date of submission of tender shall be used. For few of the currencies
where BC selling rates are not published by SBI or reserve bank of India, the exchange
rate may be obtained from website- http://www.oanda.com/currency/historical-rates or
http://www.xe.com.
(vii) For the purpose of evaluation of proposals ,all values given in INR in eligible
qualification criteria and the values provided by the applicants in the proposal in the
currencies other than INR shall be converted into one i.e. INR as per exchange rate
mentioned in para (vi) above.
1.3.14 Period of Completion
The entire work is required to be completed in all respects within 20 months (Twenty
months) from the date of issue of the acceptance letter. Time is the essence of contract.
The contractor shall be required to maintain steady and regular progress to the satisfaction
of the Engineer to ensure that the work will be completed in all respects within the
stipulated time.
1.3.15 If the Tenderer/s deliberately gives any wrong information about credentials /
documents in his/their tenders and thereby create(s) circumstances for acceptance of
his/their tender, DFCCIL reserves the right to reject such tender at any stage, besides,
shall suspend business with such tenderer. The EMD of such tenderers shall also be
forfeited.
Date Page 23
1.3.16 Quantum of work and materials:
The indicative schedule of quantities of various items of works is included in Form - 4

of the tender documents.
1.3.17 Employer not bound to accept any tender:
The employer shall not be b o u n d to accept the lowest or any tender or to a s s i gn any
reason for non-acceptance or rejection of a tender. The employer reserves the right to
accept any tender in respect of the whole or any portion of the work specified in the
tender papers or to reduce the work or to accept any tender for less than the
tendered quantities without assigning any reason whatsoever.
1.3.18 Schedule of Prices
The Schedule-1 of the tender document lists out the Schedule of Prices for various items.
Based on these, the total tender value has also been worked out.
1.3.19 Performance Guarantee: Refer relevant clause of GCC.
1.3.20 The tenderer shall furnish information for making payment through ECS/ NEFT / RTGS
(Tender Form No. 8 placed at Part IV of the tender documents).
1.3.21 Negotiation:
Should DFCCIL decide to negotiate with a view to bring down the rates, the tenderer called
for negotiations should furnish the following form of declaration before commencement of
negotiations:
"I................................................................. do declare that in the event of failure of
contemplated negotiations relating to Tender No............................................... dated
............................my original tender shall remain open for acceptance on its original terms
and conditions,".
1.3.22 Site Inspection:
Tenderers are requested to inspect the site and carry out careful examination to satisfy
them as to the nature of work involved and facilities available at the site. They should
note carefully all the existing structures and those under construction through other
agencies. They should also study the suitability of utilizing the different equipment and
the machinery that they intend to use for the execution of the work. The tenderers should
also select suitable sites for the purpose of locating their store yard, laboratory, staff
quarters etc., and satisfy themselves with regard to the feasibility of transporting the
girders, etc. from the yard to the final site of placement etc.
1.3.23 No form C & D shall be issued to the contractor for this work.
********
Date Page 24
CHAPTER-IV
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Date Page 25
PART - I
CHAPTER IV
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
1. (1) Definition:- In these General conditions of Contract, the following terms shall have the
meaning assigned hereunder except where the context otherwise requires:-
(a) “Railway” shall mean the President of the Republic of India or the
Administrative Officers of the Railway/DFCCIL or of the
Successor Railway / DFCCIL authorized to deal with any matters which these
presents are concerned on his behalf.
(b) “General Manager of Railway ” shall mean the officer - in-charge of the General
Superintendence and Control of the Railway and shall mean and include their successors,
of the successor Railway;
(c) “Chief Engineer” shall mean the officer - in-charge of the Engineering
Department of Railway and shall also include Chief Engineer (Construction), Chief
Signal and Telecommunication Engineer, Chief Signal and Telecommunication
Engineer(Construction), Chief Electrical Engineer, Chief Electrical Engineer
(Construction) and shall also include GGM/GM/CPM of DFCCIL
(d) “Divisional Railway Manager” shall mean the Officer in-charge of a Division of the
Railway and shall also mean any officer nominated by Managing Director / DFCCIL and
shall mean and include their successors of the successor Railway.
(e) “Engineer” and Employer’s Engineer shall mean the Chief Project Manager of
DFCCIL / PMC appointed by DFCCIL.
(f) “Engineer’s Representative” shall mean the Assistant Engineer, Assistant Signal and
Telecommunication Engineer and Assistant Electrical Engineer, APM / PM / Dy.CPM /
Add. CPM of DFCCIL in direct charge of the work and shall include any Sr. Sec. / Sec /
Jr. Engineer / Executive / Sr. Executive, APM/PM / Dy CPM of DFCCIL of
Civil Engineering / Signal & Telecommunication Engineering / Electrical Engineering
Department appointed by the Railway / DFCCIL and shall mean and include the
Engineer’s Representative of the successor Railway / DFCCIL.
(g) “Contractor” shall mean the person / Firm / Company / JV whether incorporated or not
who enters into the contract with the DFCCIL and shall include their executors,
Date Page 26
administrators, and successors and permitted assigns.
(h) “Contract” shall mean and include the Agreement of Work Order, the accepted
schedule of rates of the Schedule or Rates of Railway / DFCCIL modified by
the tender percentage for items of work quantified, or not quantified, General
Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contracts, if any, Drawings,
Specifications, Additional / Special Specifications, if any and tender forms, if any, and
all other documents included as part of contract .
(i) “Works” shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the
contract.
(j) “Specifications” shall mean the Specifications for materials and works referred /
mentioned in tender documents.
(k) “Schedule of rates of Railway” shall mean the schedule of rates issued under the
authority of the Chief Engineer from time to time and shall also includes Rates specified
in tender document. Schedule of rates of State Govt.” shall mean the schedule of rates
issued under the authority of the Chief Engineer/State Govt. Gujarat from time to time
and shall also includes Rates specified in tender document.
(l) “Drawing” shall mean the maps, drawings, plans and tracings or prints there of annexed to
the contract and shall include any modifications of such drawings and further drawings
as may be issued by the Engineer from time to time.
(m) “Constructional Plan” shall mean all appliances or things of whatsoever nature
required for the execution, completion or maintenance of the works or temporary works
(as hereinafter defined) but does not include materials or other things intended to form or
forming part of the permanent work.
(n) “Temporary Works” shall mean all temporary works of every kind required for the
execution completion and/or maintenance of the works.
(o) “Site” shall mean the lands and other places on, under, in or through which the works
are to be carried out and any other lands or places provided by the Railway for the
purpose of the contract.
(p) “Period of Maintenance” shall mean the defect liability period from the date of
completion of the works as certified by the Engineer.
1.(2) Singular and Plural:- Words importing the singular number shall also include
the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
1.(3) Headings & marginal headings:-The headings and marginal headings in these
general conditions are solely for the purpose of facilitating reference and shall not be
deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or

Date Page 27
construction thereof or the contract.
GENERAL OBLIGATION
2. (1) Execution Co-relation and intent of contract Documents:-The contract documents

shall be signed in triplicate by the DFCCIL and the Contractor. The contract documents
are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for
by all, the intention of the documents is to include all labour and materials, equipment’s
and transportation necessary for the proper execution of work. Materials or work not
covered by or properly inferable from any heading or class of the specifications shall not
be supplied by the DFCCIL to the contractors unless distinctly specified in the contract
documents. Materials or works described in words which so applied have a well-known
technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.
2.(2) If a work is transferred from the jurisdiction of one Railway to another Railway
or to a Project Authority/ DFCCIL or vice versa while contract is in subsistence, the
contract shall be binding on the Contractor and the Successor Railway/Project in the
same manner & take effect all respects as if the Contractor and the Successor
Railway/Project were parties there to from the inception and the corresponding officer or
the Competent Authority in the Successor Railway/Project will exercise the same
powers and enjoy the same authority as conferred to the Predecessor Railway/Project
under the original contract/agreement entered into.
2.(3) If for administrative or other reasons the contract is transferred to the Successor
Railway/Successor Project Authority of DFCCIL the contract shall not withstanding any
things contained herein contrary there to, be binding on the Contractor and the Successor
Railway /Project Authority/ DFCCIL in the same manner and take effect in all respect as
if the Contractor and the Successor Railway/ successor Project Authority of DFCCIL had
been parties thereto from the date of this contract. The contract shall be
Administered/Managed by GGM/GM/CPM/nominated by DFCCIL.
3.(1) Law governing the contract:-The contract shall be governed by the law for the time
being in force in the Republic of India.
3.(2) Compliance to regulations and bye-laws:-The contractor shall conform to the provision
of any statute relating to the works and regulations and by-laws of any location authority
and of any water and lighting companies or undertakings, with whose system the work is
proposed to be connected and shall before making any variation from the drawings or the
specifications that may be necessitated by so confirming give to the Engineer notice
specifying the variation proposed to be made and the reasons for making the variation
and shall not carry out such variation until he has received instructions from the
Engineer in respect thereof. The contractor shall be bound to give all notices required
by statute, regulations or bye-laws as aforesaid and to pay all fees and taxes payable to
any authority in respect thereof.

Date Page 28
4. Communications to be in writing:- All notices, communications, reference and

complaints made by the DFCCIL or the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative or the
contractor inters concerning the work shall be in writing and no notice, communication,
reference or complaint not in writing shall be recognized.
5. Service of Notices on Contractors:-The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer the

name designation and address of his authorized agent and all complaints, notices,
communications and references shall be deemed to have been duly given to the
contractor if delivered to the contractor or his authorized agent or left at or posted to the
address so given and shall be deemed to have been so given in the case of posting on day
on which they would have reached such address in the ordinary course of post or on the
day on which they were so delivered or left. In the case of contract by partners, any
change in the constitution of the firm shall be forthwith notified by the contractor to the
Engineer.
6. Occupation and use of land:- No land belonging to or in the possession of

the Railway / D F C C I L / S t a t e G o v e r n m e n t shall be occupied by the
Contractor without the permission of the Railway / DFCCIL. The Contractor shall
not use, or allow to be used, the site for any purposes other than that of executing
the works. Whenever non-railway bodies / persons are permitted to use Railway/ S t a t e
G o v e r n m e n t premises with competent authority’s approval, conservancy charges as
applicable from time to time may be levied.
7. Assignment or subletting of contract:- The contractor shall not assign or sublet the
contract or any part thereof or allow any person to become interested therein any manner
whatsoever without the special permission in writing of the DFCCIL. Any breach of
this condition shall entitle the DFCCIL to rescind the contract under clause 62 of
these conditions and also render the contractor liable for payment to the DFCCIL in
respect of any loss or damage arising or ensuing from such cancellation. Provided
always that execution of the details of the work by petty contractor under the
direct and personal supervision of the Contractor or his agent shall not be deemed to
be sub-letting under this clause. The permitted subletting of work by the contractor
shall not establish any contractual relationship between the sub- contractor and the
DFCCIL and shall not relieve the contractor of any responsibility under the contract.
8. Assistance by the DFCCIL for the Stores to be obtained by the Contractor:-

Owing to difficulty in obtaining certain materials (including Tools & Plant) in the
market, the DFCCIL may have agreed without any liability therefore to endeavour to
obtain or assist the contractor in obtaining the required quantities of such materials
as may be specified in the tender. In the event of delay or failure in obtaining the
required quantities of the aforesaid material the contractor shall not be deemed
absolved of his own responsibility and shall keep in touch with day to day positions
regarding their availability and accordingly adjust progress of works including
employment of labour and the DFCCIL shall not in any way be liable for the supply

Date Page 29
of materials or for the non-supply thereof for any reasons whatsoever nor for any
loss or damage arising in consequence of such delay or no supply.
9. Deleted
10. Carriage of materials:- No forwarding orders shall be issued by the DFCCIL for
the conveyance of contractor’s materials, tools and plant by Rail which may be
required for use in the works and the contractor shall pay full freight charges at
public tariff rates therefore.
11. Deleted
12. Representation on Works :- The contractor shall, when he is not personally present on the
site of the works place and keep a responsible agent at the works during working hours
who shall on receiving reasonable notice, present himself to the Engineer and orders given
by the Engineer or the engineer’s representative to the agent shall be deemed to have the
same force as if they had been given to the Contractor. Before absenting himself, the
contractor shall furnish the name and address of his agent for the purpose of this clause and
failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this provision at any time will entitle
the DFCCIL to rescind the contract under clause 62 of these conditions.
13. Relics and Treasures:- All gold, silver, oil and other minerals of any description
and all precious stones, coins, treasures relics antiquities and other similar things which
shall be found in or upon the site shall be the property of the DFCCIL and the
Contractor shall duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the DFCCIL and shall
from time to time deliver the same to such person or persons as the DFCCIL may
appoint to receive the same.
14. Excavated material:-The contractor shall not sell or otherwise dispose of or remove
except for the purpose of this contract, the sand, stones, clay, ballast, earth, rock or other
substances or materials which may be obtained from any excavation made for the
purpose of the works or any building or produced upon the site at the time of delivery of
the possession thereof but all the substances, materials, buildings and produce shall be
the property of the DFCCIL provided that the contractor may, with the permission of the
Engineer, use the same for the purpose of the works either free of cost or pay the cost
of the same at such rates as may be determined by the Engineer.
15. Indemnity by Contractors:- The contractor shall indemnify and save

harmless the Railway/DFCCIL from and against all actions, suit proceedings losses,
costs, damages, charges, claims and demands of every nature and description brought
or recovered against the Railways /DFCCIL by reason of any act or omission of the
contractor, his agents or employees, in the execution of the works or in his
guarding of the same. All sums payable by way of compensation under any of these
conditions shall be considered as reasonable compensation to be applied to the actual
loss or damage sustained, and whether or not any damage shall have been sustained.

Date Page 30
16.(1) Security Deposit:- The earnest money deposited by the contractor with this tender
will be retained by the Railways / DFCCIL as part of security for the due and faithful
fulfilment of the contract by the contractor. The balance to make up the security deposit,
the rates for which are given below, may be deposited by the contractor in cash or may
be recovered by percentage deduction from the contractor’s “on account” bills. Provided
also that in case of defaulting contractor the DFCCIL may retain any amount due for
payment to the contractor on the pending “on account bills” so that the amounts so
retained may not exceed 10% of the total value of the contract.
16.(2) Recovery of Security Deposit:- Unless otherwise specified in the special

conditions, if any, the Security Deposit / rate of recovery / mode of recovery shall be as
under:
(a) Security Deposit for each work should be 5% of the contract value.
(b) The rate of recovery should be at the rate of 10% of the bill amount till the full
security deposit is recovered.
(c) Security Deposits will be recovered only from the running bills of the contract and no
other mode of collecting SD such as SD in the form of instruments like BG(except Note
(ii) below); FD etc. shall be accepted towards Security Deposit.
Security deposit shall be returned to the contractor after the expiry of the Defect
Liability Period in all the cases other than Note (i) mentioned below and after
passing the final bill based on No Claim Certificate with the approval of the Competent
Authority. The Competent Authority shall normally be the authority who is competent to
sign the contract. If this competent authority is of the rank lower than JA grade / CPM,
DFCCIL, then JA grade officer / CPM, DFCCIL (Concerned with the work) should issue
the certificate. The certificate, inter alia, should mention that the work has been
completed in all respects and that all the contractual obligations have been fulfilled by
the contractor and that there is no due from the contractor to Railways / DFCCIL against
the contract concerned. Before releasing the SD, an unconditional and unequivocal no
claim certificate from the contractor concerned should be obtained.
Note:
(i) After the work is physically completed, security deposit recovered from the running
bills of a contractor can be returned to him if he so desires, in lieu of FDR / irrevocable
Bank Guarantee for equivalent amount to be submitted by him.
(ii) In case of contracts of value Rs.50 crore and above, irrevocable Bank Guarantee can
also be accepted as a mode of obtaining security deposit.
16.(3) No interest will be payable upon the Earnest Money and Security Deposit or amounts
payable to the contractor under the contract, but Government Securities deposited in terms
of Sub-clause (1) of this clause will be payable with interest accrued thereon.

Date Page 31
16.(4) Performance Guarantee (P.G.)

The procedure for obtaining Performance Guarantee is outlined below:
(a) The successful Bidder shall have to submit a Performance Guarantee (PG) within 30
(thirty) days from the date of issue of Letter Of Acceptance (LOA). Extension of time for
submission of PG beyond 30 (thirty) days and upto 60 days from the date of issue of
LOA may be given by the Authority who is competent to sign the contract agreement.
However, a penal interest of 15% per annum shall be charged for the delay beyond 30
(thirty) days, i.e. from 31st day after the date of issue of LOA. In case the contractor fails
to submit the requisite PG even after 60 days from the date of issue of LOA, the contract
shall be terminated duly forfeiting EMD and other dues, if any payable against that
contract. The failed contractor shall be debarred from participating in re-tender for that
work.
(b) The successful Bidder shall submit the performance Guarantee i n any of the
following forms amounting to 5% of the contract value:-
i. a deposit of Cash
ii. irrevocable Bank Guarantee
iii. Government Securities including State Loan Bonds at 5 percent below the
market value
iv. Deposit receipts, pay orders, Demand Drafts and Guarantee Bonds.
These forms of Performance Guarantee could be either of the State
Bank of India or of any of the Nationalized Banks;
v. Guarantee Bonds executed or Deposits Receipts tendered by all Scheduled
Banks;
vi. A Deposit in the Post Office Saving Bank;
vii. A deposit in the National Savings Certificates.
viii. Twelve years National Defence Certificates;
ix. Ten years Defence Deposits;
x. National Defence Bonds; and
xi. Unit Trust Certificates at 5 per cent below market value or at the face value
whichever is less.
Note: The instruments as listed above will also be acceptable for Guarantees in case of
Mobilization advance.
(c) The performance Guarantee shall be submitted by the successful Bidder after the
letter of acceptance has been issued, but before signing of the contract agreement. The
agreement should normally be signed within 30 (thirty) days after the issue of LOA and
the Performance Guarantee shall also be submitted within this time limit. This P. G. shall
be initially valid up to the stipulated date of completion plus 60 days beyond that. In
case, the time limit for completion of work gets extended, the contractor shall get the
validity of Performance Guarantee extended to cover such extended time for
completion of work plus 60 days.

Date Page 32
(d) The value of PG to be submitted by the contractor will not change for variation upto 25
% (either increase or decrease). In case during the course of execution, value of the
contract increases by more than 25 % of the original contract value, an additional
performance guarantee amounting to 5 % (five percent) for the excess value over the
original contract value shall be deposited by the contractor.
(e) The performance Guarantee (PG) shall be released after the physical completion of
the work based on the ‘completion certificate’ issued by the competent authority stating
that the contractor has completed the work in all respects satisfactorily. The security
deposit shall, however, be released only after the expiry of the defect liability period
and after passing the final bill based on ‘No Claim Certificate’ from the contractor.
(f) Whenever the contract is rescinded, the security deposit shall be forfeited and the
Performance Guarantee shall be encashed. The balance work shall be got done
independently without risk and cost of the failed contractor, the failed contractor
shall be debarred from participating in the tender for executing the balance work. If the
failed contractor is a JV or a partnership firm, then every member / partner of such a
firm shall be debarred from participating in the tender for the balance work in his / her
individual capacity or as a partner of any other JV / partnership firm.
(g) The Engineer shall not make a claim under the Performance Guarantee except for
amounts to which the President of India / DFCCIL is entitled under the contract (no
withstanding and/or without prejudice to any other provisions in the contract agreement)
in the event of:
(i) Failure by the contractor to extend the validity of the Performance Guarantee
as described herein above, in which event the Engineer may claim the full amount of
the Performance Guarantee.
(ii) Failure by the contractor to pay President of India / DFCCIL any amount due, either
as agreed by the contractor or determined under any of the Clauses/conditions of
the agreement, within 30 days of the service of the notice to the effect by Engineer.
(iii) The contract being determined or rescinded under provision of the GCC the
Performance Guarantee shall be forfeited in full and shall be absolutely at the
disposal of the President of India.
17. Force Majeure Clause:- If at any time, during the continuance of this contract,
the Performance in whole or in part by either party of any obligation under this
contract shall be prevented or delayed by reason of any war, hostility, acts of public
enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, serious loss or damage by fire, explosions,
epidemics, strikes, lockouts or act of God (hereinafter, referred to events) provided,
notice of the happening of any such event is given by either party to the other within
30 days from the date of occurrence thereof, neither party shall by reason of such event,
be entitled to terminate this contract nor shall either party have any claim for damages

Date Page 33
against the other in respect of such non- performance of delay in performance, and
works under the contract shall be resumed as soon as practicable after such event has
come to an end or ceased to exist, and the decision of the Engineer as to whether the
works have been so resumed or not shall be final and conclusive, PROVIDED
FURTHER that if the performance in whole or in part of any obligation under this
contract is prevented or delayed by reason of any such event for a period exceeding 120
days, either party may at its option terminate the contract by giving notice to the other
party.
17-A Extension of time in Contracts:- Subject to any requirement in the contract as to

completion of any portion or portions of the works before completion of the whole, the
contractor shall fully and finally complete the whole of the works comprised in the
contract (with such modifications as may be directed under conditions of this
contract) by the date entered in the contract or extended date in terms of the following
clauses:-
(i) Extension due to modification:- If any modifications have been ordered which in the
opinion of the Engineer have materially increased the magnitude of the work, then
such extension of the contracted date of completion may be granted as shall appear to the
Engineer to be reasonable in the circumstances, provided moreover that the Contractor
shall be responsible for requesting such extension of the date as may be considered
necessary as soon as the cause thereof shall arise and in any case not less than one month
before the expiry of the date fixed for completion of the works.
(ii) Extension for delay not due to DFCCIL or Contractor:-If in the opinion of the
Engineer the progress of work has any time been delayed by any act or neglect of
DFCCIL's employees or by other contractor employed by the DFCCIL under
sub-clause (4) of clause 20 of these conditions or in executing the work not forming
part of the contract but on which contractor’s performance necessarily depends or by
reasons of proceeding taken or threatened by or dispute with adjoining or to
neighbouring owners or public authority arising otherwise through the Contractor’s own
default etc. or by the delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration or in
consequences of the contractor not having received in due time necessary instructions
from the DFCCIL for which he shall have specially applied in writing to the Engineer
or his authorized representative then upon happening of any such event causing delay,
the contractor shall immediately give notice thereof in writing to the Engineer within 15
days of such happening but shall nevertheless make constantly his best endeavours to
bring down or make good the delay and shall do all that may be reasonably required of
him to the satisfaction of the Engineer to proceed with the works. The contractor may
also indicate the period for which the work is likely to be delayed and shall be bound to
ask for necessary extension of time. The Engineer on receipt of such request from the
contractor shall consider the same and shall grant such extension of time as in his
opinion is reasonable having regard to the nature and period of delay and the type and
quantum of work affected thereby.

Date Page 34
No other compensation shall be payable for works so carried forward to the extended
period of time, the same rates, terms and conditions of contract being applicable as if
such extended period of time was originally provided in the original contract itself.
(iii) Extension for delay due to DFCCIL:- In the event of any failure or delay by the
DFCCIL to hand over the Contractor possession of the lands necessary for the
execution of the works or to give the necessary notice to commence the works or to
provide the necessary drawings or instructions or any other delay caused by the
DFCCIL due to any other cause whatsoever, then such failure or delay shall in no
way affect or vitiate the contract or alter the character thereof or entitle the contractor to
damages or compensation therefore, but in any such case, the DFCCIL may grant
such extension or extensions of the completion date as may be considered reasonable.
17-B Extension of time for delay due to contractor:- The time for the execution of the work
or part of the works specified in the contract documents shall be deemed to be the
essence of the contract and the works must be completed not later than the date(s) as
specified in the contract. If the contractor fails to complete the works within the
time as specified in the contract for the reasons other than the reasons specified in
clause 17 and 17-A, the DFCCIL may, if satisfied that the works can be completed by
the contractor within reasonable short time thereafter, allow the contractor for further
extension of (Performa at Form No. 14) time as the Engineer may decide. On such
extension the DFCCIL will be entitled without prejudice to any other right and remedy
available on that behalf, to recover from the contractor as agreed damages and not
by way of penalty a sum equivalent to ½ of 1% of the contract value of the works
for each week or part of the week.
For the purpose of this clause, the contract value of the works shall be taken as
value of work as per contract agreement including any supplementary work
order/contract agreement issued. Provided also, that the total amount of liquidated
damages under this condition, shall not exceed the under noted percentage value or of
the total value of the item or groups of items of work for which a separate distinct
completion period is specified in the contract.
(i) For contract value up to Rs. 2 lakhs - 10% of the total value of the contract
(ii) For contracts valued above Rs. 2 lakhs- 10% of the first Rs.2 lakhs and 5% of
the balance
Further competent authority while granting extension to the currency of contract under
clause 17.(B) of GCC may also consider levy of token penalty as deemed fit based on
the merit of the case. Provided further, that if the DFCCIL is not satisfied that the works
can be completed by the Contractor and in the event of failure on the part of the
contractor to complete the work within further extension of time allowed as aforesaid,
the DFCCIL shall be entitled without prejudice to any other right or remedy available in
that behalf, to appropriate the contractor’s security deposit and rescind the contract under
clause 62 of these conditions, whether or not actual damage is caused by such default.

Date Page 35
18.(1) Illegal Gratification:- Any bribe, commission, gift or advantage given, promised or
offered by or on behalf to the contractor or his partner, agent or servant or, anyone on his
behalf, to any officer or employee of the DFCCIL, or to any person on his behalf in
relation to obtaining or execution of this or any other contract with the DFCCIL shall,
in addition to any criminal liability which he may incur, subject contractor to the
rescission of the contract and all other contracts with the DFCCIL and to the payment
of any loss or damage resulting from such decision and the DFCCIL shall be entitled to
deduct the amounts so payable from any moneys due to the Contractor(s) under this
contract or any other contracts with the DFCCIL.
18.(2) The contractor shall not lend or borrow from or have or enter into any monitory
dealings and transactions either directly or indirectly with any employee of the
DFCCIL and if he shall do so, the DFCCIL shall be entitled forthwith to rescind the
contract and all other contracts with the DFCCIL. Any question or dispute as to the
commission or any such offence or compensation payable to the DFCCIL under this
clause shall be settled by the General Manager/ROB /CPM of the DFCCIL, in such a
manner as he shall consider fit and sufficient and his decision shall be final and
conclusive. In the event of rescission of the contract under this clause, the contractor
will not be paid any compensation whatsoever except payments for the work done up to
the date of rescission.
EXECUTION OF WORKS
19.(1) Contractor’s understanding:- It is understood and agreed that the contractor has, by
careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the
conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during
the progress of the works, the general and local conditions, the labour conditions
prevailing therein and all other matters which can in any way affect the works under the
contract.
19.(2) Commencement of works:-The contractor shall commence the works within 15

days after the receipt by him of an order in writing to this affect from the Engineer and
shall proceed with the same with due expedition and without delay.
19.(3) Accepted Programme of work:- The contractor who has been awarded the work
shall as soon as possible but not later than 30 days after the date of receipt of the
acceptance letter in respect of contracts with initial completion period of two years
or less or not later than 90 days for other contracts have to submit the detailed
programme of work indicating the time schedule of various items of works in the form of
Bar Chart/PERT/CPM. He shall also submit the details of organization (in terms of
labour and supervisors) plant and machinery, that he intends to utilize (from time to
time) for execution of the work within stipulated date of completion. The programme of
work amended as necessary by discussions with the Engineer, shall be treated as the
agreed programme of the work for the purpose of this contract and the contractor shall

Date Page 36
endeavour to fulfil this programme of work. The progress of work will be watched
accordingly and the liquidated damages will be with reference to the overall completion
date. Nothing stated herein shall preclude the contractor in achieving earlier completion
of item or whole of the works than indicated in the programme.
19.(4) Setting out of works:- The contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out
of all works in relation to original points, lines and levels of reference at his cost. The
contractor shall execute the work true to alignment, grade, levels and dimensions as
shown in the drawing and as directed by the Engineer’s representative and shall check
these at frequent intervals. The contractor shall provide all facilities like labour and
instruments and shall co- operate with the Engineer’s representative to check all
alignment, grades, levels and dimensions. If, at any time, during the progress of the
works any error shall appear or arise in any part of the work, the contractor, on being
required so to do by the Engineer’s representative shall, at his own cost rectify such
errors, to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s representative. Such checking shall not
absolve the contractor of his own responsibility of maintaining accuracy in the work.
The contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks, sight rails, pegs
and other things used in setting out the work.
20.(1) Compliance to Engineer’s instructions:-The Engineer shall direct the order in

which the several parts of the works shall be executed and the contractor shall execute
without delay all orders given by the Engineer from time to time but the contractor shall
not be relieved thereby from responsibility for the due performance of the works in all
respects.
20.(2) Alterations to be authorized:-No alterations in or additions to or omissions or

abandonment of any part of the works shall be deemed authorized, except under
instructions from the Engineer, and the contractor shall be responsible to obtain such
instructions in each and every case in writing from the Engineer.
20.(3) Extra works:- Should works over and above those included in the contract require to be
executed at the site, the contractor shall have no right to be entrusted with the execution
of such works which may be carried out by another contractor or contractors or by
other means at the option of the DFCCIL.
20.(4) Separate contracts in connection with works:- The DFCCIL shall have the right to let
other contracts in connection with the works. The contractor shall afford other
contractors reasonable opportunity for the storage of their materials and the execution
of their works and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If any
part of the contractors work depends for proper execution or result upon the work of
another contractor(s), the contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer
any defects in such works that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
The contractor’s failure so-to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the
other contractor’s work as fit and proper for the reception of his work, except as to

Date Page 37
defects which may develop in the other contractor’s work after the execution of his work.
21. Instruction of Engineer’s Representative:- Any instructions or approval given by

the Engineer’s representative to contractor in connection with the works shall bind the
contractor as though it had been given by the Engineer provided always as follows:
(a) Failure of the Engineer’s representative to disapprove any work or materials shall not
prejudice, the power of the Engineer thereafter to disapprove such work or material and
to order the removal or breaking up thereof.
(b) If the Contractor shall be dissatisfied by reason of any decision of the Engineer’s
representative, he shall be entitled to refer the matter to the Engineer who shall there
upon confirm or vary such decision.
22.(1) Adherence to specifications and drawings:- The whole of the works shall be executed in
perfect conformity with the specifications and drawings of the contract. If contractor
performs any works in a manner contrary to the specifications or drawings or
any of them and without such reference to the Engineer he shall bear all the costs
arising or ensuing therefore and shall be responsible for all loss to the DFCCIL.
22.(2) Drawings and specifications of the works:- The contractor shall keep one copy of
drawings and specifications at the site, in good order, and such contract documents as
may be necessary available to the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative.
22.(3) Ownership of drawings and specifications:- All drawings and

specifications and copies thereof furnished by the DFCCIL to the Contractor are deemed
to be the property of the DFCCIL. They shall not be used on other works and with the
exception of the signed contract set, shall be returned by the contractor to the DFCCIL
on completion of the work or termination of the contract.
22.(4) Compliance with Contractor’s request for details:- The Engineer shall furnish
with reasonable promptness, after receipt by him of the contractor’s request for the
same, additional instructions by means of drawings or otherwise, necessary for the
proper execution of the works or any part thereof. All such drawing and instructions
shall be consistent with the contract Documents and reasonably inferable there from.
22.(5) Meaning and intent of specification and drawings:- If any ambiguity arises as
to the meaning and intent of any portion of the specifications and drawings or as
to execution or quality of any work or material, or as to the measurements of the
works the decision of the Engineer thereon shall be final subject to the appeal (within
7 days of such decision being intimated to the contractor) to the Chief Engineer/
General Manager/ROB,/CPM who shall have the power to correct any errors, omissions,
or discrepancies in aforementioned items and whose decision in the matter in dispute or
doubt shall be final and conclusive.

Date Page 38
23 Working during night:- The contractor shall not carry out any work between sun-set
and sun-rise without the previous permission of the Engineer.
24. Damage to Railway / DFCCIL property or private life and property:-The contractor
shall be responsible for all risk to the work and for trespass and shall make good at his
own expense all loss or damage whether to the works themselves or to any other property
of the Railway or the lives, persons or property of others from whatsoever cause in
connection with the works until they are taken over by the Railway / DFCCIL and this
although all reasonable and proper precautions may have been taken by the contractor,
and in case the Railway / D F C C I L shall be called upon to make good any costs,
loss or damages, or to pay an compensation, including that payable under the provisions
of the Workmen’s Compensation Act or any statutory amendments thereof to any
person or persons sustaining damages as aforesaid by reason of any act, or any
negligence or omissions on the part of the contractor the amount of any costs or charges
including costs and charges in connection with legal proceedings, which the Railway /
DFCCIL may incur in reference thereto, shall be charged to the contractor. The Railway
/ DFCCIL shall have the power and right to pay or to defend or compromise any claim
of threatened legal proceedings or in anticipation of legal proceedings being instituted
consequent on the action or default of the contractor, to take such steps as may be
considered necessary or desirable to ward off or mitigate the effect of such
proceedings, charging to contractor, as aforesaid any sum or sums of money which may
be paid and any expenses whether for reinstatement or otherwise which may be incurred
and the propriety of any such payment, defence or compromise, and the incurring of any
such expenses shall not be called in question by the contractor.
25. Sheds, stores houses and Yards:-The contractor shall at his own expense provide
himself with sheds, stores houses and yards in such situations and in such numbers as in
the opinion of the Engineer is requisite for carrying on the works and the contractor shall
keep at each such sheds, stores houses and yard a sufficient quantity of materials and
plant in stock as not to delay the carrying out of the works with due expedition and
the Engineer and the Engineer’s representative shall have free access to the said sheds,
store houses and yards at any time for the purpose of inspecting the stock of materials or
plant so kept in hand, and any materials or plan which the Engineer may object to shall
not be brought upon or used in the works, but shall be forthwith removed from the sheds,
store houses or yards by the contractor. The contractor shall at his own expenses provide
and maintain suitable mortar mills, soaking vats or any other equipments necessary for
the execution of the works.
26. Provision of efficient and competent Staff at work sites by the Contractor :-
26.1 The contractor shall place and keep on the works at all times efficient and
competent staff to give the necessary directions to his workmen and to see that they
execute their work in sound and proper manner and shall employ only such supervisors,
workmen and labourers in or about the execution of any of these works as are careful and
skilled in the various trades.

Date Page 39
26.2 The contractor shall at once remove from the works any agents, permitted sub-
contractor, supervisor, workman or labourer who shall be objected to by the Engineer
and if and whenever required by the Engineer, he shall submit a correct return showing
the names of all staff and workmen employed by him.
26.3 In the event of the Engineer being of the opinion that the contractor is not employing on
the works a sufficient number of staff and workmen as is necessary for the proper
completion of the works within the time prescribed, the contractor shall forthwith on
receiving intimation to this effect deploy the additional number of staff and labour
specified by the Engineer within seven days of being so required and failure on the part
of the contractor to comply with such instructions will entitle the DFCCIL to rescind the
contract under clause 62 of these conditions.
26A. Deployment of Qualified Engineers at Work Sites by the Contractor:-
26A.1. The contractor shall also employ Qualified Graduate Engineer or Qualified Diploma
Holder Engineer, based on value of contract, as may be prescribed by the Ministry of
Railways through separate instructions from time to time.
26A.2 In case the contractor fails to employ the Engineer, as aforesaid in Para 26A.1, he shall
be liable to pay penalty at the rates, as may be prescribed by the Ministry of Railways
through separate instructions from time to time for the default period for the provisions,
as contained in Para 26A.1.
26A.3 Deleted
27.(1) Workmanship and testing:- The whole of the works and / or supply of materials
specified and provided in the contract or that may be necessary to be done in order to
form and complete any part thereof shall be executed in the best and most substantial
workman like manner with materials of the best and most approved quality of their
respective kinds, agreeable to the particulars contained in or implied by the
specifications and as referred to in and represented by the drawings or in such other
additional particulars, instructions and drawings may be found requisite to be given
during the carrying on of the works and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer
according to the instructions and directions which the contractors may from time to
time receive from the Engineer. The materials may be subjected to tests by means of
such machines, instruments and appliances as the Engineer may direct and wholly at the
expense of the contractor.
27.(2) Removal of improper work and materials:- The Engineer or the Engineer’s
Representative shall be entitled to order from time to time:
(a) The removal from the site within the time specified in the order of any materials
which in his opinion are not in accordance with the specifications or drawings.

Date Page 40
(b) The substitution of proper and suitable materials, and
(c) The removal and proper re-execution, notwithstanding any previous tests
thereof or on account payments therefore, of any work which in respect of
materials or workmanship; is not in his opinion in accordance with the
specifications and in case of default on the part of the contractor in carrying out
such order the DFCCIL shall be entitled to rescind the contract under clause 62 of
these conditions.
28. Facilities for inspection:- The contractor shall afford the Engineer and the Engineer’s
Representative every facility for entering in and upon every portion of the work at all
hours for the purpose of inspection or otherwise and shall provide all labour, materials,
planks, ladders, pumps, appliances and things of every kind required for the purpose and
the Engineer and the Engineer’s Representative shall at all times have free access to
every part of the works and to all places at which materials for the works are stored or
being prepared.
29. Examination of work before covering up:- The contractor shall give 7 days’
notice to the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative whenever any work or materials
are intended to be covered up in the earth, in bodies or walls or otherwise to be placed
beyond the reach of measurements in order that the work may be inspected or that
correct dimensions may be taken before being so covered, placed beyond the reach
of measurement in default whereof, the same shall at the option of the Engineer or the
Engineer’s representative be uncovered and measured at the contractor’s expense or no
allowance shall be made for such work or materials.
30. Temporary Works:- All temporary works necessary for the proper execution of the
works shall be provided and maintained by the contractor and subject to the consent of
the Engineer shall be removed by him at his expenses when they are no longer required
and in such manner as the Engineer shall direct. In the event of failure on the part of the
contractor to remove the temporary works, the Engineer will cause them to be removed
and cost as increased by supervision and other incidental charges shall be recovered from
the contractor. If temporary huts are provided by the contractor on the Railway /
DFCCIL land for labour engaged by him for the execution of works, the contractor shall
arrange for handing over vacant possession of the said land after the work is completed;
if the contractor’s labour refuse to vacate, and have to be rejected by the Railway /
DFCCIL necessary expenses incurred by the Railway / DFCCIL in connection therewith
shall be borne by the contractor.
31.(1) Contractor to supply water for works:- Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the
contractor shall be responsible for the arrangements to obtain supply of water necessary
for the works.
31.(2) Deleted

Date Page 41
31.(3) Deleted
31.(4)(a)Contractor to arrange supply of Electric power for works:- Unless otherwise

provided in the contract, the contractor shall be responsible for arrangements to obtain
supply of electric power for the works.
31.(4)(b) Deleted
32. Property in materials and plant:- The materials and plant brought by the Contractor
upon the site or on the land occupied by the Contractor in connection with the works
and intended to be used for the execution thereof shall immediately, they are
brought upon the site of the said land, be deemed to be the property of the Railway /
DFCCIL. Such of them as during the progress of the works are rejected by the Engineer
under Clause 25 of these conditions or are declared by him not to be needed for the
execution of the works or such as on the grant of the certificate of completion remain
unused shall immediately on such rejection, declaration or grant cease to be deemed
the property of the Railway / DFCCIL and the Contractor may then (but not before)
remove them from the site or the said land. This clause shall not in any way diminish the
liability of the Contractor nor shall the Railway / DFCCIL be in any way answerable for
any loss or damage which may happen to or in respect of any such materials or plant
either by the same being lost, stolen, injured or destroyed by fire, tempest or otherwise.
33.(1) Tools, Plant and Materials Supplied by DFCCIL:- The Contractor shall take all
reasonable care of all tools, plant and materials or other property whether or a like
description or not belonging to the DFCCIL and committed to his charge for the
purpose of the works and shall be responsible for all damage or loss caused by
him, his agents, permitted subcontractor, or his workmen or others while they are in
his charge. The Contractors shall sign accountable receipts for tools, plants and materials
made over to him by the engineer and on completion of the works shall hand over the
unused balance of the same to the Engineer in good order and repair, fair wear and tear
excepted, and shall be responsible for any failure to account for the same or any damage
done thereto.
33.(2) Hire of DFCCIL / Railway’s Plant:- The DFCCIL may hire to the Contractor such
plant as concrete mixers, compressors and portable engines for use during execution of
the works on such terms as may be specified in the special conditions or in a separate
agreement for Hire of Plant.
34.(1) Precaution during progress of works:- During the execution of works, unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall at his own cost provide the materials for and
execute all shoring, timbering and strutting works as is necessary for the stability and
safety of all structures, excavations and works and shall ensure that no damage,
injury or loss is caused or likely to be caused to any person or property.

Date Page 42
34.(2) Roads and Water courses:- Existing roads or water courses shall not be blocked, cut
through, altered, diverted or obstructed in any way by the Contractor, except with the
permission of the Engineer. All compensations claimed for any unauthorized closure,
cutting through, alterations, diversion or obstruction to such roads or water courses by
the Contractor or his agent or his staff shall be recoverable from the Contractor by
deduction from any sums which may become due to him in terms of contract, or
otherwise according to law.
34.(3) Provision of access to premises:- During progress of work in any street or

thoroughfare, the Contractor shall make adequate provision for the passage of traffic, for
securing safe access to all premises approached from such street or thoroughfare and for
any drainage, water supply or means of lighting which may be interrupted by reasons
of the execution of the works and shall react and maintain at his own cost barriers,
lights and other safeguards as prescribed by the Engineer, for the regulation of the
traffic, and provide watchmen necessary to prevent accidents. The works shall in such
cases be executed night and day if so ordered by the Engineer and with such vigour so
that the traffic way be impeded for as short a time as possible.
34.(4) Safety of Public:- The Contractor shall be responsible to take all precautions to
ensure the safety of the public whether on public or DFCCIL/Railway property
and shall post such look out men as may in the opinion of the Engineer be required to
comply with regulations pertaining to the work.
35. Deleted.
36.(1) Suspension of works:- The Contractor shall on the order of the Engineer, suspend
the progress of the works or any part thereof for such time or times and in such manner
as the Engineer may consider necessary and shall during such suspension properly
protect and secure the work so far as is necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. If
such suspension is:-
(a) Provided for in the contract, or

(b) Necessary for the proper execution of the works or by the reason of weather
conditions or by some default on the part of the Contractor, and/or
(c) Necessary for the safety of the works or any part thereof.
36.(2) The Contractor shall not be entitled to the extra costs, if any, incurred by him during the
period of suspension of the works, but in the event of any suspension ordered by the
Engineer for reasons other than aforementioned and when each such period of
suspensions exceeds 14 days, the contractor shall be entitled to such extension of time for
completion of the work as the Engineers may consider proper having regard to the period
or periods of such suspensions and to such compensations as the Engineer may consider
reasonable in respect of salaries or wages paid by the Contractor to his employees during
the periods of such suspension.

Date Page 43
36.(3) Suspension lasting more than 3 months:- If the progress of the works or any part
thereof is suspended on the order of the Engineer for more than three months at a time,
the Contractor may serve a written notice on the Engineer requiring permission within 15
days from the receipt thereof to proceed with the works or that part thereof in regard to
which progress is suspended and if such permission is not granted within that time the
Contractor by further written notice so served may, but is not bound to, elect to treat the
suspension where it affects part only of the works as an omission of such part or where it
affects the whole of the works, as an abandonment of the contract by the DFCCIL.
37. Rates for items of works:- The rates, entered in the accepted Schedule of Rates of
the Contract are intended to provide for works duly and properly completed in
accordance with the general and special (if any) conditions of the contract and the
specifications and drawings together with such enlargements, extensions, diminutions,
reductions, alterations or additions as may be ordered in terms of Clause 42 of these
conditions and without prejudice to the generality thereof and shall be deemed to include
and cover superintendence and labour, supply, including full freight, of materials, stores,
patterns, profiles, moulds, fittings, centring, scaffolding, shoring props, timber,
machinery, barracks, tackle, roads, pegs, posts, tools and all apparatus and plant required
on the works, except such tools, plant or materials as may be specified in the contract to
be supplied to the Contractor by the DFCCIL, the erection, maintenance and removal of
all temporary works and, buildings, all watching, lighting, bailing, pumping and
draining, all prevention of or compensation for trespass, all barriers and arrangements for
the safety of the public or of employees during the execution of works, all sanitary and
medical arrangements for labour camps as may be prescribed by the DFCCIL, the setting
of all work and of the construction, repair and upkeep of all centre lines, bench marks
and level pegs thereon, site clearance, all fees duties, royalties, rent and compensation to
owners for surface damage or taxes and impositions payable to local authorities in
respect of land, structures and all material supplied for the work or other duties of
expenses for which the Contractor may become liable or may be put to under any
provision of law for the purpose of or in connection with the execution of the
contract, and all such other incidental charges or contingencies as may have
been specially provided for in the specifications.
38. Deleted
39.(1) Rates for extra items of works:- Any type of work carried out by the Contractor on
the instructions of the Engineer which is not included in the accepted schedules of
rates shall be executed at the rates set forth in the “Schedule of Rates of Railway/
Schedule of Rates of State Govt./NS items” modified by the tender percentage and such
items are not contained in the latter, at the rate agreed upon between the Engineer and the
Contractor before the execution of such items of work and the Contractors shall be
bound to notify the Engineer at least seven days before the necessity arises for the
execution of such items of works that the accepted schedule of rates does not include rate
or rates for the extra work involved. The rates payable for such items shall be decided at

Date Page 44
the meeting to be held between the Engineer and Contractor, in as short a period as
possible after the need for the special item has come to the notice. In case the Contractor
fails to attend the meeting after being notified to do so or in the event of no settlement
being arrived at, the DFCCIL shall be entitled to execute the extra works by other means
and the Contractor shall have no claim for loss or damage that may result from such
procedure.
39.(2) Provided that if the Contractor commences work or incurs any expenditure in
regard thereto before the rates as determined and agreed upon as lastly hereunto fore-
mentioned, then and in such a case the Contractor shall only be entitled to be paid in
respect of the work carried out or expenditure incurred by him prior to the date of
determination of rates as aforesaid according to the rates as shall be fixed by the
Engineer. However if the Contractor is not satisfied with the decision of the Engineer in
this respect he may appeal to the CPM/General Manager/ROB within 30 days of getting
the decision of the Engineer, supported by analysis of the rates claimed. The CPM’s/
General Manager's decision after hearing both the parties in the matter would be final and
binding on the Contractor and the DFCCIL.
40.(1) Handing over of works:- The Contractor shall be bound to hand over the works
executed under the contract to the DFCCIL complete in all respects to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the date on which the work is
considered to have been completed, in support of which his certificate shall be regarded
as sufficient evidence for all purposes. The Engineer shall determine from time to
time, the date on which any particular section of the work shall have been completed,
and the contractor shall be bound to observe any such determination of the Engineer.
40.(2) Clearance of site on completion:- On completion of works, the Contractor shall

clear away and remove from the site all constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish
and temporary works of every kind and leave the whole of the site and works clean and
in a workman like condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No final payment in
settlement of the accounts for the works shall be paid, held to be due or shall be made
to the, Contractor till, in addition to any other condition necessary for final payment,
site clearance shall have been affected by him, and such clearance may be made by the
Engineer at the expense of the Contractor in the event of his failure to comply with this
provision within 7 days after receiving notice to that effect. Should it become necessary
for the Engineer to have the site cleared at the expenses of the Contractor, the DFCCIL
shall not be held liable for any loss or damage to such of the Contractor’s property as
may be on the site and due to such removal there from which removal may be effected
by means of public sales of such materials and property or in such a way as deemed fit
and convenient to the Engineer.

Date Page 45
VARIATIONS IN EXTENT OF CONTRACT
41. Modification to contract to be in writing:- In the event of any of the provisions

of the contract requiring to be modified after the contract documents have been signed,
the modifications shall be made in writing and signed by the DFCCIL and the
Contractor and no work shall proceed under such modifications until this has been
done. Any verbal or written arrangement abandoning, modifying, extending,
reducing or supplementing the contract or any of the terms thereof shall be deemed
conditional and shall not be binding on the DFCCIL unless and until the same is
incorporated in a formal instrument and signed by the DFCCIL and the Contractor,
and till then the DFCCIL shall have the right to repudiate such arrangements.
42.(1) Powers of modification to contract:- The Engineer on behalf of the DFCCIL shall
be entitled by order in writing to enlarge or extend, diminish or reduce the works
or make any alterations in their design, character position, site, quantities, dimensions or
in the method of their execution or in the combination and use of materials for the
execution thereof or to order any additional work to be done or any works not to be done
and the contractor will not be entitled, to any compensation for any increase/reduction
in the quantities of work but will be paid only for the actual amount of work done and
for approved materials supplied against a specific order.
42.(2) (i) Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the accepted variation in quantity of each
individual item of the contract would be up to 25% of the quantity originally contracted,
except in case of foundation work. The contractor shall be bound to carry out the work at
the agreed rates and shall not be entitled to any claim or any compensation whatsoever
up to the limit of 25% variation in quantity of individual item of works.
(ii) In case of earthwork, the variation limit of 25% shall apply to the gross quantity
of earth work and variation in the quantities of individual classifications of soil shall not
be subject to this limit.
(iii) In case of foundation work, no variation limit shall apply and the work shall be
carried out by the contractor on agreed rated irrespective of any variation.
42.(3) Valuation of variations:- The enlargements, extensions, diminution, reduction,

alterations or additions referred to in sub-clause (2) of this clause shall in no degree
affect the validity of the contract but shall be performed by the Contractor as provided
therein and be subject to the same conditions, stipulations and obligations as if they had
been originally and expressively included and provided for in the specifications and
drawings and the amounts to be paid therefore shall be calculated in accordance with the
accepted schedule of rates. Any extra items / quantities of work falling outside the
purview of the provisions of sub-clause (2) above shall be paid for at the rates
determined under clause-39 of these conditions.

Date Page 46
42.(4) Variations In Quantities During Execution Of Works Contracts :- The procedure

detailed below shall be adopted for dealing with variations in quantities during execution
of works contracts:
1. Individual NS items in contracts shall be operated with variation of plus or minus

25% and payment would be made as per the agreement rate.
2. In case an increase in quantity of an individual item by more than 25% of the

agreement quantity is considered unavoidable, the same shall be got executed by
floating a fresh tender. If floating a fresh tender for operating that item is considered
not practicable, quantity of that item may be operated in excess of 125% of the
agreement quantity subject to the following conditions:
(a) Operation of an item by more than 125% of the agreement quantity needs the
approval of DFCCIL;
(i) Quantities operated in excess of 125% but upto 140% of the agreement
quantity of the concerned item, shall be paid at 98% of the rate awarded
for that item in that particular tender;
(ii) Quantities operated in excess of 140% but upto 150% of the agreement
quantity of the concerned item shall be paid at 96% of the rate awarded for
that item in that particular tender;
(iii) Variation in quantities of individual items beyond 150% will be prohibited
and would be permitted only in exceptional unavoidable circumstances
with the concurrence of associate finance and shall be paid at 96% of the
rate awarded for that item in that particular tender.
(b) The variation in quantities as per the above formula will apply only to the
Individual items of the contract and not on the overall contract value.
(c) Execution of quantities beyond 150% of the overall agreemental value should
not be permitted and, if found necessary, should be only through fresh tenders
or by negotiating with existing contractor, with approval of DFCCIL .
3. In cases where decrease is involved during execution of contract:
(a) The contract signing authority can decrease the items upto 25% of individual
item.
(b) For decrease beyond 25% for individual items or 25% of contract agreement
value, the approval of competent authority, after obtaining 'No Claim
Certificate' from the contractor and with finance concurrence, giving detailed
reasons for each such decrease in the quantities.

Date Page 47
(c) It should be certified that the work proposed to be reduced will not be required
in the same work.
4. The limit for varying quantities for minor value items shall be 100% (as against 25%
prescribed for other items). A minor value item for this purpose is defined as an
item whose original agreement value is less than 1 % of the total original agreement
value.
5. No such quantity variation limit shall apply for foundation items.
6. As far as SOR items are concerned, the limit of 25% would apply to the value of
SOR schedule as a whole and not on individual SOR items. However, in case of NS
items, the limit of 25% would apply on the individual items irrespective of the
manner of quoting the rate (single percentage rate or individual item rate).
7. - Deleted -
8. - Deleted -
9. - Deleted -
10. The aspect of vitiation of tender with respect to variation in quantities should be
checked and avoided. In case of vitiation of the tender (both for increase as well as
decrease of value of contract agreement), sanction of the competent authority as per
schedule of power of DFCCIL as per single tender should be obtained.
Note: Variation to be approved should be limited so as not to completely change the scope,
character and purpose of the original contract.
CLAIMS
43.(1) Monthly Statement of Claims:- The Contractor shall prepare and furnish to the
Engineer once in every month an account giving full and detailed particulars of all
claims for any additional expenses to which the Contractor may consider himself entitled
to and of all extra or additional works ordered by the Engineer which he has executed
during the preceding month and no claim for payment for and such work will be
considered which has not been included in such particulars.
43.(2) Signing of “No Claim” Certificate:- The Contractor shall not be entitled to make any
claim whatsoever against the DFCCIL under or by virtue of or arising out of this
contract, nor shall the DFCCIL entertain or consider any such claim, if made by the
Contractor, after he shall have signed a “No Claim” Certificate in favour of the
DFCCIL in such form as shall be required by the DFCCIL after the works are finally
measured up. The contractor shall be debarred from disputing the correctness of the

Date Page 48
items covered by “No Claim” Certificate or demanding a clearance to arbitration in

respect thereof.
MEASUREMENTS, CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS
44. Quantities in schedule annexed to Contract:- The quantities set out in the accepted
schedule of rates with items of works quantified are the estimated quantities of the works
and they shall not be taken as the actual and correct quantities of the work to be executed
by the Contractor in fulfilment of his obligations under the contract.
45. Measurement of works:- The Contractor shall be paid for the works at the rates in the
accepted schedule of rates and for extra works at rates determined under Clause 39 of
these conditions on the measurements taken by the Engineer or the Engineer’s
representative in accordance with the rules prescribed for the purpose by the DFCCIL.
The quantities for items the unit of which in the accepted schedule of rates is 100 or
1000 shall be calculated to the nearest whole number, any; fraction below half being
dropped and half and above being taken as one; for items the unit of which in the
accepted schedule of rates is single, the quantities shall be calculated to two places of
decimals. Such measurements will be taken of the work in progress from time to time
and at such intervals as in the opinion of the Engineer shall be proper having regard to
the progress of works. The date and time on which “on account” or final measurements
are to be made shall be communicated to the Contractor who shall be present at the site
and shall sign the results of the measurements (which shall also be signed by the
Engineer or the Engineer’s representative) recorded in the official measurements book as
an acknowledgement of his acceptance of the accuracy of the measures. Failing the
Contractor’s attendance the work may be measured up in his absence and such
measurements shall, notwithstanding such absence, be binding upon the Contractor
whether or not he shall have signed the measurement books provided always that any
objection made by him to measurement shall be duly investigated and considered in the
manner set out below:-
(a) It shall be open to the Contractor to take specific objection to any recorded
measurements or Classification on any ground within seven days of the date of
such measurements. Any re-measurement taken by the engineer or the Engineer’s
representative in the presence of the Contractor or in his absence after due notice
has been given to him in consequence of objection made by the Contractor shall
be final and binding on the Contractor and no claim whatsoever shall thereafter be
entertained regarding the accuracy and classification of the measurements.
(b) If an objection raised by the Contractor is found by the Engineer to be incorrect

the Contractor shall be liable to pay the actual expenses incurred in measurements.
46.(1) “On-Account” Payments:- The Contractor shall be entitled to be paid from time to time
by way of “One-Account” payment only for such works as in the opinion of the

Date Page 49
Engineer he has executed in terms of the contract.
All payments due on the Engineer’s or the Engineer’s representative’s certificates of

measurements shall be subject to any deductions which may be made under these
presents and shall further be subject to, unless otherwise required by Clause 16 of
these conditions, a retention of ten percent by way of security deposits, until the
amount of security deposit by way of retained earnest money and such retentions shall
amount to 10% of the total value of the contract provided always that the
Engineer may by any certificate make any correction or modification in any previous
certificate which shall have been issued by him and that the Engineer may withhold any
certificate if the works or any part thereof are not being carried out to his satisfaction.
46.(2) Rounding off amounts: - The total amount due on each certificate shall be rounded off
to the nearest rupee i.e. sum less than 50 paise shall be omitted and sums of 50 paise and
more upto Re. 1/- will be reckoned as Re. 1/-
46.(3) On Account Payments not prejudicial to final settlement: - “On- Account”

payments made to the ‘Contractor shall be without prejudice to the final making up of
the accounts (except where measurements are specifically noted in the Measurement
Book as “Final Measurements” and as such have been signed by the Contractor) and
shall in no respect be considered or used as evidence of any facts stated in or to be
inferred from such accounts nor of any particular quantity of work having been executed
nor of the manner of its execution being satisfactory.
46.(4) Manner of payment: - Unless otherwise specified payments to the Contractor

will be made by cheque but no cheque will be issued for and amount less than Rs. 100/-
46A PRICE VARIATION CLAUSE:
46A.1 Applicability: Price variation clause shall be applicable for this contract and irrespective
of the contract completion period. Variation in quantities shall not be taken into account
for applicability of PVC in the contract.
Materials supplied free of cost by DFCCIL to the contractors shall fall outside the
purview of price variation clause. If, in any case, accepted offer include some specific
payment to be made to consultant or some materials supplied by DFCCIL free or at fixed
rate, such payment shall be excluded from the gross value of the work for the purpose of
payment /recovery of price variation.
46A.2 Base month: The base month for the 'Price Variation Clause' shall be taken as month of
opening of tender including extensions, if any, unless otherwise stated elsewhere. The
quarter of applicability of PVC shall commence from the month following the month of
opening of tender. The price variation shall be based on the average price Index of the
quarter under consideration.

Date Page 50
46A.3 Validity : Rates accepted by DFCCIL shall hold good till completion of work and no
additional claim shall be admissible on account of fluctuations in market rates increase in
taxes / any other levies / tolls etc except that payment recovery for overall market
situation shall be made as per Price variation clause given hereunder.
46A.4 Adjustment for variation in prices of material, labour, fuel, explosives detonators, steel,
concreting, ferrous, nonferrous, insulator, zinc and cement shall be determined in the
manner prescribed hereunder.
46A.5 Components of various items in a contract on which variation in prices be admissible shall
be material, labour, fuel, explosives detonators, steel, cement and lime, concreting,
ferrous, nonferrous, insulator, zinc, erection, etc. However, for fixed component, no price
variation shall be admissible.
46A.6 The percentages of labour, material, fuel, component etc. in various types of Engineering
Works shall be as under:
Component % age Component % age
(A) Earthwork contracts N.A

Labour component - Other material components -
Fuel component - Fixed component * -
(B) Ballast and Quarry N.A
products Contracts
Labour component - Other material components -
Fuel component - Fixed component* -
(C) Tunneling Contracts N.A
Labour component Detonator Component -
Fuel component - Other material components -
Explosive Component - Fixed component* -
(D) Other work
Contracts**
Labour component 30% Fuel component 15%
Material component 40% Fixed component* 15%
* It shall not be considered for any price variation
** Category of PVC applicable for Schedule A, B, D (Except for item of cement

supply), E and F.
46A.7 Formulae: The amount of variation in prices (increase / decrease ) in the several
components (labour, material etc.) shall be worked out by the following formulae:
(i) L = W x (LQ - LB) x LC

LB 100

Date Page 51
(ii) M = W x (M Q - M B ) x M C
MB 100
(iii) F = W x (FQ - FB) x FC

FB 100
(iv) S = SW x (SQ - SB)

 Applicable for Schedule C.
 No other PVC shall be paid on Schedule C.
(v) C = CV x ( CQ - CB)
CB
 Applicable for Schedule D (only for item of supply of cement).
L Amount of price variation in Labour.
M Amount of price variation in Materials.
F Amount of price variation in Fuel.
S Amount of price variation in Steel.
C Amount of price variation in Cement.
W Gross value of the work done by the contractor as per on account bill(s),
excluding cost of materials supplied by DFCCIL at fixed price, minus the price
values of cement and steel. This will also exclude specific payment, if any, to be
made to the consultants engaged by contractors (such payment shall be indicated in
the contractor's offer)
LB Consumer price index number for industrial workers- All India- published in RBI
bulletin for the base period.
LQ Consumer Price Index Number for industrial workers -All India- Published in
RBI bulletin for the average Price Index of the three months of the quarter under
consideration.
MB Index Number of wholesale prices – By groups and sub groups-All commodities-As

published in the RBI Bulletin for the base period
M Q Index Number of wholesale prices – By Groups and sub Groups-All

commodities as published in the RBI Bulletin for the average Price Index of the
three months of the quarter under consideration.

Date Page 52
FB Index Number of wholesale prices – By Groups and sub Groups for fuel, power,
light and lubricants as published in the RBI Bulletin for the base period
FQ Index Number of wholesale prices – By Groups and sub Groups for fuel
and power as published in the RBI Bulletin for the average Price Index of the three
months of the quarter under consideration.
SW Weight of steel in tonnes supplied by the contractor as per the on accounts bill for
the Month under consideration.
SQ SAIL’s (Steel Authority of India Limited) ex-works / ex plant price plus excise
duty there of (in rupees per tonne) for the relevant category of steel supplied by
the contractor as prevailing rate on the first day of the month in which the steel
was purchased by the contractor or as prevailing rate on the first day of the
month in which the steel was brought to the site by contractor whichever is lower.
In case there is no notification by SAIL for the month under consideration, the price of steel
as notified in the last available month is to taken.
SB SAIL’s Ex- works price plus excise duty there of ( in rupees per tonne) for the
relevant category of steel supplied by the contractor as prevailing on the first day
of month in which the tender was opened.
If the rates in negotiated tenders are accepted, this will be the month in which negotiations
were held. In case there is no notification by SAIL for the month under consideration, the
price of steel as notified in the last available month is to taken.
CV Value of cement supplied by contractor as per on account bill in the quarter

under consideration.
CB Index Number of wholesale prices of sub Group (of cement & lime) as published
in the RBI Bulletin for the base period.
CQ Index Number of wholesale prices of sub Group (of cement & lime) as published in
the RBI Bulletin for the average price index of three months of quarter under
consideration.
LC % of labour component
MC % of Material component
FC % of Fuel component
46A.8 The demands for escalation of cost shall be allowed on the basis of provisional indices

Date Page 53
made available by Reserve Bank of India. Any adjustment needed to be done based on the
finally published indices shall be made as and when they become available.
46A.9 Relevant categories of steel for the purpose of operating the above price variation, as
mentioned in this clause, based on SAILS ex works price plus excise duty thereof are as
under:
Category of steel produced by SAIL whose ex-

Category of steel supplied in
S. No. works price plus excise duty would be adopted
Railway work
to determined price variation.
Reinforcement bars and other

1 TMT 8 mm, IS 1786 Fe 415/Fe 500
rounds
2 All types and sizes of angles Angle 65X65X6 mm IS 2062 E250 A SK
PM Plates above 10-20 mm IS 2062 E 250 A SK
3 All types and sizes of plates
SK
All types and sizes of channels
4 Channels 200x75 mm IS 2062 E250 A SK
and joists
Any other section of steel not
Average of price for the 3 categories covered
5 covered in the above categories
under S. No. 1, 2, 3 above
and excluding HTS
Special Note
(1) It is clearly indicated that price variation implies both increase as well decrease in input
prices and therefore price variation during the currency of the contract may result in
extra payment or recovery as the case may be.
(2) The Index Number for the base period will be the Index Number as obtained for the
month of opening of the tender and the quarter will commence from the month following
the month of opening of tender. If the rates quoted in negotiated tenders are accepted, the
base month for PVC will be month in which Negotiations are held.
(3) General Conditions of Contract shall be applicable in context of Price variation. However,
decision of Engineer shall be final & finding, in case of any conflict.
46A.10 Price Variation During Extended Period Of Contract
The price adjustment as worked out above, i.e. either increase or decrease shall be
applicable upto the stipulated date of completion of work including the extended period of
completion where such extension has been granted under Clause 17-A of the General
Conditions of Contract. However, where extension of time has been granted due to

Date Page 54
contractor’s failure under Clause 17-B of the General Conditions of Contract, price
adjustment shall be done as follows :
(a) In case the indices increase above the indices applicable to the last month of original
completion period or the extended period under Clause 17-A, the price adjustment for the
period of extension granted under Clause 17-B shall be limited to the amount payable as
per the Indices applicable to the last month of the original completion period or the
extended period under Clause 17-A of the General Conditions of Contract; as the case may
be.
(b) In case the indices fall below the indices applicable to the last month of
original/extended period of completion under Clause 17-A, as the case may be; then the
lower indices shall be adopted for the price adjustment for the period of extension under
Clause 17-B of the General Conditions of Contract.
47.0 Maintenance of works:- The Contractor shall at all times during the progress and
continuance of the works and also for the period of maintenance specified in the Tender
Form after the date of passing of the certificate of completion by the Engineer or any other
earlier date subsequent to the completion of the works that may be fixed by the Engineer
be responsible for and effectively maintain and uphold in good substantial, sound and
perfect condition all and every part of the works and shall make good from time to time
and at all times as often as the Engineer shall require, any damage or defect that may
during the above period arise in or be discovered or be in any way connected with the
works, provided that such damage or defect is not directly caused by errors in the
contract documents, act of providence or insurrection or civil riot, and the
contractor shall be liable for and shall pay and make good to the DFCCIL or other persons
legally entitled thereto whenever required by the Engineer so to do, all losses, damages,
costs and expenses they or any of them may incur or be put or be liable to by reasons or in
consequence of the operations of the Contractor or of his failure in any respect.
48.(1) Certificate of completion of works:- As soon as in the opinion of the Engineer, the
works has been completed and has satisfactorily passed any final test or tests that may
be prescribed, the Engineer shall issue a certificate of completion duly indicating the date
of completion in respect, of the work and the period of maintenance of the work shall
commence from the date of completion mentioned in such certificate. The Engineer
may also issue such a certificate indicating date of completion with respect to any part
of the work (before the completion of the whole of work), which has been both
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and occupied or used by the DFCCIL.
When any such certificate is given in respect of part of a work, such part shall be
considered as completed and the period of maintenance of such part shall commence from
the date of completion mentioned in the completion certificate issued for that part of
the work.

Date Page 55
48.(2) Contractor not absolved by completion Certificate:- The Certificate of completion in

respect of the works referred to in sub-clause (1) of this clause shall not absolve the
Contractor from his liability to make good any defects imperfections, shrinkages or
faults which may appear during the period of maintenance specified in the tender arising
in the opinion of the Engineer from materials or workmanship not in accordance with the
drawings or specifications or instruction of the Engineer, which defects, imperfections,
shrinkages or faults shall upon the direction in writing of the Engineer be amended and
made good by the Contractor at his own cost: and in case of default on the part of
Contractor the Engineer may employ labour and materials or appoint another
Contractor to amend and make good such defects, imperfections, shrinkages and faults
and all expenses consequent thereon and incidental thereto shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall be recoverable from any moneys due to him under the
contract.
49.0 Approval only by maintenance Certificate:- No certificate other than maintenance

certificate referred to in Clause 50 of the conditions shall be deemed to constitute
approval of any work or other matter in respect of which it is issued or shall be taken as
an admission of the due performance of the contract or any part thereof or of the
accuracy of any claim or demand made by the Contractor or of additional varied work
having been ordered by the Engineer nor shall any other certificate conclude or prejudice
any of the powers of the Engineer.
50.(1) Maintenance Certificate:- The Contract shall not be considered as completed until a
Maintenance Certificate shall have been signed by the Engineer stating that the works
have been completed and maintained to his satisfaction. The Maintenance Certificate
shall be given by the Engineer upon the expiration of the period of maintenance or as
soon thereafter as any works ordered during such period pursuant to sub clause (2)
Clause 48 of these conditions shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and full effect shall be given to this Clause notwithstanding the taking
possession of or using the works or any part thereof by the DFCCIL.
50.(2) Cessation of DFCCIL Liability: - The DFCCIL shall not be liable to the Contractor for
any matter arising out of or in connection with the contract of the execution of the works
unless the contractor shall have made a claim in writing in respect thereof before the
issue of the Maintenance Certificate under this clause.
50.(3) Unfulfilled Obligations:- Notwithstanding the issue of the Maintenance certificate the
Contractor and (subject to sub-clause 2 of this clause) the DFCCIL shall remain liable
for the fulfilment of any obligation incurred under the provision of the contract prior to
the issue of the maintenance Certificate which remains unperformed at the time such
certificate is issued and for the purposes of determining the nature and extent of any such
obligations the contract shall be deemed to remain in force between the parties thereto.
51.(1) Final Payment:- On the Engineer’s certificate of completion in respect of the works,
adjustment shall be made and the balance of account based on the Engineer or the
Engineer’s representative’s certified measurements of the total quantity of work executed

Date Page 56
by the contractor upto the date of completion and on the accepted schedule or rates and
for extra works on rates determined under Clause 39 of these conditions shall be paid to
the Contractor subject always to any deduction which may be made under these presents
and further subject to the Contactor having delivered to the Engineer either a full
account in detail of all claims he may have on the DFCCIL in respect of the works
or having delivered “No Claim Certificate" and the Engineer having after the receipt of
such account given a certificate in writing that such claims are correct, that the
whole of the works to be done under the provisions of the Contracts have been
completed, that they have been inspected by him since their completion and found to be
in good and substantial order, that all properties, works and things, removed, disturbed
or injured in consequence of the woks have been properly replaced and made good and
all expenses and demands incurred by or made upon the DFCCIL for or in the respect of
damage or loss by from or in consequence of the works, have been satisfied agreeably
and in conformity with the contract.
51.(2) Post Payment Audit:- It is an agreed term of contract that the DFCCIL reserves to itself
the right to carry out a post-payment audit and or technical examination of the works and
the final bill including all supporting vouchers, abstracts etc. and to make a claim on the
contractor for the refund any excess amount paid to him if as a result of such
examination any over-payment to him is discovered to have made in respect of any
works done or alleged to have been done by him under the contract.
51A. Production of vouchers etc. by the Contractor:-
(i) For a contract of more than one crore of rupees, the contractor shall, whenever
required, produce or cause to be produced for examination by the Engineer any
quotation, invoice, cost or other account, book of accounts, voucher, receipt, letter,
memorandum, paper of writing or any copy of or extract from any such document and
also furnish information and returns verified in such manner as may be required in
any way relating to the execution of this contract or relevant for verifying or
ascertaining cost of execution of this contract (the decision of the engineer on the
question of relevancy of any documents, information or return being final and binding in
the parties).The contractor shall similarly produce vouchers; etc., if required to prove to
the Engineer, that materials supplied by him, are in accordance with the specifications
laid down in the contract.
(ii) If any portion of the work in a contract of value more than one crore of rupees be carried
out by a sub-contractor or any subsidiary or allied firm or company (as per Clause 7 of
the General Conditions of Contract),the Engineer shall have power to secure the
books of such sub-contract or any subsidiary or allied firm or company, through the
contractor, and such books shall be open to his inspection.
(iii) The obligations imposed by sub clause (i) & (ii) above is without prejudice to the
obligations of the contractor under any statute rules or orders binding on the contractor.

Date Page 57
52.0 Withholding and lien in respect of sums claimed:- Whenever any claim or claims for
payment of a sum of money arises out of or under the contract against the
contractor, the DFCCIL shall be entitled to withhold and also have a lien to retain
such sum or sums in whole or in part from the security, if any, deposited by the
contractor and for the purpose aforesaid, the DFCCIL shall be entitled to withhold the
said cash security deposit or the security if any, furnished as the case may be and also
have a lien over the same pending finalization or adjudication of any such claim. In the
event of the security being insufficient to cover the claimed amount or amounts or if no
security has been taken from the contractor, the DFCCIL shall be entitled to withhold
and have a lien to the extent of the such claimed amount or amounts referred to supra,
from any sum or sums found payable or which at any time thereafter may become
payable to the contractor under the same contract or any other contract with this or any
other DFCCIL or any Department of the Central Government pending finalization or
adjudication of any such claim.
It is an agreed term of the contract that the sum of money or moneys so withheld or
retained under the lien referred to above, by the DFCCIL will be kept withheld or
retained as such by the DFCCIL till the claim arising out of or under the contract is
determined by the arbitrator (if the contract governed by the arbitration clause) or by the
competent court as the case may be and that the contractor will have no claim for
interest or damages whatsoever on any account in respect of such withholding or
retention under the lien referred to supra and duly notified as such to the contractor.
For the purpose of this clause, where the contractor is a partnership firm or a limited
company, the DFCCIL shall be entitled to withhold and also have a lien to retain
towards such claimed amount or amounts in whole or in part from any sum found
payable to any partner/limited company, as the case may be whether in his individual
capacity or otherwise.
52A. Lien in respect of claims in Other Contracts:-

( i ) Any sum of money due and payable to the contractor (including the security
deposit returnable to him) under the contract may be withheld or retained by way of lien
by the DFCCIL, against any claim of this or any other DFCCIL or any other Department
of the Central Government in respect of a payment of a sum of money arising out of or
under any other contract made by the contractor with this or any other
Department of the Central Government.
(ii) However, recovery of claims of DFCCIL in regard to terminated contracts may be

made from the Final Bills, Security Deposits and Performance Guarantees of other
contract or contracts, executed by the contractor. The Performance Guarantees submitted
by the Contractor against other contracts, if required, may be withheld and encashed. In
addition, 10% of each subsequent ‘on-account bill’ may be withheld, if required, for
recovery of DFCCIL’s dues against the terminated contract.
(iii) It is an agreed term of the contract that the sum of money so withheld or retained
under this clause by the DFCCIL will be kept withheld or retained as such by the

Date Page 58
DFCCIL till the claim arising out of or under any other contract is either mutually settled
or determined by arbitration, if the other contract is governed by arbitration clause or by
the competent court as the case may be and contractor shall have no claim for interest or
damages whatsoever on this account or on any other ground in respect of any sum of
money withheld or retained under this clause and duly notified as such to the
contractor.
53.0 Signature on Receipts for Amounts:- Every receipt for money which may become
payable or for any security which may become transferable to the Contractors under
these presents, shall, if signed in the partnership name by anyone of the partners of a
Contractor’s firm be a good and sufficient discharge to the DFCCIL in respect of the
moneys or security purported to be acknowledged thereby and in the event of death of
any of the Contractor, partners during the pendency of the contract it is hereby
expressly agreed that every receipt by anyone of the surviving Contractor partners
shall if so signed as aforesaid be good a sufficient discharge as aforesaid provided that
nothing in this clause contained shall be deemed to prejudice or effect any claim which
the DFCCIL may hereafter have against the legal representative of any contractor partner
so dying for or in respect to any breach of any of the conditions of the contract, provided
also that nothing in this clause contained shall be deemed to prejudice or effect the
respective rights or obligations of the Contractor partners and of the legal representatives
of any deceased Contractor partners inter se.
LABOUR
54.0 Wages t o L a b o u r : - The Contractor s h a l l b e r e s p o n s i b l e t o e n s u r e

compliance with the provision of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 (hereinafter referred to
as the “said Act” and the Rules made there under in respect of any employees directly
or through petty contractors or subcontractors employed by him on road construction
or in building operations or in stone breaking or stone crushing for the purpose of
carrying out this contract.
If, in compliance with the terms of the contract, the Contractor supplied any labour to
be used wholly or partly under the direct orders and control of the DFCCIL
whether in connection with any work being executed by the Contractor or otherwise for
the purpose of the DFCCIL such labour shall, for the purpose of this clause, still be
deemed to be persons employed by the Contractor.
If any moneys shall, as a result of any claim or application made under the said Act be
directed to be paid by the DFCCIL, such money shall be deemed to be moneys paid by it
as aforesaid within seven days after the same shall have been demanded, the DFCCIL
shall be entitled to recover the same form any moneys due or accruing to the Contractor
under this or any other Contract with the DFCCIL.
54A. Apprentices Act:- The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure compliance with
the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the Rules and Orders issued there under

Date Page 59
from time to time in respect of apprentices directly or through petty contractors or sub-
contractors employed by him for the purpose of carrying out the Contract.
If the contractor directly or through petty contractors or sub-contractors fails to do so, his
failure will be a breach of the contract and the DFCCIL may, in its discretion, rescind
the contract. The contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on
account of any violation of the provisions of the Act.
Note: The contractors are required to engage apprentices when the works undertaken by them
last for a period of one year or more and / the cost of works is rupees one lakh or more.
55.0 Provisions of payments of Wages Act:- The Contractor shall comply with the provisions
of the Payment of Wages Act, 1936 and the rules made there under in respect of all
employees directly or through petty contractors or sub-contractors employed by him in
the works. If In compliance with the terms of the contract, the Contractor directly or
through petty contractors of sub-contractors shall supply any labour to be used wholly
or partly under the direct orders and control of the Engineer whether in connection
with the works to be executed hereunder or otherwise for the purpose of the Engineer
such labour shall never the less be deemed to comprise persons employed by the
contractor and any moneys which may be ordered to be paid by the Engineer shall
be deemed to be moneys payable by the Engineer on behalf of the Contractor and the
Engineer may on failure of the contractor to repay such money to the DFCCIL deduct the
same from moneys due to contractor in the terms of contract. The DFCCIL shall be
entitled to deduct from any moneys due to the contractor (whether under this contract or
any other contract) all moneys paid or payable by the DFCCIL by the way of
compensation of aforesaid or for costs of expenses in connection with any claim thereto
and the decision of the Engineer upon any question arising out of the effect or force of
this clause shall be final and binding upon the Contractor.
55A. Provisions of Contract labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970:
55A.(1) The contractor shall comply with the provision of the contract labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act, 1970 and the Contract labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central
Rules 1971 as modified from time to time, wherever applicable and shall also
indemnify the DFCCIL from and against any claims under the aforesaid Act and the
Rules.
55A.(2) The Contractor shall obtain a valid licence under the aforesaid Act as modified
from time to time before the commencement of the work and continue to have a valid
licence until the completion of the work. Any failure to fulfil the requirement shall
attract the penal provision of the Contract arising out of the resultant non-execution of
the work.
55A.(3) The Contractor shall pay to the labour employed by him directly or through
subcontractors the wages as per provision of the aforesaid Act and the Rules wherever

Date Page 60
applicable. The Contractor shall notwithstanding the provisions of the contract to the
contrary, cause to be paid the wages to labour indirectly engaged on the works
including any engaged by subcontractors in connection with the said work, as if the
labour had been immediately employed by him.
55A.(4) In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the work for
performance of the contractor’s part of, the contract, the Contractor shall comply with or
cause to be complied with the provisions of the aforesaid Act and Rules wherever
applicable.
55A.(5) In every case in which, by virtue of the provisions of the aforesaid Act or the Rules, the
DFCCIL is obliged to pay any amount of wages to a workman employed by the
Contractor or his sub contractor in execution of the work or to incur any expenditure on
account of the Contingent, liability of the DFCCIL due to the contractor’s failure to fulfil
his statutory obligations under the aforesaid Act or the rules the DFCCIL will recover
from the Contractor, the amount of wages so paid or the amount of expenditure so
incurred, and without prejudice to the rights of the DFCCIL under the section 20, sub-
section (2) and section 2, sub-section (4) of the aforesaid Act, the DFCCIL shall be at
liberty to recover such amount or part thereof by deducting it from the security
deposit and/ or from any sum due by the DFCCIL to the contractor whether under the
contract or otherwise. The DFCCIL shall not be bound to contest any claim made against
it under sub-section (1) of section 20 and sub-section (4) of section 21 of the aforesaid
Act except on the written request of the contractor and upon his giving to the DFCCIL
full security for all costs for which the DFCCIL might become liable in contesting such
claim. The decision of the DFCCIL regarding the amount actually recoverable from the
contractor as stated above shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
55B. Provisions of Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 :
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Para 30 & 36-B of the Employees
Provident Fund Scheme, 1952; Para 3 & 4 of Employees’ Pension Scheme, 1995; and
Para 7 & 8 of Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme, 1976; as modified from
time to time through enactment of ”Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous
Provisions Act, 1952”, wherever applicable and shall also indemnify the DFCCIL from
and against any claims under the aforesaid Act and the Rules.
55C. Provisions of “The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of

Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996” and “The Building and Other
Construction Workers’ Welfare Cess Act, 1996” :
The tenderers, for carrying out any construction work, must get themselves registered
with the Registering Officer under Section-7 of the Building and Other Construction
Workers Act, 1996 and rules made thereto by the concerned State Govt. and submit
certificate of Registration, issued from the Registering Officer of the concerned State
Govt. (Labour Dept.). As per this Act, the tenderer shall be levied a cess @1% of cost
of construction work, which would be deducted

Date Page 61
from each bill. Cost of material, when supplied under a separate schedule item, shall be
outside the purview of cess.
56.0 Reporting of Accidents of Labour:- The Contractor shall be responsible for the
safety of all employees directly or through petty contractors or sub- contractor employed
by him on the works and shall report serious accidents to any of them however and
wherever occurring on the works to the Engineer or the Engineers Representative and
shall made every arrangements to render all possible assistance.
57.0 Provision of Workmen’s Compensation Act:- In every case in which by virtue of the
provisions of section 12 sub-section (1) of the Workmen’s Compensation Act 1923,
DFCCIL is obliged to pay compensation to a workman directly or through petty
contractor or subcontractor employed by the Contractor in executing the work, DFCCIL
will recover from the Contractor the amount of the compensation so paid, and, without
prejudice to the rights of DFCCIL under Section 12 Sub-section (2) of the said Act,
DFCCIL shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it
from the security deposit or from any sum due by DFCCIL to the Contractor whether
under these conditions or otherwise, DFCCIL shall not be bound to contest any claim
made against it under Section 12 Sub-section (1) of the said Act except on the written
request of the Contractor and upon his giving to DFCCIL full security for all costs
for which DFCCIL might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim.
57A. Provision of Mines Act:- The contractor shall observe and perform all the provisions of
the Mines Act, 1952 or any statutory modifications or re-enactment thereof for the time
being in force and any rules and regulations made there under in respect of all the
persons directly or through the petty contractors or sub-contractors employed by him
under this contract and shall indemnify the DFCCIL from and against any claims under
the Mines Act, or the rules and regulations framed there under, by or on behalf of any
persons employed by him or otherwise.
58.0 DFCCIL not to provide quarters for Contractors:- No quarters shall normally
be provided by the DFCCIL for the accommodation of the contractor or any of his staff
employed on the work.
59.(1) Labour Camps:- The contractor shall at his own expense make adequate arrangements
for the housing, supply of drinking water and provision of latrines and urinals for his
staff and workmen, directly or through the petty contractors or sub-contractors and for
temporary crèche (Bal-mandir) where 50 or more women are employed at a time.
Suitable sites on DFCCIL land/State Govt. Land, if available, may be allotted to the
contractor for the erection of labour camps, either free of charge or on such terms and
conditions that may be prescribed by the DFCCIL. All camp sites shall be maintained
in clean and sanitary conditions by the contractor at his own cost.
59.(2) Compliance to rules for employment of labour:- The contractor(s) shall conform to all
laws, by-laws rules and regulations for the time being in force pertaining to the

Date Page 62
employment of local or imported labour and shall take all necessary precautions to
ensure and preserve the health and safety of all staff employed directly or through petty
contractors or sub-contractors on the works.
59.(3) Preservation of peace:- The contractor shall take requisite precautions and use his
best endeavours to prevent any riotous or unlawful behaviour by or amongst his
workmen and other employed directly or through the petty contractors or sub-contractors
on the works and for the preservation of peace and protection of the inhabitants and
security of property in the neighbourhood of the works. In the event of the DFCCIL
requiring the maintenance of a special Police Force at or in the vicinity of the site during
the tenure of works, the expenses thereof shall be borne by the contractor and if paid by
the DFCCIL shall be recoverable from the contractor.
59.(4) Sanitary arrangements:- The contractor shall obey all sanitary rules and carry out all
sanitary measures that may from time to time be prescribed by the Railway Medical
Authority and permit inspection of all sanitary arrangements at all times by the Engineer,
the Engineer’s Representative of the Medical staff of the DFCCIL. Should the contractor
fail to make the adequate sanitary arrangements, these will be provided by the DFCCIL
and the cost therefore recovered from the contractor.
59.(5) Outbreak of infectious disease:- The contractor shall remove from his camp such
labour and their families as refuse protective inoculation and vaccination when
called upon to do so by the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative on the advice of
the DFCCIL. Should cholera, plague or other infectious disease break out, the contractor
shall burn the huts, beddings, clothes and other belongings of or used by the infected
parties and promptly erect new huts on health sites as required by the engineer, failing
which within the time specified in the Engineer’s requisition, the work may be done by
the DFCCIL and the cost therefore recovered from the contractor.
59.(6) Deleted
59.(7) Medical facilities at site: - The Contractor shall provide medical facilities at the site as
may be prescribed by the Engineer on the advice of the DFCCIL in relation to the
strength of the Contractor’s resident staff and workmen.
59.(8) Use of intoxicants: - The sale of ardent spirits or other intoxicating beverages
upon the work or in any of the buildings, encampments or tenements owned, occupied by
or within the control of the contractor or any of his employees shall be forbidden and the
Contractor shall exercise his influence and authority to the utmost extent to secure strict
compliance with this condition.
59.(9) Non-employment of female labour: - The Contactor shall see that the employment
of female labour on / in Cantonment areas, particularly in the neighbourhood of soldier’s
barracks, should be avoided as far as possible.

Date Page 63
59.(10) Restrictions On The Employment Of Retired Engineers Of Railway/DFCCIL

Services Within one Year Of Their Retirement : The Contractor shall not, if he is a
retired Government Engineer of Gazetted rank, himself engage in or employ or associate
a retired Government Engineer of Gazetted rank, who has not completed one year from
the date of retirement, in connection with this contract in any manner whatsoever
without obtaining prior permission of the President and if the Contractor is found to
have contravened this provision it will constitute a breach of contract and administration
will be entitled to terminate the contract and forfeit Earnest Money Deposits
(EMD),Performance Guarantee (PG)and Security Deposits (SD) of that contract.
60.(1) Non-employment of labours below the age of 15:- the Contractor shall not employ
children below the age of 15 as labourers directly or through petty contractors or
subcontractors for the execution of work.
60.(2) Medical Certificate of fitness for labour: - It is agreed that the contractor shall not
employ a person above 15 and below 19 years of age for the purpose of execution of
work under the contract unless a medical certificate of fitness in the prescribed form
(Proforma at Form No.15) granted to him by a certifying surgeon certifying that he is fit
to work as an adult is obtained and kept in the custody of the contractor or a person
nominated by him in this behalf and the person carries with him, while at work; a token
giving a reference to such certificate. It is further agreed that the responsibility for
having the adolescent examined medically at the time of appointment or periodically till
he attains the age of 19 years shall devolve entirely on the contractor and all the
expenses to be incurred on this account shall be borne by him and no fee shall be
charged from the adolescent or his parent for such medical examination.
60.(3) Period of validity of medical fitness certificate:- A certificate of fitness granted or

renewed for the above said purposes shall be valid only for a period of one year at a
time. The certifying surgeon shall revoke a certificate granted or renewed if in his
opinion the holder of it is, no longer fit for work in the capacity stated therein. Where a
certifying surgeon refuses to grant or renew a certificate or revoke a certificate, he shall,
if so required by the person concerned, state his reasons in writing for doing so.
60.(4) Medical re-examination of labourer:- Where any official appointed in this behalf by
the Ministry of labour is of the opinion that any person employed in connection with the
execution of any work under this contract in the age group 15 to 19 years is without a
certificate of fitness or is having a certificate of fitness but no longer fit to work in the
capacity stated in the certificate, he may serve on the Contractor, or on the person
nominated by him in the regard, a notice requiring that such persons shall be examined
by a certifying surgeon and such person shall not if the concerned official so directs, be
employed or permitted to do any work under this contract unless he has been medically
examined and certified that he has been granted a certificate of fitness or a fresh
certificate of fitness, as the case may be.
EXPLANATIONS:-

Date Page 64
(1) Only qualified medical practitioners can be appointed as “Certifying Surgeons”

and the term “Qualified Medical Practitioners” means a person holding a qualification
granted by an authority specified in the Schedule to the Indian Medical Degrees Act,
1916 (VII to 1916) or in the Schedule to the Indian Medical Council Act, 1933 (XXVII)
of 1933.
(2) The Certifying surgeon may be a medical officer in the service of State or
Municipal Corporation.
DETERMINATION OF CONTRACT
61.(1) Right of DFCCIL of determine the contract:- The DFCCIL shall be entitled to
determine and terminate the contract at any time should, in the DFCCIL’s opinion,
the cessation of work becomes necessary owing to paucity of funds or from any other
cause whatever, in which case the value of approved materials at site and of work done
to date by the Contractor will be paid for in full at the rate specified in the contract.
Notice in writing from the DFCCIL of such determination and the reasons therefore shall
be conclusive evidence thereof.
61.(2) Payment on determination of contract:- Should the contract be determined

under sub clause (1) of this clause and the Contractor claims payment for expenditure
incurred by him in the expectation of completing the whole of the work, the DFCCIL
shall admit and consider such claims as are deemed reasonable and are supported by
vouchers to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The DFCCIL’s decision on the necessity
and propriety of such expenditure shall be final and conclusive.
61.(3) The contractor shall have no claim to any payment of compensation or otherwise,
howsoever on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived from the
execution of the work in full but which he did not derive in consequence of
determination of contract.
62.(1) Determination of contract owing to default of contractor:- If the Contractor should:-
(i) Becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or
(ii) Make an arrangement with of assignment in favour of his creditors, or agree to

carry out the contract under a Committee of Inspection of his creditors, or
(iii) Being a Company or Corporation, go into liquidation (other than a voluntary

liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction), or
(iv) Have an execution levied on his goods or property on the works, or

Date Page 65
(v) Assign the contract or any part thereof otherwise than as provided in
Clause 7 of these conditions, or
(vi) Abandon the contract, or
(vii) Persistently disregard the instructions of the Engineer, or contravene any provision
of the contract, or
(viii) Fail to adhere to the agreed programme of work by a margin of 10% of the
stipulated period, or
(ix) Fail to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace work after
receiving from the Engineer notice to the effect that the said materials or works
have been condemned or rejected under clause 25 and 27 of these conditions, or
(x) Fail to take steps to employ competent or additional staff and labour as required
under clause 26 of the conditions
(xi) Fail to afford the Engineer or Engineer’s representative proper facilities for
inspecting the work or any part thereof as required under clause 28 of the
conditions, or
(xii) Promise, offer or give any bribe, commission, gift or advantage either himself
or through his partner, agent or servant to any officer or employee of the
DFCCIL or to any person on his or on their behalf in relation to the execution of
this or any other contract with this DFCCIL.
(xiii)
a. At any time after the tender relating to the contract, has been signed and
submitted by the Contractor, being a partnership firm admit as one of its
partners or employee under it or being an incorporated company elect or
nominate or allow to act as one of its directors or employee under it in any
capacity whatsoever any retired engineer of the gazetted rank or any other
retired gazetted officer working before his retirement, whether in the executive
or administrative capacity, or whether holding any pensionable post or not, in
the DFCCIL for the time being owned and administered by the President of
India before the expiry of one year from the date of retirement from the said
service of such Engineer or Officer unless such Engineer or Officer has
obtained permission from the President of India or any officer duly authorized
by him in this behalf to become a partner or a director or to take employment
under the contract as the case may be, or

Date Page 66
b. Fail to give at the time of submitting the said tender:-
a. The correct information as to the date of retirement of such retired engineer

or retried officer from the said service, or as to whether any such retired
engineer or retired officer was under the employment of the Contractor
at the time of submitting the said tender, or
b. The correct information as to such engineers or officers obtaining
permission to take employment under the contractor, or
c. Being a partnership firm, the correct information as to, whether any of its
partners was such a retired engineer or a retired officer, or
d. Being in incorporated company, correct information as to whether any of its
directors was such a retired engineer or a retired officer, or
e. Being such a retired engineer or retried officer suppress and not disclose at
the time of submitting the said tender the fact of his being such a retired
engineer or a retired officer or make at the time of submitting the
said tender a wrong statement in relation to his obtaining permission to take
the contract or if the contractor be a partnership firm or an
incorporated company to be a partner or director of such firm or company
as the case may be or to seek employment under the contractor. Then
and in any of the said clause, the Engineer on behalf of the DFCCIL
may serve the Contractor with a notice (Proforma at Form No.16) in
writing to that effect and if the contractor does not within seven days after
the delivery to him of such notice proceed to make good his default in so
far as the same is capable of being made good and carry on the work or
comply with such directions as aforesaid of the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer, the DFCCIL shall be entitled after giving 48 hours notice
(Proforma at Form No. 17) in writing under the hand of the Engineer to
rescind the contract as a whole or in part or parts (as may be specified in
such notice) and after expiry of 48 hours notice, a final termination notice
(Proforma at Form No. 18) should be issued and adopt the following
courses:
To measure up or the whole or part of the work from which the contractor has been
removed and get it completed by another contractor, the manner and method in which
such work is completed shall be in the entire discretion of the Engineer whose decision
shall be final.
62.(2) Right of DFCCIL after, rescission of contract owing to default of contractor:

In the event of any or several of the courses, referred to in sub-clause (1) of the clause,
being adopted.
(a) the contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained
by him by reason of his having purchased or procured any materials or entered
into any commitments or made any advances on account of or with a view to

Date Page 67
the execution of the works or the performance of the contract and contractor shall
not be entitled to recover or be paid any sum for any work thereto for
actually performed under the contract unless and until the Engineer shall
have certified the performance of such work and the value payable in respect
thereof and the contractor shall only be entitled to be paid the value so
certified.
(b) The Engineer or the Engineer’s representative shall be entitled to take

possession of any materials, tools, implements, machinery and buildings on the
works or on the property on which these are being or ought to have been
executed, and to retain and employ the same in the further execution of the works
or any part thereof until the completion of the works without the contractor being
entitled to any compensation for the use and employment thereof or for wear and
tear or destruction thereof.
(c) The Engineer shall as soon as may be practicable after removal of the contractor
fix and determine ex-parte or by or after reference to the parties or after such
investigation or enquiries as he may consider fit to make or institute and shall
certify what amount(if any) had at the time of rescission of the contract been
reasonably earned by or would reasonably accrue to the contractor in respect
of the work then actually done by him under the contract and what was the value
of any unused, or partially used materials, any constructional plan and any
temporary works upon the site. The legitimate amount due to the contractor
after making necessary deductions and certified by the Engineer should be
released expeditiously.
STATEMENT OF DISPUTES - INDIAN RAILWAY ARBITRATION RULES
63.0 Matters finally determined by the DFCCIL – All disputes and differences of any
kind whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the contract, whether during the
progress of the work or after its completion and whether before or after the determination
of the contract, shall be referred by the contractor to the Director /General
Manager/CPM, DFCCIL and the Director/General Manager/CPM, DFCCIL shall within
120 days after receipt of the contractor’s representation make and notify decisions on all
matters referred to by the contractor in writing provided that matter for which provision
has been made in clauses 8, 18, 22.(5), 39, 43.(2), 45.(a), 55, 55A.(5), 57, 57A, 61.(1),
61.(2) and 62.(1) to (xiii)(B) of General Conditions of contract or in any special clause
of the conditions of the contract shall be deemed as ‘excepted matters’ (matters not
arbitrable) and decisions of the DFCCIL authority, thereon shall be final and
binding on the contractor; provided further that ‘excepted matters’ shall stand
specifically excluded from the purview of the arbitration clause.

Date Page 68
64. (1) Demand for Arbitration:-

64. (1) (i) In the event of any dispute or difference between the parties hereto as to the
construction or operation of this contract, or the respective rights and liabilities of the
parties on any matter in question, dispute or difference on any account or as to the
withholding by the DFCCIL of any certificate to which the contractor may claim to be
entitled to, or if the DFCCIL fails to make a decision within 120 days, then and in any
such case, but except in any of the ‘excepted matters’ referred to in clause 63 of
these conditions, the contractor, after 120 days but within 180 days of his presenting his
final claim on disputed matters shall demand in writing that the dispute or difference be
referred to arbitration.
64.(1) (ii) The demand for arbitration shall specify the matters which are in question, or subject
of the dispute or difference as also the amount of claim item wise. Only such dispute or
difference, in respect of which the demand has been made, together with counter claims
or set off, given by the DFCCIL, shall be referred to arbitration and other matters shall
not be included in the reference.
64.(1) (iii) (a) The arbitration proceedings shall be assumed to have commenced from the
day, a written and valid demand for arbitration is received by the DFCCIL.
(b) The claimant shall submit his claim stating the facts supporting the claims along
with all the relevant documents and the relief or remedy sought against each claim
within a period of 30 days from the date of appointment of the Arbitral Tribunal.
(c) The DFCCIL shall submit its defence statement and counter claim(s), if any, within a
period of 60 days of receipt of copy of claims from Tribunal thereafter, unless
otherwise extension has been granted by Tribunal.
(d) The place of arbitration would be New Delhi
64.(1) (iv) No new claim shall be added during proceedings by either party. However, a party
may amend or supplement the original claim or defence thereof during the course of
arbitration proceedings subject to acceptance by Tribunal having due regard to the delay
in making it.
64.(1) (v) – If the contractor(s) does/do not prefer his/their specific and final claims in writing,
within a period of 90 days of receiving the intimation from the DFCCIL that the final bill
is ready for payment, he/they will be deemed to have waived his/their claim(s) and the
DFCCIL shall be discharged and released of all liabilities under the contract in respect of
these claims.
64.(2) Obligation During Pendency of Arbitration:– Work under the contract shall, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer, continue during the arbitration proceedings, and no
payment due or payable by the DFCCIL shall be withheld on account of such
proceedings, provided, however, it shall be open for Arbitral Tribunal to consider

Date Page 69
and decide whether or not such work should continue during arbitration proceedings.
64.(3) Appointment of arbitrator
64.(3)(a)(i) In cases where the total value of all claims in question added together does not
exceed Rs.25,00,000 (Rupees twenty five lakhs only), the Arbitral tribunal shall consist
of a sole arbitrator nominated by the MD/DFCCIL The sole arbitrator shall be
appointed within 60 days from the day when a written and valid demand for arbitrator is
received by MD/DFCCIL .
64.(3)(a)(ii) In cases not covered by the clause 64(3)(a)(i), the Arbitral Tribunal shall consist of a
Panel of three officials, as the arbitrators. For this purpose, the DFCCIL will send a
panel of more than 3 names of DFCCIL officers w h i c h may also include the name(s) of
Officer(s) empanelled to work as Arbitrator to the contractor within 60 days from the day
when a written and valid demand for arbitration is received by the MD/DFCCIL.
Contractor will be asked to suggest to MD/DFCCIL at least 2 names out of the panel for
appointment as contractor’s nominee within 30 days from the date of dispatch of the
request by DFCCIL. The MD/DFCCIL shall appoint at least one out of them as the
contractor’s nominee and will, also simultaneously appoint the balance number of
arbitrators either from the panel or from outside the panel, duly indicating the ‘presiding
arbitrator’ from amongst the 3 arbitrators so appointed. MD/DFCCIL shall complete
this exercise of appointing the Arbitral Tribunal within 30 days from the receipt of the
names of contractor’s nominees. While nominating the arbitrators it will be necessary to
ensure that one of them is from the Accounts department. An officer of selection grade
of accounts department shall be considered of equal status to the officers in SA grade of
other department of DFCCIL for the purpose of appointment of arbitrator.
64. ( 3)(a)(iii) If one or more of the arbitrators appointed as above refuses to act as
arbitrator, withdraws from his office as arbitrator, or vacates his/their office/offices or
is/are unable or unwilling to perform his functions as arbitrator for any reason
whatsoever or dies or in the opinion of the MD/DFCCIL fails to act without undue
delay, the MD/DFCCIL shall appoint new arbitrator/arbitrators to act in his/their
place in the same manner in which the earlier arbitrator/arbitrators had been
appointed. Such re-constituted Tribunal may, at its discretion, proceed with the
reference from the stage at which it was left by the previous arbitrator(s).
64.(3) (a) (iv) The arbitral Tribunal shall have power to call for such evidence by way of affidavits
or otherwise as the arbitral Tribunal shall think proper, and it shall be the duty of the
parties hereto to do or cause to be done all such things as may be necessary to enable the
arbitral Tribunal to make the award without any delay. The arbitral Tribunal should
record day-to-day proceedings. The proceedings shall normally be conducted on the
basis of documents and written statements.
64.(3)(a)(v) While appointing arbitrator(s) under sub-clause (i), (ii) & (iii) above, due care shall be
taken that he/they is/are not the one/those who had an opportunity to deal with the

Date Page 70
matters to which the contract relates or who in the course of his/their duties as DFCCIL
servant(s) expressed views on all or any of the matters under dispute or differences.
The proceedings of the arbitral Tribunal or the award made by such Tribunal will,
however, not be invalid merely for the reason that one or more arbitrator had, in the
course of his service, opportunity to deal with the matters to which the contract relates or
who in the course of his/their duties expressed views on all or any of the matters under
dispute.
64.(3)(b)(i) The arbitral award shall state item wise, the sum and reasons upon which it is based.
The analysis and reasons shall be detailed enough so that the award could be inferred
there from.
64.(3)(b)(ii) A party may apply for corrections of any computational errors, any typographical or
clerical errors or any other error of similar nature occurring in the award of a tribunal
and interpretation of a specific point of award to tribunal within 60 days of receipt of the
award.
64.(3)(b)(iii) A party may apply to tribunal within 60 days of receipt of award to make an
additional award as to claims presented in the arbitral proceedings but omitted from the
arbitral award.
64.(4) In case of the Tribunal, comprising of three Members, any ruling on award shall be made
by a majority of Members of Tribunal. In the absence of such a majority, the views of
the Presiding Arbitrator shall prevail.
64.(5) Where the arbitral award is for the payment of money, no interest shall be payable on
whole or any part of the money for any period till the date on which the award is made.
64.(6) The cost of arbitration shall be borne by the respective parties. The cost shall inter-alia
include fee of the arbitrator(s), as per the rates fixed by the DFCCIL from time to time
and the fee shall be borne equally by both the parties.
64(7) Subject to the provisions of the aforesaid Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 and the
rules there under and any statutory modifications thereof shall apply to the arbitration
proceedings under this clause.
JOINT VENTURE (JV) FIRMS IN WORKS TENDERS
65.0 Participation of Joint Venture (JV) Firms In Works Tender: This Clause shall be
applicable for works tenders of value as approved and communicated by Railway Board
/DFCCIL from time to time.
65.1 Separate identity / name shall be given to the Joint Venture Firm.
65.2 Number of members in a JV Firm shall not be more than three.

Date Page 71
65.3 A member of JV Firm shall not be permitted to participate either in individual capacity or
as a member of another JV Firm in the same tender.
65.4 The tender form shall be purchased and submitted only in the name of the JV Firm and not
in the name of any constituent member.
65.5 Normally earnest money deposit (EMD) shall be submitted only in the name of Employer
“Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited” A/C JV Firm and not in the
name of constituent member. However, in exceptional cases EMD in the name of
Employer “Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited” A/C JV Firm and
not in the name of Lead Member can be accepted subject to written confirmation from JV
members to the effect, that EMD submitted by the Lead Member may be deemed as EMD
submitted by JV Firm.
65.6 One of the members of the JV Firm shall be its Lead Member who shall have a majority
(at least 51%) share of interest in the JV Firm and also, must have satisfactorily completed
in the last three previous financial years and the current financial year upto the date of
opening of the tender, one similar single work for a minimum value of 35% of advertised
tender value and as defined in technical eligibility criteria. The other members shall have a
share of not less than 20% each in case of JV Firms with upto three members. In case of
JV Firm with foreign member(s), the Lead Member has to be an Indian Firm with a
minimum share of 51%.
65.7 A copy of Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) executed by the JV members shall be

submitted by the JV Firm along with the tender. The complete details of the members of
the JV Firm, their share and responsibility in the JV Firm etc. particularly with reference
to financial, technical and other obligations shall be furnished in the MOU. (The MOU
format for this purpose is enclosed along with the tender, Form No. 9).
65.8 Once the tender is submitted, the MoU shall not be modified / altered / terminated during the
validity of the tender. In case the tenderer fails to observe/comply with this stipulation, the
full Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be liable to be forfeited.
65.9 Approval for change of constitution of JV Firm shall be at the sole discretion of the
Employer (DFCCIL). The constitution of the JV Firm shall not be allowed to be modified
after submission of the tender Bid by the JV Firm, except when modification becomes
inevitable due to succession laws etc. and in any case the minimum eligibility criteria
should not get vitiated. However, the Lead Member shall continue to be the Lead Member
of the JV Firm. Failure to observe this requirement would render the offer invalid.
65.10 Similarly, after the contract is awarded, the constitution of JV Firm shall not be allowed to
be altered during the currency of contract except when modification become inevitable due
to succession laws etc. and in any case the minimum eligibility criteria should not get

Date Page 72
vitiated. Failure to observe this stipulation shall be deemed to be breach of contract with
all consequential penal action as per contract conditions.
65.11 On award of contract to a JV Firm, a single Performance Guarantee shall be submitted by

the JV Firm as per tender conditions. All the Guarantees like Performance Guarantee,
Bank Guarantee for Mobilization Advance, Machinery Advance etc. shall be accepted
only in the name of the JV Firm and no splitting of guarantees amongst the members of
the JV Firm shall be permitted.
65.12 On issue of LOA (Letter Of Acceptance), an agreement among the members of the JV Firm
(to whom the work has been awarded) shall be executed and got registered before the
Registrar of the Companies under Companies Act or before the Registrar/Sub-Registrar
under the Registration Act, 1908. This JV Agreement shall be submitted by the JV Firm to
the DFCCIL before signing the contract agreement for the work. In case the tenderer fails
to observe/comply with this stipulation, the full Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be
forfeited and other penal actions due shall be taken against partners of the JV and the JV.
This Joint Venture Agreement shall have, inter-alia, following Clauses:
65.12.1 Joint And Several Liability - Members of the JV Firm to which the contract is awarded,
shall be jointly and severally liable to the Employer (DFCCIL) for execution of the project
in accordance with General and Special Conditions of Contract. The JV members shall
also be liable jointly and severally for the loss, damages caused to the Railways / DFCCIL
during the course of execution of the contract or due to non-execution of the contract or
part thereof.
65.12.2 Duration of the Joint Venture Agreement - It shall be valid during the entire currency of
the contract including the period of extension, if any and the defect liability period after
the work is completed.
65.12.3 Governing Laws - The Joint Venture Agreement shall in all respect be governed by and
interpreted in accordance with Indian Laws.
65.13 Authorized Member - Joint Venture members shall authorize one of the members on
behalf of the Joint Venture Firm to deal with the tender, sign the agreement or enter into
contract in respect of the said tender, to receive payment, to witness joint measurement of
work done, to sign measurement books and similar such action in respect of the said
Tender/contract. All notices/correspondences with respect to the contract would be sent
only to this authorized member of the JV Firm.
65.14 No member of the Joint Venture Firm shall have the right to assign or transfer the interest
right or liability in the contract without the written consent of the other members and that
of the employer (DFCCIL) in respect of the said tender/contract.
65.15 Documents to be enclosed by the JV Firm along with the tender :

Date Page 73
65.15.1 In case one or more of the members of the JV Firm is/are partnership firm(s),following
documents shall be submitted :
(a) Notary certified copy of the Partnership Deed,
(b) Consent of all the partners to enter into the Joint Venture Agreement on a stamp
paper of appropriate value (in original).
(c) Power of Attorney (duly registered as per prevailing law) in favour of one of the
partners of the partnership firm to sign the JV Agreement on behalf of the partnership firm
and create liability against the firm.
65.15.2 In case one or more members is/are Proprietary Firm or HUF, the following documents
shall be enclosed:
Affidavit on Stamp Paper of appropriate value declaring that his/her Concern is a

Proprietary Concern and he/she is sole proprietor of the Concern OR he/she is in position
of "KARTA" of Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and he/she has the authority, power and
consent given by other partners to act on behalf of HUF.
65.15.3 In case one or more members is/are limited companies, the following documents shall be
submitted:
(a) Notary certified copy of resolutions of the Directors of the Company, permitting the
company to enter into a JV agreement, authorizing MD or one of the Directors or
Managers of the Company to sign JV Agreement, such other documents required to
be signed on behalf of the Company and enter into liability against the company
and/or do any other act on behalf of the company.
(b) Copy of Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company.
(c) Power of Attorney (duly registered as per prevailing law) by the Company
authorizing the person to do/act mentioned in the para (a) above.
65.15.4 Deleted
65.16 Credentials & Qualifying Criteria: Technical and financial eligibility of the JV Firm
shall be adjudged based on satisfactory fulfillment of the following criteria:
65.16.1 Technical Eligibility Criteria: As defined in Preamble and General Instructions to

tenderers.
65.16.2 Financial Eligibility Criteria: As defined in Preamble and General Instructions to

tenderers.

Date Page 74
PART - I
CHAPTER-V
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Date Page 75
PART - I
CHAPTER V
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1.5.1 This Tender shall be governed by Preamble and General instructions to tenderers,
General condition of Contract, Special conditions of contract, Technical Specifications,
Additional Technical specifications (if any), Drawings, Forms, Annexures, etc.
1.5.2 If there are varying or conflicting provisions in the documents forming part of the
contract, Engineer shall be deciding authority with regard to the intentions of the
provision and decision of Engineer will be final and binding on the contractor.
1.5.3 Scheme of work:- Within a period of 30 days beginning from the date of issue of Letter
of Acceptance of Tender, the Contractor shall submit the detailed time schedule for
execution of work and various documents enumerated in tender papers to the employer.
1.5.4 Quality Assurance Plan for Substructure and foundation
All materials used in the work shall be of the best quality as per codes. Quality
Assurance Plan shall include for materials used and for workmanship of work. The
contractor shall submit Quality Assurance Plan for the substructure and foundation. The
contractor shall also ensure that the Employer’s prescribed Quality Assurance Standards
are rigidly followed in for the construction of substructure and foundation. These are to be
approved from the client / DFCCIL
1.5.5 Quality Assurance Plan for Superstructure including bearings
(a) All materials used in the work shall be of the best quality as per codes / Specifications
for fabrication and erection of steel girder bridges (B1-2001) amended till date. Quality
Assurance Plan shall include for materials used and for workmanship of work. Quality
Assurance Plan shall also be prepared for erection of girder and casting of deck slab. The
contractor shall submit Quality Assurance Plan for the superstructure and bearing. The
contractor shall also ensure that the Employer’s prescribed Quality Assurance Standards
are rigidly followed for the construction of superstructure including bearing. Since, the
superstructure is Composite girder. Quality Assurance Plan shall be in line with Quality
Assurance plans prepared by RDSO for Open Web Girder and POT & POT-PTFE /
Elastomeric bearings. These plans are to be approved from the DFCCIL.
(b) The contractor shall ensure quality at all necessary points, whether at manufacturer’s
works, or in his depot or at work site as well as during erection through Quality
Assurance Plan.

Date Page 76
(c) The Contractor shall adopt a suitable Quality Assurance Programme according to
approved instructions, drawings, specifications, etc.
(d) The erection scheme of composite girder shall be approved by DFCCIL before start of
erection of girder.
(e) Fabrication of composite girder will be inspected by DFCCIL's Engineer in Charge /

RDSO / PMC's representative or agency approved by DFCCIL.
1.5.6 Expenses of Employer’ Representative – All the expenses of Engineer’s representative

shall be borne by the Employer whether the inspected material is finally utilised in work
or not.
1.5.7 The decision of the Engineer shall be final in respect of acceptability or otherwise of any
material, fittings, component or equipment required for the work.
1.5.8 This programme of the Contractor shall generally cover the followings: -
1 . 5 . 8 . 1 The organization to manage and implement the Quality Assurance programme.
1.5.8.2 The documentation control system:

(i) Basic control system.
(ii) Adopted at manufacturer’s work
(iii) Adopted at the Contractor Depot and work site.
1.5.8.3. Procedure adopted for:
(i) Source Inspection.

(ii) Incoming raw material inspection.
(iii) Verification of material purchased.
(iv) Fabrication Controls.
(v) Site erection controls.
1.5.8.4 Inspection and Test Procedure for:
(i) Manufacture and quality control procedure.

(ii) Field activity.
1.5.8.5 System of handling and storage.

1.5.8.6 System of quality audit.
1.5.8.7 System of maintenance of records.
1.5.8.8 For the purpose of obtaining ‘On Account Payment’, the Contractor shall submit along

Date Page 77
with the invoice, the documents indicated in the prescribed quality Assurance standards
which should inter alia cover the following as may be applicable in each case.
(i) Material test reports on raw materials used.

(ii) Material type and routine test report on components specification.
(iii) Inspection Plan with reports of the inspection Plan check points.
(iv) Routine test report.
(v) Factory test results as required under the specification.
(vi) Quality audit report including test check report of Employer’s representative if
any.
1.5.9 Traffic Blocks / Power Blocks / Shut Down:
(a) The contractor shall obtain Power / Traffic / Shut down in the name of authorized
representative of DFCCIL. Engineer/Engineer’s representative will facilitate to
make arrangements to obtain power blocks / shutdown (hereinafter referred to as
blocks) for works to be carried out along or adjacent to the track work. Works such
as foundations of abutments/piers shall generally be done without blocks. However
if block is required due to safety considerations, the construction shall be done
under block. The requirement of shut down, power blocks etc. shall be assessed by
the contractor and will be submitted to the Engineer/Engineer’s representative. All
the erection of girders etc. shall be done under minimum power block/shut down.
Contractor will arrange minimum two gangs of labours i.e. expert of TR line
fitters, Semi skilled fitters, labours etc. with supervisors and sufficient tools and
tackles required as per site conditions. Work will be done day & night with
war foot level with the approval of the Engineer/Engineer’s representative. Block
will be provided for each ROB individually.
(b) Blocks will be granted during day & night hours continuous. The Contractor shall
confirm that he will equip himself to carry out all construction during night blocks
efficiently by suitable special lighting equipments without any extra cost.
(c) Block period shall be counted from the time the TR-line is placed at the
Contractor’s disposal at the work-spot till it is cleared by the Contractor.
(d) Blocks will be subject to normal operating conditions and rules of the
Railway. All formalities of exchanging private number etc. with the traffic
control/traction power controller will be carried out by the Engineer staff and for
this purpose the Engineer will depute a representative for each ROB, who will be
responsible for imposing power blocks/shut down and also removing the same
after men, material and equipment have been cleared by the Contractor from
running tracks and the same declared safe for traffic by Engineer/Engineer’s
representative in case of works involving safety of running tracks.
(e) The works required to be done under traffic block shall be carried out only in the

Date Page 78
presence of DFCCIL officials. The Railway supervisor shall certify safe conditions
for passage of trains before resumption of traffic. The works to be done under
traffic block shall be carried out under the provision of banner flag and protection of
engineering flagman.
(f) Any charges which may be levied by IR on account of “Possessions” shall be

payable by the contractor but shall be reimbursed by the Employer. However
penalties, if any, levied by Indian Railways caused due to any careless working or
otherwise of violation of the Terms and Conditions of the track block, shall be
payable by the contractor.
1.5.10 Work By Other Agencies
(a) Any other works undertaken at the same time by the Engineer direct or
through some other agency at the same time or section where the contractor
is carrying out his work will not entitle the contractor to prefer any claim regarding
any delays or hindrances he may have to face on this account but the Employer
shall grant a reasonable extension of time to the contractor. The contractor shall
comply with any instruction which may be given to him by the Employer in order
to permit simultaneous execution of his own works and those undertaken by other
contractors or the DFCCIL without being entitled on this account on any extra
charge.
(b) The contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment due to hindrance
resulting from normal Railway operations, such as delay on account of adequate
number of and duration of blocks not being granted, operational delay in movement
of work trains extension of time to the contractor.
1.5.11 Infringement of patents:
(a) The Contractor is forbidden to use any patents or registered drawings,

process or pattern in fulfilling his contract without the previous consent in writing
of the owner of such patent, drawing, pattern or trade mark, except where these are
specified by the Employer himself. Royalties where payable for the use of such
patented processes, registered drawings of patterns shall be borne exclusively by
the Contractor. The contractor shall advise the Employer of any proprietary right
that may exist on such processed drawings or patterns which he may use of his own
accord.
(b) In the case of patent taken out by the Contractor of the drawings or patterns
registered by him, or of those patents, drawings, or patents for which he holds a
licence, the signing of the Contract automatically gives the Employer the right
to repair by himself the purchased articles covered by the patent or by any person
or body chosen by him and to obtain from any sources he desires the component
parts required by him in carrying out the repair work. In the event of infringement

Date Page 79
of any patent rights due to above action of the Employer, he shall be entitled to
claim damages from the contractor on the grounds of any loss of any nature
which he may suffer e.g. in the case of attachment because of counterfeiting.
(c) Indemnification by contractor:- In the event of any claim or demand being

made or action being brought against the Employer for infringement of later patent
in respect of any equipment, machine, plant, work or thing used or supplied by the
Contractor under this contract or in respect of any methods of using or working by
the Employer of such equipment machine, plant work or thing, the contractor shall
indemnify the employer and keep him indemnified and harmless against all claims,
costs, charges and expenses arising from or incurred by reason of such claim
provided that the Employer shall notify the contractor immediately any claim is
made and that the contractor shall be at liberty, if he so desires with the assistance of
the Employer if required but at the Contractor’s expense, to conduct all negotiations
for the settlement of the same or any litigation that may arise there from and
provided that no such equipment, machine, plant work or thing, shall be used by
the Employer for any purpose or in any manner other than that for which they
have been supplied by the Contractor and specified under this contract.
1.5.12 Insurance:-
Before commencing of works, it shall be obligatory for the contractor to obtain, at his
own cost, insurance cover in the joint name of the contractor and employer from reputed
companies under the following requirements:
(a) Liability for death of or injury to any person/ employer's staff / animals or things or
loss of or damage to any property / things / the work of other contractor (other than
the work) arising out of the performance of the Contract.
(b) Construction Plant, Machinery and equipment brought to site by the Contractor.
(c) Any other insurance cover as may be required by the law of the land.
The contractor shall provide evidence to the employer / Engineer before commencement
of work at site that the insurances required under the contract have been effected and
shall within 60 days of the commencement date, provide the insurance policies to the
Employer/Engineer, the contractor shall, whenever, called upon, produce to the engineer
or his representative the evidence of payment of premiums paid by him to ensure that the
policies indeed continue to be in force.
The Contractor shall also obtain any additional insurance cover as per the requirements of
the Contract.
The Employer/Engineer shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or
compensation payable to any workman or other person in the employment of the
Contractor or his sub-contractor or petty contractor / other contractor working there. The
Date Page 80
Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the employer / Engineer against all such
damages and compensation for which the contractor is liable.
The Policies of the contractor shall remain in force throughout the period of execution of
the works and till the expiry of the defect liability period except for any specific
insurance covers necessary for shorter period.
If the Contractor fails to effect or keep in force or provide adequate cover as acceptable to
the engineer in the insurance policies mentioned above, then in such cases, the engineer
may effect and keep in force any such insurance or further insurance on behalf of the
Contactor. The recovery shall be made at the rate of 1.5 times the premium/premiums
paid by the engineer in this regard from the payment due to the Contractor or from the
contractor’s Performance security. However, the Contractor shall not be absolved from
his responsibility and /or liability in this regard.
1.5.13 Accident:-
(a) The contractor shall, in respect of all staff engaged by him or by his sub-
contractor, indemnify and keep the employer at all times indemnified and
protected against all claims made and liabilities incurred under Workman’s
Compensation Act, the Factories Act and the Payment of Wages Act, and
rules made there under from time to time or under any other labour and Industrial
Legislation made from time to time.
(b) The contractor shall indemnify and keep the employer indemnified and
harmless against all actions, suits, claim demands, costs, charges or expenses
arising in connection with any death or injury sustained by any person or persons
sustained due to the acts or omission of the contractor, his sub-contractors, his
agents or his staff during the executions of this contract irrespective of whether
such liability arises under the Workman’s Compensation Act, or Fatal Accident
Act or any other statute in force for the time being.
(c) The contractor’ liability to meet third party claims of the type outlined above will
be applicable only in cases where accidents have been caused by workmanship,
material, execution or negligence on the part of the contractor and further the
liability of the contractor will be limited to Rs.5 lakh for any one accident.
(d) The contractor shall be responsible for all repairs and rectification of
damages to completed works or works under execution due to DFCCIL
accidents, thefts, pilferage or any other cause, without delay to minimize or to
avoid traffic detentions, in a section until the installation are provisionally handed
over to the employer.

Date Page 81
1.5.14 Safety Measures:-
(a) The contractor shall take all precautionary measures in order to ensure the
protection of his own personnel moving about or working on the railway
premises, but shall then conform to the rules and regulations of the Railway if
and when, in the course of the work there is likely to be any danger to persons in
the employment of the contractor due to running traffic while working in the
Railway siding and premises, the contractor shall provide flagman or look
out men for protection of such persons. The employer shall remain
indemnified by the contractor in the event of any accident occurring in the
normal course of work, arising out of the failure of contractor or his men to
exercise reasonable precaution at all places of work.
(b) Blasting of rocks for foundation work shall be done only after due notice is given
to the employer and time/s and date /s for blasting operations agreed to by the
employer. Blasting, if required to be done in the vicinity of the track, shall n o t
be undertaken until the Employer’s flagmen on duty t a k e necessary step to
protect trains and the track is adequately protected by the contractor against
damage by blasted rock .The contractor shall follow detailed instructions which
will be issued to him regarding blasting operations in the vicinity of tracks.
(c) The contractor shall abide by all Railway regulations in force for the time being
and ensure that the same are followed by his representatives, Agents or sub -
contractors or workmen. He shall give due notice to his employees and workers
about provision of this para.
(d) The works must be carried out most carefully without any infringement of the
Indian Railway Act or the General and Subsidiary Rules in force on the Railway,
in such a way that they do not hinder Railway operation or affect the proper
functioning of or damage any DFCCIL equipment, structure or rolling stock
except as agreed to by the employer, provided that all damage and disfiguration
caused by the contractor at his own cost failing which cost of such repairs shall be
recovered from the contractor.
(e) If safety of track or track drainage etc. is affected as a consequence of works

undertaken by the contractor, the contractor shall take immediate steps to restore
normal conditions. In case of delay, the employer shall, after giving due notice
to the contractor in writing, take necessary steps and recover the costs from the
contractor.
1.5.15 Guarantee / Defect Liability Period:-
(a) The Contractor shall guarantee that all the works executed under this contract
shall be free from all defects and faults in material, workmanship and manufacture

Date Page 82
and shall be of acceptable standards for the contracted work and in full conformity
with the technical specifications, drawings and other contract stipulations, for a
period of 6 months from the date of taking over by the Employer
(b) During the period of guarantee the Contractor shall keep available an
experienced engineer / man power to attend to any defective works /
installations resulting from defective erection and/or defect in the installation
supplied by the Contractor. This engineer shall not attend to rectification of
defects which arise out of normal wear and tear and come within the purview of
routine maintenance work. The contractor shall bear the cost of modifications,
additions or substitutions that may be considered necessary due to faulty
materials or workmanship for the satisfactory working of the equipment. The
final decision shall rest with the Engineer his successor(s)/Nominee.
(c) During the period of Guarantee the Contractor shall be liable for the
replacement at site of any parts which may be found defective in the
executed work whether such parts / structural elements of his own
manufacture or those of his sub-contractor / supplier whether arising from faulty
materials, workmanship or negligence in any manner on the part of the
Contractor provided always that such defective parts as are not repairable at site
are promptly returned to the Contractor if so required by him at his
(Contractor’s) own expenses. In case o f parts of executed work detected during
guarantee period, contractor should replace all such items irrespective of the fact
whether all such items have failed or not. The Contractor shall bear the cost of
repairs carried out on his behalf by the Employer at site. In such a case, the
contractor shall be informed in advance of the works proposed to be carried
out by the Employer.
(d) If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to replace or renew any defective
portion of the structural elements until the expiration of six month from the date
of such replacement or renewal or until the end of the above mentioned
period whichever is later.
Such extension shall not apply in case of defects of a minor nature, the decision
of the General Manager/ROB, /CPM or his successor/nominee being final in the
matter. If any defect be not remedied within a reasonable time during the
aforesaid period the Employer may proceed to do work at the Contractor’s risk
and expense, but without prejudice to any other rights and remedies which the
Employer may have against the Contractor in respect of such defects or faults.
(e) The repaired or renewal parts structure shall be delivered / supplied and erected
/ executed on site free of charge to the employer.
(f) Any materials, fittings, components or equipments / structure supplied under

items for supplying / providing and fixing in schedule shall also be covered by the

Date Page 83
provisions of this paragraph. The liability of the Contractor under the guarantee
will be limited to re-supply of components / structure installation and fittings.
1.5.16 Final Acceptance:-
(a) The final acceptance of the entire work executed shall take effect from the date
of expiry of the period of guarantee / Defect Liability period as defined in
paragraph 1.5.15 above of the expiry of the last of the respective periods of
guarantee of various ROBs , provided in any case that the Contractor has
complied fully with his obligations under clause 1.5.15 in respect of each
R O B , provided also that the attention has been paid by way of maintenance
by the Employer.
(b) If on the other hand the contractor has not so complied with his obligation
under Para 1.5.15 above in respect of any work, the Employer may either
extend the period of guarantee in respect of that work until the necessary works
are carried out by the Contractor or carry out those works or got them carried out
suo moto on behalf of the Contractor at the Contractor’s expenses. After expiry of
the period of guarantee for each work, a certificate of final acceptance for the
section shall be issued by the Employer and the last of such certificate will be
called the last and final acceptance certificate. The contract shall not be
considered as completed until the issue of final acceptance certificate by the
Employer.
(c) The Employer shall not be liable to the Contractor for any matter arising out
of or in connection with the contract or execution of the work unless the
Contractor shall have made a claim in writing in respect thereof before the issue
of final acceptance certificate under this clause.
Notwithstanding the issue of final acceptance certificate the Contractor and the
Employer (subject to sub-clause as above) shall remain liable for fulfilment
of any obligation incurred under the provision of the contract prior to the issue of
final acceptance certificate which remains unperformed at the time such
certificate is issued and for determining the nature and extent of such obligation
the contract shall be deemed to remain in force between the parties hereto.
1.5.17 Payment:-
Payment will be governed by the terms specified in Part-I, Chapter IV and in

accordance with accepted schedule of prices, read with relevant para of the other parts
and Chapters of the Tender Papers. The employer retains the right to withhold money
due to the contractor arising out of this contract for any default of the contractor.
(i) The Contractor shall, whenever required, produce or cause to be produced for
examination by the Employer any quotation / invoice, cost of other account, book

Date Page 84
of account, voucher, receipt letter, memorandum paper or writing or any copy of or

extract from any such document and also furnish information and returns verified
in such manner as may be required in anyway relating to the execution of this
contract or relevant for verifying or ascertaining the cost of the execution of this
Contract (the decision of the employer on the question of relevancy of any
documents, information or return being final and binding on the parties). The
Contractor shall similarly produce vouchers etc., if required, to prove to the
Employer that materials supplied by him are in accordance with the specifications
laid down in the contract.
(ii) If any portion of the work be carried out by a sub-contractor or any

subsidiary or allied firm or company the Employer shall have power to
secure the books of such sub-contractor or any subsidiary or allied firm or
company, through the Contractor, and such books shall be open to his inspection.
The Contractor should seek prior permission from the employer for subletting
whole and/or part of the work to any sub-contractor.
(iii) The obligations imposed by sub-clause (i) and (ii) above are without prejudice to
the obligation of the Contractor under any statute, rules or order binding to the
Contractor or other conditions of the contract.
(iv) It is an agreed term of the contract that the employer reserves t h e right to carry
out post-payment Audit and/or technical examination of the works and the final
bill, including all supporting vouchers, abstracts etc. and to make a claim on the
Contractor for the refund of any excess amount paid to him if as a result of
such examination any over payment to him is discovered to have been made in
respect of any work done or alleged to have been done by him under the
contract.
1.5.18 All payments in respect of the contract during the currency of the contract shall be made
through Electronic Clearing System (ECS) / National Electronic Funds Transfer
(NEFT/RTGS). The successful tenderer on award of contract must submit
ECS/NEFT/RTGS Mandate Form complete in all respects as detailed at Form No. 8 of
the tender document. However, if the facility of ECS/NEFT/RTGS is not available at a
particular location, the payments shall be made by cheque.
1.5.19 Performance Guarantee:-
(i) The Bank Guarantee for performance Guarantee shall remain valid until a date
60 days ( or as specified in the Contract) after expiry of Defects Liability Period.
(ii) The Bank Guarantee for performance Guarantee shall be submitted invariably in
the format given in the Bidding document.
(iii) The performance Guarantee shall be released 21 days after issue of performance

Date Page 85
certificate.
1.5.20 Mobilization Advance:- (Applicable for Advertised tender of value more than Rs. 25.00
crore)
(a) The Tenderer/Contractor may be granted a recoverable interest bearing

mobilization advance up to 10% of the contract value provided mobilization
advance is admissible as per the tender conditions and he specifically applies for it
while tendering. If the tenderer fails to apply specifically for Mobilization Advance
while giving his offer at the tendering stage in case where grant of Mobilization
Advance is permissible, no subsequent requests from him for grant of this advance
will be entertained. The rate of interest is 4.5% per annum above the Base Rate of
State Bank of India, as effective on the date of approval of payment of Mobilisation
Advance by the competent authority.
(b) The advance will be granted in two installments viz., 5% of the contract value on
signing of the contract agreement and the balance 5% on Mobilisation of site
establishment, setting up offices, bringing in equipment and actual commencing of
work. Each installment will be released on submission of a security in a form
acceptable to the DFCCIL (similar to Performance Guarantee notified in Clause
16.(4) (b) of General conditions of contract for the amount of the at least 110% of the
value of the sanctioned advance amount covering installment together with interest
charges calculated upto the end of the contract period. The tenderer who seeks
Mobilisation Advance should be specific about the course of action proposed to be
followed in producing the security to the satisfaction of the Railway. Each security
should be at least not less than one lakh rupees. These securities shall be returned as
and when the value of the advance plus interest is recovered from the running bill.
(c) The recovery of the advance and interest thereon will be made through the every on
account bills, pro-rata, commencing from the time the value of the work executed
under the contract reaches 15% of the contract value and completed when the value
of the work executed under the contract reaches 85% of the contract value or
assessed value whichever is less.
(d) The Mobilisation Advance granted shall be returned back to the DFCCIL in case the
work is not completed in the original contract completion period.
(e) The Bank Guarantee shall be from a Nationalised Bank in India or State Bank of
India, in a form acceptable to DFCCIL. (Tender Form No. 19 placed at Part IV of the
tender documents).
Note: The instruments as listed under Performance Guarantee vide Clause 16.(4) (b) of
General conditions of contract will also be acceptable for Guarantee in case of Mobilisation
Advance.
1.5.21 Arbitration:- Refer to clause 63 of GCC.

Date Page 86
PART - II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Date Page 87
PART - II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
For technical specifications, refer Indian Railways Unified Standard Specifications (Works
and Materials), 2010 amended upto date/ Gujarat State SOR/Codes/Manual / NH SOR
/Codes/Manual as shall be relevant. and the specification for fabrication and erection of
steel girder bridges and Locomotive Turn Table (Fabrication Specification), Serial No B1
- 2001 amended up to date. The decision of DFCCIL is final and binding to the contractor.
Indian Railways Unified Standard Specifications (Works and materials), Volume I & II
are available for sale at the offices of General Managers and DRMs at all Zonal Railways
& Production Units.
2.1 GENERAL GUIDELINES REGARDING SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL

CONDITIONS FOR SUPPLY OF CEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS
2.1.1 SUPPLY OF CEMENT:
2.1.1.1 Supply of cement to various specifications as required for various items under different
schedules will be paid under the items in Schedule.
2.1.1.2 The cement required for various items of work under Schedule shall be supplied by the
Contractor at the site of work in accordance with the requirements and specifications.
2.1.1.3 For supply and use of cement in various works, relevant Indian Railways Unified Standard
Specifications (Works and Materials), Volume I & II - 2010, IRS codes/ Guj. State
SOR/Codes/Manual/MORTH Code IS Specifications & design requirement as relevent
will be applicable. Wherever, relevant specifications are not available, decision of
the Engineer shall be final and binding on the contractor.
2.1.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CEMENT:
2.1.2.1 The cement used shall conform to any of the following standards.
(i) 33 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 269

(ii) 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112
(iii) 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12269
(iv) Rapid Hardening Ordinary Cement conforming to IS: 8041
(v) High Strength Portland Cement conforming to IRS: T: 40
(vi) Hydrophobic Portland cement conforming to IS: 8043
(vii) Low heat Portland cement conforming to IS: 12600
(viii) Sulphate Resistance Cement conforming to IS: 12330

Date Page 88
2.1.3 SOURCE AND PACKAGING:
2.1.3.1 Cement to be used on the works shall be procured from the main / reputed cement plants or
from their authorized dealers. Decision of DFCCIL regarding reputed firms shall be final
and binding on the contractor.
2.1.3.2 Cement shall be packed in jute sacking bags conforming to IS: 2580-1982, double hessian
bituminised (CRI type) or woven HDPE conforming to IS: 11652-1986, woven
polypropylene conforming to is: 11653:1986, Jute synthetic union conforming to IS:
12174:1987, or any other approved composite bags, bearing the following information in
legible markings:
(i) Manufacturer’s name or Registered Trade Mark of manufacturer, if any.

(ii) Grade of cement
(iii) Type of cement
(iv) Weight of each bag in Kg.
(v) Date of manufacture,
(vi) IS Code No. to which the cement conforms.
2.1.3.3 All cement bags shall have company stitches intact and if any sign of tampering with
company stitches is noticed, the same will be rejected without any test and no
compensation shall be payable in this regard.
2.1.4 TEST CERTIFICATE REGARDING QUALITY OF CEMENT:
2.1.4.1 Necessary test certificates will have to be produced by the contractor regarding the quality
of the cement conforming to the specification in addition to the manufacturer’s
certificates.
2.1.4.2 DFCCIL reserves the right to take samples during the course of the work and get the cement
tested in reputed laboratories to ascertain the conformity to the specification. Cost of such
testing shall be borne by the contractor without any extra payment.
2.1.4.3 Tests on cement shall be done as per relevant IS Codes. These tests are as follows:
(i) Compressive strength

(ii) Initial and final setting time
(iii) Consistency
(iv) Soundness.
(v) Fineness
2.1.4.4 The Contractor shall arrange to carryout above tests for every 50 Tonnes of cement, and
for every change in lot/batch, contractor will submitted test report from manufacturing

Date Page 89
company and shall submit to the DFCCIL and take approval of the DFCCIL before using
in work. No extra payment will be made for conducting such tests.
2.1.4.5 Any temporary structure required for storage of cement, has to be provided by the tenderer
at his cost and shall be removed after completion of work. The DFCCIL will only provide
suitable land wherever land is available and is free for use. On completion of the work or
as directed by the Engineer, the shed if put up by the Contractor, should be removed by the
contractor and site cleared at his cost.
2.1.5 CONSUMPTION OF CEMENT:
2.1.5.1 The cement consumption for other than design mix concrete, shall be as per WR USSOR,
as applicable and relevant. The quantity of cement will be decided based on the approved
design mix keeping in mind Minimum and Maximum cement content specified for various
grades. Excess cement used will not be paid for and the decision of the Engineer in this
connection shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
2.1.6 PAYMENT FOR CEMENT:-
Cement supplied for the work and measured under the Schedule will be paid if specified
separately only after its use in various works under the Schedules of the contract as per
conditions and no advance payment for supply will be admissible.
2.1.7 GENERAL:-
2.1.7.1 No wastage of any of the materials supplied and used in the work by the contractor
including cement is payable by DFCCIL, contractor shall make his own arrangements for
storing cement for use in work.
2.1.7.2 Contractor should take proper precautionary measures to store the cement in good
condition against rains, etc. Storage of cement at the work site shall be at the contractor's
expense and risk. Any damage occurring to cement due to faulty storage in contractor's
shed or on account of negligence on his part shall be the liability of the contractor.
2.1.7.3 53 Grade/43 Grade/33 Grade of cement should be stacked separately in countable manner.
2.1.7.4 Admixture as per IS: 9103 of approved manufacturer by the Engineer shall be permitted to
be used in concrete wherever required. However, no extra payment for the admixtures
used shall be payable unless otherwise specified in the Schedule.
2.1.7.5 Cement for temporary and enabling works shall be arranged by the contractor at his own
cost and no extra payment will be paid on this account.
2.1.7.6 Empty Cement bags on release from the work is the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed off by the Contractor himself.

Date Page 90
2.2 GENERAL GUIDELINES REGARDING SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL

CONDITIONS FOR CONCRETE WORKS
2.2.1 Specifications:-
2.2.1.1 Concrete for PCC/ RCC/PSC (Including piling , piers, abutments and RCC deck
slab/girders etc.) shall be as per relevant IS Specifications. Some important guide lines are
listed below. Along with these, all other relevant IRS, IRC and IS specifications with their
up to date versions shall also govern. These govern all concrete works in bridges, etc., as
applicable.
(i) IRS Concrete Bridge Code.

(ii) IS 456 : Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete.
(iii) Relevant Indian Railway Unified Standard Specifications (Works & Materials)
Volume I & II, Engineering Department, 2010
(iv) Relevant IRS/IRC/MORTH/IS Specifications/Codes
(v) Relevant PSC Codes & specification.
2.2.1.2 Specifications for cement, steel, binding wire, used in concrete construction shall be as per
IRS/IRC/MORTH/IS specifications with latest corrections slips/revisions. Any other
specifications/rules/guidelines issued from time to time by Railway Board/RDSO shall
also govern the works.
2.2.1.3 In all matters of execution, including testing of various components, where the above
codes/specifications/guidelines are not clear or explicit or at variance, the directions given
by the Engineer shall be final and binding on the contractor.
2.2.2 Cement:-
2.2.2.1 The cement used in concrete construction shall be 43/53 Grade Ordinary Portland cement
as per the design and as specified in the relevant schedules. Specifications for cement are
covered under the supply schedule.
2.2.3 Reinforcement:-
2.2.3.1 All Reinforcement Steel (TMT Bars of Grade Fe 500D) shall be procured as per
specification mentioned in IS : 1786. Independent tests shall be conducted, wherever
required, to ensure that the materials procured conform to the Specifications.
These steel shall be procured only from those firms, which are Established, Reliable,
Indigenous & Primary Producers of Steel, having Integrated Steel Plants (ISP), using iron
ore as the basic raw material and having in house iron rolling facilities, followed by
production of liquid steel and crude steel, as per Ministry of Steel’s guidelines.

Date Page 91
2.2.3.2 Bars shall be cut, bent and placed correctly and accurately to the size and shape as shown in
the detailed drawing. Preferably bars of full length shall be used. The reinforcement shall
be tied with annealed/ mild steel binding wire. Overlapping of bars, where necessary, shall
be done as directed by Engineer. Rates quoted include the cost of annealed steel binding
wire of appropriate specifications. Rate also include necessary cutting and straightening is
also included.
2.2.3.3 Welding of reinforcement will not be generally permitted except in special circumstances
under the written approval of the Engineer.
2.2.3.4 A register shall be maintained by the Contractor with full details of reinforcement provided
for accountal and payment of steel reinforcement. The contractor should sign such register
approved by DFCCIL before undertaking concreting works, as a token of acceptance of the
details of reinforcement steel provided in works, failing which the details as recorded by
DFCCIL shall be binding on the contractor for the purpose of payment and no dispute will
be entertained by DFCCIL on this account.
2.2.3.5 Contractor shall remove from site any steel materials rejected by the Engineer within a
reasonable time as specified by him.
2.2.3.6 Protective Coatings:- In order to offer adequate resistance against corrosion,

reinforcement bars may be provided with suitable protective coatings depending upon the
environmental conditions In aggressive environments (severe, and extreme ) application of
cement slurry coating after removal of rust and other loose material from the surface of the
reinforcement bar will generally be sufficient.
2.2.3.7 The steel consumption shall be as per the drawings issued by the DFCCIL. Quantity of steel
reinforcement consumption shall be as per reinforcement actually utilized in the work
based on approved bar bending schedule. Nothing extra will be paid for wastage or for cut
rods, if any, which will be property of the contractor. The weight of the steel will be
calculated from the nominal weight given in the producer’s hand / IRUSS (W & M),2010-
Volume-I books.
2.2.4 Coarse & Fine Aggregates:-
2.2.4.1 Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of IS: 383 and shall be subjected to the
tests in accordance with IS: 2386. Coarse aggregates shall be from crushed stone from
approved quarries. Sand shall be from good river sources of approved quarries only.
2.2.4.2 The size of the coarse aggregates shall be as per relevant IRS / IS specifications.
2.2.4.3 The size of the fine aggregates shall be as per relevant IRS / IS specifications.

Date Page 92
2.2.4.4 Coarse aggregate shall be crushed and roughly cubical in shape. Fine aggregate shall be
naturally produced. Creek/ Marine sand shall not be used in permanent works.
2.2.4.5 The grading of the sand shall conform to relevant IS specification. The sand shall be
screened on a 4.75 mm size screen to eliminate over size particles. The sand, if required,
shall be washed in screw type mechanical washers in potable water to remove excess silt,
clay and chlorides wherever required. The screening and washing of sand shall be
completed at least one day before using it in concrete. The washed sand shall be stored on
a sloping platform and in such a manner as to avoid contamination.
2.2.5 Water:-
2.2.5.1 Water used for washing of aggregates and for mixing and curing concrete shall be clean,
potable and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic
materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel and shall conform
to clause 5.4 of IS : 456.
2.2.5.2 In case of doubt regarding development of strength, the suitability of water for making
concrete shall be ascertained by the compressive strength as per IS : 4031 (Part VI) and
initial setting time tests IS : 4031 (Part V).
2.2.5.3 Water found satisfactory for mixing is also suitable for curing concrete. However, water
used for curing should not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
concrete surface. The presence of tannic acid or iron compounds is objectionable.
2.2.6 Admixtures:-
2.2.6.1 In bridges, use of admixtures is governed by clause 4.4 of IRS Concrete Bridge Code.
2.2.6.2 The admixtures, when permitted, shall conform to IS: 9103. Calcium chloride or
admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used in structural concrete containing
reinforcement, prestressing tendon or other embedded metal. The admixture containing Cl
& SO3 ions shall not be used. Admixtures containing nitrates shall also not be used.
Admixtures based on thiocyanate may promote corrosion and therefore shall be prohibited.
2.2.6.3 Concrete admixtures shall be obtained only from established manufactures with proven
track record or as per approved list wherever available.
2.2.6.4 The contractor shall provide the following information concerning each admixture after
obtaining the same from the manufacturer before the same is put to use:
(a) The chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixtures.
(b) The chloride iron content, if any, expressed as a percentage by mass of the total
admixture.

Date Page 93
(c) Values of dry material content, ash content and relative density of the liquid
admixture which can be used for Uniformity Tests.
(d) Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used as per the
manufacturer’s recommended dosage, and if so to what extent.
(e) Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one mix, confirmation
as to their compatibility.
(f) There would be no increase in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other

embodiments as a result of using the admixture.
(g) Retardation achieved in initial setting time.
(h) Normal dosage and detrimental effects, if any, of under dosage and over dosage.
(i) Recommended dosages and expected results, including proof for the same wherever
required. Independent test results shall be produced by the contractor on demand/as
specified.
2.2.7 Storage of materials:-
2.2.7.1 Storage of materials shall be as per IS: 4082. All materials may be stored at proper places
so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter and to ensure their
satisfactory quality and fitness for the work. The storage space must also permit easy
inspection, removal and restoring of the materials. All such materials even though stored
in approved godowns / places, must be subjected to acceptance test prior to their
immediate use.
2.2.7.2 Aggregate shall be stored at site on a hard and dry level patch of ground. If such a surface
is not available, a platform of planks or of corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of dry bricks,
or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent the admixture of clay, dust,
vegetable and other foreign matter.
Stacks of fine and coarse aggregate shall be kept in separate stack piles, sufficiently
removed from each other to prevent the materials at the edge of the piles getting
intermixed. On a large job it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give each type of
aggregate its own compartment. Fine aggregate shall be stacked in place where loss due to
the effect of wind is minimum.
Unless specified otherwise or necessitated by site conditions, stacking of aggregate should

be carried out in regular sizes.
2.2.7.3 Cement shall be transported, handled and stored at the site in such a manner as to avoid

Date Page 94
deterioration or contamination. Cement shall be stored above ground level in perfectly dry
and water-tight sheds and shall be stacked not more than eight bags high. Wherever bulk
storage containers are used their capacity should be sufficient to cater to the requirement at
site and should be cleaned at least once every 3 to 4 months. Cement older than 3 months
from the date of manufacture shall not be used. Each consignment shall be stored
separately so that it may be readily identified and inspected and cement shall be used in
the sequence in which it is delivered at site. Any consignment or part of a consignment of
cement which had deteriorated in any way, during storage, shall not be used in the works
and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor without charge to DFCCIL. For more
details regarding stacking and storage of cement etc of Indian Railway Unified Standard
Specifications (Works & Materials), Volume II, - 2010 as shall be applicable or relevant.
The decision of DFCCIL is final and binding to the contractor.
2.2.7.4 The reinforcement bars, when delivered on the job, shall be stored above the surface of the
ground level by at least by 150mm and shall ordinarily be stored in such a way as to avoid
distortion and to prevent deterioration and corrosion. Every bar shall be inspected before
assembling on the works and any defective, brittle, excessively rusted or burnt bars shall
be removed. Cracked ends of bars shall be cut out.
2.2.8 Testing of cement & others:-
Cement and other items shall be tested as per specifications. However, the contractor shall
also arrange for additional tests at his own cost as required by the Engineer as and when
required. The decision of the Engineer shall be final in this regard.
2.2.9 Concreting:
2.2.9.1 The contractor shall make his own arrangements for supply of water and electricity for all
his works at his own cost. He shall arrange potable quality water for use in all concrete
works and samples of water shall be got tested from approved laboratory/approved by the
Engineer before being used in concreting. Apart from water, fine & coarse aggregates and
all other materials shall be tested from time to time by the contractor at his cost to ensure
proper quality works.
2.2.9.2 Maximum / minimum size of aggregates, standards of quality of materials, minimum cover
for concrete, use of admixtures / chemicals, treatment to reinforcement / finished surfaces,
etc., shall be as per relevant Codes, IS / IRS specifications and conditions of contract as
specified.
2.2.9.3 All exposed concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth by the contractor at his own cost.
Shuttering materials for RCC in superstructure shall be strictly of steel only to permit
vigorous vibration and to ensure no deviation of finished dimensions by more than +5/-0
mm and wooden shutters are not permitted. For other works also, proper quality of
shuttering materials which will permit vibrating and will not require additional finishing
shall only be used. If there is any variation in the surface, alignment or lines in the products

Date Page 95
beyond permissible rejection limits indicated in these conditions, the DFCCIL reserves the
right to reject the same and the contractor shall not have any claim in this regard and cost
of DFCCIL materials involved will be recovered from the contractor including penalties, if
any imposed.
2.2.10 Weigh batching, vibrating, curing & testing:
2.2.10.1. All concrete shall be machine batched, machine mixed and machine vibrated, by using
appropriate vibrators. Weigh batching plant, mixers, vibrators, etc., of appropriate
capacity, as specified/directed by the Engineer, shall be arranged by the contractor at his
cost. In this case, Weigh batching plants shall have computerized control for weighing,
loading, mixing and delivery.
2.2.10.2. Batching plants, transit mixers, concrete pumps, etc., shall be installed by the contractor
necessarily at site. In case of failure of any of the above, standby arrangements for
ensuing continuous concreting has to be provided by the contractor at his cost. For piling
works concreting shall be done continuously as per the volumes designed without break
and accordingly standby arrangements shall be ensured by the contractor.
2.2.10.3. Curing & vibrating shall be arranged by the contractor at all locations/heights at his own
cost and no extra payment on this account will be admissible. Curing of concrete shall
be done as per relevant IS Codes / Specifications. If curing is not done by the contractor
properly, DFCCIL may get it done through any other means at the Contractor’s cost
without any notice to him and recover from his bills the same including penalty if any at
the discretion of the Engineer. The concrete shall be kept wet constantly by ponding or
covered with a layer of sacking canvas etc.
2.2.10.4. Test cubes shall be cast at regular intervals and tested to ascertain the strength of
concrete. The contractor shall establish a cube testing facility along with operator at the
site or nearby area to facilitate prompt testing of concrete. Test cube moulds as required
as per IS Codes shall be made available by the contractor at his cost.
2.2.11 Design Mix Concrete:
(a) General: Design Mix is mandatory for grades higher than M20. For concrete of
compressive strength greater than M55, specialized literature should be consulted.
Admixtures may be used while designing. Only design mix shall be used for all items
of concrete. Prior to the start of construction, the contractor shall submit details of each
trial mix of each grade of concrete to the Engineer for approval. When the proportions
of the mix are approved, the contractor shall not vary any of the design parameters or
the source of the materials without the approval of the Engineer. Wherever there is a
significant change in materials used, fresh trial mix shall be arranged by the contractor
as required by the Engineer. The concrete shall be designed keeping in view the
minimum cement content and maximum cement content. Minimum cement content
depends upon the environmental exposure conditions but maximum Cement Content
shall be limited to 500kg/m.3

Date Page 96
(b) Mix Design and Proportioning: Recommended guidelines for Concrete Mix
Design are given in IS: 10262 which may be referred to for details. As mentioned
therein in order that not more than the specified proportion of test results is likely to fall
below the characteristic strength, the concrete mix has to be designed for a somewhat
higher target average compressive strength. In terms of clause 9.2.2 of IS: 456, the
Target Mean Strength of Concrete mix should be equal to the characteristic strength
plus 1.65 times the Standard Deviation. Mix proportion shall be designed to ensure that
the workability of fresh concrete is suitable for conditions of handling and placing, so
that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fill the form work.
When concrete is hardened, it shall have the stipulated strength, durability and
impermeability.
Determination of the proportions of by weight of cement, aggregate and water shall be

based on design mix.
As a trial the manufacturer of concrete may prepare a preliminary mix according to

provisions of SP: 23-1982. (Special Publications 23-1982 of Bureau of Indian
Standards) Mix design shall be tried and the mix proportions checked on the basis of
tests conducted at a recognized laboratory approved by the Engineer. All concrete
proportions for various grades of concrete shall be designed separately and mix
proportions established keeping in view the workability for various structural
elements, methods of placing and compacting.
(c) Standard deviation: Standard deviation calculations of test results based on

tests conducted on the same mix design for particular grade designation shall
be done in accordance with Clause 9.2.4 of IS 456. Table 8 of IS 456 gives the
standard deviation that can be assumed for design of mix in the first instance.
The final standard deviation figures may be determined based on test results for
the particular grade of concrete when available.
Max size of Aggregate, Target Mean Strength
Grade of Max size Characteristic Target Mean

Concrete of Aggregate Strength (fck) at 28 Strength (fck) 28
(mm) days (N/mm2) days (N/mm2)
M20 20 20 26.60
M25 20 25 31.60
M30 20 30 38.25
M35 20 35 43.25
M40 20 40 48.25
M45 20 45 53.25
(d) Approval of Design Mix: The contractor shall submit details of each trial mix of
each grade of concrete designed for various workability conditions to the Engineer
Date Page 97
for his comments and approval. Concrete of any particular design mix and grade
shall be produced / manufactured for works only on obtaining written approval of the
Engineer.
2.2.12 Requirements of Consistency:- The mix shall have the consistency which will allow
proper placement and consolidation in the required position. Every attempt shall be made
to obtain uniform consistency. The optimum consistency for various types of structures
shall be as indicated in table below or as directed by the Engineer.
Slump Required for workability

Type Slump (mm)
(a) Structures with exposed inclined surface 25
1 requiring low slump concrete to allow proper
compaction
(b) Plain Cement Concrete 25
RCC structures with widely spaced 40-50
2 reinforcements; e.g. solid columns, piers,
abutments, footings, well steining
RCC structures with fair degree of congestion 50-75
of reinforcement; e.g. pier and abutment caps,
3
box culverts well curb, well cap, walls with
thickness greater than 300mm
RCC and PSC structures with highly congested 75-125
4 reinforcements e.g. deck slab girders, box
girders, walls with thickness less than 300mm
Underwater concreting through tremie e.g. 100-200
5 bottom plug, cast-in-situ piling
The minimum slump of concrete in case of bored cast in situ pile shall be 150 to 200 mm.
2.2.13 Durability:- The durability of concrete depends on its resistance to deterioration &
environment in which it is placed. The resistance of concrete to weathering, chemical
attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends largely upon its quality and constituent materials.
Susceptibility to corrosion of the steel is governed by the cover provided and the
permeability of concrete. The cube crushing strength alone is not a reliable guide to the
quality and durability of concrete; it must also have adequate cement content and a low
water-cement ratio. The general environment to which the concrete will be exposed during
its working life is classified into three levels of severity that is moderate, severe, and
extreme as described below:

Date Page 98
Environment Exposure condition

MODERATE Concrete surface protected against weather or aggressive
conditions. Concrete surface sheltered from severe rain or
freezing whilst wet. Concrete exposed to condensation. Concrete
structure continuously under water. Concrete in contact with non
aggressive soil /ground water.
SEVERE Concrete surface exposed to severe rain, alternate wetting &

drying or occasional freezing or severe condensation. Concrete
exposed to aggressive subsoil / ground water or coastal
environment.
EXTREME Concrete surface exposed to sea water spray, corrosive fumes or

severe freezing conditions whilst wet. Concrete structure surfaces
exposed to abrasive action, surfaces of members in tidal zone. All
other exposure conditions which are adverse to exposure
conditions covered above.
Maximum water-cement ratio, grade of concrete and cementitious material content for
various environment conditions for achieving durability are indicated below for guidance:
2.2.13.1 Maximum Water Cement Ratio:-
The limits for maximum water cement ratio for design mix shall be based on
environmental conditions as defined in durability clause. The limits for maximum water
cement ratio for different environmental conditions shall be as given in Table below:
Environment Maximum Water-Cement Ratio

Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete Pre stressed Concrete
(PCC) (RCC) (PSC)
Moderate 0.50 0.45 0.40
Severe 0.45 0.40 0.40
Extreme 0.40 0.35 0.35
2.2.13.2 Grade of Concrete:- From durability consideration, depending upon the environment to
which the structure is likely to be exposed during its service life, minimum grade of
concrete shall be as given in table below.
Minimum Grade of Concrete
(A) For Bridges in Pre stressed Concrete and important Bridges.

Date Page 99
Structural member Moderate exposure Severe Exposure Extreme exposure

PCC member M-25 M-30 M-35
RCC member M-30 M-35 M-40
PSC member M-35 M-40 M-45
(B) For Bridges other than mentioned above and sub-structure
Structural member Moderate exposure Severe Exposure Extreme exposure

PCC Member M-15 M-20 M-25
RCC member M-20 M-25 M-30
2.2.13.3 Cementitious Material Content:- Maximum Cementitious Material Content shall be

limited to 500kg/m3. Depending upon the environment to which the structure is likely to
be exposed during its service life, minimum Cementitious Material Content in concrete
shall be as given in table below:
Minimum Cementitious Material Content

Environment Minimum Cementitious Material Content in Kg/cum
Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete
(PCC) (RCC)
Grade Content Grade Content
Moderate M25 240 M30 300
Severe M30 250 M35 350
Extreme M35 300 M40 400
2.2.13.4 Clear cover is the least distance from outer most surface of steel or binding wire or its end
to the face of concrete. It is also an dimension used in design and indicated on the
drawings. From durability consideration, minimum clear cover shall be as under.
Minimum Covers
Type of Extreme Severe Moderate
structure Environment Environment Environment
Slab 50 35 25
Beam/Girder 60 50 35
Column 75 75 50
Piles 75 75 50
2.2.14 Permeability of concrete: Permeability requirements are as specified in IRS Concrete

Bridge Code. Permeability test shall be mandatory for all RCC bridges under severe and
extreme environment. Under moderate environment, permeability test shall be mandatory
for all major bridges and for other bridges and structures.
2.2.15 Mixing of concrete:

Date Page 100
2.2.15.1 Concrete shall be mixed either in a mini mobile batching plant or in a batching and mixing
plant as per the specifications. Hand mixing shall not be permitted. The mixer or the plant
shall be at an approved location considering the properties of the mixes and the
transportation arrangements available with the Contractor. The mixer or the plant shall be
approved by the Engineer.
2.2.15.2 Mixing shall be continued till materials are uniformly distributed and a uniform colour of
the entire mass is obtained, and each individual particle of the coarse aggregate shows
complete coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of cement.
2.2.15.3 Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before putting in a new batch. The first batch of concrete from the mixer shall contain only
two thirds of the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly
cleaned before changing from one type of mix to another.
2.2.16 Transporting, Placing and Compaction of Concrete:
2.2.16.1 The method of transporting and placing concrete shall be approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be transported and placed as near as practicable to its final position, so that
no contamination, segregation or loss of its constituent materials takes place. Concrete
shall not be freely dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 metres.
2.2.16.2 When concrete is conveyed by chute, the plant shall be of such size and design as to
ensure practically continuous flow. Slope of the chute shall be so adjusted that the
concrete flows without the use of excessive quantity of water and without any segregation
of its ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of
deposit. The chute shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working
period and the water used for this purpose shall be discharged outside the formwork.
2.2.16.3 All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be cleaned and made free from
standing water, dust, immediately before placing of concrete.
2.2.16.4 No concrete shall be placed in any part of the structure until approval of the Engineer has
been obtained.
2.2.16.5 If concreting is not started within 24 hours of the approval being given, it shall have to be
obtained again from the Engineer. Concreting then shall proceed continuously over the
area between the construction joints. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete
which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a proper construction joint is
formed.
2.2.16.6 Except where otherwise agreed to by the Engineer, concrete shall be deposited in
horizontal layers to a compacted depth of not more than 450 mm when internal vibrators
are used and not exceeding 300 mm in all other cases.

Date Page 101
2.2.17 Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not less than 50 C and not more than
40°C. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the
mixer, unless carried in properly designed agitators, operating continuously. It may be
necessary to add retarding admixtures to concrete if trials shows that the period indicated
above are unacceptable. In all such matters, engineer's decision shall be final.
2.2.18 Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration or other means approved by

Engineer, during placing and worked around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures and
into corners of the formwork to produce a dense homogenous void-free mass having the
required surface finish. When vibrators are used, vibration shall be done continuously
during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically
ceased and in a manner that does not promote segregation. Over vibration shall be avoided
to minimize the risk of forming a weak surface layer. When external vibrators are used,
the design of formwork and disposition of vibrator shall be such as to ensure efficient
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes. Vibrators shall not be applied through
reinforcement and where vibrators of immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement
and all inserts like ducts etc., shall be avoided. The internal vibrators shall be inserted in
an orderly manner and the distance between insertions should be about one and half times
the radius of the area visibly affected by vibration. Additional vibrators in serviceable
condition shall be kept at site so that they can be used in the event of breakdowns.
2.2.19 Mechanical vibrators used shall be of appropriate specifications, type and capacity and as
directed by the Engineer.
2.2.20 Equipment and machinery for concreting:
2.2.20.1 For concrete works, the following equipments in numbers indicated are considered
necessary for efficient and speedier concreting at each site. However, the actual numbers
may be arranged as required by the Engineer, taking into account the site conditions.
Indicative List of Equipment and Machinery
1. Concrete Batching plant (10 to 20 cum/hr capacity) 1 No.

2. Transit Mixers (4 to 7 cum capacity) 2 Nos.
3. Concrete Vibrators (2 HP capacity) 4 Nos.
4. Vibrators of Needles (60mm & 40mm) 4 Nos.
5. Screed vibrator (for ROBs) 2 Nos.
6. Form vibrator (500 watts capacity) 2 Nos.
7. Generator (35 KV capacity) 1 No.
8. Welding set (3 to 5 KV capacity) 1 No.
9. Reinforcement Steel Cutting Machine 2 No.
10. Reinforcement Steel Bending Machine 2 No.
11. Concrete Pumps (10 to 20 HP capacity with 40m pipe 1 No.
length)
Date Page 102
12. Hydra 12.0 T capacity crane 1 No.

13. Concrete Funnel Bucket 1 No.
14. Air compressor (100 to 150 cum capacity) 1 No.
15. Concrete Dumpers 2 Nos.
16. Any other including power lifts etc., as required to suit Adequate No.
site
2.2.20.2 All the machinery are required to be arranged by the contractor at his own cost and the
agreement rates for concreting include the same. No extra payment is admissible for any
machinery arranged by the contractor.
2.2.21 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE & PUMPING OF CONCRETE
2.2.21.1 General
Fresh concrete can be transported to the placement area by a variety of methods.
Common among them are:
- Mixer trucks
- Stationary truck bodies with or without agitators.
- Buckets hauled by trucks.
- Conveyor belts.
- Hose or pipe line by pumping.
Each type of transportation has specific advantages and limitations depending on the
condition of use, mix, accessibility and location of placing.
2.2.21.2 Transportation by Mixer Trucks
2.2.21.2.1 These are essentially revolving drums mounted on truck chassis. Truck mixers used in
the job shall be labelled permanently to indicate the manufacturer's specifications for
mixing like:-
- Capacity of drum.
- Total number of drum revolutions for complete mixing.
- Mixing speed
- Maximum time limit before completion of discharge and after cement has entered the
drum.
- Reduction in time period of discharge due to warm weather or other variables.
All above information shall only form guidelines for the manufacturer/producer of
concrete.

Date Page 103
2.2.21.2.2 Fulfilment of the stipulated number of revolutions or elapsed time shall not be the
acceptable criterion. As long as the mixing water limit is not exceeded and the concrete
has satisfactory plastic physical properties and is of satisfactory consistency and
homogeneity for satisfactory placement and consolidation and is without initial set, the
concrete shall be acceptable.
2.2.21.2.3 When the concrete is totally mixed in transporting trucks volume of concrete being
transported shall not exceed 63% of the rated capacity of the drum. In case the concrete
is totally mixed in the central batching plant, the transporting truck may be loaded up to
80% of the rated capacity of the drum. In this case the drum shall be rotated at charging
speed during loading and reduced to agitating speed after loading is complete.
2.2.21.2.4 When transporting concrete by truck mixers, delivery time shall be restricted to 90
minutes or initial setting time whichever is less from the time cement has entered the
mixer to completion of discharge.
2.2.21.3 Transporting by Agitating / Non-agitating Trucks.
2.2.21.3.1Transporting ready mix concrete by this method shall consist of truck chassis mounted
with open top bodies. The metal body shall be smooth and streamlined for easy
discharge. Discharge may be from the rear when the body is mechanically titled. Body
of the truck shall have a provision of discharge gate. Mechanical vibrators shall be
installed at the discharge gate for control of discharge flow.
2.2.21.3.2 Agitators, if mounted, also aid in the discharging of concrete from the truck in addition
to keeping the concrete alive.
2.2.21.3.3 Water shall not be added to concrete in transport through this system.
2.2.21.3.4 Bodies of trucks shall be provided with protective covers during period of inclement
weather.
2.2.21.3.5 Delivery period, when adopting this system of transporting concrete shall be restricted
to 30 minutes from the moment all ingredients including cement and water enter in
mixer to completion of discharge.
2.2.21.4 Transporting by Buckets
This method of transportation is very common for transportation of centrally mixed

concrete. Buckets of suitable capacities may be filled with concrete which is totally
mixed in central plant and hauled to the job site. Buckets then may be conveyed to the
actual point of placement either with the help of crane/hoist or they may be carted
.
As in the case of open truck transportation, extra water shall not be added to concrete
transported in buckets. Concrete shall be protected from inclement weather by

Date Page 104
necessary covering arrangements. Also, maximum delivery period for this system of
transportation from the time cement is introduced into the mixer to completion of
discharge shall not exceed 30 minutes.
2.2.21.5 Cleaning
Before loading concrete in either truck mixer, open bodied trucks or buckets, the
containers shall be thoroughly cleaned, washed and dried, so that there is no water or
moisture in the container which may affect the designed water content of the concrete.
2.2.21.6 Other Methods of Transportation
Transportation of concrete either by belt conveyors or by pumping is envisaged in some

works.
If, the producer/manufacturer/purchaser/contractor of ready mix concrete desires to use

such methods of transportation, they may do so provided their scheme and complete
specifications are submitted to the Engineer for his record and approval.
2.2.21.7 Objective
Method of transportation used shall ensure:-
Efficient delivery of concrete

No significant alteration of properties with regard to water cement ratio, slump, air
content and homogeneity.
All variables in transportation, considering type and accessibility of placement locations,
distance, time interval etc., shall be carefully studied before arriving at the method used.
2.2.21.8 Pumpable Concrete (Extracted from Para 8.9 of Concrete Bridge Code, 1997)
General- Pumpable concrete is the concrete which is conveyed by pressure through

either rigid pipe or flexible hose and discharged directly into the desired area. It is
especially used where space for construction equipment is very limited.
Pumping Rate and Range – Depending on the equipment, pumping rate should be 10 to
70 cum. per hour. Effective pumping range is up to 300m horizontally and 90m
vertically.
(i) Proportioning Pumpable Concrete
a) Basic Consideration - More emphasis on quality control is essential to the

proportioning and use of a dependable pump mix. Concrete mixes for pumping
must be plastic. Particular attention must be given to the mortar and to the
amounts and sizes of coarse aggregates.

Date Page 105
b) The maximum size of angular coarse aggregate is limited to one-third of smallest

inside diameter of the hose or pipe. Provisions should be made for elimination of
oversized particles in the concrete by finish screening or by careful selection of
aggregates.
(ii) Pumping Concrete
a) Proper planning of concrete supply, pump locations, line layout, placing

sequences and the entire pumping operation will result in saving of cost and time.
The pump should be placed as near the placing area as practicable and the entire
surrounding area must have adequate bearing strength. Lines from the pump to
the placing area should be laid out with a minimum of bends. The pipe line shall
be rigidly supported.
b) While pumping downward 15m or more, it is desirable to provide an air release

valve at the middle of the top bend to prevent vacuum or air build up. When
pumping upward, it is desirable to have a valve near the pump to prevent reverse
flow.
2.2.22 Construction Joints:-
2.2.22.1 Construction joints shall be avoided as far as possible and in no case the locations of such
joints shall be changed or increased from those shown on the drawings, except with
express approval of the Engineer. The joints shall be provided in a direction perpendicular
to the member axis. Sequencing of concrete placement should be organized in such a way
that cold joints are totally eliminated. The sequence of concreting shall be submitted for
approval of Engineer prior to concreting of the structural element. Concreting shall be
carried out continuously up to the construction joints, the position and arrangement of
which shall be predetermined by the designer.
2.2.22.2 Construction joints should be positioned to minimize the effect of the discontinuity on the
durability, structural integrity and appearance of the structure. Joints should be located
away from regions of maximum stress caused by loading particularly where shear and
bond stresses are high.
2.2.22.3 Laitance, both on the horizontal and vertical surfaces of the concrete, should be removed
before fresh concrete is cast. The surface should be roughened to promote good adhesion.
Various methods for removal can be used but they should not dislodge the course
aggregate particles. Concrete may be brushed with a stiff brush soon after casting while
the concrete is still fresh and while it has only slightly stiffened. If the concrete has
partially hardened, it may be treated by wire brushing or with a high pressure water jet,
followed by drying with an air jet, immediately before the new concrete is placed. Fully
hardened concrete should be treated with mechanical hand tools or grit blasting, taking
care not to split or crack aggregate particles.

Date Page 106
2.2.22.4 Where there is likely to be a delay before placing the next concrete lift, protruding
reinforcement should be protected. Before the next lift is placed, rust loose mortar, or
other contamination should be removed from the bars and where conditions are
particularly aggressive and there has been a substantial delay between lifts, the concrete
should be cut back to expose the bars for a length of about 50 mm to ensure that
contaminated concrete is removed.
2.2.22.5 In all cases, when construction joints are made, it should be ensured that the joint surface
is not contaminated with release agents, dust, or curing membrane and that the
reinforcement is fixed firmly in position at the correct cover.
2.2.22.6 When the formwork is fixed for the next lift, it should be inspected to ensure that no
leakage can occur from the fresh concrete. It is a good practice to fix a 6 mm thick sponge
which seals the gap completely. The practice of first placing a layer of mortar or grout is
not recommended. The old surface should be soaked with water without leaving puddles,
immediately before starting concreting; then the new concrete should be thoroughly
compacted against it. When fresh concrete is cast against existing mature concrete or
masonry the older surfaces should be thoroughly cleaned and soaked to prevent the
absorption of water from the new concrete. Standing water should be removed shortly
before the new concrete is placed and the new concrete should be thoroughly vibrated in
the region of the joint.
2.2.23 Finishing of concrete: The finished surface of concrete after removal of formwork shall
be such that no touching up is required. All fins/holes caused by form joints, supports, rods
etc., shall be ground/filled up effectively using appropriate machinery shutters, formwork
etc., used in construction shall be as specified in the conditions and the labour used shall
be skilled to suit the quality requirements of the work. Any surface, finished poorly in the
opinion of the Engineer shall require repair/remedial measures at the cost of the contractor
and the Engineer’s decision in this regard shall be final. Any structure, which has
deficiencies in finishing including product parameters beyond the rejection limits, as
specified in these conditions, are liable to be rejected and the decision of the Engineer
shall be final in this regard.
2.2.24 Coatings for concrete: Normally finished concrete structures do not require any surface
protective coatings in non aggressive environment (moderate) for all structures. For
aggressive environment (severe and extreme conditions), Epoxy phenolic IPN coating or
CECRI Integrated four coat system can be used in superstructure of bridges and coal tar
epoxy coating for sub structure of bridges (in affected part only).
2.2.25 Shuttering, Formwork & False work:-
2.2.25.1 Shuttering, Formwork & False work shall be designed to meet the requirements of the
permanent structure, taking into account the actual conditions of materials, environment

Date Page 107
and site conditions. Careful attention shall be paid to the detailing of connections and
functions. All the materials used for shuttering, formwork & false work shall conform to
the specified quality consistent with the intended purpose and actual site condition as
applicable. All shuttering, form work, false work, etc., shall be got approved by the
Engineer before it is put into use.
2.2.25.2 Forms shall not be struck until the concrete has reached strength at least twice the stress to
which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of formwork or as approved
by the Engineer. In normal circumstances and where Ordinary Portland Cement is used,
forms may generally be removed after the expiry of the following periods:-
Stripping Time
a) Walls, columns and vertical 24 to 48 hours as may be decided by the

faces of all structural members Engineer
b) Slabs ( props left under) 3 days
c) Beam soffits (props left under) 7 days
d) Removal of props under slabs
1) Spanning up to 4.5 m
2) Spanning over 4.5 m 7 days
14 days
e) Removal of props under beams
1) Spanning up to 6 m
2) Spanning over 6 m 14 days
21 days
Where the shape of the element is such that the formwork has re-entrant angles, the
formwork shall be removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage crack occurring due to the restraint imposed.
2.2.26 Defective Concrete and Measurement of concrete:
2.2.26.1 Should any concrete be found honeycombed or in any way defective which may be, at the
discretion of the Engineer suspected to affect the performance of the structure, shall be
rejected outright. Contractor shall have no claim in this regard and the decision of the
Engineer shall be final. The member, structurally independent, in which the concrete is
found to be defective, shall be replaced by the contractor at his cost fully. The damages
arising on account of such defective concreting shall also be recoverable from the dues of
the contractor, including penalties if any. DFCCIL reserves the right to get the member
replaced by any means at the cost of the contractor at any cost if the contractor delays
reproduction.

Date Page 108
2.2.26.2 However, some surface defects, not affecting the structural properties shall, on the
instruction of the Engineer, be repaired as per the approved procedures. The complete cost
of such repairs shall be borne by the contractor and no compensation shall be payable.
Records of such repairs done shall be maintained by the contractor.
Tolerances for Finished Concrete Bridge Structure

S Description of defects in any part or full member or Permissible limits (unless
No the structure at the decision of the Engineer. otherwise specified in
designs/drawings)
1 Shift from alignment 1) + 25 mm in member.
2 Deviation from plumb in piers or variation from 1 in 250 subjected to a

specified batter. maximum value of 0.5 times the
least lateral dimension of pier.
3 Deviation from plumb in abutments or variation 1 in 125
from specified batter.
4 Cross sectional dimensions of piers, abutments and +20mm/-5mm
girders
5 Thickness of deck slab of bridges + 6 mm / - 3 mm
+
6 Size and location of openings 12 mm
7 Plan dimensions of footings (formed excavation) + 50 mm / - 25 mm
8 Plan dimensions of footings (unformed excavation) + 75 mm / - 00 mm
_
9 Thickness of footings 5%, + No limit
10 Footing eccentricity 0.02 times the width of the
footing in the direction of
deviation, but not more than 50
mm
+
11 Reduced level of top of footing / pier / bed block 5 mm
+
12 Centre to centre distance of pier and abutments at 30 mm
pier top
+
13 Centre to centre distance of bearings along span 5 mm
+
14 Centre to centre distance of pier bearings across 5 mm
span
2.2.26.3 The tolerances for finished concrete bridge structures shall be governed by IRS Concrete
Bridge Code and shall be followed; deviations beyond the permissible limits shown are
liable to be rejected. These tolerances apply to other structures also appropriately.
2.2.27 Sampling and Strength Testing of Concrete:

2.2.27.1 General: Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS: 1199 (method of sampling
and analysis of concrete). Concrete for making 3 test cubes shall be taken from a batch of

Date Page 109
concrete at point of delivery into construction according to procedure laid down in IS:
1199 and 150 mm cubes shall be made, cured and tested at the age of 28 days for
compressive strength in accordance with IS:516. The 28 days test strength result for each
cube shall form an item of sample.
Concrete shall conform to the surface finish and tolerance as prescribed in Unified
specifications. Random sampling and lot by lot of acceptance / inspection shall be made
for the 28 days cube strength of concrete.
Concrete under acceptance shall be notionally divided into lots for the purpose of
sampling, before commencement of work. The delimitation of lots shall be determined by
the following:
(i) No individual lot shall be more than 30 cum in volume.
(ii) At least one cube forming an item of the sample representing the lot shall be taken
from concrete of the same grade and mix proportions cast on any day.
(iii)Different grades of mixes of concrete shall be divided into separate lots.
(iv) Concrete of a lot shall be used in the same identifiable component of the bridge.
2.2.27.2 Sampling .
2.2.27.2.1 Frequency of Sampling

Sampling procedure: A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each
concrete batches forming the lot under acceptance / inspection shall have a reasonable
chance of being tested that is, sampling should be spread over the entire period of
concreting and cover all mixing units.
Frequency: The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in

accordance with table below. At least one sample shall be taken from each shift of work.
Minimum Frequency of Sample

Quantity of concrete in No. of samples
work, (M3 )
1-5 1
6-15 2
16-30 3
31-50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each additional 50 M3
or part thereof
2.2.27.2.2 Test Specimen: Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28
days. Additional samples may be required for various purposes such as to determine the
strength of concrete at 7 days or at the time of striking the formwork, or to determine the

Date Page 110
duration of curing, or to check the testing error. Additional samples may also be required
for testing samples cured by accelerated methods as described in IS: 9013. The specimen
shall be tested as described in IS: 516.
2.2.28 Test Results of Sample: The test results of the sample shall be the average of the strength
of 3 specimens. The individual variation should not be more than + 15 percent of average.
If more, test results of the sample are invalid.
2.2.29 Acceptance Criteria of Concrete: Acceptance criteria shall be acceptance of concrete as

per Clause No 16 of Annexure 4.2 of Indian Railway Unified Standard Specifications
(Works & Materials), Volume I, 2010. The decision of DFCCIL is final and binding to the
contractor.
Also refer criteria of concrete vide clause no 20.3.11.5 of Indian Railway Unified
specifications. The 28 days compressive strength shall be the criterion for acceptance or
rejection of the concrete.
The followings shall also be strictly followed.
(i) Whenever a mix is redesigned due to a change in the quality of aggregate or

cement or for any other reason, it shall be considered a new mix and initially
subject to the acceptability criteria above.
(ii) If the concrete produced at site does not satisfy the above strength requirements, the
Engineer shall reserve the right to require the contractor to improve the methods of
batching, the quality of the ingredients and redesign the mix with increased cement
content, if necessary. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any extra cost for
the extra cement used for the modifications stipulated by the Engineer for fulfilling
the strength requirement specified.
(iii) It is the complete responsibility of the contractor to redesign the concrete mixes by
approved standard methods and to produce the reinforced concrete conforming to the
specification and the strength requirements approved by the Engineer. It is expected
that the Contractor will have competent staff to carry out this work.
2.2.30 Setting of field laboratory by the Contractor:
2.2.30.1 For all works, the Contractor shall set up a field laboratory of his own for testing of
cement/water/concrete at work site, which should be open for use and inspection by the
DFCCIL officials at any time and carryout the tests with his own equipments, gauges,
machinery, consumables and operators, at his own cost. The laboratory shall be equipped
with necessary equipment to carry out various tests such as property tests, sieve analysis,
setting time of cement, compression tests on cubes, slump test, workability test etc., on
aggregate, cement, water and concrete required for ensuring the required quality. For steel
however, test reports of reputed institutes/laboratories are acceptable.

Date Page 111
2.2.30.2 The cost of setting up the laboratory, equipping the same, maintaining conducting all tests
on materials and cubes shall be borne by the contractor, within his quoted rates for works
and no extra payment is eligible for the same.
2.2.30.3 All gauges, machines, equipments and other measuring and testing equipments of the
laboratory shall be got checked / calibrated regularly and the necessary certificates
furnished to the Engineer by the Contractor.
2.2.30.4 All the equipments, machinery etc., shall be kept in good working condition. Contractor
shall also maintain the required qualified / experienced staff at the laboratory.
2.2.30.5 The following is the minimum laboratory facilities at the site which are to be provided and
operated by the contractor at his cost.
(i) Testing of fine and coarse aggregates as per IS:383 and IS:2386.
(ii) Testing of cement concrete as per IS: 8142 and IS:516.
(iii) Testing of water as per IS: 456 and IS: 3025.
(iv) Certain non-routine testing such as (a) Testing of admixtures, (b) Chemical testing of
fine and coarse aggregates (c) Permeability of concrete (permeability test on concrete
shall be got done when the mix design is approved / changed of the reputed
laboratories as approved by Engineer). The frequency and need for these tests shall
be decided by the Engineer, based on stipulations contained in conditions of contract
or on the basis of accepted Engineering practice (e.g. whenever source of admixture
is changed, tests stipulated in the codes will have to be carried out afresh, etc).
2.2.30.6 As frequently as the Engineer may require, testing shall be carried out in the field for:
(a) Moisture content and absorption and density of sand and aggregate.
(b) Silt content of sand.
(c) Grading of sand and aggregates.
(d) Slump test of concrete.
(e) Concrete cube test.
(f) Permeability test for concrete
(g) Density of Plasticizer.
(h) PH Value of water
2.2.31 Ladders for inspections: Steel ladders are to be provided at the abutments and all pier
locations on both sides of girder bridges to enable inspecting officials to get down from
the ROB Road level to the top of the piers / abutments.

Date Page 112
2.2.32 Expansion joints: Expansion joints – strip seal elastomeric type expansion joint shall be
for 80mm expansion gap in RCC deck slab as per drawings.
2.2.33 Seating of foundations:
As far as possible, open foundations should be located on the firm ground having stable
strata. The strata shall be well compacted before levelling course and foundations are laid
on the levelling.
In case foundations resting on rock, no foundation shall be laid on sloping rock. The rock
shall be made level for the width of the foundation before levelling course is laid. Before
seating on the rock, capacity of the rock shall be assessed properly and safe bearing
capacity assessed in the designs is to be confirmed.
The seating of the rock shall be achieved by cutting into the rock atleast by 0.50m depth to
ensure removal of all weak layers and for obtaining adequate anchorage in case of open
foundations. After level surface is made on the rock, a rich mix layer of 150mm thick shall
be laid to even the bedding surface.
If the rock is encountered while piling, pile shall be anchored into rock to the depth as per
codal provision.
2.2.34 Drainage outlets: 100mm GI/PVC pipes in case of deck slab in bridges will serve as
drainage spouts.
2.3 GENERAL GUIDELINES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR BORED CAST-IN-SITU

RCC PILE FOUNDATIONS:
2.3.1 The piles shall be bored cast-in-situ. The scope of the work included in relevant schedules is
for the provision and testing of bored cast-in-situ RCC pile foundations with the pile cap.
Items for piling in soil has been provided in schedule. If any boulder in the form of
obstruction comes in the boring, no extra payment for piling in boulders shall be made.
Bore log provided by the DFCCIL for construction are only indicative in this regard and it
is the contractors’ responsibility to make correct assessment of ground conditions before
starting the piling operation. Rate of piling is divided into four items (a) item of empty
boring (b) payment of concrete in M: 35 from pile item (c) Payment of reinforcement in
MT from pile item.(d) Payment of liner in MT. Rate of Item of piling includes cost of all
materials, Cement and labour involved in all operations. The Payment of empty boring,
concrete M35, reinforcement and liner paid separately in respective items.
2.3.2 CONCRETING IN BORED CAST-IN-SITU PILES
(i) Bored Cast-in-situ concrete piles shall be installed by making a bore into the ground by
removal of material. Cast-in-situ concrete piles may be cast in metal liners which may

Date Page 113
remain permanently in place. The metal casing shall be of sufficient thickness and strength
to hold its original form and show no harmful distortion after it and adjacent casings have
been driven and the driving core, if any, has been withdrawn.
(ii) Concreting and reinforcement work will be done in accordance with relevant clauses in
Chapters 3 and 4 of Indian Railway Unified Standard Specifications (Works & Materials)
Volume - I, 2010 supplemented by these specifications. The decision of DFCCIL is final
and binding to the contractor.
(iii) Any liner or bore-hole which is improperly located or shows partial collapse that would
affect the load carrying capacity of the pile, shall be rejected or repaired as directed by the
Engineer at the cost of the Contractor.
(v) Bored cast-in-situ piles in soils which are stable may often be installed with only a small
casing length at the top. A minimum of 2.0m length of top of bore shall invariably be
provided with casing to prevent any loose soil falling into the bore. In cases in which the
side soil lower down can fall into the hole, it is necessary to stabilise the side of the bore
hole with drilling mud, or a suitable steel casing. The casing may be left in position
permanently specially in cases where the aggressive action of the ground water is to be
avoided, or in the cases of piles built in water or in cases where significant length of piles
could be exposed due to scour.
(vi) For bored cast-in-situ piles, casing / liner shall be driven open ended with a pile driving
hammer capable of achieving penetration of the liner to the length as approved by the
Engineer. Materials inside the casing shall be removed progressively by air lift, grab or
percussion equipment or other approved means. Unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, the diameter of the bore-holes shall be not more than the inside diameter of the
liner.
(vii) Where bored cast-in-situ piles are used in soils liable to flow, the bottom of the casing
shall be kept enough in advance of the boring tool to prevent the entry of soil into the
casing, thus preventing the formation of cavities and settlements in the adjoining ground.
The water level in the casing should generally be maintained at the natural ground water
level for the same reasons. The joints of the casing shall be made as tight as possible to
minimise inflow of water or leakage of slurry during concreting. Where mud flow
conditions exist, the casing of cast-in-situ piles shall not be allowed to be withdrawn. Prior
to the lowering of the reinforcement cage into the pile shaft, the shaft shall be cleaned of
all loose materials. Cover to reinforcing steel shall be maintained by suitable spacers, tied
in advance to the reinforcement.
(viii) Wherever practicable, concrete should be placed in a clean dry hole. Where concrete is
placed in dry condition and there is casing present, the top 3m of the pile shall be
compacted using internal vibrators.
(ix) Before concreting under water, the bottom of the hole shall be cleaned of drilling mud and
all soft or loose material very carefully. In case a hole is bored with use of drilling mud,

Date Page 114
concreting should not be taken up when the specific gravity of bottom slurry is more than
1.2. The drilling mud should be maintained at 1.5m above the ground water level.
(x) Where the casing is withdrawn from cohesive soils for the formation of cast-in-situ pile,
the concreting should be done with necessary precautions to minimise the softening of the
soil by excess water. Care shall be taken during concreting to prevent as far as possible the
segregation of the ingredients. The displacement or distortion of reinforcement during
concreting and also while extracting the tube shall be avoided.
(xi) The concrete shall be properly graded, shall be self-compacting and shall not get mixed
with soil, excess water, or other extraneous matter. Special care shall be taken in silty,
clays and other soils with the tendency to squeeze into the newly deposited concrete and
cause necking. Sufficient head of green concrete shall be maintained to prevent inflow of
soil or water into the concrete.
(xii) The placing of concrete shall be a continuous process from the toe level to the top of the
pile. To prevent segregation, a tube or tremie pipe as appropriate shall be used to place
concrete in all piles.
(xiii) To ensure compaction by hydraulic static heads, rate of placing concrete in the pile shaft
shall not be less than 6m (length of pile) per hour. Under water concreting should be done
with tremie.
(xiv) The maximum water cement ratio shall be 0.50 for cast in situ piles.
(xv) The cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/cum of concrete.
(xvi) The minimum slump of concrete for bored cast-in-situ piles shall 150mm to 200mm, but
the slump should not exceed 200mm in any case.
(xvii) Concreting under water :-General requirements and precautions for concreting under
water shall be as given in concreting chapter 3 of IR Unified Standard Specifications
(Work & Materials), Volume - I, 2010.This would be further supplemented by given
following instructions. The decision of DFCCIL is final and binding to the contractor.
(a) The concreting of a pile must be completed in one continuous operation. Also, for bored
holes, the finishing of the bore, cleaning of the bore, lowering of reinforcement cage and
concreting of pile for full height must be accomplished in one continuous operation without any
stoppage.
(b) The concrete should be coherent, rich in cement with high slump and restricted water cement
ratio.
(c) The tremie pipe will have to be large enough with due regard to the size of aggregate. For 20mm
aggregate the tremie pipe should be of diameter not less than 150mm and for larger aggregate,
larger diameter tremie pipes may be necessary.

Date Page 115
(d) The first charge of concrete should be placed with a sliding plug pushed down the tube
ahead of it to prevent mixing of water and concrete.
(e) The tremie pipe should always penetrate well into the concrete with an adequate margin of
safety against accidental withdrawal if the pipe is surged to discharge the concrete.
(f) The pile should be concreted wholly by tremie and the method of deposition should not be
changed part way up the pile to prevent the laitance from being entrapped within the pile.
(g) All tremie tubes should be scrupulously cleaned after use.
(h) In special circumstances, the Engineer may permit use of any other proved method of concrete
placement designed for under water concrete. In such cases, a detailed method statement
should be prepared and got approved by the Engineer.
(xviii) The diameter of the finished pile shall not be less than that specified and a continuous
record shall be kept by the Engineer as to the volume of concrete placed in relation to the
pile length cast.
2.3.3 The schedule of quantities in this contract is based on bored cast-in-situ pile of required
capacity and for approximate anticipated depth as indicated in the drawings. Depth of piles
is likely to vary and contractor shall have no claim whatsoever irrespective of the depth of
piles provided at any and all locations. Installation of piles shall be carried out as per
layout drawings, installation criteria and the instructions of the Engineer. The method of
installing the piles, including details of the equipment shall be submitted by the contractor
and got approved by the Engineer before start of work.
2.3.4 Piling work shall conform to specifications IS: 2911 Parts 1 & 4 unless otherwise specified.
2.3.5 Workmanship of bored cast-in-situ piles includes the provisions for control of piling
installation, use of drilling mud, cleaning of borehole, tremie concreting, defective pile,
recording of data shall be as per Clause 8 of IS: 2911(Part 1/Section 2).
2.3.6 The specifications for safe load, test load, total displacement, net displacement etc., shall
also conform to provisions as per IS: 2911 (Part 4).
2.3.7 The contractor shall set out piles with precision survey duly erecting permanent bench
marks and other references. He shall be responsible for correct maintenance of position
and plumb thereafter and these shall be checked periodically. The control of alignment and
inclination of piles shall be as per IS: 2911(Part 1/Section 2). Tolerances as specified in
the above code or as specified shall govern.
2.3.8 Level marks shall be put accurately on each pile immediately after it is installed. If any
pile shows subsequently a tendency to heave up due to installation of other piles later or

Date Page 116
due to any other reason, corrective course of action shall be suggested and taken by the
contractor after approval by the Engineer at the cost of contractor.
2.3.9 Durability provisions such as clear cover to reinforcements, minimum and maximum
cement content, maximum water-cement ratio and permeability of concrete shall be
adhered to as mentioned earlier and below. The exposed area of pile above the ground
level. In case of harmful chemical constituents found in subsoil and in water such as
chlorides and sulphides, special provisions as per relevant codes of practice shall be
followed for protection against reinforcement corrosion and disintegration of concrete and
for such protection against corrosion and bio-fouling, the pile concrete/liner below cut-off
level shall be painted with appropriate material, if ordered by Engineer for which payment
will be made separately as specified in relevant schedules.
2.3.10 Sulphate resistant cement may be used on need based consideration after conducting the
soil investigation and water investigation. It shall not be used under such conditions where
concrete is exposed to risk of excessive chlorides and sulphate attack both. Requirements
of concrete exposed to sulphate attack shall be as per Table 4 of IS: 456. Where chloride is
encountered along with sulphate in soil or ground water, Ordinary Portland Cement with
C3A contents from 5 to 8 % shall be desirable to be used in concrete instead of sulphate
resisting cement. For pH around 4, steel and concrete both have to be specially quoted. If
sulphate resistant cement is used which has faster setting properties, curing shall start
within five hours of concreting.
2.3.11 Method of boring, namely, Bailer and Chisel, Rotary, Direct Mud Circulation (DMC),
Reverse Mud Circulation (RMC), Percussion, etc., shall be chosen as appropriate to strata
and site conditions. The agreement rates for piling are inclusive of any type of boring/any
type of supporting arrangements adopted by the contractor and no extra payments are
admissible for any type of scheme adopted by the contractor.
2.3.12 Borehole stability shall be maintained with casing and/or mud circulation..
2.3.13 Use of drilling mud (Bentonite) in stabilizing the sides of bore holes is mandatory in soils
of inadequate capacity. The decision on the need of use of Bentonite will be taken by the
Engineer which is final. The bentonite slurry shall be maintained at 1.5m above the ground
water level during boring operations and till the pile is concreted. The bentonite slurry
shall be under constant circulation till start of concreting and shall meet the requirements
stipulated in the subsequent clauses. Agreemental rates for piling includes the cost of
Bentonite and related operations and the contractor cannot claim any extra cost on this
account.
2.3.14 Providing MS Liners: This item is for supply and fixing contractor’s permanent MS liners
for the pile from the top of working platform upto the required depth as may be decided by
the Engineer. The contractor shall fabricate the MS liners from his own MS sheets to suit
the diameter of the pile as directed. Required length of MS liners will be made up by
welding each unit outside by the contractor with his own equipments and plants. It shall be

Date Page 117
clearly noted that the MS sheets required for manufacture of the liners shall not be
supplied by the DFCCIL. The welding shall be of proper quality so as to withstand the
hammering forces. The payable depth shall however, be measured only from the cut off
level though the liner might have been provided right from the level of working platform
on practical considerations, since the length above the cut off level has to be necessarily
removed by gas cutting for facilitating peeling of the top portion of the pile and for
interlacing its reinforcement bars into the capping slab. Therefore, the rate quoted shall
cater for the element of cutting and removing the surplus length of MS liners. There is,
however, no objection for the surplus pieces, if usable, are united and are re-welded to the
required length for reuse on some of the other piles. No claim shall be entertained if the
cut pieces cannot be reused by the contractor.
2.3.15 The contractor shall take all necessary precautions while piling close to existing
structures/other foundations/track so as to minimize vibrations and ground movement.
Bores shall be encased as directed by the Engineer and boring shall commence only after
precautionary measures are taken. While working near the existing track, infringements
and other safety aspects shall be specially considered and taken care of.
2.3.16 The contractor shall indemnify the DFCCIL Administration against any claim or obligations
arising out of any damage to structure or out of any injury to any person/persons due to
piling working done by him.
2.3.17 The contractor shall mobilize and maintain requisite resources for piling including
concreting. Additional resources, as a standby shall also be available in advance of work,
to take care of any eventualities. Admixtures as approved by Engineer shall be kept in
readiness before concreting to meet any exigencies. After boring and/or cage lowering to
avoid borehole instability and settlement of bentonite, boreholes shall not be left un-
concreted for long.
2.3.18 The spoils arising out of boring shall be disposed off as directed by Engineer within the
agreemental rates. In case of piling close to Railway track or near the existing road,
contractor shall make adequate arrangements for disposing the muck away properly.
Contractor shall also make adequate drainage arrangement for mud slurry so that the same
does not affect the tracks or roads or adjoining properties.
2.3.19 The bored spoils may be dumped in a low lying area as directed by Engineer so that work
site is restored back to normal condition after completion of work.
2.3.20 When the bore has reached its final depth, it shall be free from any foreign matter before
placing the reinforcement cage and concreting for the pile is started. Reinforcement for the
pile shall be carefully placed in position and concreting then started. The cover block used
also shall satisfy strength and permeability criteria.
2.3.21 If hard rock is encountered, socketing in hard rock shall also be provided as per codal
provision.

Date Page 118
2.3.22 In case of sloping bedrock profile, the requisite depth of socketing shall be ensured as
minimum all round piling and the payment will be made for the least depth of socketing
only and no claims of differential depth of socketing are admissible.
2.3.23 The bottom level of pile cap will be decided by Engineer, depending upon capacity and
ground level.
2.3.24 Care shall be taken for free flow of concrete through splices and congested reinforcement
zones with proper detailing and monitoring.
2.3.25 The quantity of concrete required for a particular pile shall be calculated as per depth of
the pile and nominal diameter of the pile. This quantity shall be checked with the actual
quantity of concrete used, which is to be recorded and signed jointly by the contractor and
representative of the DFCCIL. Theoretical quantity of concrete, calculated as per depth
and nominal diameter of the pile shall form the basis of calculating the cement quantity as
per approved design mix, for payment to the contractor,
2.3.26 For the finishing of pile heads, the clearances of reinforcements in the pile cap and the
keying of the pile head into the pile cap shall be as given in IS: 2911.
2.3.27 The contractor shall maintain bore log register and bored samples for each pile boring and
concreting. The details shall contain various operations in pile boring with time, type of
soil met with depth of penetration with levels, liner welding and lowering details,
obstruction to boring, if any, machine down time, rock touch level and final socketed
level. The flushing out details before cage lowering and before concreting shall also be
recorded. The concreting details such as mix proportions, sounding at various depths vis-à-
vis cement / concrete consumption, unusual observations while concreting, interruption to
concreting, if any and overflow concrete shall be recorded. The swelling and/or squeezing
of borehole in uncased portion shall be specially monitored with recording of sounding
depth, quantity concreted actually and quantity theoretically estimated corresponding to
that sounding depth.
2.3.28 The payable depth of piles shall be taken up to the clear distance from the cut-off level
(bottom of pile cap) to the average bottom of the bore. The depth so measured shall be
rounded off to the nearest first decimal of a metre (0.05 metre or more to be reckoned as
0.10 metre whereas below 0.05 metre to be reckoned as 0.00 metre) for the purpose of
making payment.
2.3.29 In group of two or more piles, piles of same diameter and same load carrying capacity
shall be installed. The distance between centre to centre of such piles shall be governed by
IS: 2911. In case the contractor offers to install the piles closer than this spacing, he shall
state the reduction in the working load of the pile which will be subject to the approval of
Engineer. The additional piles required on this account shall be provided by the contractor
without any extra cost to the DFCCIL. Also cost of cement and steel reinforcement used

Date Page 119
on this score will have to be borne by the contractor. New MS liners shall also be to
contractors account.
2.3.30 If any pile during boring has deviated from the design position or from the verticality or if
the safe allowable load of the pile is not obtainable as per the design, all these facts shall
be reported promptly to the Engineer during the execution of the work with suggestion
from the contractor regarding adequate corrective measures. The Engineer shall consider
the suggestions of the contractor and shall give necessary directions for the corrective
measure which shall be done by the contractor at his own cost and risk. However, if
certain piles are rejected by the Engineer on account of improper location / verticality /
alignment / capacity, the Engineer may allow the rejected piles to be left in their places
and additional piles may be installed to take up the safe working load of the rejected piles
with satisfaction of Engineer without any extra cost to the DFCCIL. If any such changes
involve additional expenditure due to increase in size of pile cap, etc., the same shall also
be borne by the contractor including the extra cost involved in the usage of the extra
quantity of cement and steel used in such changes.
2.3.31 No payment will be made for rejected piles and also for the cement, steel and the MS
liners provided for the rejected piles.
2.3.32 Pile load Test: IS: 2911 (Part 4) prescribes various guidelines and procedures for load
tests on piles. Pile load test shall be conducted as per IS: 2911 (Part 4) and as directed by
the Engineer. Vertical load tests (compression) and lateral load tests shall be adopted for
testing of piles. There shall be two categories of tests on piles for each type of loading
(vertical and lateral), namely, initial tests and routine tests. Initial tests should be carried
out on test piles which are not to be incorporated in the work. Routine tests shall be
carried out as a check on working piles.
Initial load test is carried out to determine the ultimate load capacity and arrival at the safe
load by application of factor of safety whereas routine test is conducted to determine the
safe load of pile, checking the safety load and extent of safety. In other words, routine test
is conducted to check whether the pile is capable of taking the working load assigned to it.
Non-destructive testing i.e. Integrity testing of pile using Low Strain / Sonic Integrity Test
/ Sonic Echo test method in accordance with IS: 14893 shall be carried out for integrity
testing of concrete in the installed pile.
The vertical load test and lateral load test shall be carried out as per clause 6 and 7 of IS:
2911 (Part 4).
Safe load on a pile is derived by applying a factor of safety on ultimate load capacity of
pile as determined by a load test whereas working load is the load assigned to pile
according to design. The safe loads on single pile and on group of piles for the initial test
and routine test shall be in accordance clause 6.1.5 and 6.1.6 of IS : 2911(Part 4). Test load
shall be 2.5 times the safe capacity load for Initial Load. For routine test, test load shall be

Date Page 120
at least 1.5 times the working load for maximum settlement not exceeding 12mm in case
of single pile whereas test load shall be equal to the working load for maximum settlement
not exceeding 25mm in case of group piles.
The test shall be carried out at cut off level wherever practicable, otherwise suitable
allowance shall be made in the interpretation of the test results / test load if the test is not
carried out at cut-off level.
The contractor shall submit all data along with load vs settlement, time vs settlement,
interpretation of the pile load test, etc., in a report along with characteristics of the pile as
per IS 2911 and as directed by the Engineer.
For any other type of test such as pullout tests, etc. if considered necessary, the contractor
shall make arrangements in consultation with the Engineer and payments for the same will
be eligible as decided mutually in advance.
Payment for initial vertical load test, routine vertical load test and lateral load test will be
made against a separate item provided in the schedule.
2.3.33 The contractor is required to carry out load test in pile or group of piles as per provisions
contained in IS : 2911 (Part 4) of and shall provide all the designing, testing, loading,
supporting, instrumenting, recording & reporting arrangements at the agreement rates. The
design, instrumentation etc., shall be approved by the GM/ROB/CPM/DFCCIL-
Ahmedabad.
2.3.34 The payment for the test of the pile or group of piles shall be made to the contractor only
when the test is found to be satisfactory. For tests which are found to be unsatisfactory or
which are not completed due to any reasons whatsoever, no payment shall be made to the
contractor.
2.3.35 The agreemental rates for tests include instrumentation, reporting, arranging of necessary
kentledge, R.S. Joists, sand bags, etc, required for loading the platform for successful
testing of the pile or group of piles and removing the same from the site of work after the
test is completed and clearing the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer and no extra
payment shall be made on this account.
2.3.36 In case of defective piles, DFCCIL reserves the right to order, at the cost of contractor,
non-destructive test for integrity and / or capacity assessment or additional static load tests
as confirmatory tests at the cost of the contractor. The test shall be considered satisfactory
only if the criteria laid in specifications are satisfied and the behaviour of the pile or pile
group during the period of test does not disclose any defects as specified in relevant codes
and as directed by the Engineer.
2.3.37 Each pile shall be identified with a reference member. Level marks shall be accurately
painted on each pile immediately after its installation. The contractor shall record all the

Date Page 121
information during installation of piles as directed by the Engineer. Pile records in

triplicate shall be submitted by the contractor.
2.3.38 Approval of the termination depth of the pile by the Engineer shall, in no way, absolve the
contractor on the integrity of the pile.
2.3.39 Control of Position and Alignment: Piles shall be installed as accurately vertical (for
vertical piles) as possible. The permissible limits for deviation with respect to position and
alignment shall confirm to IS: 2911 (Part 1/Section 2).
2.3.40 Working level shall be above the cut-off-level. After the initial boring of about 1m,
temporary guide casing of suitable length shall be lowered in the pile bore for vertical pile.
The diameter of guide casing shall be such as to give the necessary finished diameter of
the concrete pile. The centre line of guide casing shall be checked before continuing
further boring. Guide casing shall be minimum of 1.0m length. Additional length of casing
may be used depending on the condition of the strata, ground water level etc. The
temporary guide casing (if provided) shall be withdrawn cautiously, after concreting is
done up to the required level. While withdrawing the casing, concrete shall not be
disturbed.
2.3.41 Permanent MS Liners shall be provided for piles up to point of refusal or as directed by
the Engineer. The bottom end of the MS Liner shall be stiffened by welding additional
plates to withstand the impact during driving.
2.3.42 In case hard rock is encountered, chiseling is essentially required for softening of the rock,
the same may be adopted only on approval of the Engineer, at no extra cost to the
DFCCIL. Advancement of pile bore shall be done by drilling only, in case of use of rotary
hydraulic drilling rig.
2.3.43 Specifications for Bentonite shall be as follows: Liquid limit of bentonite when tested in
accordance with IS: 2720 (Part V) shall be 400 percent or more. Bentonite solution should
be made by mixing it with fresh water using pump for circulation. The density of the
freshly prepared bentonite suspension shall be between 1.03 and 1.10 gm / ml depending
upon the pile dimensions and type of soil in which the pile is to be installed. However, the
density of bentonite suspension after mixing with deleterious materials in the pile bore
may be up to 1.25 gm / ml. The marsh viscosity when tested by a marsh cone shall be
between 30 to 60 Seconds/stroke. The pH value of the bentonite suspension shall be
between 9 and 11.5.
2.3.44 Cleaning of borehole:- After completion of borehole up to the required depth, the
borehole shall be cleaned as per clause 8.3 of IS : 2911 (Part 1/Section 2).
2.3.45 A protocol shall be maintained regarding the strata at the founding level, SPT value,
percent core recovery, Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) from the nearest

Date Page 122
borehole, socketing horizon, flushing of pile bore, time interval between end of boring and
start of concreting, bentonite density before start of concreting.
2.3.46 Top of Concrete in Pile and Cut off-level (COL):- Cut-off-Level of piles shall be as
indicated in drawings released for construction. The top of concrete in pile as cast shall be
above the cut-off-level by 1.0 metre (maximum) to remove all laitance and weak concrete
and to ensure good concrete at cut-off-level, for proper embedment into the pile cap. The
area surrounding the piles shall be excavated up to the bottom of the pile caps. After seven
days of concreting of pile, the exposed part of concrete above the COL shall be removed /
chipped off and made rough at COL. The projected reinforcement above COL shall be
properly cleaned and bent to the required shape and level to be anchored into the pile cap.
The pile top shall be embedded into the pile cap by 150 mm or clear cover to
reinforcement, whichever is higher. All loose material on the top of pile head after
chipping to the desired level shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the
Engineer.
2.3.47 Reinforcement: The longitudinal reinforcement shall project 50 times its diameter above
cut-off-level unless otherwise indicated. Proper cover to reinforcement and central
placement of the reinforcement cage in the pile bore shall be ensured by use of suitable
concrete spacers or rollers, cast specifically for the purpose. Placement of reinforcement
cage to its full length shall be ensured before concreting. Minimum clear cover to the
reinforcement shall be 75 mm, unless otherwise mentioned.
2.3.48 Building Up of Piles: If any pile, already cast as per construction drawing, requires any
extra casting due to any change in cut-off-level, then the pile shall be built up by using at
least one grade higher concrete than specified for piles, ensuring proper continuity with the
existing concrete and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Necessary reinforcement, as per
design requirement and suitable shuttering shall be provided, before casting the concrete.
Surrounding soil shall also be built up to the required level by proper compaction, to
ensure lateral capacity of the pile.
2.3.49 Breaking Off: If any pile already cast requires breaking, due to subsequent change of
Pile’s cut-off-level, then the same shall be carried out, not before seven days of casting
without affecting the quality of existing pile, such as loosening, cracking etc., and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. If any pile is cracked, the same shall be replaced by the
contractor at his own cost.
2.3.50 Bore Hole testing: Bore hole shall be made as per IS:1892.
2.3.51 IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS, INSPECTION / PRECAUTIONS
(i) While concreting uncased piles, voids in concrete shall be avoided and sufficient head of
concrete shall be maintained to prevent inflow of soil or water into the concrete. It is also

Date Page 123
necessary to take precautions during concreting to minimise the softening of the soil by excess
water. Uncased cast-in-situ piles shall not be permitted where mudflow conditions exist.
(i) The drilling mud such as bentonite suspension shall be maintained at a level sufficiently above
the surrounding ground water level to ensure the stability of the strata which is being
penetrated all through the boring operation and until the pile has been concreted.
(ii) Where bentonite suspension is used to maintain the stability of the bore-hole, it is essential that
the properties of the material be carefully controlled at stages of mixing, circulating through
the bore-hole and immediately before concrete is placed. It is advisable to limit:
(a) The density of bentonite suspension to 1.05 g/cc and maintain it.
(b) The marsh cone viscosity between 30 and 40 seconds.
(c) The pH value between 9.5 and 11.50
(d) The silt content less than 1 per cent
(e) The liquid limit of bentonite not less than 400 per cent
These aspects shall act as controlling factors for preventing contamination of
bentonite slurry by clay and silt.
(iii) The bores shall be washed by bentonite flushing to ensure clean bottom at two stages viz. (a)
after completion of boring and (b) prior to concreting after placing of reinforcement cage.
Flushing of bentonite shall be done continuously with fresh bentonite slurry till the consistency
of inflowing and out flowing slurry is similar.
(iv) Tremie of 150mm to 200mm diameter shall be used for concreting. The tremie should have
uniform and smooth cross-section inside, and shall be withdrawn slowly ensuring adequate
height of concrete outside the tremie pipe at all stages of withdrawal. Other precautions to be
taken while tremie concreting are:
(a) The sides of the bore-hole have to be stable throughout
(b) The tremie shall be water tight throughout its length and have a hopper attached
at its head by a water tight connection.
(c) The tremie pipe shall be large enough in relation to the size of aggregates. For
20mm aggregate the tremie pipe shall be of diameter not less than 150mm and
for larger size aggregate tremie pipe of larger diameter is required.
(d) The tremie pipe shall always be kept full of concrete and shall penetrate well into
the concrete in the bore-hole with adequate margin of safety against accidental
withdrawal if the pipe is surged to discharge the concrete.
(e) For very long or large diameter piles, use of retarding plasticiser in concrete is
desirable.
2.3.52 Pile Data:

Date Page 124
The contractor shall submit data in the following proforma for each pile indicating all
technical details along with date and time of various operations in adequate permanent
forms/copies for record.
Proforma
(i) Reference No. Location (Co-ordinates) __ area.
(ii) Sequence of installation of piles in group
(iii) Pile diameter & type
(iv) Working level (Platform level)
(v) Cut off level (COL)
(vi) Actual length below COL
(vii) Pile termination level
(a) Start of socket (Level)
(b) Termination of pile (Level):
(viii) Top of finished concrete level
(ix) Date and time of start and completion of boring.
(x) Depth of ground water table in the vicinity.
(xi) Type of soil/ rock at pile tip
(xii) Method of boring operation
(xiii) Details of drilling mud (Bentonite) as used:
(a) Freshly supplied mud:

Liquid limit
Sand content
Density
Marsh viscosity
Swelling index,
PH value
(b) Contaminated mud:

Density

Date Page 125
Sand content
(xiv) (a) Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Penetration for 100 blows at Socketing Level
for reference pile:
(b) Unconfined Compression Strength (UCS) Value in rock (from the nearest bore
hole): Core recovery (from the nearest bore hole):
(c) Rate of drilling in mm / hr:

(1) At start of socketing horizon
(2) At termination level
(xv) Date and time of start and completion of concreting.
(xvi) Method of placing concrete
(xvii) Concrete quantity

Actual:
Theoretical:
(xviii) Ref. number of test cubes
(xix) Grade and slump of concrete
(xx) Results of test cubes
(xxi) Reinforcement details:

Main reinforcement Stirrups: Type
No._______________ No.___________
Dia ______________ Dia ___________
Depth_____________ Spacing________
(xxii) Any other information regarding obstructions, delay and other interruption to the
Sequence of work.
(xxiii) Pile bore log details (in brief).
2.3.52 Such structure or parts of the structure which fail or pass the specified tests, shall be
removed from the site by the tenderer/contractor at his cost and the contractors shall redo the
work. Payments made on account of the rejected structure/part structure work shall be
recovered from the contractor and the work will be redone by him at the same rates.

Date Page 126
2.4 GENERAL GUIDLINES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUPPLY OF

REINFORCEMENT AND STRUCTRURAL STEEL
2.4.1 SUPPLY OF STEEL FOR VARIOUS WORKS:

Supply of steel to various specifications as required under various schedules in the
contract are governed by the Technical specifications and Special Conditions specified
hereunder.
All steel shall be supplied by the Contractor at the site of work and stacked, stored,
protected and maintained by him at his cost till they are put into use. Any temporary
structure required for storage of steel etc., has to be provided by the Contractor at his cost
and should be removed after completion of the work. The DFCCIL will only provide
suitable land for construction of the above temporary shed free of cost wherever available.
For supply and use of steel in various works, relevant IRS Codes Specifications, IS
Specifications and Railways/MORTH specification will be applicable or relevant. The
decision of DFCCIL shall be final and binding to the contractor.
2.4.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL:
2.4.2.1 The steel supplied by the contractor must satisfy any of the following material
specifications as required for the work along with other concerned specifications.
(i) The reinforcement steel shall be Thermo mechanical Treated bars of grade Fe
500D conforming / satisfying to IS 1786 (Up to date).
(ii) The structural steel shall be conforming to IS 2062 (Up to date) as specified. It
shall have Sub quality ‘BR’ & Grade E250 (Fe 410 W) as mentioned in the tender
schedule and the requirements of IRS B1-2001 shall be fulfilled for all components
for all spans. 12 mm thick & above plates are fully killed and fully normalized /
controlled cooled as mentioned in the tender schedule. 'BR' sub quality indicate the
requirement of impact test at room temperature and should conform to Charpy
Impact Test at room temperature in accordance with relevant I.S. Code.
(iii) Relevant other IS and IRS Specifications with regard to properties, testing and use
of the above steel items also shall govern.
2.4.2.2 The contractor shall produce the manufacturers test certificate for each lot of supply
satisfying the requirements of relevant IS specifications and at the specific frequency as
laid down.
2.4.2.3 The Contractor shall arrange to carryout additional tests on physical properties of steel for
every 40 metric tonne (t) of steel, and for every change in lot / batch for reinforcement
steel and structural steel, Contractor shall submitted test report from manufacturer at his
cost. DFCCIL reserve to right for carry out additional test if need arise. No extra payment

Date Page 127
will be made for conducting such tests and the agreemental rate is inclusive of above
testing charges.
2.4.3 PROCUREMENT OF STEEL:
2.4.3.1 All Reinforcement steel (TMT bars) and Structural Steel shall be procured as per
specification mentioned in BIS’s documents – IS: 1786 and IS: 2062. Independent tests
shall be conducted, wherever required, to ensure that the materials procured conform to
the Specifications.
ore as the basic raw material and having in–house iron rolling facilities, followed by
production of liquid steel and crude steel, as per Ministry of Steel's (Government of India)
guidelines.
However, only certain isolated sections of structural steel, not being rolled by ISPs, can be
procured from the authorized re-rollers of ISPs or authorized licensee of BIS having
traceability system and who use billets produced by ISPs with the approval of Engineer.
2.4.3.2 The contractor shall have to submit the cash memo and challans along with the lot / batch
of steel purchased in token of proof of purchase of steel from reputed dealers. Steel shall
be approved by Engineer only after production of necessary certificates before use in
works.
2.4.4 REINFORCEMENT AND STRUCTURAL STEEL:
2.4.4.1 Payment for supply of all types of steel shall be made for the quantity required / used as
per the drawings issued from time to time. No payment will be admissible for quantity
supplied in excess of the required quantity as per drawings. However, contractor will be
permitted to take the excess quantity back by his own means, but no claim for payment for
transportation so involved will be admissible. No payment will be made for more supply
of steel at the site / excess used in Construction. No payment will be made for steel used
in temporary or enabling works unless explicitly provided for in the Schedules. Steel for
enabling/temporary works shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost.
2.4.5 STAGE PAYAMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL:
2.4.5.1 No Advance Payment shall be made. However, stage payment for manufacturer of steel
girders shall be made as per Bills of Quantities by the DFCCIL for steel physically brought
to site by the contractor.
2.4.5.2 Stage payment for steel will be released subject to the following conditions:

Date Page 128
(i) The steel shall be delivered at site and properly stored under covered sheds in measurable
stacks and separately maintained for various sizes, sections and dates of supply.
(ii) The quantities of steel shall be brought to the site only in such instalments that would
facilitate smooth progress of work and consumed in reasonable time. The payment will be
restricted to a maximum of 30% of the schedule quantity at any point of time.
(iii) Proper accountable in the Steel Register is to be maintained in the prescribed format at the
site for the receipt and use of the steel.
(iv) Ownership of such steel shall be deemed to vest with the DFCCIL.
(v) Before releasing the stage payment, the contractor shall insure the steel at his own cost in
favour of DFCCIL against theft, misuse, damages, fire etc.
(vi) The price variation claim for steel will continue to be governed as per extant PV clause and
with reference to delivery at site.
(vii) The Stage payment will be made, only when the Engineer or his authorized representative
certifies that the said quantity of steel is received at site and entered in the register and that
in his opinion the steel is actually required in accordance with the contract.
(viii) No Stage payment is permitted for steel required for temporary and enabling works.
2.4.5.3 (i) 60% payment shall be released after fabrication and receiving fabricated component at
ROB site.
(ii) 20% payment shall be released after assembling the fabricated components as per
drawing at ROB site.
(iii) 20% payment shall be released after erection and completion of item.
2.4.5.4 Any Stage payment found to be made against the materials brought to the site in excess
over the actual materials consumed in work shall be recovered from the contractor dues.
2.4.6 OTHERS:
2.4.6.1 Reinforcement steel and structural steel, shall be stored in such a way so as to avoid
distortion and to prevent deterioration by corrosion. All steel used should be free from
loose Mill scale, loose rust, paints and oil covering / coating etc.
2.4.6.2 Steel material, for which stage payment has been availed by the Contractor, shall be
property of DFCCIL and will be issued to contractor by Engineer whenever required for
the work. Contractor will be solely responsible for guarding against theft / misuse of the
consignment due to any cause what so ever. The stage payment will be made, only when
the Engineer certifies that in his opinion that the materials are actually required in

Date Page 129
accordance with the contract. It is the responsibility of the agency to ensure that steel as
per the requirement is brought to site as per approved drawings / requirements.
2.4.6.3 The contractor shall be bound to store the materials at site of work earmarked for the
purpose by the Engineer and shall not remove from the site nor use for any other purposes
than exclusively for execution of the work for which the materials are intended for. Safe
guarding of the materials is the responsibility of the contractor even if the material is
deemed to be owned by the DFCCIL and insurance etc., have been arranged by the
contractor.
2.4.6.4 Contractor shall remove from site any steel materials rejected by the Engineer within
reasonable time as specified by him.
2.4.6.5 Before the test pieces are selected, the Contractor shall furnish copies of the mill records
of the reinforcement steel giving number of coils in each cast with sizes and identity marks
to enable identification of the material with the bill produced.
2.5 GENERAL GUIDELINES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR FABRICATION &

ERECTION OF COMPOSITE GIRDER AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2.5.1 GENERAL:
This chapter covers the supply of material, fabrication, assembly and erection of
Composite/BOW string/Open Web Girders and bearings.
The composite girder shall be fabricated / erected as per approved GAD/ Design and
launching scheme provided.
The following are the brief specifications and general guidelines for fabricating and erecting
the girders but not limited to.
For detailed technical specifications for fabrication and erection of girders, refer special
condition and specification for “Schedule-E”, added to superseded by Additional
Specifications if any, appended to or as modified from time to time and Indian Railway
Specification for Fabrication and Erection of Steel Girder Bridges and Locomotive Turn-
Tables (Serial No B1-2001) shall be followed.
The superstructure of these ROBs in Railway portion is composite girder.
Composite girder is a combination of plate girders/ Bow string/ Open Web Girders and
deck slab. These girders involve the use of shear connector also. The Width of bridge is as
per approved GAD and approved design. The superstructure includes two RCC crash
barriers and two RCC railings as per MORTH design. The wearing coat is made of plain
concrete. The wearing coat is 75 mm thick or as per GAD and design. The cross drainage

Date Page 130
slope of 1 : 40 is in the deck slab to drain the water. 100 mm dia GI/PVC pipe shall be
used as drainage spouts.
The RCC deck slab has been designed with design Mix Concrete with grade of Concrete
M35. The environmental exposure condition of this area where these ROBs are being
constructed is moderate. As per moderate condition, minimum grade of concrete required
as per Addendum and Corrigendum slip no 12 of Concrete Bridge Code - 1997 is M30.
Minimum grade of concrete requirement is for durability of the structure. Hence, M35
satisfies the codal provisions of Concrete Bridge Code.
The bearings used in these girders are Elastomeric / POT cum PTFE Bearing as per
approved GADs & design. The contractor has to purchase the bearings from the approved
manufacturers of Railways/RDSO/State Government as may be applicable or relevant, as
per approved drawing. The decision of DFCCIL shall be final and binding to the
contractor.
Bearing design shall be done by bearing manufacture are as per load/forces on bearing given
in the drawing and design/ drawing of bearing shall be got approved from Consultant. The
cost of design of bearing shall be borne by the contractor. The decision of the DFCCIL shall
be final and binding two the contractor.
Pin and Metallic Guide bearing have also been shown in the drawings of superstructure of
RDSO composite girders. But these are used in Seismic Zone IV and V. For this work, these
bearings are not applicable.
The 18m, 22m, 24m, 30m, 36m, 48m and 62m etc as per GADs span Composite plate
girder/ Bow string girder/ Open Web Girders are to be fabricated as per Indian Railway
Specification for Fabrication and Erection of Steel Girder.
Bridges and Locomotive Turn-Tables (Serial No B1-2001).
High Strength Friction Grip Bolts (HSFGB) shall be used as per drawings of RDSO. Notes
for use of HSFGB are given in drawing no. RDSO/B-11760/R.
For skew ROBs, please refer drawing no. RDSO/B-11759/R.
Protection screen is to be provided as per RDSO Drawing No RDSO/ETI/0068 in each

ROB.
The protective coating is to be given to the composite girder by metalizing with sprayed
aluminium as recommended in RDSO drawings.

Date Page 131
The Contractor will be required to develop jigs & Masters for each components of
composite Girder and same will be approved by DFCCIL authorized inspecting officials.
Masters templates should be stored & handled carefully and should be used only for
checking the correctness of the jigs from time to time.
After successful inspection of the fabricated components, appropriate surface treatment i.e.
metalizing shall be rendered & components transported to bridge sites.
Contractor will be responsible for making material dumping and girder erection yard as per
the requirement for which no extra payment will be made by the DFCCIL to the Contractor.
2.5.2 Site Inspection
Tenderers are requested to inspect the site and carry out careful examination to satisfy
them as to the nature of work involved and facilities available at the site. They should note
carefully all the existing structures and those under construction through other agencies.
They should also study the suitability of utilizing the different equipments and the
machinery that they intend to use for the execution of the work. The tenderers should also
select suitable sites for the purpose of locating their store yard, laboratory, staff quarters
etc., and satisfy themselves with regard to the feasibility of transporting the plate girders
from the yard to the final site of placement etc.
2.5.3 Brief Design Data
The composite girders has been designed as per relevant IRS / IRC / RDSO codes and other
guidelines.
2.5.4 Codes and Specifications:
The materials as well as execution of works shall be confirming to the following

specifications and codes of practice (Latest Revision of the Specification /Codes & upto date
correction slips to be referred).
2.5.4.1 Indian Railway Standard Codes and Specifications:
(i) IR Specification for Fabrication of steel girder bridge & Locomotives turn tables
(fabrication specification) – SERIAL NO. B1-2001 issued by RDSO, Reprint -2008
incorporating A & C slip upto 4 (upto date).
(ii) IRS : Welded Bridge Code (1989)
(iii) IRS : Steel Bridge Code (2003 )
(iv) IRS: M-28 Specifications for electrodes.
(v) IRS: M-39 Specification for wire flux for SAW.

Date Page 132
2.5.4.2 Indian Standard Specification:
(i) IS: 2062-2011 Specification for structural steel.

(ii) IS: 813-1986 Scheme of symbols for welding.
(iii) IS: 800-2007.
(iv) IS: 9595-1996 Manual for metal arc welding.
(v) IS: 818-1968 Code of Practice for safety and Health requirements in electric and gas
welding operations.
(vi) IS: 5666-1970 Etch (Pre-treatment) Primer
(vii) IS: 104-1979 Specification for Ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, Priming
(viii) IS : 2339-1963 : Aluminium paint
(ix) IS: 2004-1991 Carbon steel forgings for general engineering purposes.
(x) IS: 1852-1985 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products.
(xi) IS: 1148-2009 Rivet bars for structural purposes.
(xii) IS: 4353-1995 Recommendations of Sub-merged Arc welding of mild steel and low
alloy steel.
(xiii) IS: 3935-1966 (shear connector)
2.5.5 Materials
2.5.5.1 Steel (Plates and Rolled sections) should conform to IS: 2062-2011. It shall have Sub
quality ‘BR’ & Grade E250 (Fe 410 W) as mentioned in the tender schedule and the
requirements of IRS B1-2001 shall be fulfilled for all components for all spans. 12 mm
thick & above plates are fully killed and fully normalized / controlled cooled as mentioned
in the tender schedule. BR sub quality indicate the requirement of impact test at room
temperature and should conform to Charpy Impact Test at room temperature in accordance
with relevant I.S. Code.
Material supplied by the manufacturers shall be ultrasonically tested as per codal

provisions at the manufacturer’s premises before dispatch. The contractor on receipt of
supply in his factory premises/fabrication workshop may have to carry out random USFD
testing as per standards laid down in various codes and verify them with the list received
from manufacturers, if instructed by the inspection agency/ Site Engineer. Only tested
steel shall be used for fabrication. The steel shall comply in all respects with the
requirements of approved drawings and relevant codes and specifications and it may be
noted that quality of steel used for fabrication shall be the essence of the contract & shall
be rigidly followed.
2.5.5.2 Structural Steel shall be procured as per specification mentioned in BIS’s documents – IS :
2062-2011. Independent tests shall be conducted, wherever required, to ensure that the
materials procured conform to the Specifications.
ore as the basic raw material and having in – house iron rolling facilities, followed by

Date Page 133
production of liquid steel and crude steel, as per Ministry of Steel's (Government of India)
guidelines.
However, only certain isolated sections of structural steel, not being rolled by ISPs, can be
procured from the authorized re-rollers of ISPs or authorized licensee of BIS having
traceability system and who use billets produced by ISPs with the approval of Engineer.
2.5.6 Test Certificates & Testing
All materials for the work shall pass Mechanical test, Charpy test, Chemical Analysis, etc.
prescribed by the relevant IS specifications or such other equivalent specifications.
For all materials including HSFG bolts, the contractor shall furnish copies of test
certificates from the manufacturers including proof sheets, mill test certificates, etc.
showing that the materials have been tested in accordance with the requirements of various
specifications and codal provisions.
If any further testing of materials is required by Engineer in respect of these and other
items, it shall be arranged for by the contractor at a reputed laboratory/National test house
as approved by Engineer. For this, nothing extra shall be payable and accepted rates in the
schedule of items shall be deemed to include this.
Even satisfactory outcome of such tests or analysis shall in no way limit, dilute or
interfere with the absolute right of the Engineer to reject the whole or part of such
materials supplied, which in the judgement of the inspecting authority does not comply
with the conditions of the contract. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be
final, binding and conclusive for all purposes.
The Engineer shall be empowered, at his/her discretion to make or have made under the
supervision, any of the tests specified in the specifications mentioned herein in addition to
such other tests as he/she may consider necessary, at any time up to the completion of the
contract and to such an extent as he/she may think necessary to determine the quality of all
materials used therein. In doing so, he/she shall be at liberty under any reasonable
procedure, he/she may think fit to select, identify, have cut-off and take possession of test
pieces from the material either before, during or after its being worked up into the finished
product.
The Engineer shall also be empowered to call for a duly authenticated series of mechanical
tests to be obtained from the maker for this materials used in the work and to accept the
same in lieu of other tests to the extent he/she deems fit. The Contractor shall supply the
material required for the test pieces and shall also prepare the test pieces necessary.
The test shall be carried out by the Contractor, for which Contractor shall provide all
facilities including supply of labour and plant. Engineer may at his/her discretion direct the

Date Page 134
Contractor to despatch such tests pieces as he/she may require to the National Test House
or elsewhere as he/she may think fit for such testing purposes.
The Engineer may at his/her discretion, check test results obtained at Contractor's work by
independent tests at National Test House.
The Engineer shall at all times be empowered to examine and check the working of the
Contractor's plant before and after using it. Should the Contractor's plant be found, in the
Engineer's opinion, unreliable, he/she is empowered to cancel any tests already carried out
in this contract and have these tests carried out at any National Test House or elsewhere,
as he/she may think fit.
2.5.7 Packing
All projecting plates or bars shall be kept in shape by timber or angle bars spiked or bolted
to them and the ends of chord lengths, end posts etc at their shipping joints shall be
protected and stiffened so as to prevent damage or distortion in transit as the Engineer may
direct.
All threaded ends and machined surfaces are to be efficiently protected against damage in
transit. The parts shall be transported in convenient lengths.
All straight bars and plates except small pieces are to be transported in convenient bundles
temporarily riveted or bolted together or bound with wrought iron or suitable wire as the
Engineer may direct. All bolts, nuts, washers, plates under 300mm square and small
articles generally are to be packed separately for each span in cases each weighing when
full not more than 350 kg or in strong petroleum casks, or barrels as approved by
Engineer. If not entirely filled by the contents the space left shall be closely packed with
wood shaving or other suitable material. HSFG & other temporary Bolts of different sizes
shall be separately packed in bags, each bag having a label indicating its contents. A list
of contents shall be placed on top of each case or cask.
2.5.8 Stacking Materials:
(a) The materials, on receipt at site, shall be carefully unloaded, examined for defects,
checked, sorted and stacked securely on a level bed out of danger from flood and out of
contact with water or ground moisture. All materials shall be available for inspection by
the Engineer.
(b) The materials shall be verified with the marking shown on the marking plan of part list,
which shall be supplied by the manufacturers or the Engineer.
(c) Any materials found damaged during transit or while unloading should be stacked
separately and damaged portions shall be indicated by paint with distinctive colour. All
such materials shall be dealt with under the orders of the Engineer without delay. If any

Date Page 135
component after receipt at site, has in the opinion of the Engineer or Purchaser, been
damaged in transit, such component shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of
the Engineer or Purchaser free of cost.
(d) All such damaged material shall be dealt with as per the orders of the Engineer. Badly
damaged portions may require replacement. Slightly distorted parts may be straightened
by gradual pressure without heat or annealing. Badly distorted or broken parts must be
dealt with as the case demands and as directed by the Engineer.
(e) Where the work has been passed in the manufacturer’s works as strictly
interchangeable, all members bearing the same marks can be stacked together without
reference to any particular span.
(f) The tenderer shall unload the material promptly on delivery; otherwise the tenderer shall
be responsible for demurrage charges.
(g) On receipt of rolled steel at workshop or fabrication yard, they shall be carefully
unloaded and stacked properly to avoid bending, twisting, corrosion etc.
2.5.9 Manufacturing – The whole work shall be representative of the highest class of
workmanship. The greatest accuracy shall be observed in the design, manufacture and
erection of every part of the work to ensure that all parts will fit accurately together on
erection and similar parts shall be strictly inter changeable as explained interchange ability
paragraph. The contractor shall state which of the following alternative methods of
manufacture, he intends to adopt.
(i) The whole of work to be erected complete and pieces marked to place.
(ii) All spans to be made strictly interchangeable as specified below
.
2.5.10 Interchange ability :
(i) Every span is to be temporarily erected complete in Contractor's works. and all parts
as marked to their place, unless the whole of the work is made completely
interchangeable by the use of steel jigs and hard steel bushes controlled by master
gauges, in which case the first span must be completely erected to test the accuracy
of the templates. Further spans or part span assemblies built from parts selected at
random by the Engineer shall be erected from time to time to check the accuracy of
the work as the Engineer may require.
(ii) If the work is considered interchangeable by the Engineer a simplified scheme of

marking will be permitted, i.e. all pieces which are identical shall bear one
distinguishing mark irrespective of the span to which they belong. Should the
interchange ability not to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the whole of

Date Page 136
the spans must be erected complete and all parts marked to their place without
additional charge. The tenderers must state in their tenders whether they intend to
adopt complete interchange ability or not.
(iii) Under special arrangement with the Engineer, it shall be permissible for approved
portions of the work to be despatched before complete erection of the first span,
provided the Contractor satisfies the Engineer that such portions of the work are
strictly interchangeable and will assemble correctly and accurately in the complete
structure.
2.5.11 The tenderer may fabricate the steel work at his workshop or at the site of the work as is
convenient to him. If the fabrication is done in his own workshop, the transportation of the
fabricated materials may be done by Road or Rail transport at his own cost. The tenderer
must inspect the approach roads right from the workshop and should ensure that it would
be possible for him to transport the materials by Road.
2.5.12 If the tenderer propose to fabricate the steel at site, land / site would be given to the
tenderer to make temporary workshop free of cost, if available, but on completion of work,
the site would be restored to normal condition.
2.5.13 HSFG bolts shall be provided as per RDSO drawing.
2.5.14 The responsibility of custody of the materials, in Tenderer’s workshop or site will remain
with tenderer till the completion of work and then handed over to the DFCCIL.
2.5.15 All welding consumables (electrodes, wire, flux etc.) shall be procured only from the
manufacturers approved by RDSO subject to final approval by Engineer.
2.5.16 Removal of Unused Materials etc:
(a) The contractor shall take steps as desired by the Engineer to ensure that rejected work is
not resubmitted for inspection.
(b) On the completion of the work, the tenderer shall remove all his unused and surplus
materials, plant, stagings and refuse, or other materials produced by his operations and
shall leave the site in a clean and tidy condition.
2.5.17 Fabrication
2.5.17.1 General
The fabrication of the girders and its accessories shall be carried out by the contractor in his
factory premises or in a well-established fabrication workshop to be set up by the contractor
at bridge site or any other location as approved by the Engineer. The workshop staff shall
have requisite experience, proven skill and experience in the technique of fabricating large

Date Page 137
components. Accuracy of fabrication shall be realized through controlled high precision jigs,
fixtures and templates, which shall be inspected and passed by Engineer specifically
approved in prior by GM/ROB/ CPM, DFCCIL. The fabrication shall be preceded by
Quality Assurance plans to be submitted by the contractor and every activity shall be
documented in detail. The Quality Assurance Plans shall clearly indicate how individual
processes such as cutting of raw steel, making, drilling, assembly bolting, welding, painting,
handling etc. shall be monitored for quality. The quality parameters for monitoring shall be
identified. These identified quality parameters shall also be specified in these quality plans
.The contractor shall get these quality plans approved from Engineer before start of
fabrication work. The Engineer shall be empowered to check the manufacturing process
from time to time to ensure that the work is executed as per approved quality plans. The
quality records shall be submitted to Engineer for record, after completion of fabrication
work.
The works of fabrication in contractor’s fabrication shop will at all times be open for
inspection by Engineer / agency as nominated by Engineer. Before dispatch of fabricated
steel work from the shops, the same will be inspected in the contractor’s fabrication
workshop by Engineer who will thereafter issue inspection certificate.
Any defect noticed during inspection in the execution of work shall be rectified or replaced
by the contractor at his own cost. The decision of Engineer or any other agency nominated
for inspection as to be rectified or replaced, shall be final and conclusive.
2.5.17.2 Fabrication Drawings
The contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings including drawing office dispatch lists
(DODL’s) on the basis of design drawings supplied by Engineer in such size and in such
details as may be specified by Engineer. The shop drawings shall be submitted to Engineer
in triplicate. No work of fabrication will be started without such approval being obtained.
Contractor has to arrange the proof checking of the working fabrication drawings from the
nominated Institution / Consultant. The cost will be borne by the contractor. Nomination of
the Institution/Consultant for proof checking works will be decided by concerned GM/ROB/
CPM, DFCCIL. Engineer will make all efforts to approve the drawings submitted by the
contractor within reasonable time but no claim from contractor for any delay on this account
shall be entertained by Engineer.
For Engineer’s use and record, the contractor shall supply free of charge, four sets of prints
on string paper and one set of neatly executed tracings of all approved detailed drawings and
fabrication drawings, soon after communication of approval for use at site.
2.5.17.3 Maintenance of records by Fabricators
The records of fabrication shall be maintained in the registers such as Jigs register, HSFG
bolt checking register, Material offering and inspection register, RDSO inspection notes and
compliance register, Welding procedure data register, Radiographic inspection register and

Date Page 138
Statement of material test certificates, etc. The formats are given in Appendix I of IRS B1 –
2001.
2.5.17.4 Tolerance in Fabrication
Basically, composite girders are plate girders. Fabrication tolerance for plate girders shall be
as stipulated in Appendix II of IRS–B1– 2001.
All members of the girder and joints are to be either welded or bolted as shown in the
approved structural drawings. No welding except where approved by the Engineer is to be
carried out at site. All welding and bolting are to be carried out as per relevant IRS
Specifications.
2.5.18 Steel Tape
The Contractor shall maintain a master steel tape of approved make for which he/she has
obtained a certificate of accuracy from any National Test House or Government recognised
institutions competent to do so.
2.5.19 Flattening and Straightening
2.5.19.1 All steel materials, plates, bars and structural shall have straight edges, flat surfaces and be
free from twist. If necessary, they shall be cold straightened or flattened by pressure before
being worked or assembled unless they are required to be of curvilinear form. Pressure
applied for straightening or flattening shall be such as it would not injure the material and
adjacent surfaces or edges shall be in close contact or at uniform distance throughout.
2.5.19.2 Flattening and straightening under hot condition shall not be carried out unless authorized
and approved by the Engineer.
2.5.20 Planing and Shearing
2.5.20.1 Except where otherwise indicated, cutting of all plates and sections shall be affected by
shearing or sawing. All edges shall be clean, reasonably square and true. Wherever possible
the edges shall be cut in a shearing machine, which will take the whole length of the plate
in one cut.
2.5.20.2 Should the inspection find it necessary, the cut edges shall be ground afterwards.
2.5.20.3 Planning or machining of the edges or surface shall be carried out when so specified in the
contract drawings or where specifically ordered by the Engineer. Where machining is
specified, the plates or all sections shall be cut in the first instance to such a size so as to
permit not less than 3mm of metal being removed from each sheared edge or end, in the
case of plates or sections of 12mm or less in thickness and not less than 6mm of metal
being removed in the case of plates and sections exceeding 12mm in thickness.

Date Page 139
2.5.20.4 The butting ends of all booms and struts where spliced shall be faced in an end milling
machine after members have been completely fabricated. In the case of compression
members the face shall be machined so that the faces are at right angle to the axis of the
members and the joint when made, will be in close contact throughout. At the discretion of
the Engineer, a tolerance of 0.4mm may be permitted at isolated places on the butting line.
2.5.21 Flame Cutting
2.5.21.1 Flame cutting by mechanically controlled torch/torches shall be accepted both in the case
of mild steel and high tensile steelwork. Provided the edge as given by the torch is
reasonably clean and straight, plates may be cut to shape and beams and other sections cut
to length with a gas cutting torch, preferably oxyacetylene gas should be used.
2.5.21.2 All flame cut edges shall be ground to obtain reasonably clean square and true edges.
Draglines produced by flame cut should be removed.
2.5.21.3 Unless machining has been specifically provided for, special care is to be taken to ensure
that ends of all plates and members are reasonably in close contact and the faces are at
right angles to the axis of the members and joints, when made, are also reasonably in close
contact.
2.5.21.4 Use of multi-head flame cutting machine having multiple oxy acetylene torches is desirable
for higher productivity and reducing the distortion due to cutting operation. Plasma-arc
cutting method can also be employed. This process offers less heat input causing less
distortion.
2.5.22 Method of fabrication
Considering the length and height of span, jigs and fixtures shall be used to guide and
support drilling of holes and fixtures during entire fabrication work.
Jigs after manufacture shall be checked and approved by Engineer or any other Inspecting
agency as nominated by GM/ROB,/CPM, DFCCIL. Only approved and stamped jigs shall
be used for fabrication.
2.5.22.1 Tack Assembly
Tack assembly is the next step in fabrication which assembles the components to get the
form of component or girder. This activity is to be done carefully so that the final
components/ girders are fabricated to correct geometric shape and the size is within the
tolerance specified.

Date Page 140
For tack assembly, the components shall be kept on a firm hard bed and shall be held in
position using suitable fixtures so that once the measurements are taken to set a component
at proper location, these shall not move till the final tack assembly is done. The entire
work shall be done in area where arrangements for manipulating the member such turning
over, shifting etc can be conveniently done using EOT or other type of cranes and suitable
covered shelter for sufficient protection against the weather is available.
Quality of tack Welds: as per clause 24 of Welded Bridge Code,
(i) Tack welds shall be not less than the throat thickness or leg length of the root run to be
used in the joint.
(ii) Length of the tack weld shall not be less than four times the thickness of the thicker
part or 50mm whichever is the smaller.
(iii) Where tack weld is incorporated in a welded joint, the shape, size and quality shall be
suitable for incorporation in the finished weld and it shall be free from all cracks and
other welding defects. Tack welds, which have poor quality and can crack, shall be
cut out, ground and re-welded.
(iv)Tack welds shall not be made at extreme ends of joints.
(v) Tack welds are equally important in the overall quality and performance of the girder
and these shall also be made by qualified welders.
(vi) After the tack assembly is complete, the girder./ component shall be checked for
dimensional accuracy as per clause 13 of IRS B1. Drilling Jig and tacked members
shall be clamped to a fixture to avoid shifting of jig during handling and drilling.
Tack welding may be permitted only at ends or locations, which will eventually be cut and
removed. No active part of the component shall be tack welded as this would initiate crack
formation in service.
2.5.23 Template
The contractor shall supply and provide templates at his own cost. No separate payment
shall be made for this and accepted rates shall be deemed to include this aspect. The
templates throughout the work shall be of steel of similar category. The templates shall be
used for marking of cutting materials and as well as for profile machining for girders.
Templates shall be used for marking of drilling holes in steel structure. In case where
actual materials from a bridge have been used as templates for drilling similar pieces the
Engineer will decide whether these are fit to be used as part of finished structure.

Date Page 141
2.5.24 Template Shop
Fully covered template shop consisting of uninterrupted steel or concrete floor as approved
having true and correct level covering adequate area shall be provided by the contractor.
2.5.25 Drilling and Sub punching
All holes shall be drilled but the Contractor may, if he/she so prefers sub-punch them to a
diameter 6mm less than that of finished holes, e.g. a punched hole which is to be drilled
out to 25mm in diameter shall not exceed 19mm in diameter at the die end. When the bolt
holes are to be sub-punched, they shall be marked with a centre punch and made with a
nipple punch or preferably, shall be punched in a machine in which the position of the hole
is automatically regulated. The punching shall be so accurate that when the work has been
put together before drilling, a gauge 1.5mm less in diameter than the size of the punched
holes can be passed easily through all the holes.
Holes for turned bolts, should be 1mm under drilled in shop and should be reamed at site
to suit the diameter of turned bolt.
The steel bushes shall be case hardened by an approved process and checked for diameter
after the heat-treatment. The bores of bushes shall initially have a tolerance of -0mm,
0.1mm. The tolerance shall be checked from time to time and when the bores exceed a
tolerance of, -0mm, +0.4mm, the bushes shall be rejected. For this purpose, go and no-go
gauges are to be used. Tolerances for checking jigs from master plates shall be +0mm-
0.13mm.
The work shall be taken apart after drilling and all burrs left by the drill and the sharp
edges of all the bolt holes completely removed.
Drifting to enlarge unfaired holes is prohibited. The holes required to be enlarged shall be
reamed provided the Engineer permits such reaming after satisfying himself about the
extent of inaccuracy and the effect of reaming on the soundness of the structure. The
Engineer reserves the right to reject all steel work if the holes are not properly matched.
On completion of drilling of holes in each component and before shifting the jig, it shall
be ensured that all holes are drilled to their correct diameter to reconfirm quality of work.
2.5.26 Temporary Bolts, Nuts & Washers:
Refer Cl.28.1 to CI.28.8 of IR Fabrication specification Serial No. IRS-B1-2001 issued by

RDSO.

Date Page 142
2.5.27 Alterations in the Work:
The Contractor shall not in any case or in any circumstances have authority to make any
alterations in, modifications of, substitution for, addition to, or omission of work or any
method or system of construction, unless an alteration order in writing directing such
alteration, modification, substitution, addition, omission or change shall have been given
by the DFCCIL prior to the commencement of the work or part of work nor shall the
Contractor be entitled to any payment for or in respect of any such alteration,
modification, substitution, addition, omission or change may have been actually made and
executed and no course of conduct shall be taken to be a waiver of the obligation and
conditions hereby imposed.
All altered, modified, substituted, additional and changed work, labour and materials and
all omitted work shall be valued by the Purchaser on the basis of the rates specified in the
schedule.
2.5.28 Welding
Welded construction work shall be carried out generally in accordance with the provisions
of Indian Railway Standard Welded Bridge Code and subject to further specifications
given in the following paragraphs.
All welds should be done by submerged-arc welding process either fully automatic or
semi-automatic. Carbon di oxide welding or manual metal-arc welding may be done only
for welds of very short runs or of minor importance or where access of the locations of
weld do not permit automatic or semi-automatic welding.
Except for special types of edge preparation, such as single and double 'U' single and
double 'J' the fusion edges of all the plates which are to be joined by welding may be
prepared by using mechanically controlled automatic flame cutting equipment and then
ground to a smooth finish. Special edge preparation should be made by machining or
gouging.
Site welding should not be undertaken except in special circumstances with the approval
of the Chief Bridge Engineer/ CPM/DFCCIL/Agency/Officers nominated by CPM-
DFCCIL. Site welding should be confined to connections having low stresses, secondary
members, bracings etc.
Manual metal arc welding may be done taking adequate precautions as per IS: 9595 and
under strict supervision.

Date Page 143
2.5.29 Welding Procedure
The welding procedure shall be such as to avoid distortion and minimize residual
shrinkage stresses. Properly designed jigs should be used for assembly. The welding
techniques and sequences, quality, size of electrodes, voltage and current required shall be
as prescribed by manufacturers of the material and welding equipment. The contractor
should submit full details of welding procedure in proforma given at Appendix-V of IRS
B1-2001.
2.5.30 Sequence of welding and welding pass
For fabrication of welded composite girders, channel shear connectors shall be welded on
top flange plate prior to assembly of I-section. This facilitates correction of any distortion
of flange plate developed during the welding of channel shear connectors.
In making a typical I-section four fillet welds are to be made. The welding sequence to be
followed is indicated by number 1 to 4 as shown in the Fig. 3 of IR Fabrication
specification Serial No. IRS-B1-2001 issued by RDSO.
Whenever a square butt weld in a 10 or 12mm thick plate is required to be made, the
sequence to be adopted is shown in Fig. 3 of IR Fabrication specification Serial No. IRS-
B1-2001 issued by RDSO.
2.5.31 Procedure Trials for welding and cutting
Where required by the Engineer, welding and flame cutting trials as per following shall be
carried out and completed before fabrication on representative samples of materials to be
used in the work, as follows.
(i) The samples of material shall be selected and marked by the ENGINEER when the
materials for the work are inspected at the mills.
(ii) The trials of flame cutting shall be carried out in material representative of all
thicknesses to be used in the work.
(i) The welding & flame cutting trials shall be commensurate to the satisfaction of
Engineer and the procedures to be adopted in the fabrication of work which shall
include:
(a) Welding procedure in accordance with IRS Welded Bridge Code supplemented by IS
813 and IS 1980.
(b)Heat control techniques required to ensure that the flame cut surface of steel are
suitable for inclusion in welds.

Date Page 144
(ii) The trials shall include specimen weld details from the actual construction which shall
be welded in a manner simulating the most unfavourable instances of fit-up and
preparation. After welding the specimens shall be held as long as possible at room
temperature but in any case not less than 72 hours, and then shall be sectioned and
examined for cracking. Six representative samples of each weld joint similar to joint
used in fabrication of all components shall be prepared by qualified and certified
welding operators.
(v) Procedure trials: Testing shall be to relevant IS code or if approved to BS 709. The
following groups of tests shall be carried out with the type of welds.
(a) Butt welds: Transverse tensile test, transverse & longitudinal bend test with the root
of weld in tension and compression respectively, charpy V-notch impact test.
(b) Fillet welds: Fillet weld fracture test.
(c) Track welds: Inspection for cracking.
(d) All welds: Macro examination.
Additional tests may also be carried out as per requirement and instruction of Engineer,
the cost of which shall be borne by the contractor.
Shop welded joints will be radio graphically examined for 100 %.
Following tests are normally performed on welds.
(a) Non Destructive Tests (NDT):

- Visual inspection/profile gauge for dimensional check of size and throat thickness
of weld.
- Etching test for penetration of joint.
- Magnetic particle or Ultra Sonic Pulse Velocity (USPV)
- Gamma Radiography & x-ray ( only for butt welds)
- Dye penetration of all welds joints.
(b) Destructive Test :

-Tensile test
- Bend test
- Impact test
- Load test.
Once samples representing the weld joint used in fabrication of all components are
tested and test results are found satisfactory, then approval shall be taken from the
Engineer for the welding of built up components by approved welding operators.
Welding Procedure Qualification Records (WPQR’S) shall include joint details,

Date Page 145
welding consumables (i.e. electrode/wire & flux combination), weld parameters (i.e.
welding current, wire feed speed), welding position, welding equipment carriage speed
(for SAW process), are Length, arc voltage etc.
2.5.32 Preparation of Faces
Preparation of joint face: Except for special types of edge preparation such as single or
double ‘U’ & ‘J’ joints, the fusion edges of all plates which are to be joined by welding
shall be prepared by using mechanically controlled automatic flame cutting equipment
with the cutting allowance.
It shall be ensured by Non-destructive tests that the fusion face and adjacent surface are
free from cracks, notches or other irregularities that are likely to cause defects during
service or interfere with deposition of the weld.
Fusion faces and the surrounding surface up to 50 mm shall be free from mill scale,
moisture, oil, paint dirt or any other substance which may affect the quality of the weld,
and same shall be removed by grinding or flame cleaning/grit blasting.
Details of joint, fusion faces, root face and gap shall be as per details given in fabrication
drawing or as stipulated in IS:9595.
2.5.33 Welding Operation
Parts to be welded shall be assembled such that the joints to be welded are accessible and
visible to the operator. Assembly jig and fixture shall be used for accuracy.
Manipulators should preferably be used to execute the sequence of welding without

disturbance, in the most suitable position. Fixture shall maintain the alignment with
minimum restraint in order to reduce the possibility of locked up stresses.
Run in and run out plate shall be provided for fabrication of built up members or truss to
ensure that weld will start on run in plate and weld will stop on run out plate and thus
avoid crater defects on the components.
The size and length of weld shall not be less than those specified in the drawing nor shall
they be in excess of the requirement without prior approval of the Inspecting Officer. The
location of weld shall not be changed without prior approval o the Engineer.
During design and detailing of component lengths, care is to be taken to avoid butt weld in
built up members of truss. Therefore it is essential to use only nearest size and length or
rolled sections that have been procured to scheduled sizes and lengths by proper planning.
No butt weld shall be carried out without approval of Engineer.

Date Page 146
Fabrication of components subject to dynamic loading in the structure need careful

inspection during fabrication by qualified, experienced and certified Engineer from
contractor’s side and final approval by Inspecting Officer. This inspection shall be carried
out as stipulated in Indian Railway Welded Bridge Code before, during and after welding.
2.5.34 Precautions during welding
The Contractor shall submit list of weld joints of different combined thickness for
approval of welding procedure for all members.
The welding of built up component shall be carried out only by approved welding
operators and in accordance with Welding Procedure Qualification Records. WPQR’s
shall be prepared in advance and approved by the Engineer. Proper welding sequence shall
be followed to avoid distortion and minimize residual shrinkage stress, and surface
defects, within acceptable tolerance limits.
To ensure sound and defect free welding of built up members, record of welding adopted
as per approved qualifying procedure shall be maintained in Performa prescribed in
guidelines for welded fabrication issued by TPIA (Third Party Inspecting Agency)
specifically approved in prior by GM/ROB/ CPM, DFCCIL OR authorised representative
of DFCCIL.
Any change during welding for fabrication of built up member, such as welding sequence,
welding process, positioning, wire and flux combination joint details, increase or decrease
in combined thickness of joint by 5 mm etc. shall be carried out only after representative
samples test and procedure qualification, is accepted. In no case deviation from WPQR’s
without approval of Engineer shall be adopted.
2.5.35 Additional Precautions during Welding
Following precautions shall further be observed during fabrication.
(i) All equipment’s shall be provided with calibrated gauges to observe limits of variation
for parameters prescribed in WPQR’S for welding current, arc voltage, speed of travel
of equipment etc.
(ii) Covered shed for environmental control (particularly against dust, moisture and water)
shall be provided to avoid entrapment of hydrogen which is likely to cause crack
initiation in weld or under bed of weld (i.e. Heat Affected Zone HAZ). Also baking of
flux use for submerged arc welding in oven for an hour at 200 degree C shall be carried
out o ensure that no moisture is contained in flux during welding.
(iii) All tack welds shall be carried out by qualified and approved welder only. As tack weld
will become part of the final weld, it shall be free from all cracks and other welding
defects.

Date Page 147
(iv) If multiple runs are used for fabrication of built up member, inter run cleaning shall be
carried out and subsequent weld bed made only after approval of inspecting officer or
his authorized representative. This is to check free defects in the weld. Also visible
defects such as cracks, cavities, if any, shall be removed by grinding. It shall be ensure
during welding that craters are avoided.
(v) Stray arcing of components, which cause local hard spots or cracking of parent metal,
shall be avoided.
(vi) Flux of approved quality will be permitted for use.
(vii)The Auto melt grade wire spools of wires for Submerged Arc Welding and Carbon
Dioxide (CO2) consumables of only the approved quality will be permitted.
(viii) Pre Heat Treatment will be given to the consumables to remove the moisture if any.
(ix) No violation of welding procedure will be permitted on any account.
2.5.36 Technical Organisation/tools, equipments and plants
(A) Contractor should have qualified and trained manpower suitable to do the work in terms
of technical specifications and contract conditions.
(B) Contractor should have suitable and adequate plants, machinery and equipment’s
required to execute the work like:
(i) Cutting machine

(ii) Radial drilling machine.
(iii) Edge milling machine, end milling machines.
(iv) Plate/structural steel straightening machine.
(v) Pneumatic grinding machine, drilling machines, chipping machines and wrenches
etc.
(vi) Sand blasting equipment and metalizing equipment’s.
(vii) Welding machines.
(a). SAW
(b). MIG/MAG
(viii) Welding transformers3+
(ix) Cranes of adequate capacity.
(x) Suitable Jigs and fixtures.
(xi) To test the raw material and girders to conform to relevant specification, testing
facilities, for the following should be available either in house or through
outsourcing.
(a). Elcometer for measurement of thickness of paints.
(b). Steel measuring taps duly calibrated.

Date Page 148
(c). Ultrasonic flow detection testing facilities for checking internal flaws.
(xii) Suitable Welding manipulator.
(xiii) Macro etching/DP or MP testing facilities.
(xiv) Tongue tester for measuring current and voltage.
(xv) Gauges for checking weld size throat thickness and edge preparation etc..
(xvi) All equipment’s must meet the requirements of corresponding IS, IRS or other
international specifications.
(C) Manpower: Adequate No. of trained qualified welders shall be available with the
contractor. The welder must be trained in accordance with the provision of IS: 817. They
must be trained either from recognized welding institutes or by in house training, where
proper training facilities exist. The welder must be tested as per requirements of IS: 7310
and proper records maintained.
List of equipment’s mentioned above is only indicated and not exhaustive. The firm shall
be required to deploy all other machineries, tools & plants etc. required for successful
completion of the work of fabrication, assembly and launching of the girders.
2.5.37 General: Bolting & Welding
Qualified trained, and experienced supervision is essential at all times during fabrication,
and for maintenance of records.
After welding of welded components, they shall be finished finally by grinding or

matching with the help of a profile template. All the butting ends of components shall be
faced in milling machine after members haven completely fabricated. In the case of
compression members, the face shall be machined so that the faces are of proper angle as
shown in drawing and the joint when made will be in close contact throughout within a
gap tolerance of less than 0.15 mm. The Engineer may permit a tolerance of (-) 0.4 mm at
isolated points in butting line.
2.5.38 PAINTING
Specification for metalizing and painting will be done as per Clause no 39.2.1 of Indian
Railway Specification for Fabrication and Erection of Steel Girder Bridges and Locomotive
Turn-Tables (Serial No B1-2001).
2.5.38.1 Surface Preparation
This is the most important factor in ensuring good performance of the steel girder. The
surface should be clean, dry and free from contaminants and it should be rough enough to
ensure adhesion of the paint film. However it should not be so rough that the film cannot
cover the surface peaks.

Date Page 149
The cleaning of the surface shall be done initially with the use of emery paper, wire
brushes, scrapers etc. for spot cleaning to remove rust, scale etc. Subsequently, sand
blasting of the surface shall be done to remove rust, mill scale along with some of the base
metal. This will be achieved by high velocity impact of abrasive material against the
surface in accordance with the provisions of IS: 6586, which will also create a base for
good adhesion. The abrasive material once used for cleaning heavily contaminated surface
should not be reused even though re-screened. Washed salt free angular silica sand of
mesh size 12 to 30 with a minimum of 40% retained on a 20 mesh screen shall be used for
blasting. The material specifications and other requirements shall be as provided in Indian
Railways Bridge Manual, 1998.
All site bolts, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped in boiled linseed
oil. All machined surfaces are to be well coated with a mixture of white lead conforming
to IS: 34 and Mutton tallow conforming to IS: 887 as per specifications before despatch to
site. Nothing extra shall be payable to contractor on this account.
All the components in the floor and deck system in open web girders and all members in
plate & composite girders shall be metalized as IRS specifications.
2.5.38.2 Metal Spraying
The metal spraying shall be carried out as soon as possible after surface preparation but in
any case within such period that the surface is still completely clean, dry and without
visible oxidation. If deterioration in the surface to be coated is observed by comparison
with a freshly prepared metal surface of similar quality which has undergone the same
preparation, the preparation treatment should be repeated on the surface to be coated
The wire method shall be used for the purpose of metallising the diameter of the wire
being 3mm or 5mm. Specified thickness of coating shall be applied in multiple layers and
in no case less than 2 passes of the metal spraying unit shall be made over every part of the
surface. At least one layer of the coating must be applied within 4 hours of blasting and the
surface must be completely coated to the specified thickness within 8 hours of blasting.
2.5.38.2.1 Purity of Aluminium
The chemical composition of aluminium to be sprayed shall be 99.5% aluminium

conforming to IS: 2590.
2.5.38.2.2 Appearance of the Coating
The surface of the sprayed coating shall be of uniform texture and free from lumps, coarse
areas and loosely adherent particles.

Date Page 150
2.5.38.2.3 Thickness of the Coating
The nominal thickness of the coating shall be 150 μ(microns).The minimum local thickness,
determined in accordance with procedure given in clause 2.5.38.3 below, shall be not less
than 110 μ(microns).
2.5.38.3 Shop Painting
Any oil, grease or other contamination should be removed by thorough washing with a
suitable thinner until no visible traces exist and the surfaces should be allowed to dry
thoroughly before application of paint. The coatings may be applied by brush or spray. If
sprayed, pressure type spray guns must be used. One coat of wash primer to IS:5666 shall be
applied first. After 4 to 6 hours of the application of the wash primer, one coat of Zinc
chrome primer to IS:104 with the additional proviso that zinc chrome to be used in the
manufacture of primer shall conform to type 2 of IS:51 shall be applied. After hard drying of
zinc chrome primer, one coat of Aluminium paint to IS:2339 (brushing or spraying as
required) shall be applied.
2.5.38.4 Site Painting
After the steel work is erected at site a second cover coat of Aluminium paint to IS: 2339
(brushing or spraying as required) shall be applied after touching up the primer and the
cover coat given in the shop if damaged in transit
2.5.38.5 Method for the Determination of Local Thickness
2.5.38.5.1 Equipment
Any magnetic or electro-magnetic thickness meter that will measure local thickness of a
known standard with an accuracy of ± 10 percent.
2.5.38.5.2 Calibration of Instrument
Calibrate and check the meter on one of the following standards (as appropriate):
(i) (Applicable to magnetic and elecro-maganetic meters other than the pull-off type) A
soft brass shim , free from burrs, in contact with the grit-blasted surface of the base
metal prior to its being sprayed. The thickness of the shim shall be measured by micro
meter and shall be approximately the same as the thickness of the coating.
(ii) A sprayed metal coating of uniform known thickness approximately the same as the
thickness of the sprayed coating to be tested, applied to a base of similar composition
and thickness to the article being sprayed, grit-blasted in accordance with Clause
2.5.38.1.

Date Page 151
2.5.38.5.3 Procedure
For each measurement of local thickness, make an appropriate number of determinations,

according to the type of instrument used.
With instrument measuring the average thickness over an area of not less than 0.645 sq
cm, the local thickness shall be the result of the one reading.
With instruments having one or more pointed or rounded probes, the local thickness shall
be the mean of three readings within a circle of 0.645 cm2 area.
With meters having two such probes, each reading shall be the average of two
determinations with the probes reversed position.
2.5.38.6 Method of Test For Adhesion
Using a straight edge and hardened steel scriber which has been ground to a sharp 30
degree point, scribe two parallel lines at a distance apart equal to approximately 10 times
the average coating thickness. In scribing the two lines, apply enough pressure on each
occasion to cut through the coating to the base metal in a single stroke.
2.5.38.7 Inspection
2.5.38.7.1 Determination of Local Thickness
The minimum local thickness shall be determined by the method described above.
2.5.38.7.2 Adhesion
The sprayed metal coating shall be subjected to an adhesion test using the method
described above. If any part of the coating between the lines breaks away from the base
metal, it shall be deemed to have failed the test Articles, which have been rejected shall
have the defective sections blasted clean of all sprayed metal prior to re-spraying. Where
the rejection has been solely due to too thin a coating, sprayed metal of the same quality
may be added provided that the surface has been kept dry and is free from visible
contamination.
2.5.39 Paints: Source & Quality
Paint and other accessories including those for metallising work will be supplied by the
contractor. Paints manufactured by the following firms (or more) may be used subject to
their being in the approved list of RDSO and final approval by the Engineer.
M/s. Jenson Nicholson. Paints

M/s. British / Barger paints.

Date Page 152
M/s. Shalimar Paints

M/s. I.C.I. paints
M/s. Nerolac. Paints
The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, the date of manufacture of paint as certified
by the manufacturers with the necessary container marking and test certificate for paint
conforming to relevant IS code. In addition to this, he shall also submit the necessary
vouchers in respect of paint purchased by him.
The Engineer reserves the right to get the paint tested at contractor’s expenses as
considered necessary by the Engineer. It the test results do not conform to relevant IS
specifications fully, then the lost of paint shall be rejected and got removed from the
contractor(s) storage. If the paint has already been applied it shall be removed.
In addition to above, the following tests are required to be carried out in the field.
-Weight per litre
- Consistency test
- Scratch test.
- Flexibility and adhesive test.
The Engineer reserves the right to reject the lot of paint even on the basis of field results.
2.5.40 Painting - General Instructions
Painting shall not be commenced till the surface preparation has been approved by the
Engineer or his representative.
Sealed containers of paint of approved brand shall be used. The paint drums must be
rolled, turned upside down and shaken before opening. The paint must be stirred well
before use. Over stirring which results in invisible air bubbles etc, shall be avoided.
Where brush painting is accepted, the paint must be applied by means of flat brushes not
more than 75 mm in width having soft flexible bristles conforming to IS: 384.
Round and oval brushes of approved quality conforming IS: 487 may also be used as per
the instructions of the Engineer or his representative or inspecting officer.
All new brushes should be soaked in raw linseed oil conforming to IS: 77 for at least 24
hours before use.
The date of painting shall be marked with paint on the member.

Date Page 153
2.5.41 Care during Painting
Paint should be mixed in small quantities sufficient to be consumed within one hour in the
case of red lead paint.
The applied coat of paint shall be uniform, and free from brush marks, sack marks,
blemishes, scratching, non-uniform thickness, holes, log marks, fuel staining, cracking,
scaling, and other defects.
Paint shall be applied only on dry and clean surface free from moisture or dust (including
scrapping dust).
Paint should be used within the prescribed life from the date of manufacture.
2.5.41.1 Each coat of paint shall be left dry till it sufficiently hardens before the subsequent coat is
applied. Each coat of paint shall be inspected by the Engineer and certified as satisfactory
before applying subsequent coat.
2.5.42 ASSEMBLEY & ERECTION
2.5.42.1 General
The contractor shall provide at his own cost all tools, machinery, equipment and erection
material, including all temporary works and shall assemble all components in every
respect as stipulated in the contract and in accordance with approved drawings and
specifications.
Before starting the work the contractor shall seek the Engineer’s approval as to the method
he proposes to follow and the type and suitability of equipment he proposes to use for
assembly of girder components and launching of girder. The approval of the Engineer
shall however not in any way relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy
and safety of methods and/or equipments he proposes to use for carrying our work in full
accordance with drawings and specifications.
All temporary work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed for the loads,
which it will be called upon to support. Adequate allowance and provision of a lateral
forces and wind loads shall be made according to local conditions and ensure that support
shall not settle during erection.
When chains are used for lashing care must be taken to protect the edges of members from
twisting and distortion, damage to paint and similar effects.
Temporary bracing shall be provided to take care of stresses caused by erection equipment
or other incidental loads during erection.

Date Page 154
The method use for lifting and slinging flexible members shall be brought to the notice of
the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval.
The contractor shall observe sufficient accuracy in the assembly of every part of the work
to ensure that all parts fit accurately together.
2.5.42.2 Procedure for Assembly in Workshop & Site
The contractor is required to undertake test assembly of the girders in his fabrication
workshop to prove accuracy of templates and Jigs. This assembly can be done in
horizontal position. In case the fabrication workshop is set up by the contractor at bridge
site itself the test assembly may be done at assembly platform and after testing of accuracy
of jigs, fixtures & templates and the same assembly can be launched after bolting.
The test assembly shall be certified by Inspecting agency of the Engineer.
Launching of girders: once sufficient number of girders are assembled and the sub
structure has been certified to be ready, launching of girders shall be taken up. The scheme
for launching shall be submitted by contractor and approved beforehand by RITES LTD /
Railway / or Agency approved by DFCCIL and any statutory clearances such as CRS
sanction must be obtained. The decision of DFCCIL shall be final and binding to the
contractor. Launching can be done by any of the various methods such as using single
crane, using multiple cranes, end launching or using derricks. The payment of same shall
be borne by Contractor.
2.5.43 Care during Assembly at Workshop
2.5.43.1 Drilling & Drifting of Holes
Drilling of joints shall be avoided as far as possible and when necessary should be done
with great care and under expert supervision. Hammers not exceeding 1kg (2 lb) in weight
may be used with turned barrel drifts and a number of holes drifted simultaneously, the
effect of drifting shall be checked by observation of adjacent unfilled hole.
Any apparent error in shop work which prevents the assembling and fitting of the mating
parts by the proper use of drifts shall be investigated immediately.
As all work is rigidly inspected at the fabrication shop before dispatch, these difficulties
should not arise and the cause could possibly be due to the use of incorrect components. It
is usually important that parts be correctly handed. Should errors still persist, the matter
shall be immediately reported to the Engineer who will decide what action is to be taken.

Date Page 155
2.5.43.2 Inspection, Testing & Marking
All components shall be offered for inspection prior to painting. All approved components
shall be stamped defect free, painted as per specifications prior to dispatch to bridge site.
On final finishing of each component, it shall be marked distinctly with paint with
shipping mark for guidance, during assembly of component.
2.5.43.3 Stud shear connectors shall be subjected to the following tests:
The appearance test and test to check the fixing of shear studs shall be as per
approved/RDSO drawings.
2.5.44 Transports from Workshop & Stacking at Site
All items fabricated in the workshop shall be marked and packaged with accompanying
package list. The items after fabrication shall be transported by contractor to site by
Rail/Road in a manner as to cause no damage to the components. Contractor shall be liable
for all losses and damages in transit for the materials consigned by him till materials are
erected and work completed and taken over by the Engineer. Insurance against loss or
damage in transit, if any, shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
After identification & correct marking, all components of each girder shall be dismantled
& similar components shall be grouped together & labelled; bolts and plates of each size
shall be packed separately, after approval by the Engineer.
The packages shall be of such size by length & weight that they are safely transportable by
Rail/Road. The components shall be provided with necessary packing to avoid damage to
painting & members in transit.
Dimensions for transport shall be as per standard schedules.
2.5.45 Assembly at site
2.5.45.1 Holes
After drilling holes in temporary tack assembled components, the components shall be
taken apart after match marking and all burrs left by drill and sharp edges of all holes shall
be removed by spot grinding to ensure full contact when assembled.
Assembly fixture shall be used to build components for turned bolt connection. These
connections will help realize correct position of member and matching of coaxial holes in
opposite members besides true alignment and level.

Date Page 156
After assembly, all blank holes shall be checked with plug gauge of diameter 0.8mm less
than hole diameter, to check fair matching of holes before riveting / bolting.
2.5.45.2 Drifts
Drifts as per IRS specifications may be used for drawing light members into position, but
their use on heavy members should be restricted to securing them in their correct position.
In no case shall drifting be allowed to such an extent that holes are distorted. Drifting to
enlarge unfaired holes is prohibited.
2.5.45.3 Making of joints
Cleaning of permanent contact surfaces:- Surfaces which will have permanent contact
shall be removed of paints and mill scale down to bare metal, clean and dried and
immediately a coating of zinc chrome red oxide priming to IS:2074 shall be applied. Care
shall be taken to see that all burrs are removed and no surface defects exist before the parts
are assembled.
2.5.45.3.1 Reaming
No reaming shall be undertaken without the written authority of Engineer or his authorized
representative except for under drilled holes meant for turned bolts. The contractor shall
supply special bolts to fill reamed hole, where reaming is approved. Record of all such
variations shall be kept. However, these provisions should not apply for under drilled
holes meant for turned bolts. Copies of all correspondence pertaining to the recourse of
reaming and the use of oversize bolts shall be sent by the contractor for information to
Engineer.
2.5.45.3.2 Service Bolts & Drifts
Joints shall normally be made by filling not less than 50% of the holes with service bolts
and barrel drifts in the ratio of four to one. The service bolts are to be fully tightened up as
soon as the joint is assembled.
2.5.45.3.3 In cases where the joints have to withstand stresses arising from special methods of
erection, provision is to be made to take the whole stress that will or may occur.
Cylindrical drifts and turned bolts shall be used to withstand such stresses and no reliance
is to be placed on service bolts for this purpose. Up to a maximum of 40 percent of the
holes of each member of the joint are to be filled with drifts and balance of strength
required is to be attained with turned bolts. The position and number of the drifts and bolts
will be decided by Engineer.

Date Page 157
2.5.45.4 Painting of Joints
All surfaces, which are in permanent contact, shall be thoroughly cleaned down to the bare
metal, to remove mill scale, grease etc. They shall be painted immediately before assembly
with one coat of suitable primer and raw linseed oil freshly ground and the surface
prepared for painting as per painting specification at Clause 2.5.38.
2.5.46 Assembly and Launching
The launching of girders shall be done as per approved drawings. For this purpose, the
contractor shall submit in triplicate, detailed launching schemes of all the girders including
design calculations, safety procedures and method statement with such plans, sketches and
other details as may be necessary to determine the suitability and adequacy of the schemes
proposed. The scheme will be checked by RITES Ltd/DFCCIL/Railway/or Agency
nominated by the DFCCIL. The Payment for the launching scheme of girders shall be born
by contractor. The agency shall provide/arrange all works and full support to obtain CRS
sanction. Contractor will be responsible to co-ordinate with Divisional Railway/WR HQ
officials to gate CRS sanction. The methods adopted shall not, under any circumstances,
cause the stresses in various members of girder spans to exceed permissible and safe limits
at any stage of launching. One copy duly approved by the Engineer shall be returned to the
contractor.
For the Engineer’s use and record, the contractor shall supply free of charge, four sets of
prints of approved detailed drawings of assembly and launching schemes on strong paper
with back of linen for use at site and one set of neatly executed tracings.
The launching system & procedure shown on enclosed drawings are purely indicative of
the method proposed for launching for which the permanent members of the girders are
designed. The contractor shall provide full structural details of the temporary members and
their connections to the girder, along with necessary design calculations not only justifying
member’s sizes but also for the entire launching system adopted. Contractor will be
responsible for getting approval of launching scheme submitted by him from the Engineer.
In order to ensure perfect fit of the temporary components, holes may be carefully drilled
for the connecting members in between the girders in situ and T & F High tension grip
bolts used.
The launching system shall be test tried if directed by the Engineer and no separate
payment for this shall be made.
Nothing extra will be paid to the contractor for adopting any scheme for launching. All
temporary members shall be removed after launching and may be taken back by the
contractor. Erection gussets provided for connecting the members may be cut and edges
ground as required by the Engineer.

Date Page 158
2.5.47 Field Bolts, Nuts and Service Accessories
2.5.47.1 The work is to include supply of all units, bolts, nuts, washers etc. required to complete
erection at site with an allowance for wastage etc. 12.5% of the net number of field bolts
and washers required subject to a minimum number of five in each item.
2.5.47.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying site rivets/bolts of approved length. The
length of such bolts shall be verified by snapping a few bolts of each length in the
presence of the Engineer.
2.5.47.3 Black hexagonal bolts (Service bolts) with nuts and ordinary platter’s washers and drifts
for use in the erection of the work shall also be supplied at 60% (45% bolts and 15%
drifts) of the number of field bolts per span in each size (this includes wastage).
2.5.48 Temporary Strengthening
The launching arrangement may include fabrication of launching nose or restraining

girders, sway restraining devices such as sway ropes, restraining cables etc. the supply and
fixing of members for temporary strengthening of girder members to take care of erection
stresses and strains and other relevant components for satisfactory and successful
completion of the defined scope of work. Erection stresses must be kept within safe and
permissible limits at every stage of erection.
The contractor has to make arrangements at his own cost for the steel for temporary
arrangements including sway restraining devices for launching and temporary
strengthening of girder, as may be required for the launching operations. The rate
quoted should take into account these factors as nothing extra shall be paid.
2.5.49 Inspection and Rectification
During erection of girders, the contractor shall provide all facilities and permit the
Engineer to inspect the field assembly, site bolting and erection of spans.
After inspection by the Engineer, the contractor shall identify cause of any defect,
imperfection and/or fault noticed during such inspection and initiate corrective action as
per the direction of the Engineer. All defects, imperfections of faults for which the
contractor is liable under the contract, shall be made good by the contractor to Engineer’
satisfaction and the cost of identifying and rectifying such defects, imperfection or faults
shall be borne by the contractor.
A neat casting bearing the name of the contractor, the place and date of manufacture, the
contact number and the standard of loading to be specified by the Engineer shall be bolted
conspicuously on all girders. The drawing of the name plate shall be approved by the
Engineer.

Date Page 159
2.5.50 Erection & Equipment:
2.5.50.1 The Contractor shall provide at his/her own cost all tools, machinery, equipment and
erection material necessary for the expeditious execution of the work and shall erect the
structural steel and iron work, in every respect as covered by the contract and in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
2.5.50.2 If any labour, material, plant staging haulage and storage facilities are to be provided by
the Engineer, details of such items and the conditions under which these are to be supplied
shall be clearly specified in the contract agreements. In the absence of any such provisions
in the agreement, the Contractor shall make his/her own arrangement for such items.
2.5.50.3 Before starting the work, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer fully as to the method
he/she proposes to follow and the amount and character of equipment he/she proposes to
use, which shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the
Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the
safety of his/her method or equipment or from carrying the work in full accordance with
the drawings and specifications.
2.5.50.4 All temporary work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed for the loads,
which it will be called upon to support. Adequate allowance and provision of a lateral
forces and wind loads shall be made according to local conditions and ensure that support
shall not settle during erection.
2.5.50.5 Careful and periodical inspection of plants shall be made by the Contractor to ensure that
all tackle, ropes, chains and other important lifting gear and machinery are in good order
and fit for service and well up to the capacity for which they are required.
2.5.50.6 When chains are used for lashing, care must be taken to protect the edges of members to
avoid the marking and distortion otherwise caused.
2.5.50.7 Span erected upon staging shall be supported upon suitable blocks, which shall ensure that
the girders shall be at the correct elevation and alignment when completed. If other
methods of erection be adopted where staging in situ is not employed, special means shall
be used to ensure this.
2.5.50.8 The method used for lifting and slinging flexible members shall be brought to the notice of
the Engineer and shall be subject to his/her approval.
2.5.50.9 Temporary bracing shall be provided to take care of stresses from erection equipment or
other loads carried during erection.

Date Page 160
2.5.51 ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
2.5.51.1 Land:
DFCCIL will at its discretion, and, if available, arrange land free for use for contractor’s
office at sites, field workshop, stores, assembly and erection yard. Land required by the
contractor for labour or staff colony or other purpose will have to be arranged by him at
his own cost.
2.5.52.2 Further Drawing and Instructions:
(i) GM/ROB,/CPM, DFCCIL shall have full power to make and issue further drawings or
instructions or direction from time to time as may appear necessary and proper to the
contractor for efficient construction, completion and maintenance of the works . The
contractor shall be bound by the same as fully as be if they had been mentioned or
referred to in the contract, and the contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment in
respect of any work or materials shown or directed to be done supplied by such further
drawings or instructions required for completion of unless the GM/ROB,/CPM, DFCCIL
have given an extra order for the same in writing.
(ii) The tenderer’s rate should provide for cutting M. S. Plates for making out M. S. Flats
from plates, in case M. S. Flats are not available, No extra payment for such cutting and
grinding that may be necessary for converting M. S. Plates to Flats will be admissible.
(iii) If the works are required to be done in Railway Yards and Tracks are to be crossed, the
tenderer shall inspect the site and make himself thoroughly acquainted with site
condition and quote rate considering these aspects.
(iv) The work shall have to be done in such a manner that the normal working of the Railway
within the railway yard does not get disturbed. No material/temporary structures should
be kept adjacent to the running track which may infringe rail traffic. The contractor shall
take necessary precaution to prevent/cause damage to the Railway property & staff
during the execution of the work.
2.5.52.3 Commencement of the Erection Work at site:
The contractor shall commence the erection work when and as soon as, but not until, he
receives instructions from Engineer to do so. On such order being given, possession of
site/authority shall be given to the contractor of such portion or portions of the site as the
Engineer may determine.
2.5.52.4 Contractor to Study Drawing & Specification etc. and His Liability:
The contractor shall be responsible for close scrutiny of the approved drawings supplied by
the DFCCIL, For any discrepancies, error or omission in the drawings or other particulars

Date Page 161
indicated therein, the contractor shall approach the DFCCIL immediately for rectification
of indicated therein, the contractor shall approach the DFCCIL immediately for
rectification of such discrepancies, errors and omission. If any dimension/figure/features
etc. on approved drawings or plans differ from those drawings or plans issued to the
contractors at the time of calling the tender, the dimensions as figured upon the approved
drawings or plans shall be taken as correct.
2.5.52.5 Contractor to Submit His Time Table:
The contractor shall submit a monthly progress of work done during the month by the 4 th
day of the following month. He will also give the programme of coming month by 25th of
each month. The programme will be subject to alteration at the discretion of the DFCCIL
officials.
2.5.52.6 Any Doubted Points to be referred to the GM/ROB, /CPM, DFCCIL:
Should there be any doubt or obscurity as to anything to be done or not to be done by the
contractor or as to these instructions or as to any matter or thing, the contractor must set
forth such doubt or obscurity in writing and submit the same to GM/ROB,/CPM, DFCCIL.
Only such reply as the said GM/ROB,/CPM, DFCCIL may be in writing given shall be
taken as the authoritative interpretation of the point in doubt or obscurity.
2.5.52.7 Contractor’(s) Liability:
Any fitting, accessory or apparatus which may not have been mentioned in this
specification or the drawings, but which are usual or necessary in the execution of such
work, are to be provided by the Contractor without extra payment. The whole work must
be completed in all details, whether mentioned in this specification or not, with the
exception of such work as has been specified in the schedule of items to be separately
provided for in the Contract.
Notwithstanding the specifications and conditions stated in the contract, the contractor
shall keep the Engineer/ Employer authority fully indemnified and free from all liabilities
and risks consequential to any lapse on his part in respect of material quality, standard of
workmanship, accuracy of fabrication and the like. He shall provide all labour and
material required for execution of the work as per all standards and specifications.
2.5.52.8 DFCCIL desires that successful contractor should establish (at his own cost) the fabrication
workshop near the site only for close monitoring of all the quality aspects of this contract
work. Contractor’s request for establishing workshop/using workshop proposed/located
away from the bridge site shall require prior approval.
2.5.52.9 Contractor shall establish fully equipped laboratory for all the tests required on
materials/processes/products as per provisions of the contract, Specifications and the
direction/approval of the Engineer. Costs of these are deemed to be included in the quoted

Date Page 162
rates. Prior approval of the engineer shall be obtained for non installation of such testing
equipments which can not be installed in normal course due to any reason. However,
engineer’s decision (for installation and non-installation) in this regard shall be final
binding and conclusive.
2.5.52.10 Site Facilities by the Contractor:
Contractor shall provide office / site facilities at the bridge site / other locations for
ensuring smooth and efficient communication and work execution. Cost of these facilities
deemed to be included in the quoted rates and nothing extra shall be paid for this item.
(i) Contractor shall supply round the clock electricity in site offices of DFCCIL located at
the bridge during the entire contract work. Contractor shall also maintain the electric
fittings/wirings/plants of both the offices in the good condition.
(ii) To provide proper communication the contractor shall (at his own cost) establish inter
office communication system between DFCCIL office, fabrication workshops and
contractor’s offices at site. Adequate number of intercom / telephone/ mobile sets or are
similar suitable equipments as decided/approved by Engineer fully communicable shall
be established in each of the above fabrication shops & at site of bridge work. The entire
expenditure incidental to running and maintenance of above shall be borne by the
contractor within quoted rates.
(iii) Contractor shall (at his own cost) depute / nominate safety officers(s) for supervising
safety aspects of all works/process including enabling arrangements for execution and
inspection of the work. Safety systems/arrangements should be made for each activity of
fabrication/erection and its inspection and same should be certified by nominated safety
officer. Special care/arrangements are required to be made for supervising the
erection/launching process of such high girders and concreting in road deck:
arrangements should facilitate satisfactory and fearless inspection of each activity of
launching / erection.
2.5.52.11 Declaration of designed fabrication/assembly yard as a part of site:
DFCCIL may issue necessary declaration on specific request of the contractor subject in
the condition that the workshop area are earmarked exclusively for fabrication of girder
components for this bridge with separate entry/exit arrangements. This is with further
stipulation that such an arrangement should be acceptable to excise department by way of
a no objection certificate. Necessary follow up with Excise Department will be solely the
contractor’s responsibility. In the event of excise department not agreeing to such an
arrangement , the contractor shall not have any claims whatsoever, and shall pay excise
tax and other extant taxes as per extant rules within quoted rates and nothing extra would
be payable to them on this account.

Date Page 163
2.5.53 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
2.5.53.1 Measurement
For the purpose of payment, quoted rates apply to the weights of structural steel work
calculated from final working drawings based on theoretical weights given in the
producer’s hand books / IRUSS (W &M),2010-Volume-I and using minimum square
overall dimensions, no deductions being made for skew cuts, holes or notches. Each gusset
shall be measured as equivalent to the dimension of the smallest enclosing rectangle. The
rates items quoted by the tenderer shall include all wastage. The wastage of steel in the
form of skew cuts etc. shall be the property of the contractor.
Payment shall be made on the weight to be calculated in the accordance with the nominal
weight of the sections as specified on the drawings. No deduction for holes and no
addition for rivets/bolts/welds etc. shall be made.
The drawing office dispatch lists (D.O.D.Ls) when prepared according to procedure shall
be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer for approval.
The payment for steel work as per item in the schedule of items shall be released in stages
of accepted item rates for quantities executed, as mentioned in the tender schedule. The
payment after receipt of material in fabrication shop shall be made on the basis of
measurements contained in the supplier’s vouchers, if required, these measurements shall
be further verified by the representative of Engineer in charge by measuring
dimensions/sizes of the sections and multiplying the same by standard weight. Sampling
for actual weight of the sections shall also be done by him as per procedure and frequency
prescribed by Engineer.
The payment for complete metallizing / painting of all components of girders including all
accessories, painting of contact surface etc including all labour and material, tools and
plants, machinery required for all operations of work is included in the accepted rates of
item in the schedule. Nothing extra shall be paid.
In the event of a dispute arising as to a portion of steel work, weightment shall be made in
the presence of the engineer.
No separate payment shall be made for the field bolts, nuts and service accessories for
temporary works.
The cost of temporary erection and testing at the Contractor’s workshop, marking,
packing and delivery at the site of work is to be included in the price quoted on the tender.
Rate include fabrication of all the types of battens, bracings, ties, stiffeners, packing,
diaphragms, shop bolts / welding, T&F bolts, drifts, shop welds, templates, jigs, fixtures,

Date Page 164
back up supports, accessories, transporting various components from fabrication shop to

site including loading, unloading, lift and taxes complete including assembly of girders .
Rate of girder item includes assembling of temporary support for side slewing, raising of
girders to the bed block level, providing sliding arrangements and slewing the girder in
position and lowering of girder on bearings.
Grouting of holes with epoxy based compounds in the bed block for fixing of HD
bolts/anchor pins of bed plates as directed by Engineer are included in the bearing rates.
Rate of girder item includes the Assembling, bolting with contractor’s own material,
erection, launching, lowering, aligning and placing at exact position as per approved
scheme of steel plate girder for required span in proper level and alignment, grip bolts and
with all necessary works like making holes.
The rate of girder item will inclusive of supplying /erection and dismantling of staging,
scaffolding and other temporary arrangement required for assembling, erection, launching
and lowering of the girder.
The rate shall be also inclusive of cold straightening of deformed bent girder parts before
the assembling including contractor’s all labour, materials T & P, testing etc. complete.
2.5.54 BEARING
POT cum PTFE bearings/Elastomeric bearings as per approved drawing shall be utilized
under the girder as per approve GAD/ Design and its special conditions and specification.
2.5.55 DEFLECTION TEST:
The deflection test shall be carried out as per additional specifications. Load testing will be
paid separately as per relevant item.

Date Page 165
PART – III (A)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION-I

Date Page 166
PART – III (A)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-I

3.1 STUD SHEAR CONNECTOR
3.1.1 Material:-
The stud shear connector and ceramic ferrules shall conform to type SD1/UF as per BS
EN ISO 13918-2008. The diameter of ceramic ferrule D 7 as per Figure 13/Table 18 of BS
EN ISO 13918 shall be 26. Mechanical properties of stud shear connectors shall be as per
ISO 6892/BS EN ISO 13918–2008. Shape of tip of stud shear connectors may be chosen
by manufacturer. The stud tip shall be supplied with flux in the form of press fitted
aluminium ball or Aluminium spray coating.
3.1.2 Welding:-
The welding of stud shear connectors shall be done by “Drawn arc stud welding with
ceramic ferrule” Technique. The stud and the surface to which studs are welded shall be
free from scale, moisture, rust and other foreign material. The stud base shall not be
painted, galvanized or cadmium plated prior to welding. Welding shall not be carried out
when temperature is below 10 degrees Celsius or surface is wet or during periods of strong
winds unless the work and the welder are adequately protected. The welds shall be
visually free from cracks and shall be capable of developing at least the nominal ultimate
strength of studs. The procedural trial for welding the stud shall be carried out when
specified by the Engineer
3.1.3 Testing:-
(a) Appearance test

1. The weld to a stud shear connector should form a complete collar around the shank
and free from cracks, excessive splashes of weld material, free from injurious laps
fins, seams, twist, bends or other injurious defects.
2. Weld material should have a `Steel Blue’ appearance.
(b) Test to check the fixing of shear studs
All studs need to be checked by a ring test.
1. Ring Test : Involves striking the side of the head of the stud with a 2 kg
hammer. A Ringing tone achieved after striking indicates good fusion whereas dull
tone indicates a lack of fusion (BS 5400 – 6).

Date Page 167
2. Bend Test : Test requires the head of a stud to be displaced laterally by

approximate 25% of its height using a 6 kg hammer.
- The weld should then be checked for signs of cracking or lack of fusion
- Stud should not be bent back as this is likely to damage the weld.
- The testing rate should be 1 in 50 (BG 5400 – 6).
3.1.4 Measurements:- The work shall be enumerated. It's unit is "each".
3.1.5 Rates: - The rate shall include the cost of material, labour, equipments, tools and plants,
etc. complete required for all operations described above.
3.2 Load Testing of Bridge
3.2.1 General
These guidelines cover testing of superstructures, excluding arches for evaluation of their
flexural capacity. Testing for shear capacity is not considered. This test is not intended to
assess ultimate load carrying capacity of bridge superstructure.
3.2.2 Test Procedures – Method of Loading
The method of loading should be such as to either simulate the specific class of vehicle or
induce in the member(s) the calculated forces, viz., the bending moments at critical
sections.
The test loads may be in the form of static loads on wheel/ track imprints of the specific
class of vehicle.
3.2.3 Static Loads
3.2.4 Simulation of the specific IRC vehicle
The load effect on a span can be produced by building up pre weighed units on loading
imprints spaced as per codal provisions. The imprints are built either with brick masonry
or concrete and rolled steel sections placed across pairs of imprints, so that platforms
could be built on a group of four imprints for placement of pre weighed units. The area of
each platform depends on the magnitude of the load and unit weight of individual unit. A
pre weighed unit normally comprises sand or soil filled gunny bags, concrete cubes, bricks
etc., which can be carried manually. Otherwise, large concrete blocks, containers of water
or (stone) ballast or steel ingots could be used if mechanical handling facilities are
available to load and unload them from test vehicles. Fig. below shows a scheme for
building up 2 lanes of IRC Class A loading on the carriageway of a bridge. The loads are
placed eccentrically on the carriageway of a bridge in such a way that maximum bending
moment is produced in any longitudinal.

Date Page 168
1800 4300 3600 3600

1100 3200 1200 3400 3000 3000 3000
350 350 1550 1550 300 300 300 300
1500
FOOTPATH
1400
250
150 200
380
200
500
400
C.L. OF WHEEL
1800
1800
34.8T 18.5T 18.5T
3300
3000
3000
8.2T
C.L. OF PLATFORM
7500
3500
1700
3000
3000
3300
400 1800
34.8T 18.5T 18.5T

8.2T C.L. OF WHEEL
NEAR CURB
1500
FOOTPATH
C.L. OF BEARING
PLACEMENT OF 2-LANES OF IRC CLASS-A LOADING AND FOOT6PATH LOADING ON CARRIAGEWAY
3.2.5 Other types of static loads
Any configuration which produces the design forces (load effects) in the member(s) could
be adopted, for instance uniformly distributed load. Any of the appropriate methods of
load distribution between the girders can be adopted in arriving at the test load and its
configuration on the span. But the method of distribution of loads should be the same as
adopted in the approved design. However, where the approved designs are not available
the owner of the bridge should specify the appropriate method of load distribution. In the
case of multiple girders, it is possible that the design moments are simultaneously induced
in more than one girder. It may well happen that the magnitude of the test load on the span
is greater than that of the design IRC vehicle but the forces induced in any member should
be always equal to the specified design force of the load test.
3.2.6 Loading and Unloading Sequence
3.2.6.1 The test load shall be applied in stages so that timely action, such as stopping the test, can
be taken if any untoward distress is observed at any stage. In most cases, the design live
load effect would be equal to or less than that due to dead load. The dead load is already
acting the test load it some specified multiple of live load more than one. The suggested
stages of test load placement are 30 percent, 50 percent, 70 percent, 80 percent, 90 percent
and 100 percent. Unloading should also be in the same stages. The next incremental

Date Page 169
loading should be added only after the deflections under the previous load have stabilized
and all the stipulated observations are completed.
3.2.6.2 The selection of first stage of loading depends on the general condition of a bridge and the
load carrying capacity theoretically assessed. It is advisable to monitor the appearance and
widening of flexural cracks at every stage of loading, so as to decide about placement of
next incremental load. It is expected that the load deflection characteristics at every
increment are linear and any abnormal behaviour is reflected in the load v/s deflection
data. It the deflection observed exceeds the limit prescribed in the code the further loading
shall be stopped. Subsequent actions shall be taken in consultation with appropriate
authorities. Occasionally, crackling sounds at the locations of expansion joints are heard
when the rotation capacity is exceeded, particularly, in balanced cantilever bridges.
Spalling of delaminated concrete is also possible during load tests.
3.2.7 Preparatory Work
- All visual defects should be measured, mapped and plotted.

- It should be ensured that bearings are functional.
- Expansion gaps, joints should be cleared of all debris.
- It will be useful to give the surface of the superstructure a coat of white wash, so that
appearance of cracks becomes immediately perceptible.
3.2.8 Precautions
- Staging should be stable and safe.

- Staging for instruments and that for observers should be quite independent.
- Staging for instruments should be rigid.
- Due to temperature change, the superstructure may tend to hog or sag; therefore, it
should be ensured that when this occurs, contact with the spindle of the dial gauge is not
lost. Spindle extensions should be fixed to take care of this.
During the 24 hour retention period of built up load, care shall be taken to cover the pre
weighed units with tarpaulin, so that rain or strong winds do not affect the stacking on the
platforms.
3.2.9 Observations
The following should be observe, measured and recorded at regular intervals of one hour
over a period of 24 hours:
- Deflections at critical sections (for instance for simply supported spans at mid-span
and at quarter-span. In box girders, it will be useful to record deflections under each of
the external ribs).
- Appearance of cracks and their development, length, width, location, orientation
correlated with load.
- Deformation of bearings.

Date Page 170
- Ambient temperature and related temperature in the body of the structure.
3.2.10 Measurement of deflections

Deflections could be measured with the following devices:
(a) Dial gauges
(b) Scale and cursor
(c) Deflectometers
(d) Precision level
(e) Water level
The methods (a) to (c) could be used wherever dry bed is available under the span.
Otherwise, methods (d) and (e) can be used by using a reference station at the nearby
abutment. When girder bridges are subjected to load tests, it is essential to clear debris in
the expansion gaps and lubricate steel bearings to permit free translation and rotational
movements of the spans.
The deflection measurement can be done by suspension wire method at the required
locations using dial gauges (Fig.). In this method trestles or posts 1.5m tall would be
embedded in firm ground and dial gauges of least count 0.01 mm are clamped to them.
The spindles of the dial gauges are connected by a pair of adapters in plumb line with a GI
or Invar wire. The wire is made taut by attaching a weight at the end. The method could be
partly modified by using a (steel) scale and cursor instead of dial gauge, when the order of
anticipated deflection exceeds 100mm. Fig. 2 also shown the scale and cursor method for
measurement of large defections.
3.2.11 Procedure for Temperature Correction

A set of thermocouples are to be fixed at different locations of deflection measurement for
monitoring temperature of the bridge deck. In absence of thermocouples, hand held
instruments could be used wherein a probe could be inserted in a preformed hole in
concrete surface, for recording temperature. As a last resort, thermometers could also be
Date Page 171
suspended from trestles used for deflection measurement to measure the shade
temperature. The number of thermocouples/thermometers/probes used could be about half
the total number of locations for deflection measurement.
The superstructure tends to hog or sag due to variation in ambient temperature and it is
necessary to apply correction to the deflection data during static load test. This is so since
the duration of loading or unloading operation in static load test could be for 4-5 hours.
For this purpose, the platforms on masonry imprints meant for building up static loads
should be placed in respective positions for observing thermal response of the bridge deck
prior to load test. The deflection values and ambient temperature data are generally
collected from dawn to dusk for two or three consecutive days at 1 hour intervals. The
temperature vs. deflection data are collected on these days and a curve drawn for each
station (dial gauge location), which is taken as basic curve for temperature correction.
Usually the temperature – deflection characteristic would be a best fit obtained from a
cluster of readings. The deflection reading at any location and temperature during load
test, is super-imposed on the basic curve. The difference between the two values give the
true deflection for the location under reference, corresponding to the same temperature.
Fig. below shows typical characteristic of thermal response, super imposed on load vs.
deflection data during a proof test.

Date Page 172
Precaution
The bridge deck temperature gets affected due to variation in humidity and strong winds
on the day. Also, the data gathered on sunny and cloudy days would be different, although
the ambient temperature is same.
Therefore, to avoid inconsistencies in the data, it is preferable to choose two identical

spans, one for load test and the other for temperature – deflection data and should be
monitored simultaneously. This approach reduces the total period of load testing by at
least two days.

Date Page 173
3.2.12 Percentage Recovery of Deflection
The percentage recovery could be calculated for values of deflection. The percentage
recovery is calculated at 24 hours after removal of load.
The calculation is done as follows after effecting temperature and/or rotation correction to
deflection data:
Initial value (on dial gauge) … R1

Final value after placement of test load … R2
[Thereafter, measurements are to be taken at regular intervals of one hour].
Value at 24 hours after placement of test load ... R3
Value immediately after removal of test load … R4
[Thereafter, measurement are to be taken at regular intervals of one hour]
Value at 24 hours after removal of test load R5
Total deflection … R3-R1
Total recovery 24 hrs after removal of test load .... R3-R5
Percentage of recovery of deflection … (R3-R5) x 100
24 hrs after removal of test load (R3-R1)
3.2.13 Acceptance Criteria
3.2.13.1 The criterion of acceptance is based on recovery of deflection after removal of test load. It
is necessary to specify the quantum of applied load, the duration of the load on the span
and the percentage recovery of deflection on removal of load.
3.2.13.2 For bridges designed for IRC Standard loadings, criteria for load testing of steel, PSC and
RCC superstructures are given in table below :
Table Acceptance Criteria

Sl. Type of Bridges Live Load Duration of Minimum percentage
No. Intensity for Retention of recovery of Deflection at 24
Testing Test Load hrs after removal of Test
(Hrs.) Load
1 Reinforced concrete * 24 75
2 Prestressed concrete * 24 85
3 Steel * 24 85
4 Composite * 24 75
(* 1.0L plus corresponding impact as per IRC Codes)
A general acceptance criterion for the behavior of a structure under test load is that it shall not show
“visible evidence of failure” which include appearance of cracks of width more than 0.3mm,
spalling or deflections which are excessive and incompatible with safety requirements.

Date Page 174
3.4 NON-DESTRUCTIVE INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILE
3.4.1 SCOPE
This specifications covers the methods on non-destructive testing as per IS: 14893 of all
types of concrete piles covered in IS 2911 (Part I/Sections 1, 2, 3 and 4).
3.4.2 SITE INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR THE TESTS
The following information is generally required to carry out integrity tests:

(a) Location of site
(b) Pile types including size, material and reinforcement
(c) Layout of piles
(d) Details of pile installation (including construction and driving sequence and rest
periods)
(e) Number of piles to be tested;
(f) Subsurface profile/driving d e t a i l s of the piles
(More if variations are noted)
(g) Depth of water table and soil investigation report, if any
(h) Density of concrete; Strength of concrete
(i) Abnormal conditions noted while driving/boring or concreting of piles. The normal
daily report produced by the piling site should contain this information. In addition,
any other information concerning planning and conducting the tests including
relevant past experiences covering similar test(s) in the area, and
(j) Details of test piles(s), if any.
3.4.3 TYPES OF TESTS
Various methods are available for checking the integrity of concrete piles after
installation. In the most widely used method, impulses or vibrations are applied to the pile
and measurements made of timings and attenuation of reflected signals.
The commonly used sonic methods, vibration methods, sonic logging techniques, etc, have
been tried within the last 15-20 years in different parts of the world. However, the
methods based on One Dimensional Stress Wave approach known a s Sonic Integrity
Testing, a Low Strain Integrity testing or Sonic Echo Testing have been used successfully in
various parts of the world. The method is simple and quick enabling dozens of piles to be
examined in a single working day without much interference in site activities.
The work carried out on sonic integrity testing of pile in the country has shown its
efficiency; in assessing the structural quality of piles and therefore it is appropriate to
frame in this code the salient features of this method.

Date Page 175
3.4.3.1 The Low Strain Integrity T e s t i n g
This is a system of assessing the integrity of piles by the use of low stress wave imparted
to the pile shaft and is also known as Sonic Integrity or Sonic Echo Test..A small
metal/hard rubber hammer is used to produce a light tap on top of the pile. The shock
travelling down the length of the pile is reflected back from the toe of the pile and recorded
through a suitable transducer/accelerometer (also held on top of the pile close to the point
of impact) in a computer disk or diskette for subsequent analysis..
The primary shock wave which travels down the length of the shaft is reflected from the toe
by the change in density between the concrete and sub-strata. However, if the pile has any
imperfections o r discontinuities within its length these will set up secondary reflections
which will be added to the return signal. (See Fig.).
By a careful analysis of the captured signal and knowledge of the conditions of the
ground, age of concrete, etc, a picture of the locations of such problems can be built up. The
reflected stress wave can be monitored using either processing t e c h n i q u e ; the observed
signals are amplified and converted into digital display as velocity versus length or
frequency versus mobility records, providing information o n structural integrity of piles.
The stress wave velocity and approximate pile lengths are provided as input for the
integrity testing. The stress wave velocity is dependent o n the Young's modulus and
mass density of pile concrete. This value generally lies between 3000-4000 meter per
second depending o n the grade of concrete used (M15-M25).
3.4.3.2 Normally more than one recording of signals is done until repeatability of signals is
achieved. If necessary, averaging of signals is also done to achieve more informative signals.
In a suspected pile the test should be repeated at more than one location on top of the pile.
3.4.3.3 The tests shall be conducted on piles whose length is correctly recorded or on test piles
where available, to determine the value of stress wave velocity and characteristic or
reference signal for comparing the signals for testing subsequent piles.
3.4.3.4 The method of testing involves high skill and use of computerized equipment. Therefore,
the tests should be performed and interpreted b y trained and experienced personnel.

Date Page 176
3.4.4 Data and Reporting
(i) The assessment of structural integrity is based on two equally important aspects:
a) Quality of signals, and
b) Accurate analysis and interpretation of signal.
(ii) Piles requiring remedial measures s h o u l d be so marked immediately on

completion of the field integrity testing, and rectification, measures selected.
(iii) The final report should include signals of each integrity test and reflect on the
structural condition of piles.

Date Page 177
3.4.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE TESTS
(i) Piles shall be trimmed to cut off level or sound concrete level before the test with
all laitance removed. No pile cap blindage work should be undertaken prior to the
test.
(ii) The area surrounding the pile should be free from standing water and kept
dewatered during the tests.
(iii) The pile head should be accessible.
(iv) Testing should be free o f work likely to cause disturbance.
(v) The cast-in-situ piles should not be tested normally before 14 days of casting.
(vi) The test piles, if available at site, can be used to determine t h e pulse velocity and
characteristic or reference signal generated. Where no test pile is available
information can be obtained from cast piles whose length is accurately recorded.
3.4.6 LIMITATIONS OF NDT METHODS

(i) Non-Destructive Testing of piles does not provide the load carrying capacity of
piles.
(ii) It does not provide information regarding verticality or displacement in position of

piles.
(iii) Minor deficiencies like local loss of cover, small intrusions or type of conditions
of materials at the base of piles are undetectable. Integrity testing may not
identify all imperfections, but it can be useful tool in identifying major defects
within the effective lengths. The test may identify minor impedance variations that
may not affect the bearing capacity of piles. In such cases, the engineer should
use judgment as to the acceptability of these piles considering other factors such
as load redistribution to adjacent pile, load transfer to the soil above the defect,
applied safety factors and structural load requirements.
(iv) Based on the latest information available, the limitations relating to the depths
up to which the integrity tests can be carried on piles depends on the
surrounding strata and damping within the concrete.
(v) The present experience of Non-Destructive Testing of piles is up to a diameter of

1500 mm.
(vi) Soil stiffness or founding on rock of similar density as the pile will attenuate the
signals such that there will be little or no toe reflection.

Date Page 178
(vii) The low strain integrity method is applicable to cast – in – situ concrete bored and
driven piles. Conclusive results are rarely obtained in case of segmented precast
reinforced concrete driven piles or precast piles in pre bored holes.
3.4.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENTS: It will be measured in number.
3.4.8 PAYMENTS: The rate includes cost of all materials, labour, equipments & operations
required to do this test.

Date Page 179
PART – III (B)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-II

Date Page 180
PART – III (B)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-II
4.1. Special condition for contractor’s Vehicle plying near Railway track.
4.1.1 The contractor shall not allow any road vehicle belonging to him or his suppliers etc. to
ply in railway land next to the running line. If for execution of certain works viz.
earthwork for parallel railway line and supply of ballast for new or existing rail line
gauge conversation etc. road vehicle are necessary to be used in railway land next to the
Railway line, the contractor shall apply to the engineer-in-charge for permission giving
the type and number of individual vehicles, names and license particulars of the drive,
location, duration and timings for such work / movement. The engineer in charge or his
authorized representative will personally counsel, examine and certify, the road vehicle
drivers, contractor’s flagmen and supervisor and will give written permission giving
names of road vehicles drivers, contractor’s flagmen and supervisor to be deployed on
the work, location, period and timing of the work. This permission will be subject to the
following obligatory conditions:
4.1.2 Road vehicles can ply along the track after suitable cordoning of track with minimum
distance of 6 m from the centre of the nearest track. For plying of road vehicles during
nig hours, adequate measures to be communicated in writing along with a site sketch to
the contractor / contractor’s representative and controlling engineers / supervisors in
charge of the work including officers and the in charge of the section.
4.1.3 Nominated vehicles and drivers will be utilized for the work in the presence of at least
one flagman and one supervisor certified for suck work.
4.1.4 The vehicles shall ply 6m clear of track. Any movement / work at less than 6 m and up
to minimum 3.5 m clear track centre shall be done only in the presence of railway
employee authorized by the engineer-in-charge. No part of the road vehicle will be
allowed at less than 3.5 m from track centre. Cost of such railway employee shall be
born by the railway.
4.1.5 The contractor shall remain fully responsible for ensuring safety and in case of any
accident, shall bear cost of all damages to this equipment and men and also damages to
Railway and its passengers.
4.1.6 Engineer-in-charge may impose other condition necessary for a particular work or site.
4.1.7 The staff engaged by the contractor at site should be competent enough for the job. They
should possess the certificate of competency certificate, necessary training will be

Date Page 181
arranged by the contractor at his cost by an expert to enable officer nominated by

sectional Sr. DEN/ DEN/CPM DFCCIL in-charge to accord permission for the job.
Without a suitable competency certificate, the contractor’s supervisors shall not be
allowed to carry out concreting and earthwork.
4.2. Issue of Identity Cards by Contractors:

4.2.1. The contractor is bound to issue identity card to each and every person employed by him
and deployed for execution of contract work as per the prescribed format provided in the
tender at his cost. Failure on part of the contractor to issue of identity cards to their
employees will be treated as breach of contract conditions.
It is mandatory on part of every employee, deployed by the contractor to keep in his
possession the identity card, issued by the contractor throughout the execution of the work.
Failure to possess such identity card will be treated as unauthorized presence in the railway
premises and such person shall be liable for prosecution as per law. It is mandatory for the
contractor to submit the list of the employee issued with the identity cards and deployed for
the particular contract, to Railway/DFCCIL Engineer at site before commencement of the
work and also for any changes made during the execution of the work.
No claims whatsoever arising out of implementation of special conditions pertaining to issue
of identity cards shall be admissible.
4.3. Site Lab

4.3.1. The contractor shall be set up a site lab with minimum equipment listed below;
1. IS sieve sets for sieve analysis.
2. 15 X 15 X15 cms cubes minimum 15 nos.
3. Cubes for cement test of 7.09 X 7.09 X cm
4. Vicate apparatus.
5. Cube testing machine of minimum 100 T capacities.
6. Measuring cylinder.
In case they have not brought the aforesaid articles or have not set up the lab, DFCCIL shall
set up the same and actual cost plus 10% shall be recovered from the bills.
4.4. Disaster management
4.4.1. “All the available vehicles and equipment of the contractor can be drafted by the
DFC/Railway Administration in case of accidents/natural calamities involving human lives.
The payment for such drafting shall be made according to the rates as shall be fixed by the
Engineer. However, if the contractor is not satisfied with the decision of the Engineer in this
respect he may appeal to the CPM-DFCCIL/Chief Engineer within 30 Days of getting the
decision of the Engineer, supported by analysis of the rates claimed. The CPM-
DFCCIL/Chief Engineer’s decision after hearing both the parties in the matter would be
final and binding on the contractor and the Railway.”

Date Page 182
(1) Non- employment of labourers below the age of 15:- the contractor shall not employ
children below the age of 15 as labourers directly or through petty contractors or sub-
contractors for the execution of work.
(2) (2) Medical certificate of fitness for Labour:- It is agreed that the contractor shall not
employ a person above 15 and below 19 years of age for the purpose of execution of
work under this contract unless a medical certificate of fitness in the prescribed form
(proforma at annexure II) granted to him by a certifying surgeon certifying that he is
fit to work as an adult is obtained and kept in the custody of the contractor or a
person nominated by him, in this behalf and he person carries with him, while at
work, a token giving a reference to such certificate. It is further agreed that the
responsibility for having the adolescent examined medically at the time of
appointment or periodically till he attains the age of 19 years shall devolve on the
contractor and all the expenses to be incurred on this account shall be borne by him,
and no fee shall be changed from the adolescent or his parent for such medical
examination.
(3) Period of validity of Medical fitness certificate: - A certificate of fitness granted or

renewed for the above said purposes shall be valid only for a period of one year at a
time. The certifying surgeon shall revoke a certificate granted or renewal if in his
opinion the holder of it is, no longer for work in the capacity stated therein. Where a
certifying surgeon refuses to grant or renew a certificate or revoke a certificate, he
shall, if so required by the person concerned state his reasons in writing for doing so.
(4) Medical Re-examination of Labourer:- Where any official appointed in this behalf by
the Ministry of Labour is of the opinion that any person employed in connection with
the execution of any work under this contract in the age group 16-19 years is without
a certificate of fitness or is having a certificate of fitness but no longer fit to work in
the capacity stated in the certificate, he may serve on the contractor or the person
nominated by him in this regard, a notice requiring that such person shall be
examined by a certifying surgeon and such person shall not, if the concerned official
so directs, be employed or permitted to do any work under this contract unless he has
been medically examined and certified that he has been granted a certificate of fitness
or a fresh, as the case may be.
4.5. Submission of Photographs and Videos:

4.5.1. The contractor shall arrange to submit three sets of minimum 200 Nos. of photographs of
size 5”x7” showing various operations and stages of different activities of the project. The
photograph shall be taken for every important activity during execution of work as decided
by the Engineer for display and record purpose. In addition, the contractor will submit 3 sets
of 2 laminated photographs of size 20”x30”. If the photograph as listed above are not
submitted then recovery of Rs.75,000/- shall be made from the contractor’s bill.
4.5.2. The successful tenderer will be required to prepare video film (on CDROM) recording of
entire construction and edit the same with proper commentary. The same shall cover the
Date Page 183
whole work in duration of about 2 hours. This film shall pictorially represent the entire work
of Linking, Various Execution Stages, CRS Inspection and final completion stages. Two
copies of video films (On CDROM) shall be handed over to be Railway along with
necessary details, instructions, literature etc. The rate includes cost of such filming. Nothing
shall be paid on this account. If the contractor fails to submit the Video Film on CDROM
then Rs. 1,00,000/- shall be recovered from bill.
5. Special Conditions for working of Road Cranes:
5.1. No machine shall be selected to do any lifting on a specific job until its size and
characteristics are considered against the weights, dimensions and lift radii of the heaviest
and largest loads.
5.2. The contractor shall ensure that a valid Certificate of Fitness is available before use of Road
Cranes.
5.3. Contractor can utilise the services of any competent person as defined in Factories Act, 1948
and approve by Chief Inspector of Factories.
5.4. The laminated photocopies of fitness certificate issued by competent person, the operator’s
photo, manufacturer’s load chart and competency certificate shall always be either kept in
the operator cabin or pasted on the visible surface of the lifting appliances.
5.5. All lifting appliances including all parts and gears thereof, whether fixed or movable shall be
thoroughly tested and examined by a competent person once at least in every six months or
after it has undergone any alterations or repairs liable to affect its strength or stability.
5.6. In addition, it is also advised that for all the works being executed by the Road Cranes, the
above stipulations should be checked. These instructions should be strictly observed.

Date Page 184
PART – III (C)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-III

Date Page 185
PART – III (C)
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-III
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR

SCHEDULE “A”
Item Sr No. 1
Excavation for foundation in sand, gravel, clay soft soils and murrum etc.
including shoring, strutting dewatering as necessary and disposing of the
excavated stuff as directed. (A) Depth up to 3.0 M and lead up to 100m for 10
Cum
MORTH 304.1. Scope
Excavation for structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction
of foundations for bridges, culverts, retaining walls, headwalls, cutoff walls, pipe culverts
and other similar structures, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications
and the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer, work
shall include construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs their subsequent removal;
all necessary sheeting, shoring, bracing, and pumping; the removal of all logs, stumps, grubs
and other matter and obstructions, necessary for placing the foundations; trimming bottoms
of excavations; backfilling and clearing up the site the disposal of all surplus material.
MORTH 304.2 Classification of Excavation

All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the Engineer in the
following manner:
(a) Soil
This shall comprise topsoil, turf, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat, black cotton soil, soft
shale or loose moorum, a mixture of these and similar material which yields 10 the ordinary
application of pick, spade and/or shovel, rake or other ordinary digging implement.
Removal of gravel or any other nodular material having dimension in any one direction not
exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata shall be deemed to be covered under this
category.

Date Page 186
Authority for classification : The classification of excavation shall be decided by the

Engineer and his decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor. Merely the use of
explosives in excavation will not be considered as a reason for higher classification unless
blasting is clearly necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
MORTH 304.3. Construction Operations
MORTH 304.3.1. Setting out : After the site has been cleared according to Clause 201, the
limits of excavation shall be set out true to lines, curves and slopes to Clause 301.3.1.
MORTH 304.3.2. Excavation : Excavation shall be taken to the width of die lowest step of
the footing and the sides shall be left plumb where the nature of soil allows it. Where the
nature of soil or the depth of the trench and season of the year do not permit vertical
sides, the Contractor at his own expense shall put up necessary shoring, strutting and
planking or cut slopes to a safer angle or both with due regard to the safety of personnel and
works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall be as shown on the drawings,
unless the type of material encountered is such as to require changes, in which case the
depth shall be as ordered by the Engineer. Propping shall be undertaken when any
foundation or stressed zone from an adjoining structure is within a line of 1 vertical to 2
horizontal from the bottom of the excavation.
Where blasting is to be resorted to, the same shall be carried out in accordance with Clause
302 and all precautions indicated therein observed. Where blasting is likely to endanger
adjoining foundations or other structures, necessary precautions such as controlled blasting,
providing rubber mat cover to prevent flying of debris etc. shall be taken to prevent any
damage.
MORTH 304.3.3. Dewatering and protection : Normally, open foundations shall be laid
dry. Where water is met with in excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or
other reasons, the Contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing, pumping,
constructing diversion channels, drainage channels, bunds, depression of water level by
well-point system, cofferdams and other necessary works to keep the foundation trenches
dry when so required and to protect the green concrete/masonry against damage by
erosion or sudden rising of water level. The methods to be adopted in this regard and
other details thereof shall be left to the choice of the Contractor but subject to approval
of the Engineer. Approval of the Engineer shall, however, not relieve the Contractor of the

Date Page 187
responsibility for the adequacy of dewatering and protection arrangements and for the
quality and safety of the works.
Where cofferdams are required, these shall be carried to adequate depths and heights,
be safely designed and constructed and be made as watertight as is necessary for facilitating
construction to be carried out inside them. The interior dimensions of the cofferdams shall
be such as to give sufficient clearance for the construction and inspection and to permit
installation of pumping equipments, etc., inside the enclosed area.
If it is determined beforehand that the foundations cannot be laid dry or the situation
is found that the percolation is too heavy for keeping the foundation dry, the foundation
concrete shall be laid under water by tremie pipe only. In case of flowing water or artesian
springs, the flow shall be stopped or reduced as far as possible at the time of placing the
concrete.
Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a
manner as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water through any fresh concrete.
No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of concrete or for any period of at least 24
hours thereafter, unless it is done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by
a watertight wall or other similar means.
At the discretion of the Contractor, cement grouting or other approved methods may
be used to prevent or reduce seepage and to protect the excavation area.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting channels and in discharging the
drained water as not to cause damage to the works, Crops or any other property.
MORTH 304.3.4. Preparation of foundation: The bottom of the foundation shall be

levelled both longitudinally and transversely or stepped as directed by the Engineer. Before
footing is laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and rammed. In the event of excavation
having been deeper than that shown on the drawings or as otherwise ordered the Engineer,
the extra depth shall be made up with concrete masonry of the foundation at the cost of the
Contractor. Ordinary filling shall not be used for the purpose to bring the foundation to
level.
When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose
material, cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level and stepped as directed by the
Engineer. All seams shall be denied out and filled with cement mortar or grout to the

Date Page 188
satisfaction of die Engineer. In the case of excavation in rock, annular space around footing
shall be filled with lean concrete (1:3:6 nominal mix) upto the top level of rock.
If the depth of fill required is more than 1.5m above the top of the footing, filling
upto 1.5m above top of footing shall be done with lean concrete (1:3:6 nominal mix)
followed by boulders grouted with cement.
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be substantially completed
before beginning pile-driving operations therein. After pile driving operations in a given pit
are completed, all loose and displaced materials therein shall be removed to the elevation of
the bottom of the footings.
MORTH 304.3.5. Slips and slip-outs: If there are any slips or slip-outs in the excavation,
these shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost.
MORTH 304.3.6. Public safety: Near towns, villages arid all frequented places, trenches
and foundation pits shall be securely fenced, provided with proper caution signs and
marked with red lights at night to avoid accidents. The Contractor shall take adequate
protective measures to see that the excavation operations do not affect or damage adjoining
structures. For safety precautions, guidance may be taken from IS: 3764.
MORTH 304.3.7. Backfilling: Backfilling shall be done with approved material after
concrete or masonry is fully set and carried out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust
on any part of the structure. All space between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides
of excavation shall be refilled to the original surface in layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted thickness. The compaction shall be done with the help of suitable equipment
such as mechanical tamper, rammer, plate vibrator etc., after necessary watering, so as to
achieve a density not less than the field density before excavation.
MORTH 304.3.8. Disposal of surplus excavated materials:All the excavated materials shall
be the property of the Government. Where the excavated material is to be used in the construction
of embankment as directed by Engineer in-charge. It shall be directly deposited at the required
location within 100 meters lead. Payment will be made 50% of accepted rate of item no. 4 of
Schedule ‘A’.
All hard materials, such as, hard moorum, rubble, etc., not intended for use as above
shall be stacked neatly on specified land as directed by the Engineer with all lifts

Date Page 189
Unsuitable and surplus material not intended for use within the lead specified above
shall also, if necessary, be transported with all lifts and lead and disposed of or used as
directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 304.4. Measurements for Payment
Excavation for structures shall be measured in cu. m. for each class of material
encountered, limited to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Excavation over increased width, cutting of slopes, shoring, shuttering and
planking shall be deemed as convenience for the Contractor in executing the work and shall
not be measured and paid for separately.
Foundation sealing, dewatering, including pumping shall be deemed to be incidental

to the work unless separate provision is made for in the Contract
MORTH 304.5. Rates
MORTH 304.5.1. The Contract unit rate for the items of excavation for structures
shall be payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation
for:
(i) Setting out;
(ii) Construction of necessary cofferdams, cribs, sheeting, shoring and bracing and their
subsequent removal;
(iii) Removal of all logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and obstructions, for
placing the foundations including trimming of bottoms of excavations;
(iv) Foundation sealing, dewatering including pumping when no separate provision for it
is made in the Contract;
(v) Backfilling, clearing up the site and disposal of all surplus material within all lifts
and leads and
(vi) All labour, materials, tools, equipment, safety measures, diversion of traffic and
incidentals necessary to complete the work to Specification.
MORTH 304.5.2. The Contract unit rate for preparation of rock foundation shall be full
compensation for cutting, trimming and cleaning the foundation surface and filling/sealing

Date Page 190
of all seams with cement grout or mortar including all materials, labour and incidentals
required for completing the work.
Item SR No. 2
Empty boring through all sorts of strata for providing 1.20 M dia. R.C.C. bored
piles to required depth including providing necessary casting pipe with all plants
and equipment's as required complete.
Work shall be carried out as per specification/condition as per clause No.2.3 of TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION of the Tender Document.
Mode of measurement shall be as per Para 2.3.28 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of the Tender
Document.
Item SR No.3
Load testing of foundation piles including loading with necessary kentledge or
any other suitable method as directed.
1. The Load testing shall be conducted as per IS:2911 (Part-4)-1985 or latest.
2. Load test may be carried out as decided by the Engineer-in-charge on one or more working
piles. Preloading shall be not less than one and half times estimated safe load carrying capacity
of the pile in case of sandy soil sand to times estimated safe mode in the case of clayey soils.
3. The test shall commence as early as possible after driving of piles .The test shall be carried out
by applying a series of load on R.C.C or pile or a groups of piles united by any other support.
The load shall preferably by applied by means of hydraulic jack reacting against a loaded
platform or against heavy R.S. joists or suitable load frame held down by anchor piles or other
anchorages. Which shall be pre-loaded not less than one and a half times the estimated safe load
carrying capacity of pile. The load applied by the jack should be co-axial with the test pile
.Wherever tension piles or other suitable anchors are used to sustain the loaded platform, the
centre distance between the test pile and anchor pile should be minimum 5 times the test pile
diameter. The hydraulic jack used shall be of adequate capacity and shall have a pressure gauge
and a remote control pump.
4. Before load test is performed, the proposed set up and the load frame shall be got approved from
the Engineer-in-charge .Readings of settlement and rebound shall be recorded with the help of at
last two dial gauges (preferably four) of 0.02 mm. sensitivity and resting on a diametrically
opposite ends of the pile cap. The dial gauges shall be fixed in a datum bar whose ends rest
upon non-movable supports. The supports for datum bar with reference to which the settlement
of the pile would be measured shall be at least 5 ‘d’ away, clear from the piles, where ‘d’ is the
diameter of the pile subject ‘o’ a minimum of 2 meters for good sandy soils and 5 meters for
Date Page 191
loose soils.
5. The test load shall be applied in equal increments of about one fifth of the estimated safe load
and reduced to smaller increments at the final stages as or directed by the Engineer in charge.
Alternate loading and unloading of each load increment shall be performed and the elastic and
plastic settlement recorded.
6. Each stage of loading or unloading shall be maintained till the rate of movement of the pile top
is not more than 0.02 mm per hour in case of clay soil and 0.1 mm per hour for sandy soil.
7. The loading shall be continued up to 1 ½ times the estimated safe load on the pile or when the
total settlement of pile top/cap equals the value specified below. Assessment of safe load shall
be as under:
(a) Two-thirds of the final load at which the total settlement attain a value 12 mm unless it is
established that a total settlement different from 12 mm. is 52 permissible in a given case on
the basis of nature and type of the structure: in the latter case the actual total settlement
permissible shall be used for assessing the safe load instead of 12 mm.
(b) For a group of piles, two-thirds of the final load at which the total settlement attains a value
of 40 mm.
8. Lateral load test, this test shall be carried out at the cut off level of the piles. Two or more test
pile which may be part of the working piles driven to the required depth and spacing shall be
used for the tests. The lateral load at the cut off level shall either be applied by a jack inserted
between the piles or by some other arrangement capable of facilitating the application of desired
pull. The loading shall be applied in increments of about 20 percent of the estimated safe load,
reducing to smaller increments in the final stages of the test. The next increment shall be applied
after the rate of displacement is about 0.05 mm per hour in sandy soils and 0.02 mm per hour in
clayey soils or two hours whichever is earlier. Lateral displacement shall be recorded by using
at least two dial gauges spaced at 30 cm and kept horizontally one above the other on each pile.
Where it is not possible to locate the dial gauges in line of the jack axis, then the two dial gauges
be kept at a distance of 30 cm at a suitable height and the displacement at load point,
interpolated from similar triangles.
The safe lateral load on the pile shall be taken as the least of the following:
(a) 50 percent of the final load at which total displacement increases to 12 mm.
(b) Final load which total displacement corresponds to 5 mm and
(c) Load corresponding to any other specified displacement due to performance requirements.
9. The measurement for payment shall be per number of load test on piles.
10. The Unit includes all materials, labour, equipment plant, platform, gauges of the purpose of
recording result to complete the job.
11. Further, specifications/conditions as per clause No.2.3.32 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of

the Tender Document are applicable.

Date Page 192
Item SR No. 4
Providing and fixing in position fully moulded restrained elastometric
Bearings as per detailed drawings.
1. The term bearings in this case shall refer to an elastomeric bearing consisting of one or
more elastomer slabs bonded to metal plates during manufacture so as to form a sandwich
arrangement, while Bearings pads shall denote single unreinforced elastomer slabs.
2. The elastomer to be used for bearings shall be made from natural or synthetic rubber and
satisfy the physical properties given below. The test pieces required for the test shall be
selected from the centre layer of the bearings while making up the selection.
Table :-
Sr.
Items ASTM Designation Requirement
No.
55 to 70
1 Durometer Hardness D-2240
(5 points for the nominated value)
450 to 55 grade
Ultimate Tensile Strain
2 D-412 400 for 60 grade
percent
300 for 70 grade
175 minimum
3 Tensile strength kg/cm2 D-412 135 minimum for natural rubber of
hardened greater than 65.
4 Adhesion to metal kg/cm D-429 (Method-B) 9
5 Tear resistance kg/cm D-624 40 (DIEC)
Compression set 22 hrs. at
6 D-395 (Method-B0 25 maximum
70 C%
Ozone resistance 22%
strain 100 hrs. at 380 C -
7 D-1149 No Cracks
10-C (1 part per million in
air by volume)
Accelerated ageing 70
10 points
hours, 1000C hardness
8 increase Tensile strength D-573 15% of original
reduction, Elongation at 25 % of original
break reduction.
Law temperature stiffness
9 young’s modulus-40 C D-797 700 maximum
kg/cm2

Date Page 193
3. Adhesive used in bearing location attachment to bridge decks shall be subject to the
approval by the Engineer in charge. It shall be of high viscosity resigns, which are cold
setting and free of solvent. Adhesive shall not be used to bond layers of cure elestomer.
Mild steel used for plate reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of relevant IS
the contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in charge a certificate by the Manufacture that
the elastomer and fabric (if used) in the elastomric bearing conforms to all the above
requirements. The certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the results of
tests, performed by the Manufacturer upon samples of the elastomer and fabric to be used
in the bearings.
The contractor shall whenever required, during the course of manufacture arrange and
offer all facilities for the purpose of inspection and test of all or any of the material used
therein to any officer as directed by the Engineer in charge and the bearings and similar
parts shall be used in the superstructure except on the production of certificate of
acceptance thereof from the Directorate of inspection whenever necessary. All the
inspection charges shall be payable by the contractor.
4. The thickness of a single layer bearing shall not exceed 20 per cent of the least plan
dimension. The total thickness of a laminated bearing shall not exceed 40 percent of the
least plan dimension. The thickness of any internal layer of elastomer shall not be less
than 6 mm nor greater than 12 mm. The thickness of outer plates shall be not less than 3
mm and that on inner plate not less than 1.5 mm. Metal plates in which dowels are
located shall be in general not less than 6 mm thick. The edges of all plates shall be
lightly rounded to approximately 5 mm raid. The metal plates referred above should not
be composed of thinner plates joined together. Laminate Bearings shall have side cover of
elasomer of minimum thickness of 6 mm to protect the ends of the steel plates and to give
a reduced surface strain to that occurring at the edge of the bonded plates but shall not be
considered in evaluation of deformations. The cover of elastomer at the top and bottom
surfaces shall not be less than 3 mm or more than half the thickness of internal layer. The
outer cover at top and bottom surfaces having thickness less than half that of a single
internal layer and not exceeding 3 mm may be considered as a simple protection and need
not therefore be considered in calculating deflections. Where above elastomer covers are
provided,, there is no objection to keeping the thickness of top most and bottom most
plates same as that of inner plates.
5. Bearing shall be set back from the edge of a bearing surface a distance not less than the
thickness of the layer of elastomer in contact with bearing surface to allow for spreading
of the elastomer under load. Bearing may be located in position by means of dowels or
studs or other devices, or bonded to the structure with approved adhesives which shall
generally be of the high viscosity resin type cold setting and free from solvent. For spans
on an inclined grade and without hinge bearing the sole plates shall provided and the
same beveled so that masonry surfaces and the bearing shall be kept horizontal. To
facilitate maintenance, the ends of trusses an plates girders shall preferably by supported
on plates or pedestals so that there is at least 15 centimeters clearance between the bottom
chord or flange and the substructure.. The plan dimensions of the bearings to be finally

Date Page 194
adopted shall preferably be selected from series R 20 of IS: 1076. The arrangement of
placing only one bearing under a girder shall be permitted. Further bearings of different
sizes must not be place next to each other to support a span. The bearings shall be fully
moulded when metal laminations are used. These laminated elastomeric bearings shall
consist of one or more elastomer slabs bounded to metal plates so as to form a sandwich
arrangement. Such fully moulded bearings shall be manufactured to required size. The
bond between elastomers and metal or fabric shall be such that when samples are tested
for separation failure shall occur within the elastomers and not between the elastomer a
metal.
6. The contractor shall get the bearings tested for the physical properties and performance of
bearings. The test pieces required for the test shall be selected from the central layer of
bearing making up the selection. For the size of the test pieces and method of tests etc. the
relevant ASTM Standard shall be followed. The tests shall be carried out in a recognized
laboratory acceptable to the department for all the necessary tests required by the
Department. The specimen for tests as may be required shall be supplied by the contractor
at his own cost and the testing charges shall also be fully borne by the contractor. Only
those bearings which pass the tests satisfactorily will be accepted and will be permitted to
be use. The Departmental shall not accept any responsibility for the cost of bearings
rejected.
7. (i) Tolerances on length and width 0, +5 mm.

(ii) Tolerances on thickness for single layer pad ±0.5 mm.
(iii) Tolerance on total thickness
‘h’ of finished bearings.
10 < h ≤ 30 mm : ±0.5 mm
30 < h ≤ 50 mm : ±0.8 mm
50 < h ≤ 80 mm : ±0.9 mm
80 < h ≤ 120 mm : ±1.1 mm
iv) The parallelism of the individual elastomer laminations for a finished bearings, shall not
exceed the tolerances specified at (ii) above when measured at the extremities of the laminations.
8. Proper arrangement shall be made to avoid corrosion of metal plates or deteriorating of adhesive
by encasing the bearings totally in elastomer or by some other method approved by the Engineer
in charge.
9. (i). When bearing assemblies on plates are shown on the drawing to be placed (not embedded)
directly on concrete, the concrete bearing area shall be constructed slightly above grade and
shall be finished by grinding.
(ii) It shall be ensured that bearings are set truly level and in exact position as indicated on the
drawings so as to have full and even bearing on the seats. Thin mortar pads (not exceeding
12 mm) may be made to meet with this requirement.
Date Page 195
(iii) It shall be ensured that the bottoms of the girders to be received on the bearings are plane
at the location of these bearings and care shall be taken that the bearing are to displaced
while placing the girders.
(iv) Before fixing the elastomeric bearings the concrete surface on which the bearing is to be
placed shall be wood float finished to a level plane which shall not vary more than 1.5 mm
from a straight edge placed in any direction across the areas.
(v) The position of the bearings shall be accurately marked on the pier/abutment cap and the
area where the bearings are to be located leveled accurately.
(vi) The concrete surface shall be free from any loose material and cleared of any grease oil,
paint etc. and it shall be dry at the time of fixing.
(vii) The surface of elatomer shall be free any foreign material.
(viii) Once prepared, the concrete or elastomer shall not be touched with bare hand.
(ix) The bearings shall be covered with canvas or a suitable covering material to protect from
erect sun light and weather until the concrete on superstructure is cast.
(x) The bearings shall be fixed in position with epoxy resin adhesive of approved quality.
(xi) The concreting of superstructure shall be taken up only after ensuring that the adhesive for
fixing the bearings or abutment cap has set.
10. Unit rate shall be cubical contents of the bearing measured in cu. cms.
11. The rate for each type of bearing hall includes the cost of supplying and fixing the bearings in
position complete. The rate shall also include the cost of samples and their testing as desired by
the Engineer in charge. The rate shall also include the cost of adhesives for fixing them.
Item SR No. 5
Providing and laying chequered precast cement concrete tiles 22mm thick with
aggregate of sizes up to 6mm in floors, treads of steps and landings on 20mm
thick bed of C.M. 1:6 (1-cement : 6-sand) or L.M. 1:1.5(1-Lime putty : 1.5 coarse
sand) joint with neat cement slurry with pigments to match the shade of the tiles.
(up to 10 ton)
1.Chequered tiles :-
Chequered terrazzo tiles 22mm thick with marble chips of size upto 6mm in floor on 25mm thick
bed or C.M 1:5 jointed with neat cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of the tiles
including rubbing and polishing etc. complete, light shade using white cement.
2.Fixing Tiles
2.1The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least two hours. Neat grey cement grout at
3.3 kg/cement/sq.mt. of honey like consistency shall be spread over the mortar bedding at directed.
The edges of the tile be smeared with neat cement slurry. The tiles shall be well pressed and gently
tapped with a wooden mallet till they are properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles.

Date Page 196
There shall be no hollows in bed or joints. The joint between the tiles shall be as thin as possible in
straight line or as per pattern.
2.2 The tiles shall not have staggered joints. The joint shall be true to centre line both ways. The
Nehni trap coming in the flooring shall be so positioned that it granting shall replace only one tile as
far as possible. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, they shall be cut(sawn) to be required size and
the edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. The joint shall be filled with gray cement
grout with wire brush of trowel to a depth of 5mm and loose material removed. White cement shall
be used for pointing the joints. After fixing the tile finally in an even plane the flooring shall be kept
wet and allowed to nature undisturbed for 7 days.
2.3 Cleaning: The surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joint shall be cleared off
before its sets. Once the floor has set, it shall be carefully washed, cleared by dilute acid and dried.
Proper precaution and measure shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are not damaged in any way till
the completion of the construction.
3.0 Mode of measurements and payment:
3.1 The work done shall be measured in sq.mt. for visible area of work done. The length and width
of the flooring shall be measured not-between the faces of skirting or dedos or plastered face of wall
as the case may be. The paving under dado or skirting shall not be measured. No deduction shall be
made nor extra paid of any opening in the floor of area upto 0.1 sq.mt. Nothing extra shall be paid
for lying the floors at different levels in the same rooms.
3.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. metre.
Item SR No. 6
Providing PVC. 100 mm. diameter water spouts including necessary iron
gratings as per drawings.
1. Material for the water spout shall be as mentioned in the item and shall be got approved from
the Engineer in charge.
2. Water spout shall be 100 mm internal dia Cast iron grating shall be provided at the entry and
shall be fixed in the recess so as to be flush with the road surface. The quality and size of the
grating shall be got approved from the Engineer in charge. The water spouts shall project at least
10 Cm outside the concrete and shall be rigidly fixed in it. The granting and CI pipes shall be
painted with two coats of anticorrosive black bitumen paint.
3. Measurement shall be per number of water spout fixed.
4. Unit rate includes cost of all material, labour and tool to complete the work.

Date Page 197
Item SR No. 7
Providing and laying of a strip seal expansion joint catering to maximum
horizontal movement up to 70 mm complete as per drawing and standard
specifications to be installed by the manufacturer / suppliers or their authorised
representative ensuring compliance to the manufacture's instruction for
installation.
MORTH 2607.1. Components
Strip seal expansion joint shall comprise the following items :

i) Edge beams - This special claw leg profiled member shall be of extruded rolled steel section
combining good weld ability with notch toughness.
ii) Strip seal - This shall be of chloroprene with high tear strength, insensitive to oil, gasoline,
and ozone. It shall have high resistance to aging. This component, provided to ensure water
tightness, shall have bulbous shape of the pan of the seal which is inserted into the groove,
provided in the edge beam. The seal should be vulcanised in single operation for minimum full
length of joint.
iii) Rigid Anchorage - This shall be welded to the edge beam at staggered distance.
iv) Anchor loops - This shall be made of weldable steel connecting the rigid anchorage with, deck
reinforcement
MORTH 2607.2. Material
i) Edge beams of this special section are at present being directly imported in India. The
steel shall conform to steel grade Rst 37-2 of German Standard or equivalent.
ii) Chloroprene of strip seal shall conform to clause 915.1 of RC:83 (Pan II). The properties of
chloroprene shall conform to Table 2600-1
iii) Anchorage steel shall conform to IS:2061
iv) Anchor loop shall conform to 13:2062.
MORTH TABLE 2600-1. STRIP SEAL ELEMENT SPECIFICATION

Scaling element is made of chloroprene and must be a extruded section. The working movement
range of the sealing element shall be at least 80 nun with a maximum of 100 mm at right angles to
the joint and ±40 mm parallel to the joint

Date Page 198
PROPERTY SPECIFIED VALUE
Hardness 63±5 Shore A

Tensile Strength Min 11 MPa
Elongation at fracture Min 350 per cent
Tear Propagation Strength
Longitudinal Min 10 N/mm
Transverse Min 10 N/mm
Shock Elasticity Min 25 per cent
Abrasion Min 220 mm3
Residual Compressive Strain
(22 h/70 deg C/30 per cent strain) Max 28 per cent
Ageing in hot air
(14 days/70 deg C) Max +5 Shore A
Change in hardness Max -20 per cent
Change in tensile strength Max -20 per cent
Change in elongation at fracture
Ageing in ozone
(24 h/50pphm/25 deg C/20 per cent strain) No cracks
Swelling behaviour in Oil
(116 h/25 per cent Q ASTM Oil no.
Volume Change Max 5 per cent
Change in hardness Max 10 Shore A
ASTM Oil no.3
Volume Change Max 25 per cent
Change in hardness Max 20 Shore A
Cold Hardening Point Min -35 deg C

Date Page 199
MORTH 2607.3. Fabrication (Pre-installation)

a) Rolled steel profiles for edge beams shall be long enough to cater for a 2-lane carriageway.
These shall be cut to size of actual requirements by meant of a metre box saw. Alignment of
the cut-to-size steel profiles shall then be made in accordance with the actual bridge cross-
section on work tablet. For this purpose, the contour of bridge cross-section shall be sketched
onto these tables. After the steel profiles are aligned, they will be chucked to the tables by
means of screw clamps and tacked by arc welding.
b) Anchor plates shall be cut to the required size by gat cutting. These shall be welded to the
edge beams.
c) Anchor loops shall be bent to the required shape and welded to anchor plates.
d) The finally assembled joints shall then be clamped and transported to the work site.
MORTH 2607.4. Handling and Storage

a) For transportation and storage, auxiliary brackets shall be provided to hold the joint assembly
together.
b) The manufacturer shall supply either directly to the Engineer . or to the Bridge
Contractor all the materials of strip seal joints including sealants and all other accessories for
the effective installation of the jointing.
c) Expansion joint material shall be handled with care. It shall be stored under cover on suitable
lumber padding by the Contractor to prevent damage. Any damage occurring after delivery
shall be made good at the Bridge Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
MORTH 2607.5. Installation

MORTH 2607.5.1. The width of the gap to cater for movement due to thermal effect, prestress,
shrinkage and creep, superstructure deformations (if any) and sub-structure deformations (if any)
shall be determined and intimated to the manufacturer. Depending upon the temperature at which
the joint is likely to be installed, the gap dimension shall be preset.
MORTH 2607.5.2. Taking the width of gap for movement of the joint into account, the
dimensions of the recess in the decking shall be established in accordance with the drawings or
design data of the manufacturer. The surfaces of the recess shall be thoroughly cleaned and all din
and debris removed. The exposed reinforcement shall be suitably adjusted to permit
unobstructed lowering of the joint into the recess.
MORTH 2607.5.3. The recess shall be shuttered in such a way that dimensions in the joint drawing
are maintained. The formwork shall be tight.
MORTH 2607.5.4. Immediately prior to placing the joint, the presetting shall be inspected. Should
the actual temperature of the structure be different from the temperature provided for presetting,
correction of the presetting shall be done. After adjustment, the brackets shall be tightened again.
MORTH 2607.5.5. The joint shall be lowered in a pre-determined position. Following placement,
of the joint in the prepared recess, the joint shall be levelled and finally aligned and the anchor

Date Page 200
loops on one side of the joint welded to the exposed reinforcement bars of the structure. Upon
completion, the same procedure shall be followed for the other side of the joint. With the expansion
joint finally held at both sides, the auxiliary brackets shall be released, allowing the joint to take up
the movement of the structure.
MORTH 2607.5.6. High quality concrete shall then be filled into the recess. The packing concrete
must feature low shrinkage and have the same strength as that of the superstructure, but in any case
not less than M 35 grade. Good compaction and careful curing of concrete is particularly important.
After die concrete has cured, the movable installation brackets still in place shall be removed.
MORTH 2607.5.7. Rolled up neoprene strip seal shall be cut into the required length and inserted
between the edge beams by using a crow bar pushing the bulb of the seal into the steel grooves of
the edge beams. A landing to a bead shall be formed in the thickened end of the edges of the seal
which would force the thickened end against the steel beam due to wedge effect when the strip seal
is buttoned in place.
MORTH 2607.5.8. As soon as the concrete in the recess has become initially set, a sturdy ramp
shall be placed over the joint to protect the exposed steel beams and neoprene seals from site traffic.
Expansion joint shall not be exposed to traffic loading before the carriageway surfacing is placed.
MORTH 2607.5.9. The carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the top of the steel
sections. The actual junction of the surfacing/wearing coat with the steel edge section shall be
formed by a wedge shaped joint with a sealing compound. The horizontal leg of the edge beam shall
be cleaned beforehand. It is particularly important to ensure thorough and careful compaction of the
surfacing in order to prevent any premature depression forming in it.
Acceptance Test
(i) All steel elements shell be finished with conform corrosion protection system.
(ii) For neoprene seat, the acceptance test shall conform to the requirement & Stipulated in Table
2600-1. It shall also be stretch tested. If a manufacturer is to supply this type of joint, they will
have to produce a test certificate accordingly conducted in a recognised laboratory, in India or
abroad.
(iii) In view of the importance of the built up edge beam*, special investigation of fatigue strength of
this section with anchorages to withstand 2x10* load change cycles without showing signs of
damage, will be required. The supplier shall have to produce a test certificate in this regard,
conducted in a recognised laboratory, in India or abroad.
(iv) The manufacturer shall produce test certificates indicating that anchorage system had been tested
in a recognised laboratory to determine optimum configuration of anchorage assembly under
dynamic bating.
(v) The manufacturer shall satisfy the Engineer that water tightness test for the type of joint has been
carried out in a recognised laboratory to check the water tightness trader a water pressure of 4
bars.
(vi) As strip seal type of joint if specialised in nature generally of the proprietary type, the
manufacturer shall be required to produce evidence of satisfactory performance of this type
of joint.

Date Page 201
MORTH 2608. TESTS AND STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these specifications and shall meet the prescribed
criteria.
The work shall conform to these specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of
acceptance.
MORTH 2609. MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The expansion joint shall be measured in running metres. For filled joints, the rate per running
metre shall include the cost of sealant for the depth provided in this drawing.
MORTH 2610. RATE

The contract unit rate shall include the cost of all material, labour, equipment and other incidental
charges for fixing the joints complete in all respects as per these specifications in the case of Bridge
Contractor supplying the expansion joint. If the manufacturer supplies the expansion joint directly
to the Engineer, the cost of installation, handling and fixing shall be borne by the Bridge Contractor.
Item SR No. 8
Supplying and fixing reinforced concrete heavy-duty non-pressure pipes With
collars for culverts carrying heavy as per Indian Railway Standard
Specifications-458-1991 specifications including setting the pipes in C.M.1:2
Watering and laying (to level or slope) of class NP3 of following internal
diameters.
vii) 1200 mm dia.
1. The work shall consist of furnishing and installing reinforced cement concrete pipe of the
type dia metre and length required at the location shown on the drawings or as ordered by the
Engineer-in-charge.
2. Reinforced concrete pipe shall be NP3 type conforming to the requirements of IS: 458 and
shall be of dia as specified in the item Each consignment of cement concrete pipes shall be
inspected. if necessary and approved by the Engineer- in-charge at the place of manufacture or at
the site before their incorporation in the works.

Date Page 202
NP3 pipes are used for R.C.C. Pipes where testing of pies will not be feasible the contractors
will have to produce a certificate from the manufactures on company on company latter head the
given hereinafter form
Production of such certificate will not however relieve the contractor from his responsibility
of supplying pipes of required standard and will have to bear the loss of damage caused to the work
on account of defects found subsequently during the execution it will also be necessary to purchase
these pipes from manufacturer having standard equipments for carrying out various test as per IS:
458 at his factory.
3. No pipe shall be placed in position until the foundations have been approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. Where two or more pipes are to be laid adjacent to other, they shall be
separated by a distance equal to at least half diameter of the pipe subject to minimum of 450 mm.
The laying of pipes on the prepared foundation shall start from the outlet and proceed towards the
specified lines and grades. The pipes shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in work they
form a culvert with a smooth uniform invert. Any pipe found defective or damaged during shall be
removed at their cost of Contractor.
4. The pipes shall be jointed either by collar joint or by flush joint, the former case; the collars
shall be of R.C.C. 150 to 200mm wide and having the same strength as the pipes to be jointed.
Caulking space shall be between 13 and 20mm. according to the diameter of the pipes Caulking
material shall be slightly wet mix of cement and sand in the ratio of 1:2 rammed with caulking
irons. Before caulking the collar shall be so placed that its centre coincides with that of pipe and
even annular space is left between the collar and the pipes. Flush joint may be shaped to from a self-
centring joint with a joining space 13cm wide. The joining space shall be filled with cement mortar
1 cement to 2 sand mixed sufficiently dry to remain in position when forced with a trowel or
rammer. Care shall be taken to fill all voids and excess mortar shall be removed. All joints shall be
made with care so that their interior surface is smooth and consistent with the interior surface of the
pipes. After finishing, the joint shall be kept covered and damp for at least four days.
5. R.C.C. pipe shall be measured along their centre between their inlet and outlet and outlet
ends in linear metres.

Date Page 203
6 The rate for the pipes shall include the cost of pipe including, unloading, handling storing
laying in position and joining complete.
Items SR No:- 9
Providing and laying Filter Media 600mm thick at the back of RE walls as per
detailed specifications.
1. Well graded pebbled or metal of 40mm to 63mm size shall be used. The grading and
tolerances of metal of pebbles shall be as under:-
Sr. No. of Size Range Size Percentage by weight

No. designation passing through the sieve.
1. 63mm to 40mm 90mm 100-100
63mm 85-100
50mm 35-70
40mm 00-15
20mm 00-05
2. The size shall be 40mm to 63mm.where in tolerance limit for oversize shall be up to 15%
and that for lower size should be up to 15% and below 20mm.It shall be allowable up to
5%.The filter Material shall be tightly placed to a thickness of not less than 600 mm. and
provided over the entire surface behind abutment, wings or return wall to the height.
3. Materials shall be first stacked in boxed of 2mX1.5 mX0.5m.size on fairly level ground and
measured.
4. The measurement for payment shall be made on Cmt. Basis of boxes. No deduction shall be
made for voids.
5. The unit rates include the cost of material, scaffolding labour and tools to complete the
work.

Date Page 204
Items SR No:- 10
Providing, laying and jointing in true line and level 110 diametre U.P.V.C (Type
B) conforming to IS 13592-1992 with one end plain and other end socketed with
rubber ring, & fittings conforming to ISI 14735-1999 of approved make for
drainage system pipe line, pipe shall be jointed with each other with rubber
lubricant, pipe shall be fixed on wall using of PVC clamp of the size 110 mm
diameter x 149 mm length x 145 mm height at every 2000 mm centre to centre or
shall be concealed in walls as directed including necessary fittings such as bends,
shoes etc. including testing of pipes and joints and jointed with adhesive solvent
cement including cost of all materials.
Materials
1.1. The pipes shall be standard I.S.I. mark U.P.V.C. SWR Type B pipe of specified dia.
1.2. The fittings, clamps etc. required for specified dia. bore pipes shall be of best quality and
makes as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Necessary accessories with inner/ outer brass
thread shall be used as required and instruction by Engineer in charge.
2.0. Workmanship
2.1. Cutting, Laying & Jointing
2.1.1. When the tubes are to be cut or rethreaded, the ends shall be carefully filed out so that no
obstruction to bore in offered. The ends of the tubes shall then be threaded conforming to the
requirements of I.S. 554-1955 with pipe dies and taps carefully in such a manner that it will
not result in slackness of joints when the two pieces are screwed together.
2.1.2. The taps and dies shall be used only for straightening screw threads which have becoming
bent or damaged and shall not be used for turning of the threads so as to make them slack as
the latter procedure may not result in the water tight joint. The screw threads for tube and
fitting shall be protected form edge until they are fitted.
2.1.3. In jointing the tubes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the tubes shall be oiled
and smeared with white or red lead and wrapping around with a few turns of fine spun yarn
round the screwed end of the tube. The end shall then be tightly screwed in the socket, tees,

Date Page 205
etc. with a pipe wrench. Care shall be taken that all times free from dust and dirt during
fixing. But from the joints shall be removed after screwing. After laying the open ends of the
pipes shall be temperately plugged to prevent access of water, soil, or any other foreign
matter. Jointing shall be carried out with proper chemical adhesive material and allow to
dry.
2.1.4. Any threads exposed after jointing shall be painted or in the case of underground piping
thickly coated with approved anti-corrosive paint to prevent corrosion.
2.2. Fixing concealed to wall, ceiling & floors.
2.2.1. In case of fixing concealed cement point to walls or ceilings, these shall run on the surface
of the wall, or ceiling (not in chase) unless otherwise specified. The fixing shall be done by
means of standard pattern, holder clamps keeping the pipes about 15 mm. clear of the wall.
When it is found necessary to pattern, holder clamps keeping the pipes about 15 mm. clear
of the wall. When it is found necessary to conceal the pipes and when specified so, chasing
may be adopted or pipe fixed inducts or recesses etc. provided that there is sufficient space
to work on the pipe with usual tools. The pipe shall not ordinarily be buried in walls or solid
floors, where unavoidable, pipe may be buried for short distances provided that adequate
protection is given against damage and where so required joints are not buried. Where
required M.S. tube sleeve shall be fixed at a place a pipe is peasant through a wall or floor
for expansion and contraction and other movements. In case the pipe is embedded in walls
or floors, it should be painted with anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality. The
pipe should not come in contact with lime mortar or lime concrete as the pipe is affected by
lime. Under the floors, the pipe shall be laid in layer of sand filling.
2.2.2. All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The
pipes shall be fixed to walls with standard pattern clamps of required size and shape, one
end of which shall be properly plugged or cemented into walls with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand) and the other tightened round the pipes to hold it securely. These
clamps shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight lengths at 2 MC/C interval in
horizontal run and 2.5 m. interval in vertical run. For pipe of 15 mm. dia. up to 25 mm. dia

Date Page 206
the holes in the walls and floors shall be made by drilling with chisel or jumper and not by
dismantling the brick work or concrete. However for bigger diameter pipes the holes shall be
carefully made (1 cement : 3 coarse sand), and properly finished to match the adjacent
surface.
2.3. Testing of joints :
2.3.1. After laying and jointing, the pipes and fillings shall be inspected under working conditions
of pressure and flow. Any joints found liken shall be redone, and ail leaking pipes removed
and replaced without extra cost.
2.3.2. The pipes and fittings after they are laid shall be tested to hydraulic pressure of 6 Kg./Sq cm.
The pipe shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape and
avoiding all shocks and water hammer. The draw off takes and stop cock shall then be
closed and specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied gradually. The pressure gauge must
be accurate. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the work laying proceeds,
keeping, the joints exposed for inspection during the testing.
3.0. Mode of measurements and payment
3.1. The description of the item shall, unless otherwise stated be held to include where necessary
conveyance and delivery, handling, unloading, storing fabrication, hoisting, all labour for
finishing to required shape and size, setting, fitting in position straight, cutting and waste
return of packing etc.
3.2. The length shall be measured on running meter basis of finished work. The length shall be
taken along the centre line of the pipe and fittings. The pipes fixed to wall, ceiling. floors etc
shall be measured and paid under this item.
3.3. All the work shall be measured in decimal system as fixed in its place, subject to tolerance
given below unless otherwise stated.
(i) Dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0 01 meter.
(ii) Area shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq. meter.

Date Page 207
3.4. All measurements of cutting shall unless otherwise stated by held to include the consequent
waste.
3.5. In case of fitting of unequal bore, the targets bore shall be measured for the test.
3.6. Testing of pipe lines fittings, and joints include for providing all plant appliances necessary
for obtaining access to the work to be tested an carrying out the tests.
3.7. The rate includes U.P.V.C. SWR Type B pipe with screwed socket joints to gather with all
fittings (such as bends, sockets springs, elbows, test, crosses, short pieces, clamps and plugs,
unions etc.) and fixing complete with clamping wall hooks, wooden plug etc. and also
curing, screwing and waste and for making forged (or hand made) bends on piping as
required. Connector shall be inserted where required or directed. The rate also includes
cutting through walls, floors etc. and their making good and painting exposed threads with
anti-corrosive paint as above and testing where tubes are to be fixed to wall, ceiling and
flooring, the rates shall not include painting of pipes, providing sleeves and sand filling
under floor for which separate payment shall be made.
3.8. The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.
Item SR No. 11:-

Providing and laying Road marking with hot applied thermo plast compound
reflecting glass bends on bituminous surface. Providing and laying Hot applied
thermoplastic compound 2.5 cm thick including reflectorizing glass bends 250
gms/sqmt area, thickness of surface applied glass bends as per IRC 35 the
finished surface to be level uniform and free from streaks & holes.
General :-
Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking.
(i) The work under this section consists of marking traffic stripes using a thermoplastic
compound meeting the requirements specified herein.
(ii) The Thermoplastic compound shall be screened / extruded on to the pavement surface in a
molten state by suitable machine capable of controlled preparation and laying with surface

Date Page 208
application of glass beads at a specific rate. Upon cooling to ambient pavement temperature, it shall
be producing an adherent pavement marking of specified thickness and width and capable of
resisting deformation by traffic.
(iii) The color of the compound shall be white or yellow (IS: color No. 356) as specified in
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(iv) Where the compound is to be applied to cement concrete pavement sealing primer as
recommended by the manufacture, shall be applied to the pavement in advance of placing of the
stripes to ensure proper bonding of the compound. On new concrete surface any laitance and / or
curing compound shall be removed before the marking are applied.
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIALS
GENERAL:
The thermoplastic material shall be homogeneously composed of aggregate, pigment, resins and
glass reflector zing beads.
REQUIREMENT:
Composition: the pigment, beads and aggregate shall be uniformly dispersed in the resin. The
material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign objects and shall comply with requirements
indicated in Table 800 – 3.
MORTH Table 800 – 3 PROPORTIONS OF CONSTITUENTS OF
MARKING MATERIAL (percentage by weight)
Component White Yellow
Binder 18.00 min. 18.00 min.
Glass Beads 30 – 40 30 – 40
Titanium Dioxide 10.00 min. ---
Calcium Carbonate 42.00 max See Note

and Inert Fillers
Yellow Pigments --- - do -
Note: Amount of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and inert fillers shall be at the option of the
manufacturer, provide all other requirement of this Specification are met.
II Properties: The properties of thermoplastic material, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D36/ BX-3262- (Pa. T1) shall be as below:
A) Luminance :
White: Daylight luminance at 45 degree 65 per cent min. as per AASHTO M 249.
B) Drying time: When applied at a temperature specification by the manufactures and to the
required thickness, the material shall set to bear traffic in not more than 15 minutes.
Date Page 209
C) Skid resistance: not less than 45 as per BS 6044.

D) Cracking resistance at low temperature: The material shall show no cards on application to
concrete blocks.
E) Softening point: 102.5 ÷ 9.5” as per ASTM D 36.
F) Flow resistance: Note more than 25 per cent as per AASHTO M 249.
G) Yellowness index (for white thermoplastic paint) not more than 0.12 as per AASHTOM 249.
III Storage life: The materials shall meet the requirement of their Specifications for period of
one year. The thermoplastic material must also melt uniformly with no evidence of skins of
un-melted particles for the one-year storage period. Any material not meeting the above
requirements shall be replaced by the manufacturer/ supplier/ contractor.
IV Reflectorisation: Shall be achieved by incorporation of beads, the grading and other properties
of the beads shall be as specified in Clause 803.4.3 of MORT & H Specification.
V Marking: Each container of the thermoplastic material shall be clearly and indelibly marked
with the following information.
1. The name, trademark or other means of identification of manufacturer.
2. Batch number.
3. Date of manufacture.
4. Color (White or Yellow)
5. Maximum application temperature and maximum safe heating temperature.
VI Sampling and testing: The thermoplastic material shall be sampled and tested in accordance
with the appropriate ASTM/BS method. The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer a copy
of certified test report from the manufacturer of the thermoplastic material showing results
of all tests specified therein and shall certify that the materials meets all requirements of this
Specification.
REFLECTORZING GLASS BEADS
GENERAL: This Specification covers two types of glass beads to be used for to production of
reflectiorised pavment markings. Type 1 beads are those which are a constituent of the basic
thermoplastic compound vide Table 800 – 3 and type – 2 beads are those which are to be sprayed on
the surface vide Clause 803.6.3.
The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and free from milliness, dark particles and excessive
air inclusions.
These shall conform to the requirements spelt out in clause 5.4.3.3.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS.
A GRADATION:
The glass beads shall meet the graduation requirements for the two types as given in MORTH Table
800 – 4.
MORTH TABLE 800-4 GRADATION REQUIREMENT FOR GLASSBEADS
Sieve Size Per Cent Retained
Table – 1 Table – 2

Date Page 210
1.18 mm 0 to 3 --
850 micron 5 to 20 0 to 5
600 micron -- 5 to 20
425 micron 65 to 95 --
300 micron -- 30 to 75
180 micron 0 to 10 10 to 30
Below 180 micron 0 to 15
B. ROUNDNESS:
The glass beads shall have a minimum of 70 per cent true spjeeres.
C. REFRACTIVE INDEX:
The glass beads shall have a minimum refractive index of 1.50.
D. FREE FLOWING PROPERTIES:
The glass beads shall be free of hard lumps and clusters and shall dispense readily under any
condition suitable for paints striping. They shall pass the free flow-test.
TEST METHODS:
The specific requirement shall be tested with the following methods.
I Free-flow test: Spread 100grams of beads evenly in a 100 mm diameter glass dish. Place the
dish in a 250 mm inside diameter desiccators which is filled within 25 mm of the top of a
desiccators plate with sulphur acid water solution (specific gravity 1.10) Cover the desiccators and
let is stand for 4 hours at 20 to 29 degree C. Remove Sample from desiccators, transfer beads to a
pan and inspect for lumps of clusters. Then pour heads into a clean dry glass funnel having a 100
mm stem and 6 mm orifice. If necessary, initiate flow by lightly tapping the funnel. The glass
spheres shall be essentially free of lumps and clusters and shall flow freely through the funnel.
II The requirements of gradation, roundness and refractive index of glass beds and the amount
of glass beads in the compound shall be tested as per BS 6088 and BS 3262 (Part 1).
III The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer a copy of certified test report from the
manufacturer of glass beads obtained from a reputed laboratory showing results of all tests specified
therein and shall certify that material meets all requirements of this Specification. However, if so
required, these tests may be carried out as directed by the Engineer in charge.
APPLICATION PROPERTIES OF THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
The thermoplastic materials shall readily get screed / extruded at temperatures specified by the
manufacturers for respective method of application to produce a line of specified thickness which
shall be continuous and uniform in shape having clear and share edges.
The materials upon heating to application temperatures shall not exude fumes which are toxic.
Obnoxious of injurious to persons property.

Date Page 211
PREPARATION :
i) The material shall be melted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in a heater
fined with a mechanical sairrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic materials to avoid
local overheating. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range specified by the
manufacturer, and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum temperature started by
the manufacturer. The molten material should be used as expeditiously as possible and for
thermoplastic materials. Which has natural binders or is otherwise sensitive to prolonged heating
the materials shall be maintained in a molten condition for more than 4 houses.
II) After transfer to the laying equipment, the material shall be maintained within the
temperature range specified by the manufacturer for achieving the desired consistency for laying.
PROPERTIES OF FINISHED ROAD MARKING :

a) The stripe shall be not be slippery when wet.
b) The marking shall not lift from the pavement in freezing weather.
c) After application and proper drying the stripe shall show no appreciable deformation of
discoloration under traffic and under road temperatures up to 60 C.
d) The marking shall be deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride calcium chloride or oil
drippings from traffic.
e) The stripe of marking shall maintain its original dimensions and position. Cold ductility of
the material shall be such as to permit normal movement with the road surface without
chopping or cracking.
f) The colour of yellow marking shall conform to IS Colour No. 356 as given in IS : 164.
REFLECTORISED PAINT :
Reflectorised paint, if used shall conform to the specification by the manufacturers and
approved by the engineer. Reflectorising glass beads for reflectorishing paints where used
shall conform to the requirements of Clause 5.3.
APPLICATION
Marking shall be done by machine. For locations where painting cannot be done machine,
approved manual methods shall be used with prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
mairtain control over traffic while painting operations are in progress so as to cause mimimum
inconvenience to traffic compatible with protecting the workmen.
The thermoplastic materials shall be applied hot either by screening or extrusion process.
After transfer to the laying apparatus, the material shall be laid at a temperature within the range
specified by the manufacturer for the particular method lf laying being used. The paint shall be
applied using a screed or extrusion machine.
The pavement temperature shall bet be less than 10 C. during application. All surface to be marked
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt, grease, oil and all other foreign matter before
application of the paint.
The material, when formed into traffic stripes, must be readily renewable by placing on overlay of
new material directly over an old line of compatible material. Such new material shall so bend itself
to the old line that no splitting or separation takes place.
Thermoplastic paint shall be applied in intermittent of continuous lines of uniform thickness of at
least 2.5 mm unless specified otherwise. Where arrows or letters are to be provided, thermoplastic
compound may be hand-sprayed. In addition to the beads included in the material, a further quantity
of glass beads of Type 2, conforming to the above noted specification shall be sprayed uniformly

Date Page 212
into a mono layer on to the hot paint line quick succession of the paint spraying operation. The
glass beads shall be applied at the rate of 250 grams per square meter area.
The minimum thickness specified in exclusive of surface applied glass beads. The method of
thickness measurement shall be in accordance with Appendices B and C of BS- 3262 (Part 3).
The finished lines shall be free from ruggedness on sides and ends and be parallel to the general
alignment of the carriageway. The upper surface of the lines shall be level, uniform and free from
steaks.
MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT.

The painted marking shall be measured in sq. meters of actual area marked (excluding the
gaps. If any).
In respect of markings line directional arrows and lettering. Etc., the measurement shall be
in Square meter basis.
Rate
The contractor unit rate for road markings shall be payment in full compensation of furnishing all
labour, materials, tools, equipment, including all incidental costs necessary for carrying out the
work at the site confirming to these specification complete as per the approved drawing (s) or as
directed by the Engineer and other incidental cost necessary to complete the work to these
Specifications.
Item SR No. 12
Providing & Fixing Village name boards made out of 2mm. Aluminium sheet
size 90 x 60 cms rectangle per the design of IRC - 67 - 1977 Pre treated with
phosphating process & acid etching : coated with one coat of epoxy primer and
two coats of best quality epoxy paint reflectorised with retro reflective sheeting
as per latest M.O.S.T Specification :Letters and numerals sound be as per IRC-
30-1968, 3.1 M long ( 2 no's) Stand post and frame fabricated from suitable size
iron angle of 50 x 50 x 5mm : painted with best quality epoxy coating in black
and white bends the details of symbol or inscription / numerals for each board
shall be as per the instruction for of Engineer-in-charge, The fixing at site shall
be in 1;2;4 CC block of size 45 x 45 x 60cms. for each leg. including excavation
curing etc. comp. under the supervision of engineer in charge.(B) High intensity
Grade
Specification same as item no 13 and to be followed for this item except the size of the sign board
made out 2 mm aluminium sheet is size 90X60 CM equilateral rectangle.

Date Page 213
Item SR No. 13
Providing & Fixing sign boards made out of 2mm. Aluminium sheet size 1
Meter x 1 Meter as per the design given by engineer in charge, Pre treated
with phosphating process & acid etching : coated with one coat of epoxy primer
and two coats of best quality epoxy paint reflectorised with retro reflective
sheeting as per latest M.O.S.T Specification, Letters and numerals should be as
per IRC -30-1968, 3.1 M long ( 2 nos) Stand post and frame fabricated from
suitable size iron angle of 35 x 35 3mm & 50 x 50 x 5mm 75 x 75 x 6mm :
painted with best quality epoxy coating in black and white bends the details of
symbol or inscription / numerals for each board shall be as per the instruction
for of Engineer-in-charge, The fixing at site shall be in 1;2;4 CC block of size 45
x 45 x 60cms. for each leg. including excavation curing etc. comp. under the
supervision of engineer in charge.(B) High intensity Grade
1.0 Traffic Signs having retro-reflective sheeting:

1.1 General Requirement:
The retro-reflective used the sign shall be consist of white or colored sheeting a smooth surface
outer surface has the property of retro-reflection over its entire surface. It shall be weather resistant
and show lifting or curling and shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion. A certificate of having
tested the sheeting for properties in an unprotected outdoor exposure facing the sun for two years
and its having passed these tests shall be obtained from a reputed laboratory by the manufacturer of
the sheeting. The Type of sheeting to be used would depend upon the type, Functional hierarchy
and importance of the road.
1.2 High Intensity Grade Sheeting:

1.2.1 Encapsulated Lens Type:
This sheeting be of encapsulated lens type consisting of spherical glass lens element, adhered to a
resin and encapsulated by flexible, transparent proof plastic having a smooth surface. The retro
reflective surface after cleaning with soap and water and in dry condition shall have the minimum
co-efficient of retro-reflection (determined in accordance with ASTM Standard e: 810) as indicated
in MORTH Table 800-1.
MORTH TABLE 800-1 ACCEPTABLE MINIMUM CO-EFFCINT OF RETRO REFLECTIVE
FOR HIGH INTENSITY GRADE SHEETING (CANDELAS PER LUX SQURE METOD).
Observation

Date Page 214
Angle Entrance White Yellow Orange Green Blue

Angle /Red
(In degrees)
(In degrees)
0.2 -4 250 170 100 45 20

0.2 +30 150 100 60 25 11
0.5 -4 95 62 30 15 7.5
0.5 +30 65 45 25 10 5.0
When totally wet, the sheeting shall not less than 90% of the values of retro reflectance indicated in
Table 800-1. At the end of 7 years. The sheeting retain at least 75% of its original retro-reflectance.
1.3 Engineering Grade Sheeting:
This sheeting shall be enclosed lens type consisting of microscopic lens element embedded beneath
the surface of a smooth, flexible, transparent, water-proof plastic, resulting in a non-exposed lens
optical reflecting system. The retro-reflective surface after cleaning with soap and water and in dry
condition shall have the minimum coefficient of retro-reflection (determine in accordance with
ASTM Standard e-810) as Table800-2.
TABLE 800-2 ACCEPTABLE MINIMUM CO-EFFCINT OF RETRO REFLECTIVE FOR
ENGINEERING GRADE SHEETING (CANDELAS PER LUX SQURE METOD).
Observation
Angle Entrance White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue
Angle
(In degrees)
(In
degrees)
0.2 -4 70 50 25 9.0 14.5 4.0

0.2 +30 30 22 7.0 3.5 6.0 1.7
0.5 -4 30 25 13.5 14.5 7.5 2.0
0.5 +30 15 13 4.0 2.2 3.0 0.8

Date Page 215
1.3.1 When totally wet, the sheeting shall not show less than 90% of the values of retro-reflectance
indicated in table 800-2 At the end of 5 years, The sheeting shall retain at least 50% of its original
retro-reflectance.
1.4. Messages /Boarders: The messages (legends, letters, numerals etc.) and borders shall either be
screen-printed or of cut-outs. Screen-Printing shall be processed and finished with materials and in a
manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer. Cut outs shall be of material as specified by the
sheeting manufacturer and shall be bonded with the sheeting in the manner specified by
Manufacturer.
1.4.1 For screen-printed transparent colored areas on white sheeting, the co-efficient shall not be
less than 50 % of the values corresponding color in table 800-1(a),800-1(b) as applicable.
1.4.2 Cut out message and border, wherever used, shall be made out of retro-reflective sheeting (as
per Clause1.12) except those in black which shall be of non-reflective sheeting.
1.4.3 Color: Unless otherwise specified the general color scheme shall be stipulated in IS:5 “ Color
for ready Mixed Paints.”
Blue IS Color No.166: French Blue
Red IS Color No.537: Signal Red
Green IS Color No.284: Indian Green
Orange IS Color No.591: Deep Orange
The color shall be durable and uniform in acceptable but when viewed in day or under normal
headlight at night.
1.5. Adhesives : The sheeting shall be either have a pressure sensitive of the aggressive tack type
requiring no heat, Solvent or removable liner (removable by peeling without soaking in water or
other solvent) and shall be suitable for the type material of the base plate used for the sign. The
adhesive shall from a durable bond to smooth, corrosion and weather resistance surface of the base
plate such that it shall be possible to remove the sheeting from the sign base in one piece by sharp
instrument. In case of pressure-sensitive adhesive sheeting, the sheeting shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer specification
1.6. Refurbishment: Where existing signs are specified for the refurbishment, the sheeting shall
have a semi-rigid aluminium backing pre-coated with aggressive-tack type pressure sensitive
adhesive. The adhesive shall be suitable for type of material used for the sign and should thoroughly
bond that material.
1.7. Fabrication:
1.7.1 Surface to be refectories shall be prepared to receive the retro-reflective sheeting. The smooth
plain surface before the application of retro-reflective sheeting. If the surface is rough, approved

Date Page 216
surface printer may be used. After cleaning, metal shall not be handled, except by suitable devise or
clean canvas gloves between all cleaning and preparation operation and application of reflective
sheeting/primer.
1.7.2 Complete sheets of the material shall be used on the signs except where it is unavoidable. At
splices sheeting with pressure sensitive adhesive shall be overlapped not less be 5 mm. Sheeting
with heat –activated adhesive may be spliced with an overlapped not less than 5mm or butted with
gap or butted with a gap not exceeding 0.75mm. Where screen printing with transparent color is
proposed, only but jointing shall be used. Cut out to produce legends and borders shall be bonded
with the sheeting in the manner specified by the manufacturer.
1.7.3 Warranty Durability: For each lot of sheeting procured, the contactor shall obtain from the
manufacturer a 7 Years warranty for satisfactory field performance including stipulated retro-
reflectance of the sheeting of high intensity grade and 5 years warranty for the engineering grade
and submit the same to the Engineer. In addition, a 7 years and a five years warranty for satisfactory
in field performance of the finished sign with retro-reflective sheeting of high intensity grade and
engineering grade respectively, inclusive of the screen printed or cut-out letters/legends and their
bonding and their bonding to the retro-reflective to the retro-reflective sheeting shall be obtained
from the contractor/supplier and passed on to the Engineer.
1.8. Installation:
1.8.1 Sign post their foundation and sign mounting shall be so constructed as to hold in a proper and
permanent position against the normal storm wind loads or displacement by vandalism. Normally
signs with an area 0.9 Sq.m. shall be mounted on a single post, and for greater area two or more
supports shall be provided. Sign supports may be of mild steel, reinforced concrete or galvanized
iron (G.I.).Post –end shall be firmly fixed to the ground by means of properly designed foundation.
The work of foundation shall conform to relevant specification as specified.
1.8.2 All components of signs and supports, other than the reflective portion and G.I. Posts shall be
thoroughly decaled, cleaned, primed concrete or G.I. Posts. After the must have been tightened, The
tails of the bolts shall be painted with three coats of red lead paint.
1.8.3 The signs shall be fixed to the posts by welding in the case of steel post and by bolts and
washers of suitable size in the case or reinforced concrete or G.I. Posts. After the nuts have been
tightened, the tails of the bolts shall be furred over with a hammer to prevent removal.
1.9. Measurement for payment:

The measurement for standard cautionary, mandatory and information sign shall be In number of
different types of signs supplied and fixed as per above detail and specification.
1.10. Rate:
The contract unit shall be payment in full for the cost of making the road sign. Including all
material, installing it at the site and incidentals to complete the work in accordance with the
specification.

Date Page 217
Item No.14:-
Providing and fixing Junction board made out of 2mm aluminium sheet; size
244x122 cms rectangle, as per the design of IRC-67-1977. Pretreated with
phospheting process and acid etching; coated with one coat of epoxy primer and
two coats of best qualtiy epoxy paint; refloctrorized with retro reflective
sheeting as per the latest M.O.S.T. specification, Letters and numerals should be
as per IRC-30-1968; 3.1 Mt. long (2 nos.) stand post and frame fabricated from
suitable size iron angle of50x50x5 mm, & 75 x 75 x 6 mm as required; painted
with best quality epoxy coating in black and white bends. The details of symbol
or inscription/numerals for each board shall be as per the instruction of engineer
in charge.The fixing at site shall be in 1:2:4 CC block of size 45 x 45 x 60 cms for
each leg, including excavation curing etc. complete under the supervision of
Engineer-In-Charge (A) High intensity grade
MORTH 801.1. General

MORTH 801.1.1. The colour, configuration, size and location of all traffic signs for highways
other than Expressways shall be in accordance with the Code of Practice for Road Signs,IRC: 67 or
as shown on the drawings. For Expressways, the size of the signs, letters and their placement shall
be as specified in the Contract drawings and relevant Specifications. In the absence of any details or
for any missing details, the signs shall be provided as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 801.1.2. The signs shall be either reflectorised or non-reflectorised as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. When they are of reflectorised type, they shall be of retro-
reflectorised type and made of encapsulated lens type reflective sheeting vide Clause 801.3, fixed
over aluminium sheeting as per these Specifications.
MORTH 801.1.3. In general, cautionary and mandatory signs shall be fabricated through process of
screen printing. In regard to informatory signs with inscriptions, either the message could be printed
over the reflective sheeting, or cut letters of non-reflective black sheeting used for the purpose
which must be bonded well on the base sheeting as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 801.2. Materials

The various materials and fabrication of the traffic signs shall conform to the following
requirements:
MORTH 801.2J. Concrete : Concrete shall be of the grade shown on the Contract drawings or
otherwise as directed by the Engineer.

Date Page 218
MORTH 801.2.2. Reinforcing steel: Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirement of IS:1786
unless otherwise shown on the drawing.
MORTH 801.2.3. Bolts, nuts, washers: High strength bolts shall conform to IS : 1367 whereas
precision bolts, nuts, etc., shall conform to IS: 1364.
MORTH 801.2.4. Plates and supports: Plates and support sections for the sign posts shall
conform to IS: 226 and IS: 2062 or any other relevant IS Specifications.
MORTH 801.2.5. Aluminium: Aluminium sheets used for sign boards shall be of smooth, hard
and corrosion resistant aluminium alloy conforming to IS : 736-Material designation 24345 or 1900.
311
MORTH 801.2.6. Signs with a maximum side dimension not exceeding 600 mm shall not be less
than 1.5 mm thick. All others shall be at least 2 mm thick. The thickness of the sheet shall be related
to the size of the sign and its support and shall be such that it does not bend or deform under the
prevailing wind and other loads.
MORTH 801.2.7. In respect of sign sizes not covered by IRC:67, the structural details (thickness,
etc.) shall be as per the approved drawings.
MORTH 801.3. Traffic Signs Having Retro-reflective Sheeting
MORTH 801.3.1. General requirements: The retro-reflective sheeting used on the sign shall consist
of the white or coloured sheeting having a smooth outer surface which has the property of retro-
reflection over its
entire surface. It shall be weather-resistant and show colour fastness. It shall be new and unused and
shall show no evidence of cracking, scaling, pitting, blistering, edge lifting or curling and shall have
negligible shrinkage or expansion. A certificate of having tested the sheeting for these properties in
an unprotected outdoor exposure facing the sun for two years and its having passed these tests shall
be obtained from a reputed laboratory, by the manufacturer of the sheeting. The reflective sheeting
shall be either of Engineering Grade material with enclosed lens or of High Intensity Grade with
encapsulated lens. The type of the sheeting to be used would depend upon the type, functional
hierarchy and importance of the road.
MORTH 801.3.2. High intensity grade sheeting: This sheeting shall be of encapsulated lens type
consisting of spherical glass lens, elements adhered to a synthetic resin and encapsulated by a
flexible, transparent water-proof plastic having a smooth surface. The retro-reflective surface after
cleaning with soap\and water and in dry condition shall have the minimum co-efficient -of retro-
reflection (determined in accordance with ASTM Standard E : 810) as indicated in Table 800-1.
MORTH TABLE 800.1. ACCEPTABLE MINIMUM COEFFICIENT OF RETRO.
REFLECTION FOR HIGH INTENSITY GRADE SHEETING (CANDELAS PER LUX
PER SQUARE METRE)

Date Page 219
Observation Angle Entrance Angle White Yellow Orange Green / Red Blue
(In degrees (In degrees
0.2 -4 250 170 100 45 20
0.2 +30 150 100 60 25 11
0.5 -4 95 62 30 15 7.5
0.5 +30 65 45 25 10 5.0
When totally wet, the sheeting shall not show less than 90 per cent of the values of retro
reflectance indicated in Table 800-1. At the end of 7 years, the sheeting shall retain at least 75 per
cent of its original retro-reflectance.
MORTH 801.3.3. Engineering grade sheeting: This sheeting shall be of enclosed lens type
consisting of microscopic lens elements embedded beneath the surface of a smooth, flexible,
transparent, water-proof plastic, resulting in a non-exposed lens optical reflecting system. The
retroreflective surface after cleaning with soap and water and in dry condition shall have the
minimum coefficient of retro- eflection (determined in accordance with ASTM Standard: E-S'IO) as
indicated in Table SOO-2.
MORTH TABLE 800.2. ACCEPTABLE MINIMUM COEFFICIENT OF RETRO.REFLECTION
FOR ENGINEERING GRADE SHEETING (CANDELAS PER LUX PER SQUARE METRE)
Observation Entrance White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue

Angle (In Angle (In
degrees degrees
0.2 -4 70 50 25 9.0 14.5 4.0
0.2 +30 30 22 7.0 3.5 6.0 1.7
0.5 -4 30 25 13.5 4.5 7.5 2.0
0.5 +30 15 13 4.0 2.2 3.0 0.8
When totally wet, the sheeting shall not show less than 90 per cent of the values, of retro-
reflection indicated in Table SOO-2.At the end of 5 years, the sheeting shall retain at least 50 per
cent of its original retro-reflectance.
MORTH 801.3.4. Messages/borders: The messages (legends, letters, numerals etc.) and borders
shall either be screen-printed or of cut-outs. Screen printing shall be processed and finished with
materials and in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer. Cut-outs shall be of materials as

Date Page 220
specified by the sheeting manufacturer and shall be bonded with the sheeting in the manner
specified by the manufacturer.
MORTH 801.3.5. For screen-printed transparent coloured areas on white sheeting, the co-efficient
of retro-reflection shall not be less than 50 per cent of the values of corresponding colour in Tables
SOO-l and 800-2, as applicable.
MORTH 801.3.6. Cut-out messages and borders, wherever used, shall be made out of retro-
reflective sheeting (as per Clause S01.3.2 or S01.3.3 as applicable), except those in black which
shall be of non-reflective sheeting.
MORTH 801.3.7. Colour: Unless otherwise specified, the general colour scheme shall be as
stipulated in IS : 5 "Colour for Ready Mixed Paints",viz.
Blue - IS Colour No. 166: French Blue
Red - IS Colour No. 537: Signal Red
Green - IS Colour No. 284: India Green
Orange - IS Colour No. 591: Deep Orange.
The Colours shall be durable and uniform in acceptable hue when viewed in day light or
under normal headlights at night.
MORTH 801.3.8. Adhesives: The sheeting shall, either have a pressure sensitive adhesive of the
aggressive-tack type requiring no heat, solvent or other preparation for adhesion to a smooth clean
surface, or a tack free adhesive activated by heat, applied in a heat-vacuum applicator, in a manner
recommended by the sheeting manufacturer. The adhesive shall be protected by an easily removable
liner (removable by peeling without soaking in water or other solvent) and shall be suitable for the
type of material of the base pl3le used for the sign. The adhesive shall form a durable bond to
smooth, corrosion and weather resistant surface of the base plate such that it shall not be possible to
remove the sheeting from the sign base in one piece by use of sharp instrument. In case of pressure-
sensitive adhesive sheeting, the sheeting shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
Specifications. Sheeting with adhesives
requiring use of solvents or other preparation for adhesive shall be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
MORTH 801.3.9. Refurbishment: Where existing signs are specified for refurbishment, the
sheeting shall have a semi-rigid aluminium backing pre-coated with aggressive-tack type pressure
sensitive adhesive. The adhesive shall be suitable for the type of material used for the sign and
should thoroughly bond with that material..
MORTH 801.3.10. Fabrication :

MORTH 801.3.10.1. Surface to be reflectorised shall be effectively prepared to receive the retro-
reflective sheeting. The aluminium sheeting shall be de-greased either by acid or hot alkaline
etching and all scale/dust removed to obtain a smooth plain surface before the application of retro
Date Page 221
reflective sheeting. If the surface is rough, approved surface primer may be used. After cleaning,
metal shall not be handled, except by suitable device or clean canvas gloves, between all cleaning
and preparation operation and application of reflective sheeting/primer. There shall be no
opportunity for metal to come in contact with grease, oil or other contaminants prior to the
application of retro-reflective sheeting.
MORTH 801.3.10.2. Complete sheets of the material shall be used on the signs except where it is
unavoidable; at splices, sheeting with pressure sensitive adhesives shall be overlapped not less than
5 mm. Sheeting with heat-activated adhesives may be spliced with an overlap not less than 5 mm or
butted with ~ gap not exceeding 0.75 mm. Where screen printing with transparent colours is
proposed, only butt jointing shall be used. The material shall cover the sign surface evenly and shall
be free from twists, cracks and folds. Cut-outs to produce legends and borders shall be bonded with
the sheeting in the manner specified by the manufacturer.
MORTH 801.3.11. Warranty and durability : The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a
seven-year warranty for satisfactory field performance including stipulated retro-reflectance of the
retro-reflective sheeting of high intensity grade and a five year warranty for the adhesive sheeting of
engineering grade. and submit the same to the Engineer. In addition, a seven year and a five year
warranty for satisfactory in-field performance of the finished sign with retro-reflective sheeting of
high intensity grade and engineering grade respectively, inclusive of the screen printed or cut out
letters/legends and their bonding to the retro-reflective sheeting shall be obtained from the
Contractor/supplier and passed on to the Engineer. The Contractor/supplier shall also furnish a
certification that the signs and materials supplied against the assigned work meets all the stipulated
requirements and carry the stipulated warranty.
Processed and applied in accordance with recommended procedures, the reflective material shall be
weather resistant and, following cleaning, shall show no appreciable discolouration, cracking,
blistering or dimensional change. and shall not have less than 50 per cent of the specified minimum
reflective intensity values (Tables 800-1 and 800-2) when subjected to accelerated weathering for
1000 hours, using type E or EH Weatherometer (AASHTO Designation M 268).
MORTH 801.4. Installation

MORTH 801.4.1. Sign posts, their foundations and sign mountings shall be so constructed as to
hold these in a proper and permanent position against the normal storm wind loads or displacement
by vandalism. Normally, signs with an area upto 0.9 sq. m. shall be mounted on a single post, and
for greater area two or more supports shall be provided. Sign supports may be of mild steel,
reinforced concrete or galvanised iron (G.I). Post- end(s) shall be firmly fixed to the ground by
means of properly designed foundation. The work of foundation shall conform to relevant
Specifications as specified.
MORTH 801.4.2. All components of signs and supports, other than the reflective portion and OJ.
posts shall be thoroughly descaled, cleaned, primed and painted with two coats of epoxy paint. Any
part of mild steel
(M.S.) post below ground shall be painted with three coats of red lead paint.

Date Page 222
MORTH 801.4.3. The signs shall be fixed to the posts by welding in the case of steel posts and by
bolts and washers of suitable size in the case of reinforced concrete or GI posts. After the nuts have
been tightened, the tails of the bolts shall be furred over with a hammer to prevent removal.
MORTH 801.5. Measurements for Payment The measurement of standard cautionary, mandatory
and information signs shall be in numbers of different types of signs supplied and fixed, while for
direction and place identification signs, these shall be measured by area in square metres.
MORTH 801.6. Rate The Contract unit rate shall be payment in full for the cost of making the road
sign, including all materials, installing it at the site and incidentals to complete the work in
accordance with the Specifications.
Item SR No.15:-
Providing and fixing Cautionary Sign Board made out of 2mm aluminium sheet,
size 90 x 90 x 90 cms equilateral triangle, as per the design of IRC-67-1977. Pre
treated with phospheting process and acid etching coated with one coat of epoxy
primer and two coats of best quality epoxy paint, reflectorized with retro
reflective sheeting as per the latest M.O.S.T. specification, 3.1 Mt. long stand
post and frame fabricated from suitable size iron angle of 35 x 35 x 3 mm, 75 x
75 x 6 mm; painted with best quality epoxy coating in black and white bends.
The details of symbol for each board shall be as per the instruction of engineer
in charge. The fixing at site shall be in 1:2:4 CC block of size 45 x 45 x 60 cms
for each leg, including excavation curing etc. complete under the supervision of
Engineer-In-Charge (B) High Intensity grade.
This work shall consist of Providing and fixing Cautionary Sign Board and shall be carried out as
per relevant detailed specification of Item No. 13 of this contract.
Item SR No.16 :-
Providing and fixing ordinary kilometer stone of precast R.C.C. 1:2:4 including
necessary reinforcement as per I.R.C. type design in C.C. 1: 4:8 including letter
and paints etc. complete. (for N.H., SH. and M.D.R.)
1. Kilometer stone shall be of approved quality and shall be either black Rajula stone or of precast
1:2:4 R.C.C. as specified in the item.
2. The size manner of fixing painting and lettering of K.M. stone specification as per I.RC. 8 (Type
design for Highway kilometer stones.) The fixing of K.M. stone shall be carried out in ordinary
concrete of grade specified in the item using broken metal field metal or gravel The measurement
for payment shall be made per No of K.M. stone fixed in position
Date Page 223
3.Unit rate for kilometre stone include the cost of all materials, labour, tools, fixing, finishing curing
lettering and painting as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Item SR No.17 :-
Providing and fixing marble slab including engraving and painting complete of
Size 75 cm x 60 cm x 4 cm
1. Marble plate shall be white and of approved quality and shall be of size as mentioned in the
item. Lettering shall be done by V-shape engraving and shall be filled with black paint of approved
quality, lettering shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The Marble plate shall be
fixed in neat cement at a place as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Cement shall confirm to
relevant IS Specification.
2. Measurement shall be per number of marble plate fixed.
3. Unit rates includes cost of all material labour and tools to complete the work
Item SR No.18:-
Supplying and fixing Cats eye (Stimsonite) made out of Acrilobeautilesterine
injection high compressed moulding with reflector made of MMC Prismatic type
size 12 cm x 6 cm x 2.5 cm provided with bituminous adhesive 100 g. with each
unit for fixing ( High intensity grade)
1.1 General
Reflective Pavement marker (RPM) or road stud is device which is bonded to or
anchored within the road surface for lane marking and delineation for night time visibility. It
reflects incident light in directions close to the direction from which it came.
1.2 Definitions
1.2.1 Description of Terms Specific to this standard
1.2.1.1 Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) or specific intensity = the ratio of luminous
intensity of the retro-reflector in the direction of observation to luminance at the
retro-reflector on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the incident light
expressed in terms of Milaca deal as per incident lux (med/ lx).
1.2.1.2 Horizontal entrance angle – the angle in the horizontal plant between the direction of
incident light and the normal to the leading edge of the marker.
1.2.1.3 Observation angle – the angle in the reflector between the illumination axis and the
observation axis.

Date Page 224
1.2.1.4 Retro – reflection – reflection in which the radiation is returned in direction close to
the direction from which it came, this property being maintained over were
variations of the direction of incident radiation.
1.2.1.5 Head – that part of a road stud which is above the road surface where the road stud is
fixed in position in the road.
1.2.1.6 Upper surface – that part of the external surface of road stud which is visible when
the road stud is fixed in position in the road.
1.2.1.7 Anchorage – that part of a road stud which is below the road surface above the road
stud is fixed position in the road.
1.3 Material
1.3.1 Plastic body of RPM road stud shall be moulded from ASA (Acrylic Sterner
Acrylonitrile) or HIPS (Impacts polystyrene) or ABS or any other suitable material
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The marker shall support a load of 13635 kg
tested in accordance with ASTM D4280.
1.3.2 Reflective panels shall consist if number of lenses containing single or dual prismatic
cubes capable of providing total internal reflection of the light entering the lens face.
Lenses shall be moulded of methyl methecrylate conforming to ASTMD 788 or
equivalent.
1.4 Design
1.4.1 The slope or retro-reflecting surface shall preferably be 35 + 5 degree to base.
1.4.2 The area of each retro-reflecting surface shall not be less than 13.0 Sq.cm.
1.5 Optical Performance
1.5.1 Unidirectional and bi-directional studs
1.5.1.1 Each reflector or combination of reflectors on each face of the stud shall have a CIL
not less than given in Table 1 or 2 as appropriate.
Table 1 Minimum C.I.L. Values for Category "A" studs.

Entrance angle Observation angle C.I.L. in med 1 x
White Ambe Red
r
0" U 5" L & R 0.3" 220 110 44
0" U 10" L & R 0.5" 120 60 24
Table 1 Minimum C.I.L. Values for Category "B" studs.

Entrance angle Observation angle C.I.L. in med 1 x
White Amber Red
0" U 6" L & R 0.3" 20 10 4
0" U 10" L & R 0.5" 15 7.5 3
Note: The entrance angle of 0"U corresponds to the normal aspect of the reflectors when
the reflecting road stud is installed in horizontal road surface.
Date Page 225
1.5.1.2 A stud that incorporates one or more corner cube reflectors shall be considered to be
included in category "A". A stud that incorporates one or more biconvex reflectors
shall be considered to be included in category "B".
1.5.2 Omni – directional studs

Each Omni-directional stud shall have a minimum C.I.L. of not less than med/ lx.
1.5.3 Tests
1.5.3.1 Coefficient of luminance intensity can be measured by produced described in
ASTMD 809 "Practice for Measuring Photometric Characteristics" or as
recommended in BS 873 Part 4:1973.
1.5.3.2 Under test conditions a stud shall not be considered to fall the photometric
requirements of the measured C.I.L. at any one position of measurement is less than
the values specified in Table 1 or 2 provided that.
(A) The value is not less than 80% of the specified minimum, and
(B) The average of the left and right measurements for the specific angle is greater than
the specified minimum.
1.6 Fixing of Reflective Markers
1.6.1 Requirements
1.6.1.1 The enveloping profile of the head of the stud shall be smooth and the suds shall not
present any sharp edges to traffic.
1.6.1.2 The reflecting portions of the studs shall be free from crevice or ledges where dirt
might accumulate.
1.6.1.3 All road studs shall be legibly marked with the name, trade mark of other means of
identification of the manufacture.
1.6.1.4 Marker height shall not exceed 20 mm.
1.6.1.5 Marker width shall not exceed 130 mm.
1.6.1.6 The base of the marker shall be flat within 1.3 mm. If the bottom of the marker is
configured. The outermost faces of the configurations shall not deviate more than 1.3
mm form a flat surface.
1.6.2 Placement
1.6.2.1 The reflective marker shall be fixed to the road surface using the adhesives and the
produced recommended by the manufacturer. No nails shall be used to affix the
marker as nails are hazardous for the roads.
1.6.2.2 Regardless of the type of adhesive used. The markers shall not be fixed if the
pavement is not surface dry and on new asphalt concrete surfacing unit the surfacing
has been opened to traffic for a period of not less than 14 hours.
1.6.2.3 The portions of the highway surface, to which the marker is to be bonded by the
adhesive, shall be free of dirt, curing compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose of
unsound layers, paint and any other material which would adversely affect the bond
of the adhesive.
1.6.2.4 Use a wire brush, if necessary to loosen and remove dirt. Then brush or blow clean.
1.6.2.5 The adhesive shall be places uniformly on the cleaned pavement surface or on the
bottom to the marker in a quantity sufficient to result in complete coverage of the
area of contact of the marker with no voids present and with a slight excess after the
marker has been lightly pressed in place.

Date Page 226
1.6.2.6 For epoxy installations, excess adhesive around the edge of the marker, excess
adhesive on the pavement and adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the markers shall
be immediately removed. Soft rags moistened with mineral spirits of kerosene may
be used a necessary to remove adhesive from exposed faces of pavement marker.
1.7 Warranty and durability
The contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a two year warranty for
satisfactory light performance including stipulated retro-reflectance of the reflecting
panel and submit the same to the Engineer. In addition, a two year warranty for
satisfactory infield performance of the finished road marker shall also be given by
the contractor who carried out the work of fixing of reflective road markers. In case
the markers are displaced, damaged get worn out or lose their reflectivity compared
to stipulated standards, the contractor would be required to replaced all such markers
within 15 days of the intimation from the Engineer at his own cost and with no extra
remuneration to be paid for such works.
1.8 Measurement for Payment
The measurement of Cats eye (MMC) shall be in numbers of markers supplied and
fixed.
1.9 Rate
The contact unit rate for Cats eye (MMC) shall be payment in full compensation for
furnishing all labour, material, tools, equipment including incidental costs necessary
for carrying out the work at site conforming to the specifications complete as per
approved drawings or as directed.
Item SR No. 19:

Supplying and fixing reinforced concrete heavy duty non-Pressure pipes with
collars for culverts carrying heavy traffic as per IS 458-1991 specifications
including setting the pipes in C.M. 1:2 watering and laying (to level or slopes) of
class NP3 of following internal daimeters.(vii) 900mm dia.
This shall consist of furnishing and installing reinforced cement concrete pipe of the type
diameter and length required at the location shown on the drawings or as ordered by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Reinforced concrete pipe shall be of NP3 type conforming to the requirements of IS : 458
and shall be of dia. as specified in the item. Each consignment of cement concrete pipes
shall be inspected, if necessary and approved by the Engineer-in-charge either at the place of
manufacture or at the site before their incorporation in the works.

Date Page 227
NP3, NP2 and NP1 pipes are used for R.C.C. Pipes. Where the testing of pipes will not be
feasible the contractors will have to produce a certificate from the' manufacturer on
company's letter head in the given' hereinafter from.
Production of such certificate will not however relieve the Contractor form his responsibility
of supplying pipes of required standard and will have to bear the loss or damage caused to
the work on account of defects found subsequently during execution. It will also be
necessary to purchase these pipes from manufacturer having standard equipments for
carrying out various tests as per IS : 458 at his factory.
Form of Certificate for NP-3, NP-2, NP-1 Pipes
We___________________________________________________________
Manufacturer or R.C.C. Pipes produce R.C.C. pipes as per the requirement of IS : 458 and
also carry out the required test at out place, We have acquired equipments for carrying out
test and are prepared to carry out tests at our factory sites. We have experience of
manufacturing of pipes of years. The pipes supplied by us to
M/S._____________________________.
Satisfy the requirement of IS:458.
Date:__________________
Place:__________________
Manufacturer's Sign ___________________
3. No pipes shall be placed in position until the foundations have been approved by the
Engineer-in charge. Where two or more pipes are to be laid adjacent to each other, they shall
be separated by a distance equal to at least half the diametre of the pipe subject to minimum

Date Page 228
of 900 mm. The laying of pipes on the prepared foundation shall start from the outlet and
proceed towards the inlet and be completed to the specified lines and grades. The pipes shall
be fitted and matched so that when laid in works they from a culvert with a smooth uniform
invert. Any pipe found defective or damaged during laying shall be removed at there cost of
Contractor.
4 The pipes shall be jointed either by collar joint or by flush joint in the former case the collars
shall be of R.C.C. 150 to 200 mm. wide and having the same strength as the pipes to be
jointed. Caulking space shall be between 13 and 20 mm. according to the diametre of the
pipes caulking material shall be slightly wet mix of cement and sand in the ratio of 1:2
rammed with caulking irons. Before caulking the collar shall be so placed that its centre
coincides with that of pipes and an even annular space is left between the collar and the
pipes. Flush joint may be shaped to from a self centering joint with a joining space 13 cm
wide. The joining space shall be filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 sand) mixed
sufficiently dry to remain in position when forced with a trowel or rammer. Care shall be
taken to fill all voids and excess mortar shall be removed. All joints shall be made with care
so that their interior surface is smooth and consistent with the interior surface of the pipes.
After finishing, the joint shall be kept covered and damp for at least four days.
5. R. C. C. pipes shall be measured along their centre between their inlet and outlet ends in
linear metres.
6. The rate for the pipes shall include the cost of pipe including loading, unloading, handing,
storing laying in position and joining complete.

Date Page 229
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL

CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE “B”
Item SR No. 1
Clearing the site before commencement and after completion of the work
1. Before starting the work, the site shown on plans shall be cleared of all obstructions,
loose stones and materials, rubbish of all kinds as well as all trees and brush wooden except
those marked for preservation, the roots being entirely grubbed up. No trees are to be cut
down before obtaining the instruction from Engineer-in-charge.
2. The stuff obtained from clearance shall be stacked in such a place and in such a manner
as ordered by the Engineer-in-charge and the ground shall be left in a perfectly clean
condition.
3. In jungle clearing, all trees, not specifically marked for preservation, bamboos, jungle
wood and brush wood shall be cut down, their roots rubbed up. All wood and material
available shall be stacked as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
4. All holes or hollows, whether originally or produced by digging up roots shall be

carefully filled up with earth, well rammed and leveled up neatly as directed.
5. After completion of the work, but before its acceptance, the site shall be cleared of
all scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish etc. as per contract. No extra payment shall be
made for site.
6. The rate for this item of work shall be for the complete job and shall be paid at the
lump sum rate tendered for the work on completion of the entire work.
Measurements for Payment

Clearing the site before commencement and after completion of the work shall be measured
on L.S. basis in terms of Job.
Acceptance
Acceptance of clearing the site before commencement and after completion of the work
shall be based on visual inspection of the work for compliance with the above specifications to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Date Page 230
Rate
a. The Contract unit rates for the Clearing the site before commencement and after completion of
the work shall be paid/payable in full for carrying out the required operations including full
compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
the work. These will also include removal of stumps and roots of trees less than 300 mm in girth
as well as stumps left over after cutting of trees carried out by another agency of the Contractor
or Government, excavation and backfilling to required density, where necessary, and handling,
salvaging, piling and disposing of the cleared materials with all lifts and up to a lead of 1000 m.
b. The Contract unit rate for clearing the site before commencement and after completion of the
work is on Job basis.
Item No. 2
Marking out the centre line of the bridge and various other component
structures and complete lining out and levelling with theodolite levels including
constructing necessary masonry pillars for lines and levels and establishing
necessary bench marks etc. as directed.
The Centre line axis of the Rail Over Bridge with approaches shall be surveyed along their
lengths. Centre line pegs for Rail Over Bridge with approaches including foundation pegs at each
location and at suitable distance of 3.0 m c/c along the approach on each side shall be fixed.
All deviation angles of the central line axis for the Rail Over Bridge with approaches including
tangent distances shall be demarcated with pegs fixed in to the ground.
The rate on Lump sum basis shall include all equipment/theodolite/total station survey
instruments, necessary survey party, supply and fixing of pegs including, fixing of pillars for
intermediate stations labour, materials required in completing the job as required, as per direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
The rate shall be paid on lump sum basis for completed item as directed.
Item no: 3
Earthwork for embankment including breaking clods, dressing with all lead
and lift and including watering rolling and consolidation of sub grade in layers
at O.M.C. to required dry density including filling the depression which occur
during the process using Vibratory roller 8T to 10T. (D) From Borrow area
within 5.0 KM. lead.

Date Page 231
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL:
Description: These Specifications shall apply to the construction of embankments including sub
grades, earthen shoulders and miscellaneous backfills with approved materials obtained from
contractor’s own earth. No railway land / Gujarat State land to be used as source of earth,
contractor shall arrange own earth. All embankments, sub grades, earthen shoulders and
miscellaneous backfills shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer.
MATERIALS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Physical requirements:
The materials used in embankments sub grades, earthen shoulders and miscellaneous back fills
shall be soil, murrum, gravel a mixture of these or any other material approved by the Engineer.
Such materials shall be free of logs, stumps, roots, rubbish or any other ingredient likely to
deteriorate or affect the stability of the embankment sub grade.
The following types of material shall be considered unsuitable for embankment:
(a) Materials from swamps, marshes and bogs;
(b) Peat, log, stump and perishable material and soil that classifies as OL, 01, OH or Pt in
accordance with IS: 1498
(c) Materials susceptible to spontaneous combustion
(d) Materials in a frozen condition
(e) Clay having liquid limit exceeding 70 and plasticity index exceeding 45; and
(f) Materials with salts resulting in leaching in the embankment.
Expansive clay exhibiting marked swell and shrinkage, properties ("free swelling index"
exceeding 50 percent when tested as per IS:2720-Part 40) shall not be used as a fill materia1.Where
an expansive clay with acceptable "free swelling index" value is used as a fill material, sub grade
and top 500 mm portion of the embankment just below sub grade shall be non-expansive in nature.
Any fill material with a soluble sulphate content exceeding 1.9 grams of sulphate (expressed as
S03) per liter when tested in accordance with BS:1377 Test 10, but using a 2: 1 water-soil ratio shall
not be & deposited within 500 mm or other distance described in the Contract, of concrete, cement
bound materials or other cementious materials forming part of the Permanent Works.
Materials with a total sulphate content (expressed as S03) exceeding 0.5 per cent by mass, when
tested in accordance with BS: 1377 Test 9 shall not be deposited within 500 mm, or other distances
described in the contract, of metallic items farming part of the Permanent Work
The size of the coarse material in the mixture of earth shall ordinarily not exceed 75mm when
being placed in the embankment and 50 mm when placed in the sub grade. However the Engineer
may at his discretion permit the use of material coarser than this also. If he is Satisfied that the same
will not present any difficulty as regards the placement of fill material and its compaction to the
requirements of these specifications. The maximum particle size shall not be more than two third of
the compacted layer thickness.

Date Page 232
Ordinarily, only the materials satisfying the density requirements given in MORTH Table 300-1
shall be employed for the Construction of the embankment and the sub grade.
MORTH TABLE 300-1:- DENSITY REQUIREMENTS OF EMBANKMENT AND

SUBGRADE MATERIALS
Maximum Laboratory dry
Sr. No. Type of work unit weight when tested as
per IS:2720(part 8)
Embankments up to. 3 meters height, not
1. Not less than 15.2 kN/cum.
subjected to extensive flooding.
Embankments exiting 3 meters height of
2. embankments of any height subject to long Not less than 16.0 kN/cum.
period of inundation
Sub grade and earthen shoulders/
3. Not less than 17.5 kN/cu.m.
Verges/backfill
Notes:
(1) This Table is not applicable for lightweight fill materials e.g. cinder, fly ash etc.
(2) The Engineer may relax these requirements at his discretion taking into account the availability
of materials for construction and other relevant factors.
(3) The materials to be used in sub grade should also. Satisfy design CBR at the dry unit weight
Applicable as per Table 300-2 of MORT&H.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The materials for embankment shall be obtained from approved sources with preference given
to materials becoming available from nearby roadway excavation or any other excavation under the
same Contract.
The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available materials are saved for the sub
grade and the embankment portion just below the sub grade.
Borrow materials: Where the materials are to be obtained from designated borrow areas, the
location, size and shape of these areas shall be as indicated by the Engineer and the same shall not
be opened without his written permission. Where specific borrow areas are not designated by the
Employer/the Engineer, arrangement for locating the source of supply of materials for embankment
and sub grade as well as compliance environmental requirements in respect of excavation and
borrow areas as stipulated from time to time by the Ministry of Environment and Forests,
Government of India and the local bodies as applicable, shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.

Date Page 233
Borrow pits along the road shall be discouraged. If permitted by the Engineer, these shall not be
dug continuously. Ridges of not less than 8 m width should be left at intervals not exceeding 300m.
Small drains shall be cut through the ridges to facilitate drainage.
The depth of the pits shall be so regulated that their bottom does not cut an imaginary line
having a slope of 1 vertical to 4 horizontal projected from the edge of the final section of the bank,
the maximum depth in any case being limited to 1.5 m. Also, no pit shall be dug within the offset
width from the toe of the embankment required as per the consideration of stability with a minimum
width of 10m.
Haulage of material to embankments or other areas of fill shall proceed only when sufficient
spreading and compaction plant is operating at the place of deposition.
No excavated acceptable material other that surplus to requirements of the Contract shall be
removed from the site. Should the contractor be permitted to remove acceptable material from the
site to suit his operational procedure, and then he shall make good any consequent deficit of
material arising there form.
Where the excavation reveals a combination of acceptable and unacceptable materials, the
Contractor shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, carry out the excavation in such a
manner that the acceptable materials are excavated separately for use in the permanent works
without contamination by the unacceptable materials. The acceptable materials shall be stockpiled
separately.
The Contractor shall ensure that he does not adversely affect the stability of excavation or fills
by the methods of stockpiling materials, use of plants or sitting of temporary buildings or structures.
The Contractor shall obtain representative samples from each of the identified borrow areas and
have these tested at the site laboratory following a testing programme approved by the Engineer
shall be ensured that the sub grade material when compacted to the density requirements as in
MORTH Table 300-2 shall yield the design CBR value of the sub grade.
MORTH TABLE 300-2:- COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMBANKMENT AND
SUB GRADE
Relative compaction as
percentage of
Sr. No. Type of work/material
max.1aboratory dry density
as per IS:2720 (part 8)
1 Sub-grade and earthen shoulders Not less than 97%
2 Embankment Not less than 95%
3 Expansive clay
a) Sub grade and 500 mm portion Just below the sub-
Not allowed.
grade
b) Remaining portion of embankment 90-95%

Date Page 234
The Contractor shall at least 7 working days before commencement of compaction submit the
following to the Engineer for approval:
(i) The value of maximum dry density and optimum content obtained in accordance with IS: 2720
(part 8), appropriate for each of the fill materials he intends to use.
(ii) A graph of density plotted against moisture content from which each of the values in (i) above
of maximum dry density and optimum moisture content were determined.
(iii)The Dry density-moisture content-CBR relationships for light, intermediate and heavy
compctive efforts (light corresponding to IS: 2720 (part 7), heavy corresponding to IS:
2720(part 8) and intermediate in-between the two) for each of the fill materials he intends to use
in the Sub grade.
Once the above information has been approved by the Engineer, it shall form the basis for
compaction.
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS:
Setting Out: After the site has been cleared to Clause 201, the work shall be set out to Clause
301.3. 1. The limits of embankment/sub grade shall be marked by fixing batter pegs on both sides at
regular intervals as guides before commencing the earthwork. The embankment/sub grade shall be
built sufficiently wider than the design dimension so that surplus material may be trimmed;
ensuring that the remaining material is to be desired density and the position specified and conforms
to the specified side slopes.
Dewatering: If the foundation of the embankment is in an area with stagnant water, and in the
opinion of the Engineer it is feasible to remove it, the same shall be removed by bailing out or
pumping, as directed by the Engineer and the area of the embankment foundation shall be kept dry.
Care shall be taken to discharge the drained water so as not to cause damage to the works, crops or
any other property. Due to any negligence on the Part of the Contractor, if any such damage is
caused, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to repair restore it to original condition or
compensate the damage at his own cost.
If the embankment is to be constructed under water, MORTH Clause 305.4.6 shall apply.
Stripping and Storing topsoil: In localities where most of the available embankment materials are
not conducive to plant growth,-or when so directed by the Engineer, the topsoil from all areas of
cutting and from all areas to be covered by embankment foundation shall be stripped to specified
depths not exceeding 150 mm and stored in stockpiles of height not exceeding 2 m for covering
embankment slopes, cut slopes and other disturbed areas where re-vegetation is desired. Topsoil
shall not be unnecessarily trafficked either before stripping or when in a stockpile Stockpiles shall
not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling shall be kept to a minimum.
Compacting ground supporting embankment Sub grade: Where necessary, the original ground
shall be levelled to facilitate placement of first layer of embankment, scarified, mixed with water

Date Page 235
and then compacted by rolling so as to achieve minimum dry density as given in MORTH Table
300-2.
In case where the difference between the sub grade level (Top of the sub grade on which
pavement rests) and ground level is less than 0.5 m and the ground does not have 97 per cent
relative compaction with respect to the dry density as given in MORTH Table 300-2, the ground
shall be loosened up to a level 0.5 m below the sub grade level, watered and compacted in layers in
accordance with MORTH Clauses 305.3.5 and 305.3.6 to not less than 97 per cent of dry density as
given in Table 300-2.
Where so directed by the Engineer, any unsuitable material occurring in the embankment
foundation shall be removed and replaced by approved materials laid in layers to the required
degree of compaction.
Embankment or sub grade work shall not proceed until the foundations for Embankment/sub
grade have been inspected by the Engineer for satisfactory condition and approved.
Any foundation treatment specified for embankments especially high embankments, resting on
suspect foundations as revealed by borehole logs .shall be carried out in a manner and to the depth
as desired by the Engineer. Where the ground on which an embankment is to be built has any of the
,material types (a) to (f) in MORTH Clause 305.2.1,atleast 500 mm. of such material must be
removed and replaced by acceptable fill material before embankment construction commences.
Spreading material in layers and bringing to appropriate moisture content

The embankment and sub grade material shall be spread in layers of uniform thickness not
exceeding 200mm.compacted thickness over the entire width of embankment by mechanical means,
finished by a motor grader and compacted as per MORTH Clause 305.3.6.The motor grader blade
shall have hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustment and maintain the same so, as to achieve
the specific slope and grade. Successive layers shall not be placed until the layer under construction
has been thoroughly compacted to the specified requirements as in MORTH Table 300-2 and got
approved by the Engineer. Each compacted layer shall be finished parallel to the final cross-section
of the embankment.
Moisture content of the material shall be checked at the site of placement prior to
commencement of compaction; if found to be out of agreed limits, the same shall be made good.
Where water is required to be added in such constructions, water shall be sprinkled from a water
tanker fitted with sprinkler capable of applying water uniformly with a controllable rate of flow to
variable widths of surface but without any flooding. The water shall be added uniformly and
thoroughly mixed in soil by balding, dicing or harrowing until uniform moisture content is obtained
throughout the depth of the layer.
If the material delivered to the roadbed is too wet, it shall be dried, by aeration and exposure to
the sun, till the moisture content is acceptable for compaction. Should circumstances arise, where
owing to wet weather, the moisture content cannot be reduced to the required amount by the above
procedure, compaction work shall be suspended. Moisture content of each layer of soil shall be
checked in accordance with IS: 2720. (part , 2),and unless otherwise mentioned, shall be so
adjusted, making due allowance for evaporation losses, that at the time of compaction it is in the

Date Page 236
range of 1 per cent above to 2 per cent below the optimum moisture content determined in
accordance with IS:2720 (Part 7) or IS: 2720 (part 8) as the case may be. Expansive clays shall
however, be compacted at moisture content corresponding to the specified dry density, but on the
wet side of the optimum moisture content obtained, from the laboratory compaction curve.
After adding the required amount of water, the soil shall be processed by means of graders,
harrows, rotary mixers or as otherwise approved by the Engineer until the layer is uniformly wet
clods or hard lumps of earth shall be broken to have a maximum size of 75 mm when being placed
in the embankment and a maximum size of 50 mm when being placed in the sub grade.
Embankment and other areas of fill shall, unless otherwise required in the Contract or permitted
by the Engineer, be constructed evenly over their full width and their fullest possible extent and the
Contractor shall control and direct construction plant and other vehicular traffic uniformly over
them. Damage by construction plant and other vehicular traffic shall be made good by the
Contractor with material having the same characteristics and strength as the material had before it
was damaged.
Embankments and other areas of unsupported fills shall not be constructed with steeper side
slopes, or to greater widths than those shown in the Contract, except to permit adequate compaction
at the edges before trimming back, or to obtain the final profile following any settlement of the fill
and the underlying material.
Whenever fill is to be deposited' against the face of a natural slope, or sloping earthworks face
including embankments, cutting, other fills and excavations steeper than 1 vertical on 4 horizontal,
such faces shall be benched as per MORTH Clause 305.4.1 immediately before placing the
subsequent fill.
All permanent faces of side slopes of embankments and other areas of fill formed shall,
subsequent to any trimming operations, be reworked and sealed to the satisfaction of the Engineer
by tracking a tracked vehicle, considered suitable by the Engineer, on the slope or any other method
Compaction: Only the compaction equipment approved by the Engineer shall be employed to
compact the different material types encountered during construction. Vibratory rollers of suitable
size and capacity as approved by the Engineer shall be used for the different types and grades of
materials required to be compacted either individually or in suitable combinations.
The compaction shall be done with the help of vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight
with plain or pad foot drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of adequate capacity capable of
achieving required compaction.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the efficacy of the equipment he intends to use by carrying out
compaction trials. The procedure to be adopted for this site trials hall first be submitted to the
Engineer for approva1.
Each layer of the material shall be thoroughly compacted to the densities specified in MORTH
Table 300-2. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the finished layer has been tested
according to MORTH Clause 903.2} and accepted by the Engineer. The Engineer may permit
measurement of field dry density by a nuclear moisture/density gauge used in accordance with

Date Page 237
agreed procedure and the gauge is calibrated to provide results identical to that obtained from tests
in accordance with IS: 2720 (Part 28). A record of the same shall be maintained by the Contractor.
When density measurements reveal any soft areas in the embankments /sub grade /earthen
shoulders, further compaction shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer. If in spite of that the
specified compaction is not achieved, the material in the soft areas shall be removed and replaced
by approved material, compacted to the density requirements and satisfaction of the Engineer.
Drainage: The surface of the embankment/ sub grade at all times during construction shall be
maintained at such a cross fall (not flatter than that required for effective drainage of an earthen
surface) as will shed water and prevent ponding.
Repairing of damages caused by rain/spillage of water
The soil in the affected portion shall be removed in such areas as directed by the Engineer
before next layer is laid and refilled in layers and compacted using appropriate mechanical means
such as small vibratory roller, plate compactor or power rammer to achieve the required density in
accordance with MORTH Clause 305.3.6 If the cut is not sufficiently wide for use of required
mechanical means for compaction, the same shall be widened suitably to permit their use for proper
compaction. Tests shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer to ascertain the density
requirements of the repaired area. The' work of repairing the damages including widening of the cut,
if any, shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost, including the arranging of
machinery/equipment for the purpose.
Finishing operations:
Finishing operations shall include the work of shaping and dressing the shoulders/verge/roadbed
and side slopes to conform to the alignment, levels, and cross sections and dimensions shown on the
drawings' or as directed by the Engineer subject to the surface tolerance described in MORTH
Clause 902. Both the upper and lower ends of the side slopes shall be rounded off to improve
appearance and to merge the embankment with the adjacent terrain.
The topsoil, removed and conserved earlier (MORTH Clause 301.3.2 and 305.3.3) shall be
spread over the fill slopes as per directions of the Engineer to facilitate the growth of vegetation.
Slopes shall be roughened and moisture slightly prior to the application of the topsoil in order to
provide satisfactory bond. The depth of the top soil shall be sufficient to sustain plant growth, the
usual thickness being from 75 mm to 150 mm.
Where directed, the slopes shall be turfed with sods in accordance with MORTH Clause 307. If
seeding and mulching of slopes is prescribed, this shall be done to the requirement of MORTH
Clause 308.
Construction of Embankment and sub grade under special conditions, Earthwork for
widening existing road embankment:
When an existing embankment and/or sub grade is to be Widened and its slopes are steeper than
I vertical on 4 horizontal, continuous horizontal benches, each at least 300 mm wide, shall be cut
into the old slope for ensuring adequate bond with the fresh embankment/sub grade material to be
added. The material obtained from cutting of benches could be utilized in the widening of the
embankment/sub grade. However when the existing slope against which the fresh material is to be

Date Page 238
placed is flatter than 1 vertical on 4 horizontal, the slope surface may only be ploughed or scarified
instead of resorting to benching.
Where the width of the widened portions is insufficient to permit the use of conventional rollers,
compaction shall be carried out with the help of small vibratory rollers/plate compactors/power
rammers or any other appropriate equipment approved by the Engineer. And dumping of material
from trucks for widening operations shall be avoided except in difficult circumstances when the
extra width is too narrow to permit the movement of any other types of hauling equipment.
Earthwork for embankment and sub grade to be placed against sloping ground:
Where an embankment /sub grade to be place against sloping ground, the latter shall be
appropriately benched or ploughed/scarified as required in MORTH Clause 305.4.1 before placing
the embankment /sub grade material. Extra earthwork involved in benching or due to ploughing
/scarifying etc. shall be considered incidental to the work.
For wet conditions, benches with slightly inward fall and subsoil drains at the lowest point shall
be provided as per the drawings, before the fill is placed against sloping ground.
Where the contract requires construction of transverse subsurface drain at the cut-fill interface,
work on the same shall be carried out to MORTH Clause 309 in proper sequence with the
embankment and sub grade work as approved by the Engineer.
Earthwork over existing road surface:
Where the embankment is to be placed over an existing road surface, the work shall be carried
out as indicated below,
(i) If the existing road surface is of granular or bituminous type and lies within 1 m of the new
sub grade level, the same shall be scarified to a depth of 50 Rm or more if specified, o as to
provide ample bond between the old and new material ensuring that at least 500 mm portion
below the top of new sub grade level is compacted to the desired density.
(ii) If the existing road surface is of cement concrete type and lies within 1 m of the new sub
grade level the same shall be removed completely.
(iii) If the level difference between the existing road surface and the new formation level is more
than 1 m. the existing s surface shall be permitted to stay in place without any modification.
Embankment and sub grade around structures:
To avoid interference with the construction of abutments, wing walls or return walls of
culvert/bridge structures, the Contractor shall, at points to be determined by the Engineer suspend
work on embankment forming approaches to such structures, until such time as the construction of
the latter is sufficiently advanced to permit the completion of approaches without the risk of damage
to the structure.
Unless directed otherwise, the filling around culverts, bridges and other structures up to a
distance of twice the height of the road from the back of the abutment shall be carried out
independent of the work on the main embankment. The fill material shall not be placed against any
abutment or wing wall, unless permission has been given by the Engineer but in any case not until
the concrete or masonry has been in position for 14 days. The embankment and sub grade shall be

Date Page 239
brought up simultaneously in equal layers on each side of the structure to avoid displacement and
unequal pressure. The sequence of work in this regard shall be got approved from the Engineer.
The material used for backfill shall not be all' organic soil or highly plastic clay having plasticity
index and liquid limit more than 20 and 40 respectively when tested according to IS: 2720 (part 5)
.Filling behind abutments and wing walls for all structures shall conform to the general guidelines
given in Appendix 6 of IRC: 78 (Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges-
Section VII) in respect of the Just below the sub grade type of material, the extent of backfill, its
laying d compaction etc. The fill material shall be deposited in horizontal layers in loose thickness
and compacted thoroughly to the requirements of MORTH Table 300-2.
Where the provision of any filter medium is specified behind the abutment, the same shall be
laid in layers simultaneously with the laying of fill material. The material used for filter shall
conform to the requirements' for filter medium spelt out in MORTH Clause 2502/309.3.2 (B) unless
otherwise specified in the Contract.
Where it may be impracticable to use conventional rollers, the compaction shall be carried out
by appropriate mec4anical means such as small vibratory roller, plate compactor or power rammer.
Care shall be t en to see that the compaction equipment does not hit or come too close to any
structural member so as to cause any damage to them or excessive pressure against the structure.
Construction of embankment over ground incapable of supporting construction equipment

Where embankment is to be constructed across ground which will not support the weight of
repeated heavy loads of construction equipment, the first layer of the fill may be constructed by
placing successive loads of material in a uniformly distributed layer of a minimum thickness
required to support the construction equipment as permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor, if so
desired by him, may also use suitable geo synthetic material to increase the bearing capacity of the
foundation. This exception to normal procedure will not be permitted where, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the embankments could be constructed in the approved manner over such ground by the
use of lighter or modified equipment after proper ditching and drainage have been provided. Where
this' exception is' permitted, the selection of the material and the construction procedure to obtain an
acceptable layer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost of providing suitable traffic
conditions for. Construction equipment over any area of the Contract will be the responsibility of
the Contractor and no extra payment will be made to him. The remainder of the embankment shall
be constructed as specified in MORTH Clause 305.3.
Embankment construction under water:
Where filling or backfilling is to be placed under water, only acceptable granular material or
rock shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Acceptable granular material shall
consist of graded, hard durable 'particles with maximum particle size not exceeding 75mm. The
material should be non-plastic having uniformity coefficient of not less than 10. The material placed
in open water shall be deposited' by end tipping without compaction.
Earthwork for high Embankment:

Date Page 240
In the case of high embankments, the Contractor shall normally use the, material from the
specified borrow area. In case he desires to use different material for his own convenience, he shall
have to carry out necessary soil investigations and redesign the high embankment at his own cost.
The contractor shall then furnish the soil test data and design of high embankment for approval of
the Engineer, who reserves the right to accept or reject it if necessary, stage construction of fills and
any controlled rates of filling shall be carried out in accordance with the Contract including
installation of instruments and its monitoring.
Where required, the contractor shall surcharge embankments or other areas of fill with approved
material for the periods specified in the Contract. If settlement of surcharged fill results in any
surcharging Material, which is unacceptable for use in the fill being surcharged, laying below
formation level, the Contractor shall remove the unacceptable material and dispose it as per
direction of the Engineer. He shall then bring the resultant level up to formation level with
acceptable materials.
Settlement period: - Where settlement period is specified in the Contract, the embankment
shall remain in place for the required settlement period before excavating for abutment, wing wall,
retaining wall, footings, etc. or driving foundation piles. The duration of the required settlement
period at each location shall be as provided for in the contract or as directed by the Engineer.
Rolling and watering of earth work in layers with power roller including filling in depression
which occur during the process.
1. For spreading materials in layers and bringing the appropriate moisture content, the
embankment materials shall be spread uniformly over the entire width of the embankment in
layers not exceeding 250mm in loose thickness, Successive layers of embankment shall not be
placed until the layer under construction has been thoroughly compacted to the requirements set
down here under
Moisture content of the materials shall be checked at the source of supply arid it found less
than that specified for compaction; the same shall be made good either at the source or after
spreading the soil in loose thickness for compaction. In the latter case, water shall be sprinkled
directly from a houseline or from a truck mounted water tank and flooding shall not be
permitted under any circumstances.
If the materials delivered to the road bed is too wet it shall be dried, by evaporation arid
exposure to the sun, till the moisture content is brought done to acceptable standard for
compaction should circumstances arise, where owing to wet weather, the moisture content
cannot be reduced to the required level by the above procedure. Work of compaction shall be
suspended.
Moisture content of each layer of soil shall be checked in accordance with IST 2720 (Part-II)
and unless otherwise mentioned shall be so adjusted, making due allowance for evaporation
losses, that at the time of the compaction it is in the range of 1 percent to 2 percent below the
optimum Moisture content determined in accordance with ISI (Part-VII). Highly expansive
clays shall however be compacted at 2 to 4 percent above the optimum moisture content.
After adding the required amount of water, the soil shall be processed by means, of harrows.
Rotary mixers or as otherwise approved until the layer is uniformly wet. Clods or hard lumps of
Date Page 241
earth shall be broken to have maximum size of 150mm when being placed lower layers of the
embankment arid a maximum size of 60mm when being placed in the top 0.5 meter portion of
the embankment below the sub grade.
Hauling equipment shall be dispersed uniformly over entire surface of the previously
constructed layer to minimize cutting of uneven compaction.
Where the embankment is to be constructed on low area ground that will not support the
weight of trucks of other hauling equipment the lower part of the fill should be constructed by
dumping Successive loads in a uniformly distributed layers of a thickness not greater than that
necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent layers.
2. COMPACTION: Only compacting equipment approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be
employed to compact the materials. The contractor shall demonstrate the efficiency of the plants
he intends to use for carrying out compaction trials.
Each layer of the materials shall be thoroughly compacted to the densities specified in Table
below:
Table :-
Sr. Field dry density/MDD as percentage
No. Type of Work / Materials of maximum laboratory dry density as
per IS : 2720 (Part VII)
Top 0.5 meter portion of embankment

1 Not less than 97.
below sub grade level and shoulders
2 Other portion of embankment Not less than 95.
3 Highly expensive class 85 to 90.
Subsequent layers shall be placed only after finished layer has been tested according to
M.O.S.T. specification clause 902 and accepted by the Engineer-in-charge.
When density measurements reveal any soft areas in the embankment further compaction shall
be carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-charge If insight of that the specified compaction is not
achieved, the materials in the soft areas shall be removed and replaced by approved materials and
compacted to the density requirement, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
3. The contract unit rate includes cost of mechanical roller required for consolidation including all
labour equipment fuel, hire charges, tolls, and incidentals necessary.
Plying of Traffic:
Construction and other vehicular traffic shall not use the prepared surface of the embankment
and/or sub grade without the prior permission of the Engineer. Any damage arising out of such use
shall, however, be made good by the Contractor at his own expense as directed by the Engineer.

Date Page 242
Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work:

The surface finish of construction of sub grade shall conform to the requirements of MORTH
Clause 902. Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised in accordance with
MORTH Clause 903.
Sub grade Strength:

It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the borrow area material to be used in the sub
grade satisfies the requirements of design CBR.
Sub grade shall be compacted and. finished to the design strength consistent with other physical
requirements. The actual laboratory CBR values of constructed sub grade shall be determined on
undisturbed samples cut out from the compacted sub grade in CBR mould fitted with cutting shoe
or on remoulded samples, compacted to the field density at the field moisture content.
MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT:

Earth embankment/ sub grade construction shall be measured separately by taking cross
sections at intervals in the original position before the work starts and after its completion and
computing the volumes of earthwork in cubic meters by the method of average end areas.
The measurement of fill material from borrow areas shall be the difference between the net
quantities of compacted fill and the net quantities of suitable material brought from roadway and
drainage excavation. For this purpose, it shall be ass med that one cum. of suitable material brought
to site from road and drainage excavation forms one cum. of compacted fill and all bulking or
shrinkage shall be ignored.
Construction of embankment under water shall be measured in cum.
Construction of high embankment with specified material and in specified manner shall be
measured in cum.
Stripping including storing and reapplication of topsoil shall be measured in Cum.
Work involving loosening and re-compacting of ground supporting embankment /sub grade
shall be measured in cum.
Removal of unsuitable material at embankment/sub grade foundation and replacement with
suitable material shall be measured in Cum.
Scarifying existing granular /bituminous road surface shall be measured in Square metres.
Dismantling and removal of existing cement concrete pavement shall be measured vide
MORTH Clause 202.6.
Filter medium and backfill material behind abutments, wing walls and other retaining
structures shall be measured as finished work in position in cum.

Date Page 243
RATES:
The Contract unit rates for the items of embankment and sub grade construction shall be
payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for:
(i) Cost of arrangement of land as a source of supply of material of required quantity for
construction, unless provided otherwise in the contract.
(ii) Setting out.
(iii) Compacting ground supporting embankment/sub grade except where removal and
replacement of unsuitable material or loosening and re-compacting is involved;
(iv) Scarifying or cutting continuous horizontal benches 300mm wide on slopes of existing
embankment and sub grade as applicable;
(v) Cost of watering or drying of material in borrow areas and/or embankment and sub grade
during construction as required.
(vi) Spreading in layers, bringing to appropriate moisture content and compacting to specification
requirements
(vii) Shaping and dressing top and slopes of the embankment and sub grade including rounding of
corners;
(viii) Restricted working at sites of structures
(ix) Working on narrow width or embankment and sub grade;
(x) Excavation in all soils from borrow pits/designated borrow areas in jungle Clearing and
grubbing and transporting the material to embankment sub grade site with all lifts and leads
unless otherwise provided for contractor.
(xi) All labour, material, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to com etc. the work to the
Specifications;
(xii) Dewatering and
(xiii) Keeping the embankment/completed formation free of water as per Clause 311.
In case the Contract unit rate specified is inclusive of all leads, the unit rate for transporting
material beyond the initial lead, as specified in the contract for construction of embankment and sub
grade shall be inclusive of full compensation for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary on account of the additional haul or transportation involved beyond the specified initial
lead.
Item No. 4
Providing & filling in foundation with ordinary cement concrete M 15 mix and
providing necessary vertical pin headers including formwork vibrating ramming
& curing complete.
a) Work shall be carried out as per specification/condition as per clause No.2.1 and 2.2 of
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of the Tender Document

Date Page 244
b) All necessary labour, materials, cement equipment, etc., for sampling, preparing test cubes,
curing etc., shall be provided by the Contractor. Testing of the materials and concrete may
be arranged by the Engineer-in-charge in an approved laboratory at the cost of the
contractor.
c) The payment shall be made on cum. basis of the finished work. The unit rate of concrete
shall include the cost of all materials, cement, labour, tools and plant required for mixing,
placing in position, vibrating and compacting finishing etc. complete.
Item No.5
Providing and laying controlled cement concrete M 35 for R.C.C. bored piles of
1.20M dia. including ramming, vibrating and finishing excluding cost of T.M.T
reinforcement etc. complete.
a) Work shall be carried out as per specification/condition as per clause No.2.1 and 2.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of the Tender Document.
contractor.
d) The payment for steel will be paid separately under relevant item.
Item No. 6
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M-35 for R.C.C. pile
cap including necessary formwork, vibrating, curing and finishing complete.
Work shall be carried out as per specification/condition as per clause No.2.1 and 2.2 of
a) All necessary labour, materials, cement equipment, etc., for sampling, preparing test cubes,
contractor.
b) The payment shall be made on cum. basis of the finished work. The unit rate of concrete
c) The payment for steel will be paid separately under relevant item

Date Page 245
Item No. 7
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement M-35 for R.C.C. work For
Piers/Abutment as per drawing including centring shuttering scaffolding
where necessary laying vibrating curing and finishing complete. Exposed
concrete finish and form mark as directed by Engineer-in-charge, etc.
complete as per specification.
contractor.
c) The payment for steel will be paid separately under relevant item.
Item No. 8
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M 35 Mix for R.C.C.
works in pier cap including controlled cement concrete M 40 bed block or
pedestals of required drawings, centring shuttering, scaffolding wherever
necessary laying vibrating curing and finishing complete.
contractor.

Date Page 246
Item No. 9
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement M 35 for R.C.C. work in
superstructure including centring shuttering scaffolding, ramming, vibrating
curing and finishing complete.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of Tender Document.
contractor.
Item No. 10
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M 25 for
Footpath/Inspection platform//railing etc. Including formwork, curing and
finishing complete.
contractor.
Item No. 11
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M 40 for average 75
mm. thick wearing coat laid as directed including tamping vibrating finishing
curing and filling in joints with bitumen complete.

Date Page 247
contractor.
Item No. 12
Provision of an Reinforced cement concrete crash barrier at the edges of the

road, approaches to bridge structures and medians, constructed with M- 40
grade concrete with HYSD reinforcement conforming to IRC:21 and dowel bars
25 mm dia, 450 mm long at expansion joints filled with pre- moulded asphalt
filler board, keyed to the structure on which it is built and installed with M.S
Pipe Railing at top as per design given in the enclosure to MOST circular No.
RW/NH- 33022/1/94-DO III dated 24 June 1994 as per dimensions in the
approved drawing and at locations directed by the Engineer, all as specified with
friction slab as per drawing attached.
Only Crash Barrier
This work shall consist of providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M 40 grade for
crash barrier shall be carried out as per relevant detailed specification of Item No.11 of schedule-B
of this contract and Steel shall be as per Item No.5 of schedule-C. The other material shall be
1. G.I. C-class pipe, 50 mm Dia, 4 mm thick
2.12 mm thick M.S. Plate
3. Lugs -16 mm Dia U- Bolts & Nuts.
All above material shall be used as per complete working drawing and sanctioned by engineer in
charge.
The item shall be measured & paid as finished work in Rmt.
Date Page 248
The Surface of concrete to weather must be done with necessary embossing/ Developing design
given by CPM-DFCCIL/S.E., R & B Design circle, Gandhinagar.
Crash Barrier shall be measured in running metres including friction slab and it’s PCC.
Reinforcement in the Crash Barrier shall not be paid separately.
Unit rate includes cost of all materials including Cement, steel, from work, labour, tools and plants
to complete the job.
Item No. 13
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement M 35 for R.C.C. work for Box
culvert as per Drawing including centring shuttering scaffolding where
necessary laying, vibrating, curing and finishing complete.
contractor.
Item No.14 :-
Providing and Laying only with Knitted and PVC coated Polyester Uniaxial
Geogrid-Techgrid indigenously manufactured from selected high tenacity
polyester yarn with high molecular weight (> 25000 g/mol), and low carboxyl
end group (<30mmol/kg) for Reinforced soil wall with granular fill of PHi-30
degree (design is to be carried out in accordance with BS-8006 / FHWA) with
concrete Panel (M35) as facia, casting & erection of panels with Techgrid,
Date Page 249
providing & laying of levelling pad of M15, providing and laying coping beam
(M25), providing and laying 600mm thick filter media etc. completed as per the
necessary drawing and instruction of Engineer In Charge. Excluding
providing, laying and compacting selected backfill and retained fill behind the
wall, excavation and ground improvement, if any.
1.0 SCOPE
This work comprises execution of reinforced soil wall with all necessary material supply
with accessories etc. completed. Materials includes, knitted & PVC coated polyester
Uniaxial Geo-grid, Galvanized connectors (minimum 86 micron zinc coating), facing with
Tech-form panel of size 1.6m to 2.0 meter (T-panel), Tech-geo Nonwoven Geo-textile,
EPDM pad etc. completed. Geo-grids are conforming to the material specifications stated
herein, as per the bill of quantity and schedule of supplies enclosed.
2.0 GENERAL
Indigenously manufactured geogrids shall be preferred, considering advantages of shorter
delivery periods, no inventory pile-up and rates being not affected by fluctuation of
exchange rate of foreign currency.
A plant visit by the Engineer’s representative to verify the manufacturer’s quality control
procedures and witness testing of products is also required prior to the dispatch of material
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 General Requirements
3.1.1 The geogrid shall be manufactured from high tenacity polyester filament yarns with
molecular weight ≥ 25,000 g/mol when measured in accordance with GRI-GG8 / ASTM
D4603 and carboxyl end groups ≤ 30 mmol/Kg when measured in accordance with GRI
GG7 / ASTM D2455.
3.1.2 The yarns shall be formed into a dimensionally stable grid structure with uniform square or
rectangular apertures using a weft insertion warp knitting process
3.1.3 The geogrid shall have a durable PVC coating to protect the yarns from mechanical damage
and adverse environmental effects
3.1.4 The geogrid shall be resistant to the chemicals and microorganisms normally found in soils
and shall be stabilized against short-term exposure to solar radiation.
3.2 Transportation & Storage

3.2.1 The product shall be supplied in roll form with a protective wrapping and an identification
label stating the following – product name, manufacturer’s name, roll number, roll width
and length

Date Page 250
3.2.2 Material shall be protected from sunlight, mud, dirt, debris, any other harmful substances or
mechanical damage during transportation.
3.2.3 Rolls shall be stored in a secured area sufficiently elevated above the ground and adequately
covered to protect them from the following: site construction damage, precipitation,
prolonged exposure to ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are strong
acids or strong bases, flames including welding sparks, high temperatures, and any other
environmental conditions that may damage the physical property values of the geogrid.
3.2.4 Any material, which is damaged during transportation, handling or storage and do not meet
the minimum requirements of the specifications is liable for rejection by the Engineer.
3.3 Quality Control & testing

3.3.1 The quality management system of the manufacturer shall conform to the requirements of ISO
9001:2000.
3.3.2 Each shipment of geogrid shall be accompanied by a manufacturer’s quality certificate
stating that the geogrid shipped meets the requirements of this specification as evaluated
under the manufacturer’s quality control programme.
3.3.3 CE-certification (BTTG certification) shall be required for supply of knitted and PVC coated
Uniaxial geogrid.
3.4 Physical and Mechanical Properties

The Mechanical properties of knitted and PVC coated Uniaxial Polyester geogrids shall
conform to Table-1 below:
Table-1
Property Test UnitType-I Type-IIType-III Type-IV Type-V Type-VI Type- Type-

Method VII VIII
Peak tensile strength1
Machine
60 80 100 120 150 200 250 300
Direction ASTM
kN/m
Cross-machine D-6637
20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
Direction
Reduction factors (RF) and Machine Direction long term design strength (LTDS)
Creep (RFCR) 120 years life 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57
Installation Sand/silt/clay 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05

Date Page 251
damage (RFID) <37.5 mm

1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
gravel
Durability (RFD) pH = 4 to 9 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
LTDS – 120 years; kN/m

31.5 42.1 52.7 63.2 79.1 105.4 131.8 158.2
sand/silt/clay; pH = 4 - 9
LTDS – 120 years; Gravel kN/m

28.9 38.5 48.1 57.7 72.3 96.2 120.3 144.4
< 37.5; pH = 4 - 9
Physical Properties2
Aperture size (± mm
30 x 2530 x 25 30 x 25 30 x 23 30 x 23 30 x 23 30 x 22 30 x 20
3 mm)
MD – Machine Direction, CD-Cross Direction, (1) – Minimum average rolls value.
4.0 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

4.1 Approved Manufacturers
(1) Techfab (India) Industries Ltd.
712 Embassy Centre
Nariman Point, Mumbai – 400021
Phone: 022 – 2287 6224/6225
Fax: 022 – 2287 6218
5.0 DELIVERY
Delivery of knitted and PVC coated Uniaxial Polyester geogrids shall be done according to
the delivery schedule.
6.0 PAYMENT
6.1 Method of Measurement
Reinforced soil wall shall be measured in the square meter of facing of panels, from top of
levelling pad to top of coping beam.
6.2 Basis of Payment

Payment for the execution of reinforced soil wall shall be made in the square meter of
facing, certified by the engineer in charge, which includes, knitted and pvc coated Geogrid,
accessories (EPDM pad, Geotextile and connectors), panels, and drainage media of 600mm,
Date Page 252
which shall be full compensation for the cost of materials, transportation, duties and taxes.
Levelling pad (PCC M15), coping beam (RCC M25), excavation, and backfilling shall be
paid under respective items of tender.
6.3 Stage payment for precast RCC facia panel shall be as under.
(i) 40% after casting in casting yard/site of Facia Panels.
(ii)60% after placing & erecting and completion of item.
ITEM NO :-15
Providing Sand & filling in approach portion of RE Wall (as per MORTH
section 3100) including laying of earth as per specification for compaction in 250
mm thick loose layers and dressing(MORTH specification Cl. by mechanical
means using motor grader including 305.3.5) watering the earth to bring the
earth upto required OMC including rolling with the use of vibratory roller when
earth is at suitable moisture content with desired field density not less than 97%
of maximum dry density (modified proctor test). The material for filling shall
conform to IRC Highway Research Board's special report No. 16.
REINFORCED FILL SPECIFICATIONS
The reinforced fill shall be a select granular fill with the following properties:
 Peak drained or effective angle of friction of compacted fill (as per IS 2720: part 13) shall be
minimum 28°.
 % fines (passing 75 micron sieve) shall be less than 15%. Sieve Analysis test shall performed as
per IS 2720 (part 4),
Material with more than 15% passing 75 micron sieve, but less than 10% of of particle smaller
than 15 microns are acceptable provided PI is less than 6 and angle of friction is not less than 280
 The fill material shall be free from organic and any other deleterious matter and shall not react
adversely (chemically, electrically or biologically) with the reinforcement material and / or facia
material.
 Liquid limit & Plastic Limit test shall performed as per IS 2720 (Part 5). Plasticity index shall be
less than 6.
 Co-efficient of uniformity (Cu) shall be ≥ 2.
 Top 500 mm of fill below Sub grade shall satisfy the effective CBR criteria with Sub grade
material in addition to the above requirement.
 Recommended guidelines for gradation of the reinforced soil are given below:
Sieve Size (mm) % Finer
75 100

Date Page 253
4.75 85-100
0.425 60-90
0.075 < 15
Plasticity Index (PI) shall not exceed 6 and Cu > 2

RETAINED FILL SPECIFICATIONS
 Peak drained or effective angle of friction of compacted fill (as per IS 2720: Part 13) shall be
minimum of 30°.
 The fill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum laboratory density obtained from modified
protocol compaction test performed as per IS 2720 (Part 8)
 Fill within 0.5m of the bottom of pavement (sub grade) shall be compacted to a minimum of
98% of the MDD.
 The liquid limit and plasticity index (performed as per IS 2720: Part 5) of the fill shall be
restricted to 40 and 20 respectively.
 The organic content shall be limited to 5% and the fill shall be free from deleterious matter.
 If Fly ash is used as retained fill then it shall be in conformity with IRC-SP 58. Top 500 mm of
retained fill below Sub grade shall satisfy the effective CBR criteria with Sub grade material in
addition to the above requirements.
DRAINAGE BAY
Drainage Bay shall be provided as shown in the approved drawings. The width of the drainage bay
shall be 600 mm behind the facing element.
Backfill and drainage material to be separated by permeable non-oven geo textile
TESTS FOR REINFORCED AND RETAINED FILL

The soil which is proposed to be used as reinforced fill shall be tested to ascertain the suitability for
required quantity, grading, type and availability of required quantity etc. The soil to be used as
retained fill behind the reinforced fill, in case it is not natural soil, shall be tested for its shear
characteristics and permeability to evaluate earth pressure, drainage characteristics etc. for external
stability of the wall.
The backfill is tested at two stages. The first stage is to ascertain the suitability of the fill while the
second stage to ensure that the backfill envisaged in design is used during construction. To ascertain
the suitability of the fill, samples should be drawn from the borrow area by drawing a grid of 25 m
c/c to full depth, logging and sampling for ascertaining suitability of the borrow material as per
MORTH 2013 Specifications. Following tests shall be carried out as per Indian Standards.
i) Sieve Analysis - IS: 2720 Part - 2 tests per 3000 cum. of soil
ii) Atterberg Limit Tests- IS: 2720 Part- 5-2 tests per 3000 cum. of soil
Date Page 254
iii) Compaction Tests - IS: 2720 relevant part corresponding to modified as well
as Standard Proctor test - 2 tests per 3000 cum. of soil
iv)Direct Shear Tests - IS: 2720 Part 13 & 39 to ascertain the peak angle of shearing resistance. The
tests should be done at 95 percent of Modified Proctor Density at -2 percent of OMC at a frequency
of 1 per 3000 cum. of fill.
During construction the quality control should be exercised by conducting one set of density test of
3000 sqm. of compacted area considering the importance of compaction in reinforced soil walls.
(Clause 903.2.2 of MORTH 201 3) One set shall consist of 6 tests. The density tests shall be carried
out in accordance with IS-2720 Part 28. Density measurement by nuclear gauge may be carried out
as an alternative. For such a test the number of tests per set shall be doubled. If the retained fill is
borrowed tests mentioned above should be carried out at same frequency of reinforced fill.
Frequency during construction shall be as per MORTH2013 Specifications.
DRAINAGE AGGREGATE
The drainage material shall consist of clean crushed stone or gravel with particle size gradation as
shown below (as per IRC SP: 102- 2014 )
Sieve Analysis test shall performed as per IS 2720 (Part 4) and one test is recommended per 250
cum of drainage material. Percentage passing through different size of sieve is given in the
following table:
Sieve size %age finer
37.5 mm 90-100%
20 mm 80-100%
12.50 mm 0-20%
Besides meeting gradation requirement it is to be ensured that the aggregates are not friable, flaky,
elongated and are sound in strength.
Rate:
The Contract unit rates for the items of all labour, material, tools, equipment and incidentals
necessary to com etc. the work to the Specifications & payment shall be done in Cu.m.
Items :- 16
Provision of an Reinforced cement concrete crash barrier at the edges of the

road, approaches to bridge structures and medians, constructed with M-40
grade concrete with Fe-500D reinforcement conforming to IRC:21 and dowel
bars 25 mm dia, 450 mm long at expansion joints filed pre-moulded asphalt filler

Date Page 255
board, keyed to the structure on which it is built and installed as per design
given in the enclosure to most circular No. RW/NH-33022/1/94-DO III dated 24
june 1994 as per dimension in the approved drawing and at locations directed by
the Engineer, all as specified ) & Provide 150 mm dia PVC pipe for utility
services etc complete.
Crash barrier with friction slab

This work shall consist of providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M 40 grade for crash
barrier with friction slab shall be carried out as per relevant detailed specification of Item no.11 of
Schedule - B of this contract and Steel shall be as per Item no- of schedule - C. The other material shall be
1. G.I. C-class pipe, 50 mm Dia, 4 mm thick
2.12 mm thick M.S. Plate
3. Lugs -16 mm Dia U- Bolts & Nuts.
4. When preformed filler is to be provided, the filler shall be placed in correct position before concrete is
placed against the filler. The filler material shall form part of the joint and while concreting the slab. Care
shall be taken to prevent the former form being displaced, After the work is completed, the exposed face of
the joint shall be cleaned of all loose materials sticking to it.
5. The rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, equipments 'incidental charges for fixing the joints
complete in all respects as per these specifications and as shown on the drawings.
6. 150 Dia PVC PIPE for Utility services as directed by Engineer in charge
All above material shall be used as per complete working drawing and sanctioned by engineer in charge.
The item shall be measured & paid as finished work in Rmt.
The Surface of concrete to weather must be done with necessary embossing/ Developing design
given by CPM-DFCCIL/S.E., R & B Design circle, Gandhinagar.
Crash Barrier shall be measured in running metres including friction slab and it’s PCC.
Reinforcement in the Crash Barrier shall not be paid separately.
Unit rate includes cost of all materials including cement, steel, from work, labour, tools and plants
to complete the job.

Date Page 256
Item No.17:-
Construction of 300 mm thick compacted coarsed granular sub base (Grade-I
crushed B.T materials of 53 mm to 26.5 mm @ 35 %, 26.5 mm to 4.75 mm @
45% ,Below 2.36 mm @ 20 %) by providing close graded material , mixing in a
mechanical mix plant at OMC, carriage of a mix material to work site,
spreading uniform layers with motor grader on prepared surface and
compacting with vibratory power roller to achieve desire density , complete
clause as per 401.
This work shall consist of laying and compacting well graded material on prepared sub grade in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more
layers sub base and upper sub base (termed as sub base herein after) as necessary according to lines,
grades and cross sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 401.2 Materials:
MORTH 401.2.1 The materials to be used for the work shall be crushed stone of required
grading. The material shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and confirm to the
coarse graded granular sub base grading II as mentioned below.
MORTH TABLE 400-2.
GRADING FOR COARSE GRADED GRANULAR SUB-BASE
MATERIALS.
IS sieve Designation Percent by weight passing the IS sieve. Grading

I
75.0 mm 100
53.0 mm –
26.5 mm 55 – 75
9.5 mm –
4.75 mm 10 – 30

Date Page 257
2.365 mm
0.425 mm
0.075 mm < 10
CBR Value (Minimum) 30
Material passing 425 micron (0.425 mm) sieve for all the three grading when tested
according to IS : 2720 (Part 5) shall have liquid limit and plasticity index not more than 25 and 6
percent respectively.
MORTH 401.2.2 Physical requirements:
The materials hall have a 10 percent fines value of 50 KN or more (for sample in
soaked condition) when tested in compliance with B.S.: 812 (Part 111). The water absorption value
of the coarse aggregate shall be determined as per IS : 2386 (Part 3) : if this value is greater than 2
percent, the soundness test shall be carried out on the material delivered to site as per IS : 383. For
grading II and III materials, the CBR shall be determined at the density and moisture content likely
to be developed in equilibrium conditions which shall be taken as being the density relating to a
uniform air voids content of 5 percent.
MORTH 401.3 Strength of sub-base.
It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the material to be used in the sub base
satisfies the requirements of CBR and other physical requirements when compacted and finished.
When directed by the Engineer, this shall be verified by performing CBR tests in the
laboratory as required on specimens remoulded at field dry density and moisture content and any
other tests for the "Quality" of materials, as may be necessary.
MORTH 401.4 Construction Operations:
MORTH 401.4.1 Preparation of Sub grade:
Immediately prior to the laying of sub-base, the sub grade already finished to Clause 301 or
305 as applicable shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous matter, lightly
sprinkled with water, if necessary and rolled with two passes of 80-100 KN smooth wheeled roller.
MORTH 401.4.2 Spreading and compacting:
The sub-base material of grading specified in the Contract shall be spread on the prepared
sub grade with the help of a motor grader of adequate capacity, its blade having hydraulic controls

Date Page 258
suitable for initial adjustment and for maintaining the required slope and grade during the operation
or other means as approved by the Engineer.
When the sub-base material consists of combination of materials mentioned in MORTH

Clause 401.2.1, of this item mixing shall be done mechanically by the mix in place method.
Manual mixing shall be permitted only where the width of laying is not adequate for
mechanical operations, as in small-sized jobs. The equipment used for mix-in-place construction
shall be a rotator or similar approved equipment capable of mixing the material to the desired
degree. If so desired by the Engineer, trial runs with the equipment shall be carried out to establish
its suitability for the work.
Moisture content of the loose material shall be checked in accordance with IS:2720 (Part 2)
and suitably adjusted by sprinkling additional water from a truck mounted or trailer mounted water
tank and suitable for applying water uniformly and at controlled quantities to variable widths of
surface of other means approved by the Engineer so that, at the time of compaction, it is from 1
percent above to 2 percent below the optimum moisture content corresponding to IS:2720 (Part 8).
While adding water, due allowance shall be made for evaporation losses. After water has been
added, the material shall be processed by mechanical or other approved means like disc barrows,
rotators until the layer is uniformly wet.
Immediately thereafter, rolling shall start. If the thickness of the compacted layer does not
exceed 100 mm, a smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 KN weight may be used. For a compacted
single layer up to 225 mm the compaction shall be done with help of a vibratory roller of minimum
80 to 100 KN static weight with plain drum or pad foot drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of
minimum 200 to 300 KN weight having a minimum tyre pressure of 0.7 MN/ M2 or equivalent
capacity roller capable of achieving the required compaction. Rolling shall commence at the lower
edge and proceed towards the upper edge longitudinally for portions having unidirectional cross fall
and super elevation and shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre for portions
having cross fall on both sides each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third
of the track made in the preceding pass. During rolling, the grade and cross fall (camber) shall be
checked and any high sports or depressions, which become apparent, corrected by removing or
adding fresh material. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 Km per hour. Rolling shall be
continued till the density achieved is at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density for the material
determined as per IS: 2720 (Part 8). The surface of any layer of material on completion of
compaction shall be well closed, free from movement under compaction equipment and from
compaction planes, ridges, cracks or lose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective
areas shall be made good to the full thickness of layer and re-compacted.

Date Page 259
401.5 Surface Finish and Quality Control of work:

The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of Clause 902 of MORT & H
specifications. Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in
accordance with Section 900 of MORT & H specifications.
MORTH 401.6 Arrangements for Traffic:
During the period of construction, arrangement of traffic shall be maintained in accordance

with Clause 112 of MORT & H specifications.
MORTH 401.7 Measurements for Payment:Granular sub base shall be paid as finished
work in position on cross sectional measurements and computing the volume of GSB work in cubic
meters by average area method.
The protection of edges of granular sub base extended over the full formation as shown in
the drawing shall be considered incidental to the work of providing granular sub-base and as such
no extra payment shall be made for the same.
MORTH 401.8 Rate:
The Contract unit rate for granular sub base shall be payment in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for:
[i] Making arrangements for traffic to Clause 112 as above except for initial treatment to
verges, shoulders and construction of diversions.
[ii] Furnishing all materials to be in corporate in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
where necessary and all leads and lift.
[iii] All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the specifications.
[iv] Carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed, and
[v] Carrying out the required tests for quality control.
Item No.18:-
Providing and laying wet mix macadam base course 250 mm thick in two layers
using machine crushed B.T. chips as per required gradation mixing with
required optimum quantity of water, conveying the mix to site and spreading to
grade and camber with mechanical paver and consolidation by vibratory roller
including material, labour, plant and machinery and equipment etc. complete.

Date Page 260
This work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and granular
material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared sub grade sub base/ base or existing
pavement as the case may be in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. The
material shall be laid in one or more layers as necessary to lines, grades and cross-sections shown
on the approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The thickness of a single compacted Wet Mix Macadam layer shall not be less than 75mm. When
vibrating or other approved types of compacting equipment are used, the compacted depth of a
single layer of the sub-base course may be increased to 20cm upon approval of the Engineer.
MORTH 406.2 MATERIALS

MORTH 406.2.1 AGGREGATES
MORTH 406.2.1.1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS:
Course aggregates shall be crushed stone. If crushed gravel / shingle is used, not less than 90
percent by weight of the gravel / shingle pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two
fractured faces. The aggregates shall conform to the physical requirements set forth in Table 400-10
below.
MORTH TABLE 40-10 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT OF COARSE AGGREGATES
FOR WET MIX MACADAM FOR SUB-BASE / BASE COURSES
Test Test Method Requirements
1.*Los Angeles Abrasion value IS : 2386 (Part-4) 40 percent (Max)
Aggregate impact value IS : 2386 (Part-4) or IS : 30 percent (Max)

5640
2. Combined Flakiness and IS : 2386(PART-1) 30 percent (Max)

Elongation indices ( Total )**
* Aggregates may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests.

** To determine this combined proportion, the flaky stone from a representative sample should
first be separated out. Flakiness index is weight of flaky stone metal divided by weight of stone
sample only the elongated particles be separated out from the remaining (non flaky stone metal.
Elongation index is weight of elongated particles divided by total non flaky particles. The value of
flakiness index and elongation index so found are added up.
If the water absorption value of the coarse aggregate greater than 2 percent, the soundness test shall
carried out on the material delivered to site as per 2386 (Part – 5).
MORTH 406.2.1.2 Grading requirements:

Date Page 261
The aggregates shall conform to the grading given in Table 400-11
MORTH TABLE 400-11. GRADING REQUIREMENTS OF AGGREGATES FOR

WET MIX MACADAM.
Is Sieve Designation Percent by weight Passing the IS sieve
53.00 mm 100
45.00 mm 95-100
26.50 mm -
22.40 mm 60-80
11.20 mm 40-60
4.75 mm 25-40
2.36 mm 15-30
600.00 micron 8-12
75.00 micron 0-8
Materials finer than 425 micron shall have plasticity index (P.1 ) not exceeding 6.
The final gradation approved within these limits shall be well graded from course to fine and shall
not very from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice- versa.
MORTH 406.3 Construction Operation:

MORTH 406.3.1 Preparation of base: Clause 404.3.1 as below shall apply.
MORTH 404.3.1 Preparation of base: The surface of the sub grade/sub-base/base to receive the
water bound macadam course shall be prepared to the specification lines and cross fall (camber) and
made free of dust and other extraneous material. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected
in an approved manner and rolled unit firm surface is obtained if necessary by sprinkling water.
Any sub-base/base/surface irregularities, where predominant, shall be made good by proving
appropriate type of profile corrective course (levelling course) to clause 501 of these specification.
As far as possible, laying water bound macadam course over an existing thick bituminous
layer may be avoided since it will cause problems of internal drainage of the pavement at the
interface of two courses. It is desirable to completely pick out the existing thin bituminous wearing
course where water bound macadam is proposed to be laid over it. However, where the intensity of
ran is low and the interface drainage facility is efficient, water bound macadam can be laid over the
existing thin bituminous surface by cutting 50 mm x 50 mm furrows at an angle of 45 degrees to the
centre line of the pavement at one metre intervals in the existing road. The directions and depth of
Date Page 262
furrows shall be such that they provide adequate bondage and also serve to drain water to the
existing granular base course beneath the existing thin bituminous surface.
MORTH 406.3.2 Provision of lateral confinement of aggregates:
While constructing wet mix macadam arrangement shall be made for the lateral confinement
of wet mix. This shall be done by laying materials in adjoining shoulders along with that of wet mix
macadam layer and following the sequence of operations described in Clause 407.4.1 as below.
MORTH 407.4 Construction Operations:

MORTH 407.4.1 Shoulder: The sequence of operations shall be such that the construction of paved
shoulder is done in layers each matching the thickness of adjoining pavement layer. Only after a
layer of pavement and corresponding layers in paved and earth shoulder portion have been laid and
compacted, the construction of next layer of pavement and shoulder shall be taken up.
Where the materials in adjacent layers are different, these shall be lad together and the
pavement layer shall be compacted first. The corresponding layer in paved shoulder portion shall be
compacted thereafter, which shall be followed by compaction of earth shoulder layer. The adjacent
layers having same material shall be laid and compacted together.
In all cases where paved shoulders have to be provided along side of existing carriageway,
the existing shoulders shall be excavated in full width and to the required depth as per clause
301.3.7 under no circumstances; box cutting shall be done for construction of shoulders.
Compaction requirement of earthen shoulder shall be as per table 300-2 in the case of
bituminous courses, work on shoulder (earthen/hard/paved), shall start only after the pavement
course has been laid and compacted.
During all stages of shoulder (earth/hard/paved) construction, the required cross fall shall be
maintained to drain off surface water
Regardless of the method of laying, all shoulder construction material shall be placed
directly on the shoulder. Any spilled material dragged on to the pavement surface shall be
immediately removed, without damage to the pavement, and the area so affected thoroughly
cleaned.
MORTH 406.3.4 Preparation of mix:

Wet Mix Macadam shall be prepared in an approved mixing plant of suitable capacity
having provision for controlled addition of water and forced / positive mixing arrangement like pug-
mil or pan type mixer of concrete batching plant.
Optimum moisture for mixing shall be determined in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part – 8)
after replacing the aggregate fraction retained on 22.4 mm sieve with material of 4.75 micron to
22.4 mm size. While adding water, due allowance should be made for evaporation losses. However,
at the time of compaction, water in the wet mix should not vary from the optimum value by more
than agreed limits. The mixed material should be uniformly wet and so segregation should be
permitted.
Date Page 263
MORTH 406.3.4 Spreading of mix:

Immediately after mixing, the aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the
prepared sub grade / sub-base / base in required quantities. In no case should these be dumped in
heaps directly on the area where these are to be laid nor shall their hauling over a partly completed
stretch be permitted.
The mix may be spread either by a paver finisher or motor grader. For portions where
mechanical means cannot be used, manual means as approved by the Engineer shall be used. The
motor grader shall be capable of spreading he material uniformly all over the surface. Its blade shall
have hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustments and maintaining the same so as to achieve the
specified slop and grade.
The paver finisher shall be self – propelled, having the following features:
(i) Loading hoppers and suitable distribution mechanism
(ii) The screed shall have tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial compaction to the layer
as it is spread without rutting or otherwise marring the surface profile.
(iii) The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to ensure that the
finished surface is free from surface blemishes.
The surface of the aggregate shall be carefully checked with templates and all high or law spots
remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be tested by depth blocks during construction.
No segregation of larger and fine particles should be allowed. The aggregates as spread should be
allowed. The aggregates as spread should be of uniform gradation with pockets of fine materials.
MORTH 406.3.5 Compaction:-

After the mix has been laid to the required thickness, grade and care full / camber the same shall be
uniformly compacted, to the full depth with suitable roller. If the thickness of single compacted
layer does not exceed 100mm, as smooth wheel roller of 80 to 100 KN weigh may be used. For a
compacted single layer up to 200mm, the compaction shall be done with the help of vibratory roller
of minimum static weight of 80 to 100 KN or equivalent capacity roller. The speed of the roller
shall not exceed 5 km/h. In portions having unidirectional cross fall / super elevation rolling shall
commence from the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge. Thereafter, roller
should progress parallel to the centre line of the road. Uniformly over-lapping each preceding track
by at least one fourth width until the entire surface has been rolled. Alternate trips of the roller shall
be terminated in stops at least I am away from any preceding stop.
In portions in camber, rolling should at the edge with the roller running forward and backward until
the edges have been firmly compacted. The roller shall the progress gradually towards the centre
parallel to the centre line of the road uniformly overlapping each of the preceding tracks by at least
one – Fourth width until the entire surface has been rolled.
Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of a roller or from any other
caused shall be corrected at once as specified and / or removed and made good.
Date Page 264
Along forms, Kerbs, walls or other places not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be
thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or a plate compactor. Skin patching of an area
without scarifying the surface to permit proper bonding of the added material shall not be permitted.
Rolling should not be done when the sub grade is soft or yielding or when it caused a wave-like
motion in the sub – base/ base course or sub grade. If irregularities develop during rolling which
exceed 12mm when tasted with a 3 meter straight edge, the surface should be loosened and
premixed material added or removed as required before rolling again so as to achieve a conforming
to the desired grade and cross fall. In no case should the use of unmixed material be permitted to
make up the depressions.
Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 per cent of the maximum dry the
material as determined by the method outlined in IS: 2720 ( Part-8 )
After completion, the surface of any finished layer shall be well-close, free from movement under
compaction equipment or any compaction planes, ridges, cracks and loose material. All loose,
segregated of otherwise defective areas shall be made god to the full thickness of the layer and re-
compacted.
MORTH 406.3.6 Setting and drying:

After final compaction of wet mix macadam course, the road shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours.
MORTH 406.4 Opening to Traffic:

Preferably no vehicular traffic of any kind should be allowed on the finished wet mix macadam
surface till it has dried and the wearing course laid.
MORTH 406.5 Surface Finish and Quality control of work

MORTH 406.5.1 Surface evenness:
The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of Clause 902 of MORT & H
specifications.
406.5.2 Quality Control:
Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with
section 901 of MORT & H specifications
MORTH 406.6 Rectification of Surface Irregularity:

Where the surface irregularity of the wet mix macadam course exceeds the permissible tolerances or
where the course is otherwise defective due to sub grade soil getting mixed with the aggregates, the
full thickness of the layer shall scarified over the affected area. Reshaped with added premixed
material or removed and replaced with fresh premixed material as applicable and recomputed in
accordance with Clause 406.3 of this item. The area treated in the aforesaid manner shall not be less
than 5m long and 2m wide. In no case shall depressions be filled up with unmixed and ungraded
material or fines.

Date Page 265
MORTH 406.6.7 Arrangement for Traffic:

During the period of construction, arrangement of traffic shall be done as per Claus 112 of MORT
& H specifications
MORTH 406.8 Measurements for Payment:

Wet mix macadam shall be paid as finished work in position on cross sectional measurements and
computing the volume of WMM work in cubic meters by average area method.
MORTH 406.9 Rate: The Contract unit rate for wet mix macadam shall be payment in full
for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for all components listed
below.
i) Making arrangement for traffic to Clause 112 as above Except for initial treatment to verges,
shoulders and Construction of diversions:
ii) Furnishing wet materials o be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
where necessary and all leads and lifts;
iii) All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the specifications;
iv) Carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed; and
v) Carrying out the required tests for quality control.
Item No.19 :-
Providing and laying 70 mm DBM using crushed stone aggregate BT chips as
per required gradation and using emulsion asphalt as a tack coat @ 2.5 kg / 10
sqmt and the 60/70 grade asphalt at 40 kg/MT)by total weight of mix hot laid
process using drum mix plant including heating and mixing asphalt & materials
by drum mix process transporting the mix and laying by paver finisher
including consolidation with vibratory roller including cost of material, labour,
machinery equipment and fuel , oil , lubricant for plant and machinery using
contractor's own plant and machineries etc. Complete
MORTH 507. DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS MACADAM
MORTH 507.1. Scope
This clause specifies the construction of Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam, (DBM) for use
mainly, but not exclusively, in base/binder and profile corrective course, DBM is also intended for
use a road base material. This work shall consist of construction in a single or multiple layers of
DBM on a previously prepared base or sub-base. The thickness of a single layer shall be 50mm to
100mm.
Date Page 266

MORTH 507.2.1 Bitumen:
MORTH 507.2.2 Course aggregates: The aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements
specifies in Table 500-8, for dense bituminous macadam. The requirement shall be similar to that of
Clause 504 except that aggregates shall satisfy physical requirements specifies on Table 500-8.
When crushed gravels is proposed for use in aggregates, not less than 90% by weight of the crushed
material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve shall be have at least two fractured faces.
MORTH 507.2.3 Fine aggregates: Fine aggregates shall consists of crushed or naturally
occurring mineral material, or a combination of the two, passing the 2.36mm sieve and retained on
the 75 micron sieve. The fine aggregate shall have a sand equivalent value of not less than 50 when
tested in accordance with the requirement of IS:2720 (Part 37) The plasticity index of the fraction
passing the 0.425 mm sieve shall not exceed 4, when tested in accordance with IS:2720 (Part 5)
MORTH TABLE 500-8. PHYSICLE REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE AGGREGATE FOR

DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS MACADAM
Property Test Specification
Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis¹ Max 5% passing 0.075 mm sieve
Particle shape Flakiness and elongation Index Max 30%

(combined)²
Strength Los Angeles Abrasion Value ³ Max 30%
Aggregate Impact Value4 Max 24%
Polishing Polished Stone Value5 Min 55
Durability Soundness6
Sodium Sulphate Max 12%
Magnesium Sulphate Max 18%
Water Absorption Water Absorption7 Max 2%
Stripping Coating and stripping of bitumen Minimum retained coating 95%

aggregate mixtures9
Water sensitivity** Retained tensile strength8 Min 80%

Date Page 267
Notes:
1. IS:2386 Part 1 6. IS: 2386 Part 5
2. IS:2386 Part 1 7. IS:2386 Part 3
(the elongation test may be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the samples)
3. IS:2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTO T 283**
4. IS:2386 Part 4* 9. IS: 6241
5. BS: 812 Part 114
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests

**The water sensitivity test is only required if the minimum retained coating in the stripping test is
less than 95%.
MORTH 507.2.3 Fine aggregates: Fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and
retained on 75 micron sieve, consisting of crusher-run screening, gravel sand or a mixture of both.
These shall be clean, hard, durable uncoated, dry and free from any injurious, soft or flaky pieces
and organic or other deleterious substances.
MORTH 507.2.4 Filler
Filler shall consist of finely divided minerals matter such as rock dust, hydrated lime or cement as
The filler shall be graded within the following limits:
MORTH TABLE 509-9. GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL FILLER
Cumulative percent passing by weight of

IS Sieve (mm)
total aggregate
0.6 100
0.3 95-100
0.075 85-100
Mineral filler shall consist of rock dust, hydrated lime or Portland cement, or after inert mineral
matter approved by the Engineer. It shall be dry and free from lumps.
The filler shall be free from organic impurities and have a Plasticity Index not greater than 4. The
Plasticity Index requirement shall not apply if filler is cement or lime. When the coarse aggregate is
Date Page 268
gravel, 2 percent by mass of total aggregate of port land cement or hydrated lime shall be added and
the percentage of fine aggregate reduced accordingly. Cement or hydrated lime is not required when
the gravel is limestone.
MORTH 507.2.5 Aggregate grading and binder content : When tested in accordance with
IS:2386 Part 1 (Wet sieving method), the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregates and
added filler shall fail within the limits shown in Table 500-10 for dense bituminous macadam
gradings 1 or 2 as specified on the Contract. The type and quantity of bitumen, and appropriate
thickness are also indicated for each mixture type.
MORTH TABLE 509-10. COMPOSITION OF DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS

MACADAM PAVEMENT LAYERS
Grading 1 2
Nominal aggregate size 400mm 25mm
Layer Thickness 80-100 mm 50-75 mm
IS Sieve1 (mm) Cumulative % by weight if total aggregate passing
45 100
37.5 95-100 100
26.5 63-95 90-100
19 - 71-95
13.2 55-75 56-80
9.5 - -
4.75 38-54 38-54
2.36 28-42 28-42
1.18 - -
0.6 - -
0.3 7-21 7-21
0.15 - -
0.075 2-8 2-8

Date Page 269
Bitumen content % by mass of total mix2 Min 4.0 Min 4.5
Bitumen grade (pen) 65 to 90 65 o 90
Notes: 1.The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high
limit on the adjacent sieve. Determined by the Marshall method.
MORTH 507.3. Mixture Design
MORTH 507.3.1 Requirements for the mixture: Apart from conformity with the grading and
quality requirements for individual ingredients, the mixture shall meet the requirements set out in
MORTH Table 500-11.
The requirements for minimum percent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) are set out in MORTH
Table 500-12.
MORTH TABLE 500-11. REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE GRADED BITUMOUS

MACADAM
Minimum stability (kN at 60°C) 9.0
Minimum flow (mm) 2
Maximum flow (mm) 4
Compaction level (Number of blows) 75 blows on each of the two faces of the
specimen
Percent air voids 3-6
Percent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) See table 500-12
Percent voids filled with bitumen (VFB) 65-75
MORTH 507.3.2 Binder content: The binder content shall be optimized to achieve the
requirements of the mixture set out in Table 500-11 and the traffic volume as specified in the
contract. Where 40mm dense bituminous macadam mixture is specified, the modified Marshall
Method described in MS-2 shall be used. This method requires modified equipment and procedures;
particularly the minimum stability values in Table 500-11 shall be multiplied by 2.25, and the
minimum flow shall be 3 mm.
MORTH 507.3.3 Job mix formula: The contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing at least 20
days before the start of the work. The approved job mix formula shall remain effective unless and
until a revised Job Mix Formula is approved. Should a change in the source of materials be

Date Page 270
proposed, a new job mix formula shall be forwarded to the engineer for approval before the placing
of the material.
MORTH 507.3.4 Permissible Variation from Job Mix Formula: It shall be the responsibility of
the contractor to produce a uniform mix conforming to the approved Job Mix Formula subject to the
permissible variations of the individual percentages of the various ingredients in the actual mix
from the job mix formula to be used within the limits as specified in Table 500-11. These variations
are intended to apply to individual specimens taken for quality control tests vide Section 900.
MORTH TABLE 500-13 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM THE JOB MIX FORMULA
S.No. Description of Ingredients Permissible Variation
Base/binder Wearing course

course
1. Aggregate passing 19mm sieve or larger ±8% ±7%
2. Aggregate passing 13.2mm, 9.5mm ±7% ±6%
3. Aggregate passing 4.75mm ±6% ±5%
4. Aggregate passing 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm ±5% ±4%
5. Aggregate passing 0.3mm, 0.15mm ±4% ±3%
6. Aggregate passing 0.075 mm ±2% ±1.5%
7. Binder content ±0.3% ±0.3%
8. Mixing temperature ±10°C ±10%
MORTH 507.3.5 Laying Trials: Once the plant trails have been successfully completed and
approved, the Contractor shall carry out laying trails, to demonstrate that the proposed mix can be
successfully laid, and completed all in accordance with Clause 501.
The Contractor shall previously inform the Engineer of the proposed method for laying and
compaction the material. The plant trails shall then establish if the proposed laying plant,
compaction plant, and methodology is capable of producing satisfactory results. The density of the
finished paving layer shall be determined by taking cores, no sooner than 24 hours after laying, or
by other approved method.
Once the laying trails have been approved, the same plat and methodology shall be applied to the
laying of the material on the project, and no variation of either shall be acceptable, unless approved
in writing by the Engineer who may at his discretion require further laying trials.
Date Page 271

MORTH 507.4.1. Weather and seasonal limitations: The provisions of Clause 501.5.1 shall
apply.
MORTH 507.4.2 Preparation of base: The base on which Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam is
to be laid shall be prepared in accordance with Clause 501 or as directed by the Engineer. The
surface shall be thoroughly swept clean free from dust and foreign matter using mechanical broom
and dust removed or blown off by compressed air. In portions where mechanical broom cannot
reach, other approved method shall be used as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 507.4.3 Geo-synthetics: Where Geo-synthetics are specified in the Contact this shall be
in accordance with the requirements stated in clause 70.3
MORTH 507.4.4 Stress absorbing layer: Where a stress absorbing layer is specified in the
contract, this shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Clause 522.
MORTH 507.4.5 Prime Coat: Where the material on which the dense bituminous macadam is
to be laid is other than a bitumen bound layer, a prime coat shall be applied as specified, in
accordance with the provisions of Clause 502 or as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 507.4.6 Tack Coat: Where the material on which the dense bituminous macadam is
to be placed is bitumen surface, a tack coat shall be applied as specified, in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 503 or as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 507.4.7 Mixing and transportation of the mixture: The provisions as specified in
Clause 501.3 and 501.4 shall apply.
MORTH 507.4.8 Spreading: The provisions of Clause 501.5.3 and 501.5.4 shall apply.
MORTH 507.4.9 Rolling: The general provisions of Clause 501.6 and 501.7 shall apply, as
modify by the approved laying trails the compaction process shall be carried out by the same plant,
and using the same method, as approved in the laying trials, which may be varied only with the
express approval of the Engineer in writing.
MORTH 507.5 Opening Traffic: The newly laid surface shall not be open to traffic for at least
24hrs after laying and completion, without the express approval of the Engineer in writing.
MORTH 507.6. Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work: The surface finish of construction
shall conform to the requirements of Clause 902. Control on the quality of materials and work shall
be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with Section 900.
MORTH 507.7. Arrangements for Traffic: During the period of construction, arrangements for
the traffic shall be done to Clause 112.
MORTH 507.8 Measurement for Payment: Dense Graded Bituminous Materials shall be
measured as finished work either in cubic metres, tons or by the square metre at a specified
thickness as detailed on the Contract drawings, or documents, or as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 507.9 Rate: The Contract unit rate for Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam shall be
payment in full for carrying out the all required operations as specified, and shall include, but not
necessarily limited to all components listed in Clause 501.8.8.2(i) to (xi). The rate shall include the
provision of bitumen, at 4.25 per cent by weight of the total mixture.

Date Page 272
The Variance in actual percentage of bitumen used will be assessed and the payment adjusted up or
down accordingly.
Item No.20 :-
Providing and laying 40 mm Bitumen concrete using crushed stone aggregate
BT chips as per required gradation and using emulsion asphalt as a tack coat @
2.5 kg / 10 sqmt and the 60/70 grade asphalt at 55 kg/MT)by total weight of mix
hot laid process using drum mix plant including heating and mixing asphalt &
materials by drum mix process transporting the mix and laying by paver
finisher including consolidation with vibratory roller including cost of material,
labour, machinery equipment and fuel , oil , lubricant for plant and machinery
using contractor's own plant and machineries etc. complete .
MORTH 509. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
MORTH 509.1. Scope
This clause specifies the construction of Bituminous Concrete, for use in wearing and
profile corrective courses. This work shall consist of construction in a single or multiple
layers of bituminous concrete on a previously prepared bituminous bound surface. A single
layers shall be 40 mm in thickness.
MORTH 509.2.1. Bitumen: The bitumen shall be paving bitumen of Penetration grade
complying with Indian Standard Specification for Paving Bitumen, IS: 73 and of the
penetration indicated in Table 500-18. for bituminous concrete, or this bitumen as modified
by one of the methods specified in Clause 521, or as otherwise specified in the Contract.
Guidance on the selection of an appropriate grade of bitumen is given in The Manual for
Construction and Supervision of Bituminous Works.
MORTH 509.2.2. Coarse aggregates: The coarse aggregates shall be generally as specified
in MORTH Clause 507.2.2, except that the aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements
of MORTH Table 500-17.
MORTH TABLE 500-17. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE

AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT LAYERS

Date Page 273
Property Test
Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis1 Max5%passing
0.075mm sieve
Panicle shape Flakiness and Elongation Index Max 30%
(Combined)2
Strength* Los Angeles Abrasion Value3 Max 30%
Aggregate Impact Value4 Max 24%
Polishing Polished Stone Value5 Min 55
Durability Soundness:6
Sodium Sulphate Max 12%
Magnesium Sulphate Max 18%
Water Absorption Water absorption7 Max 2%
Stripping Coating and Stripping of Bitumen Minimum Retained

Aggregate Mixtures9
Coating 95%
Water Sensitivity** Retained Tensile Strength8 Min80%
Notes: 1. IS: 2386 Part 1 6. IS: 2386 Part 5
2. IS: 2386 Part 1 7. IS: 2386 Part 3
(the elongation test may be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the sample)
3. IS: 2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTOT283**
4. IS: 2386 Part 4* 9. IS: 6241
5. BS: 812 Part 114
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of cither of these two tests.

Date Page 274
** The water sensitivity test is only required if the minimum retained coating in the
stripping test is less than 95%.
mix formula shall be generally as specified in Clause 507.3.3 and the results of tests
enumerated in Table 500-19 as obtained by the Contractors.
MORTH 509.2.3. Fine aggregates: The fine aggregates shall be all as specified in Clause
507.2.3.
MORTH 509.2.4. Filler: Filler shall be generally as specified in Clause 507.2.4. Where the
aggregates fail to meet the requirements of the water sensitivity test in Table 500-17 then 2
per cent by total weight of aggregate, of hydrated lime shall be added without additional
cost.
MORTH 509.2.5. Aggregate grading and binder content: When tested in accordance with
IS:2386 Part 1 (Wet grading method), the combined grading of the coarse and fine
aggregates and added filler shall fall within the limits shown in Table 500-18 for gradings 1
or 2 as specified in the Contract.
MORTH 509.3. Mixture Design
MORTH 509.3.1. Requirements for the mixture: Apart from conformity with the grading
and quality requirements for individual ingredients, the mixture shall meet the requirements
set out in MORTH Table 500-19.
The requirements for minimum per cent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) are set
out in MORTH Table 500-12.
MORTH 509.3.2. Binder content: The binder content shall be optimised to achieve the
requirements of the mixture set out in Table 500-19 and the traffic volume as specified in
the Contract. The Marshall method for determining the optimum binder content shall be
adopted as described in the Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2, replacing the aggregates
retained on the 26.5mrn sieve and retained on the 22.4mm sieve, where approved by the
Engineer.
MORTH 509.3.3. Job mix formula: The procedure for formulating the job
MORTH 509.3.4. Plant trials - permissible variation in job mix formula:
The requirements for plant trials shall be all as specified in Clause 507.3.4, and
permissible limits for variation as shown in Table 500-13.
Date Page 275
MORTH 509.3.5. Laying trials: The requirements for laying trials shall be all as specified
in Clause 507.3.5.
MORTH 509.4.1. Weather and seasonal limitations: The provisions of Clause 501.5.1
shall apply.
MORTH TABLE 500-18. COMPOSITION OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

PAVEMENT LAYERS
Grading 1 2
Nominal aggregate size 19mm 13mm
Layer Thickness 50-65 mm 40 mm
IS Sieve1 (mm) Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing
45
37.5
26.5 100
19 79-100 100
13.2 59-79 79-100
9.5 52-72 70-88
4.75 35-55 53-71
2.36 28-44 42-58
1.18 20-34 34-48
0.6 15-27 26-38
0.3 10-20 18-28
0.15 5-13 12.20

Date Page 276
0.075 2-8 4.10
Bitumen content % by mass

5.0-6.0 5.50
of total mix2
Bitumen grade (pen) 60 60 (VG-30)
Notes: 1. The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit on one
sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve.
2. Determined by the Marshall method.
MORTH TABLE 500-19. REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

LAYERS
Minimum stability (kN at 60°C) 9.0
Minimum flow (mm) 2
Maximum flow (mm) 4
Compaction level (Number of blows) 75 blows on each of the two
faces of the specimen
Per cent air voids 3-6
Per cent voids in mineral aggregate See Table 500-12

(VMA)
Per cent voids filled with bitumen 65-75

(VFB)
Loss of stability on immersion in water Min. 75 per cent

at 60°C (ASTM D 1075)
retained strength
MORTH 509.4.2. Preparation of base: The surface on which the bituminous concrete is to
be laid shall be prepared in accordance with Clauses 501 and 902 as appropriate, or as
directed by the Engineer. The surface shall be thoroughly swept clean by mechanical broom
and dust removed by compressed air. In locations where a mechanical broom cannot access,
other approved methods shall be used as directed by the Engineer.

Date Page 277
509.4.3. Geosynthetics: Where Geosynthetics are specified in the Contract this shall be in
accordance with the requirements stated in Clause 703.
509.4.4. Stress absorbing layer : Where a stress absorbing layer is specified in the
Contract, this shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Clause 522 of MORT
& H specifications
MORTH 509.4.5. Tack coat: Where specified in the Contract, or otherwise required by the
Engineer, a tack coat shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Clause 503 of
MORT & H specifications.
MORTH 509.4.6. Mixing and transportation of the mixture: The provisions as specified
in Clauses 501.3 and 501.4 shall apply.
MORTH 509.4.7. Spreading: The general provisions of clauses 501.5.3 and 501.5.4 of
MORT & H specifications shall apply.
MORTH 509.4.8. Rolling: The general provisions of clauses 501.6 and 501.7 shall apply, as
modified by the approved laying trials.
MORTH 509.5. Opening to Traffic
The newly laid surface shall not be open to traffic for at least 24 hours after laying and the
completion of compaction, without the express approval of the Engineer in writing.
MORTH 509.6. Surface Finish and Quality Control
The surface finish of the completed construction shall conform to the requirements of
Clause 902. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the provisions set out in
Section 900 of this Specification.
MORTH 509.7. Arrangements for Traffic
During the period of construction, arrangements for traffic shall be made in accordance with
the provisions of Clause 112 of MORT & H specifications
MORTH 509.8. Measurement for Payment
The payment shall be made on the tonnage basis of the weight of mix aggregates and
bitumen. For this purpose, the contractor shall have to install a weigh-bridge of suitable
capacity for the purpose of weighing dumpers at suitable place at his cost as directed.

Date Page 278
Weight of empty dumpers and weight of loaded dumper will be recorded in bound and
numbered register on plant site.
Department will be free to get some loaded dumpers test checked at other weigh
bridge. Weigh bridge will be periodically got calibrated and verified from weight and
measure authorities.
For the purpose of application of tack coat, if the theoretical area as per sanctioned
estimate for basic of tonne differs with the actual area of work done in the field then the
reduction in or addition to payment shall have to be effected to the contractor on pro-rata
basis depending upon the area reduced or exceeded respectively.
Weight of mix materials will be done in presence of responsible person, not less than
the rank of Supervisor of Department and the measurements shall be recorded by the Deputy
Executive Engineer or Assistant Engineer or Additional Assistant Engineer, if so authorized.
Record of each dumper will be mentioned separately in bond and numbered register which
will be maintained by the Department representatives and signed by the contractor. Proper
gate pass system shall be established for the vehicle coming to the plant site and going from
the site. The location of the K.M. hectometer and meter in which individual dumpers are
unloaded shall be recorded carefully.
MORTH 504.8 Rate :- The contract unit rate for Bituminous Concrete shall be payment
in full for carrying out the required operations as specified. The rate shall include for all
components listed below.
(i) Making arrangements for traffic to clause 112 except for initial treatment to verge,
shoulders and construction of diversions.
(ii) Preparation of the surface to revive the materials.
(iii) Providing all materials to be incorporated in the work including arrangement for
stock yards. All royalties, fees rents where necessary and all leads and lifts.
(iv) Mixing transporting, laying and compacting the mix as specified.
(v) All labour, tools equipment, plant including installation of hot mix plant, power
supply units and all machinery incidental to complete the work to these specification.
(vi) Carrying out the work in part widths of the road where directed.
(vii) Carrying out all tests for control of quality, and
(viii) The rate shall cover the provision of bitumen at the rate specified in the contract, with
the provision that the variation in actual percentage of bitumen used will be assessed and the
payment adjusted accordingly.

Date Page 279
(ix) The rate for premixed material are to include for all wastage in cutting of joints etc.
(x) The rates are to include for all necessary testing mix design transporting and testing
of samples, and cores. If there is not a project specific : laboratory, the contractor must
arrange to carry out all necessary testing at an outside laboratory approved by the Engineer,
and all costs incurred are deemed to be included in the rate quoted for the material.
(xi) The cost of all plant and laying trials as specified to prove the mixing and laying
methods is deemed, to be included in the contractor’s rates for the materials.
The contract unit rate shall include the provision of bitumen at 5.50 per cent, by weight of
total mixture. The variance in actual percentage of bitumen used will be assessed and the
payment adjusted up or down, accordingly.
Item No. 21:-

Providing and applying priming coat using medium setting emulsion bitumen as
the rate of 7.50 kg/ 10 Sq.mt. on WMM surface including cleaning the surface
etc. complete.
MORTH 502.1 Scope

This work shall consist of the application of a single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous
material to a porous granular surface preparatory to the superimposition of bituminous treatment or
mix..
MORTH 502.2 Materials

MORTH 502.2.1 Primer : The choice of a emulsion bituminous primer shall depend upon the porosity
characteristics of the surface to be primed as classified in IRC : 16 These are :
(i) Surface of low porosity: such as wet mix macadam and water bound macadam.
(ii) Surfaces of medium porosity; such as cement stabilized soil base,
(iii) Surfaces of high porosity; such as a gravel base.
MORTH 502.2.2 Primer viscosity :

The type and viscosity of the primer shall comply with the requirements of IS 8887, as
sampled and tested for bituminous primer in accordance with the standards. Guidance on
viscosity and rate of spray is given in MORTH Table 500-1.

Date Page 280
MORTH TABLE 500-1. VISCOSITY REQUIREMENT AND QUANTITY OF

LIQUID BITUMINOUS PRIMER
Type of Surface Kinematic Viscosity of Quantity of Liquid

Primer at 60o C Bituminous Material
( Centistokes ) per 10 Sq.M.
(kg)
Low porosity 30 – 60 6 to 9
Medium porosity 70 – 140 9 to 12
High porosity 250 – 500 12 to 15
MORTH 502.2.3 Choice of primer : The primer shall be emulsion bitumen complying with IS
8887 of a type and grade as specified in the Contact or as directed by the Engineer. The use of
medium curing cutback as per IS 217 shall be restricted only for sites at sub-zero temperatures or
for emergency applications as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 502.3 Weather and Seasonal Limitations

Bituminous primer shall not be applied to a wet surface (see 502.4.2) or during a dust
storm or when the weather is foggy, rainy or windy or when the temperature in the shade is
less than 10o C. Surfaces which are to receive emulsion primer should be damp. But no free or
standing water shall be present.
Construction:
MORTH 502.4.1.1 Equipment :
The Primer distributor shall be a self-propelled or towed bitumen pressure sprayer equipped
for spraying the material uniformly at specified rates and temperatures. Hand spraying of
small areas. Inaccessible to the distributor, or as directed by the Engineer.
MORTH 502.4.2 Preparation of road surface : The surface to be primed shall be prepared
in accordance with Clauses 501.8 .
MORTH 501.8 This work shall consist of preparing an existing granular surface and shall be
performed on such widths and lengths as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer
Immediately prior to applying the primer the surface shall be carefully swept clean of dust
and loose particles, care being taken not to disturb the inter locked aggregate. This is best
achieved when the surface layer is slightly moist (lightly sprayed with water and the surface
allowed to dry) and the surface should be kept moist until the primer is applied.
MORTH 502.4.3 Application of emulsion bituminous primer : The viscosity and rate of
application of the primer shall be at rate of 7.5 Kg / 10 Sq.m. as directed. The bituminous
primer shall be sprayed uniformly in accordance with Clause 501. The method for application

Date Page 281
of the primer will depend on the type of equipment to be used, size of nozzles, pressure at the
spray bar and speed of forward movement. The Contractor shall demonstrate at a spraying
trial, that the equipment and method to be used is capable of producing a uniform spray,
within the tolerances specified.
MORTH 502.4.4 Curing of primer and opening to traffic : A primed surface shall be
allowed to cure for at least 24 hours or such other period as is found to be necessary to allow
all the volatiles to evaporate before any subsequent surface treatment or mix is laid. Any
unabsorbed primer shall first be blotted with an application of sand, using the minimum
quantity possible. A primed surface shall not be opened to traffic other than that necessary to
lay the next course. A very thin layer of clean sand may be applied to the surface of the
primer, to prevent the primer picking up under the wheels of the paver and the trucks
delivering bituminous material to the paver.
MORTH 502.5 Quality Control of Work :

For control of the quality of materials supplied and the works carried out, the relevant
provisions of Section 901 of MORT & H specifications shall apply.
MORTH 502.6 Arrangements for Traffic

During construction operations, arrangements for traffic shall be made in accordance with
the provisions of Clause 112 of MORT & H specifications.
MORTH 502.7 Measurement for Payment

Prime coat shall be measured in terms of surface area of application in square meters.
MORTH 502.8 Rate :-

The contract unit rate for prime coat with adjustments as described in Clause 502.7
of MORT&H specification shall be payment in full for carrying out the required operations
including full compensation for all components listed below
[i] Making arrangements for traffic to Clause 112 as above except for initial treatment
to verges, shoulders and construction of diversions.
[ii] Furnishing all materials to be in corporate in the work including all royalties, fees,
rents where necessary and all leads and lift.
[iii] All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the
specifications.
[iv] Carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed, and
[v] Carrying out the required tests for quality control.
Payment shall be made on the basis of the provision of prime coat at an application rate of 7.5
kg per 10 square meter, with adjustment, plus or minus, for the variation between this amount

Date Page 282
and the actual amount approved by the Engineer after the preliminary trials referred to in
Clause 502.4.3.of MORT&H specification stated above.
Item No. 22:

providing & laying 37.5 mm thick compacted Built up spray grout base course in single layers for
bringing the road surface in to camber and gradient over existing road surface with bitumen grade
60/70 for tack coat at the rate of 2.50 kg/10 sq. mt. of road surface area and using 0.50 cum of stone
Aggregate per 10 sqm with asphalt for grouting @ 15 kg per 10 sqm of road surface and using 0.13
cmt of key aggregate per 10 sqm of road surface including heating and consolidation in both layers by
vibratory roller as per MORT&H specification clause No 506 including cost of all materials. Fuel
labours, tools etc. completed.
MORTH 506.1 Scope:

This work shall consist at a one layer composite construction of compacted crushed coarse
aggregates with application of bituminous binder after each layer and key aggregates on the top of
the second layer, in accordance with requirement of these specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades and cross sections shown on the drawing or directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Thickness of course shall be 37.5mm.
MORTH 506.2 Materials:
MORTH 506.2.1 Binder : The binder shall be straight run bitumen of a suitable grade, 60/70 as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge, satisfying the requirements of IS-73 or approved cutback.
MORTH 506.2.2 Aggregates : The aggregates shall, durable, of fairly cubical shape and free of
disintegrated pieces, organic or other deleterious matter and adherent coatings. The aggregates shall
preferably be hydrophobic and of low porosity.
The aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements set fort in Annexure-B except that the upper
limit for Los Angeles Abrasion Value and Aggregate impact Value shall be 50 and 40 respectively.
The coarse and key aggregates for built-up spray grout shall conform to the gradings given below.
MORTH Table 500-7 Grading requirements of coarse and key aggregates for built-up spray
grout
IS Sieve Designation Percent by weight passing the Sieve

Coarse Aggregate Key Aggregate
53.0mm 100 -
26.5mm 40-75 -
22.4mm - 100
13.2mm 0-20 40-75
5.6mm - 0-20
2.8mm 0-5 0-5

Date Page 283
MORTH 506.3.1 Weather and seasonal limitations: Built-up spray grout shall not be constructed
during rainy weather, when the base is damp or wet or when the atmospheric temperature in shade
is 16° C or below.
MORTH 506.3.2 Equipment : The provisions of clause 505.3.2 shall apply.
MORTH 506.3.3 Preparation of base : The base on which built-up spray grout is to constructed
shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to the specified lines, grades and cross-sections as
directed by the Engineer in-charge. The surface be thoroughly swept and scrapped clean of dust and
other foreign matter.
MORTH 506.3.4Tack coat: A tack coat as per Clause 503.
MORTH 506.3.5 Spreading and rolling coarse aggregates : Immediately after the application of
tack coat the coarse aggregates in a dry and clean from shall be spread uniformly, and evenly at the
rate of 0.5 cum per 10 Sq.m. area. The surface of the layer shall be carefully checked with templates
and all high and low spots remedied by removing or adding as may be required. Immediately after
spreading of the coarse aggregates, dry rolling shall be done with a 8-10 tonne smooth wheeled
roller Rolling shall commence at the edge and progress towards the centre except in super-elevated
portions where it shall proceed from the inner edge to the outer. Each pass of the roller shall
uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. After initial
rolling the surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally with templates and any
irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing necessary amounts of
aggregate followed by rolling. Rolling shall be stopped before voids in the aggregate layer are-
closed to such an extent as to prevent free and uniform penetration of the binder.
MORTH 506.3.6 Application of binder - First spray : The binder shall be heated to the
temperature appropriate to grade of bitumen approved by the Engineer-in-charge and sprayed on
aggregate layer at the rate of 15 kg/ 10 m2 (In terms of straight-run bitumen) in a uniform manner
with the help of mechanical sprayers. Excessive deposits of caused by stopping or starting of the
sprayers or through leakage or any other reason shall be corrected promptly.
MORTH 506.3.7 Spreading and rolling for coarse aggregate for the one layer : Immediately
after the first application of binder the second layer of coarse aggregates shall be spread and rolled
to 503.4 above.
MORTH 506.3.8 Application of binder - one spray : The second aggregate layer shall then be
given a binder spray at the rate of 15 kg/10 m3 (in terms, of straight-run bitumen) to 3.5 above.
MORTH 506.3.9 Application of key aggregate : immediately after second application of the
binder key aggregate in a clean and dry state shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 0.13 m3 / 10m2
so as to cover the surface completely. If necessary, the surface shall be broomed to ensure uniform
application of the key aggregates. The entire surface shall then be rolled with a 8-10 tonne smooth
wheeled roller. While rolling is in progress, additional key aggregates where required shall be
spread by hand. Rolling shall continue until the entire course is thoroughly compacted and the key
aggregates are firmly in position.

Date Page 284
MORTH 506.4. Surface Finish and Quality Control : The surface finish of construction shall
conform to the requirements of 9O2 of M.O.S.T.
MORTH 506.5. The built-up spray -grout shall be provided with final surfacing without any delay.
MORTH 506.6. Arrangements for Traffic : During period of construction, arrangements of traffic
shall be done as per para 112 of M.O.S.T. Specification.
MORTH 506.7. Measurements for Payment : Built-up spray grout shall be measured as finished
work in square meters.
MORTH 506.8. Rate : The contract unit rate for built-up spray grout shall be payment in full for
carrying out the required operations including full compensation for all components as follows.
(1) Providing all materials to be used in the work including royalty charges, fees, rent where
necessary with all lead & lift.
(2) All labour, tools, plants, equipments and incidental to complete the work to the specification.
(3) Providing and maintaining diversion and controlling traffic.
Asphalt if used less than as specified on account of deviation in tack coat or modification in rate of
asphalt consumption.

Date Page 285

CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE “C”
Item No. 01
Providing Steel Liner 6 mm thick for pile including Fabricating and Setting
out as per Detailed Drawing.
Work shall be carried out as per specification/condition as per clause No.2.3.14 of TECHNICAL
a) Mode of measurement shall be in MT basis of liner provided as directed by Engineer in
Charge.
Item No. 02
Providing and fixing in position steel bar reinforcement of steel grade Fe-500D
(T.M.T) for R.C.C. bored piles as per detailed drawing, including cutting,
hooking, tying and welding and including forming the cage and lowering it in
position complete.
1.0 GENERAL
a) This work shall consist of furnishing and placing TMT Fe 500D Conforming to IS 1786 -2008
reinforcement, bars (intentioned) of the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings and
conforming to these Specifications or as approved by the Engineer in charge.
b) The work shall be carried out as per clause 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.3 and 2.4.4 TECHNICAL
c) The payment shall be made for over lapping beyond the standard length of bar only.
2.0 Binding wire
2.1 Mild steel binding wire shall be of 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm (16 to 18 gauge diameter and shall
conform IS 280-1972.
2.2 The use of black wire will be permitted for binding reinforcement bars. It shall be free from dirt,
paint, grease or oil, oil scale or loose or thick rust and any other undesirable coating which may
prevent adhesion of cement mortar at the time of binding.
2.3 Only new binding wire shall be delivered to the site all binding wire shall be inspected before
binding to its position and defective brittle, rusted, used wire, shall be discarded.
3.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENTS & PAYMENT
3.1 For the purpose of payment the bar shall be measured correct up to 10 mm length and weight
Date Page 286
payable works out at the rate specified below,

1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.
2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.86 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.84 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.32 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.87 Kg./Rmt.
3.2 The rate for reinforcement includes cost of steel binding wires, with all leads and lifts, cutting,
bending, binding, and placing in position as shown on the drawings and as directed.
3.3 The rate shall be for a unit of one M.T.
Item No. 3
Providing and placing in position steel bar reinforcement of steel grade Fe-500D
(TMT) for R.C.C. Pile cap including cutting, hooking, tying, welding etc.
complete as per detailed drawing & specification.
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 Binding wire
Date Page 287

1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.
2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.86 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.84 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.32 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.87 Kg./Rmt.
Item No. 4
Providing and fixing in position steel bar for pier/abutment, pier cap & seismic
arrester reinforcement of steel grade FE-500D (TMT) including cutting,
bending, hooking, tying, welding etc., complete as per detailed drawing and
specification.
1.0 GENERAL
c) This item will be utilised for pier, pier cap, seismic attester, bed block etc.
d) The payment shall be made for over lapping, for more than standard length of bar.
2.0 Binding wire


Date Page 288

1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.
2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.86 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.84 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.32 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.87 Kg./Rmt.
Item No. 5
Providing and fixing in position steel bar reinforcement For Super Structure of
steel grade FE-500D (TMT) including cutting ,bending, hooking, tying, welding
etc., complete as per detailed drawing and specification.
1.0 GENERAL
b) The work shall be carried out as per clause 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.3 and 2.4.4 of TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION of Tender Document..
c) The payment shall be made for over lapping, for more than standard length of bar.
2.0 Binding wire
2.1. Mild steel binding wire shall be of 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm (16 to 18 gauge diameter and shall
2.2. The use of black wire will be permitted for binding reinforcement bars. It shall be free from
dirt, paint, grease or oil, oil scale or loose or thick rust and any other undesirable coating
which may prevent adhesion of cement mortar at the time of binding.
Date Page 289
2.3. Only new binding wire shall be delivered to the site all binding wire shall be inspected before

3.1 For the purpose of payment the bar shall be measured correct up to 10 mm length and
weight payable works out at the rate specified below,
1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.
2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.86 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.84 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.32 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.87 g./Rmt.
3.2. The rate for reinforcement includes cost of steel binding wires, with all leads and
lifts, cutting, bending, binding, and placing in position as shown on the drawings and as
directed.
3.3. The rate shall be for a unit of one M.T.
Item No. 6
Providing and fixing in position steel bar for RCC BOX of steel grade FE-500D
(TMT) including cutting , bending, hooking, tying, welding etc., complete as per
detailed drawing and specification.
1.0. GENERAL
a) This work shall consist of furnishing and placing TMT Fe 500D Conforming to IS 1786 -
2008 reinforcement, bars (intentioned) of the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings
and conforming to these Specifications or as approved by the Engineer in charge.
2.0. Binding wire
2.1. Mild steel binding wire shall be of 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm (16 to 18 gauge diameter
and shall conform IS 280-1972.
2.2. The use of black wire will be permitted for binding reinforcement bars. It shall be

Date Page 290
free from dirt, paint, grease or oil, oil scale or loose or thick rust and any other
undesirable coating which may prevent adhesion of cement mortar at the time of
binding.
2.3. Only new binding wire shall be delivered to the site all binding wire shall be
inspected before binding to its position and defective brittle, rusted, used wire, shall be
discarded.
3.0. MODE OF MEASUREMENTS & PAYMENT

3.1. For the purpose of payment the bar shall be measured correct up to 10 mm length and
weight payable works out at the rate specified below,
1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.
2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.86 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.84 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.32 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.87 Kg./Rmt.
3.2. The rate for reinforcement includes cost of steel binding wires, with all leads and lifts, cutting,
3.3. The rate shall be for a unit of one M.T.

Date Page 291

CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE “D”
As per SOR Item of USSOR of Western Railway

Date Page 292

CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE “E”
Item No. NS/1 & NS/3

Supply & Fabrication and Launching of steel girder
(A) The work of fabrication, launching etc shall be carried out as per specifications/conditions
mentioned at clause no.2.4 and 2.5. of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of the Tender
Document and as per approved structural drawing/design
(B) Contractor should inform in writing to Engineer in charge from time to time regarding
fabrication stages of the girder in work shop and should provide all facilities to the
representative of engineer in charge for frequent inspections during fabrication.
(C) Stage of Payment: Payment shall be made as per clause 2.4.5.2(ii) and 2.4.5.3 of
Item No. NS/2

Metallising of Girder Components:
1. All the parts of the girder shall be metalised and the girder parts which are not to be metalised
shall be advised by the Engineer in-charge.
2. Metalising: The entire surface to be metalised shall be sand blasted before metalising so that
surface is thoroughly clean and free from grease, oil, rust, moisture and any other foreign
matter.
3. Clean prior to Blasting: Grease, paint and other foreign matter should be removed from the
area to be sprayed as well as the adjoining areas.
4. Sand Blasting: The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by compressed air
blasting or centrifugal blasting with a suitable abrasive material like sharp, coarse sand of grain
size between 600 microns and 1.7 mm a minimum of 40% should be retained on a 850 micron
sieve.
5. The surface shall be comparable in roughness with a reference surface produced in accordance
with Appendix a of IS: 5905 and shall provide an adequate key for the subsequently sprayed
metal coating. The girder components shall have one coat of primer when received at site from
Manmade and shall have to be cleaned as above.
6. Metal spraying: The metal spraying shall be carried out as soon as possible after surface
preparation but, in any case, within such period that the surface is still completely clean, dry and
without visible oxidation. It deterioration in the surface to be coated is observed by comparison
with a freshly prepared metal surface or similar quality which has undergone the same
preparation, the preparation treatment should be repeated on the surface to be coated.
Date Page 293
7. The wire method shall be used for the purpose of metalising, the diameter of the wire being
3mm to 5 mm. Specified thickness of coating shall be applied within 4 hours or blasting and the
surface must be completely coated to the specified thickness within 8 hours of blasting.
8. Purity of Aluminum: The chemical composition of aluminum to be sprayed shall be 99.5%
aluminum conforming to IS: 2590-1964.
9. Appearance of the coating: The surface of the sprayed coating shall be of uniform texture and
free from lumps, coarse areas and loosely adherent particulars.
10. Thickness of coating: The nominal thickness of the coating shall be 150 microns. The
minimum thickness shall not less than 115 microns.
11. Inspection: Determination of local thickness: The minimum local thickness shall be determined
by the method of described below.
Equipment for measuring thickness: Any magnetic or electromagnetic thickness meter that will
measure local thickness of a known standard with an accuracy of +/- 10%.
Magnetic thickness measuring gauge : Electrometer may be used for measuring the thickness of
coating as specified in IS 5203-1965.
Method of Test for Adhesion: The sprayed metal coating shall be subjected to an adhesion test
using the method as described below.
Using a straight edge and hardened steel scriber which has been ground to a sharp 30 degree
point, scribe two parallel lines at a distance apart equal to approximately 10 times the average
coating thickness. Inscribing the two lines, apply enough pressure on each occasion to cut
through the coating to the base metal in a single stroke.
If any part of the coating between the lines breaks away from the base metal, it shall be deemed
to have failed the test.
12. Re-treatment of defective areas: Any defective area shall be cleaned of all sprayed metal by
blasting or other suitable means and re-prepared to conform to the requirement of para 1 of re-
spraying, where the defect has been solely due to too thin a coating, sprayed metal of the same
quality may be added, provided that the surface has been kept dry and is free from visible
contamination, as specified in para 6.1 of IS 5905.
a) 1st coat with wash primer/Etch primer of SSPCT/IS-5666 and 2nd coat of zinc chrome primer
to IS: 104.
b) After hard drying of zinc chrome primer, one coat of aluminum paint to IS 2339 (brushing
or spraying as required) shall be applied.
c) Corrosion pits and caps between members connected together should be filled with putty
before applying final coating. The putty shall conform to IS 419-1967 or other suitable
compound approved by the department.
d) Linseed oil, raw or boiled, used for mixing paints shall correspond to IS: 77-1976.
13. Site painting: After steel work is erected at site, a second cover coat of aluminum paint to IS:
2339 ( brushing or spraying as required) shall be applied after touching up the primer.
14. In case of metalising at site, priming coat as well as both the coats of aluminum paint will be
applied at the site and each coat will be applied after drying of the previous coat.
15. Thickness of coating: Minimum thickness of all the coatings, including metalising will be 175
microns.
16. Safety precautions: Safety precautions should be taken as specified in IS: 6586 which is

Date Page 294
described below.
17. The normal precautions against fumes and dust hazards, such as wearing of mask and proper
ventilation should be observed and that no special dangers arise during the spraying of
aluminum and zinc.
18. Any warning printed on the containers by the pain manufacturer should be strictly observed and
the user should consult him in all cases of doubt regarding health and fire hazards arising from
the use of the product.
Item No. NS/4

Supplying, fabricating and fixing of mild steel of any size such as M.S. steel
angles, plates, I-beams, channels, pipes etc.
1. The work shall be carried out as per specifications/conditions mentioned at clause no.2.4.
2. This item includes fabricating Girders / Rail clusters, bearing plate, etc. with contractor’s own
mild steel of various rolled section including I beam and channels as per drawing/ details given
by the Engineer in charge and assembling etc. All the mild steel sections shall be procured by
the contractor and shall conform to IS 226 of 1975. The fabrication of steel work will be done
strictly as per Indian Railway Unified standard specification Vol-I(2010) to the extent
applicable to this work.
3. Weight of the structural member to be fabricated and erected will be worked out on the basis of
the length of different structural steel members shown in the DFCCIL/Railways final fabrication
drawing and book weight of the section actually used.
4. No separate payment for nuts and bolts and other fittings/fastenings shall be made and the
rate is deemed to have been included, while taking measurement weight of the same shall
not be accounted for.
5. In case the structural sections and nuts, bolts specified in the approved DFCCIL/Railway’s
fabrication drawings are not available, the tenderer/s will be at liberty to use alternate sections
with the approval of the DFCCIL/Railway Administration in each case. However it may please
be noted that no extra payment for the difference in weight on account of the use of alternate
higher section will be paid. The payment will be made for the weight of the steel sections as per
approved final fabrication drawings. Only difference of weight on account of use of alternative
heavier sections can however be allowed, for payment, subject to certification by the main
producer that the prescribed sections are not being manufactured. The rate includes making the
surface good for application of one coat of approved quality red oxide and two or more coats (
to achieve good and even surface) of good quality synthetic enamel paints , transportation ,
labour, T&P, welding, bolting and riveting , erection etc. complete.
6. The contractor has to produce the test certificate for the steel brought to site and for test check
same may be sent for testing. In case the testing material does not conform to the relevant IS
Specifications, it will be summarily rejected. The cost of all such tests is to be borne by the
contractor. The contractor at his own cost shall do one test per 50 MT of steel or part thereof
from approved Govt. Laboratory.
7. The weight shall be calculated as per the standard unit weight of the section as per the ISI Hand

Date Page 295
Book. If any extra quantity of steel over and above shown in the drawing and over the standard
scale laid down has been used by the contractor or for any other reasons such as wastage or bad
workmanship, the cost of this excess will not be paid by the DFCCIL. The overlap shall be
paid only if the length of section exceeds the standard length available in market.
8. The rate quoted by the contractor includes all labour, T&P, machinery, taxes, electricity etc.
9. MODE OF PAYMENT/MEASUREMENT
(i) 90 % payment will be done after erection and application of one coat of red oxide.
(ii) 10 % payment will be done after painting the sections with two coats of good quality
synthetic enamel paint.
10. The payment shall be made on the prorata basis i.e. actual work done at site and MT shall be the
basis of the measurement. No payment shall be released under this item unless the test
certificate produced by the contractor and the same is got approved by the Engineer in Charge.
NS/5 : Pot PTFE Bearings:

Pot Bearings: General
Pot type bearing shall consist of metal piston supported by a disc or unreinforced elastomer
confined within a metal cylinder to take care of rotation. Horizontal movement, if required, shall
with a system of sealing rings be provided by sliding surfaces of PTFE pads sliding against
stainless steel mating surfaces. The pot bearings shall consist of cast steel assemblies or
fabricated structural steel assemblies.
Provision of IRC-983 (Part I) shall be applicable for all metallic elements. Provisions of IRC: 83
(Part II) shall be applicable for all elastomer elements. When any items are not converted by
IRC: 83 (Parts I and II), the same shall be as per guidelines given hereunder and BS: 5400
(Sections 9.1. and 9.2), except that no natural rubber shall be permitted. If there is any conflict
between BS on the one hand and IRC on the other, the provisions of IRC will be guiding.
Combination bearings using any judicious combination and sliding element shall be permitted.
As for example.
Name Rotation element Sliding Element Generally for
POT POT None Vertical load.
Elastomer Elestomer None * Horizontal Buffer
POT PTFE POT PTFE-SS ** Vertical load and

horizontal load.
Spherical Spherical PTFE-SS** Vertical load and

Kunckle PTEE Knuckle horizontal load.
Elastomer PTFE Elastomer PTFE-SS ** Transverse Guide.

Date Page 296
Elastomer SS ** Elastomer SS-SS ** Transverse Guide.
Elastomer shall permit movement by shear.

** Stainless Steel.
Fabrication.
The surface mating with the PTFE in the sliding pair shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel,
Normally, the stainless steel from the upper component. The stainless steel shall overlap the
PTFEE after full movement on all sides. If stainless steel sheet is used, it should be bonded by
continuous welding along the edges. Adhesive or any other bonding can be approved by the
Engineer in charge. The surface shall be prepared by through cleaning to remove grease, dust or
any other foreign substance.
PTFE modular sheets of then sliding pair shall be located by confinement assisted by bonding.
Confined PTFE shall be recessed into the metal backing plate. The shoulders of the recess shall
be sharp and square to restrict the flow of PTFE.
The thickness of the PTFE shall not be less than 4.5 mm with projection above the recess not
exceeding 2.0 mm. When the piston is subjected to tilting, the seal must slide along the wall and
alter its shape according to the angle of tilt. At the same time, it must be sufficiently rigid to
bridge the gap between the piston and the wall of the pot. However, the percentage of plan area
of the lubrication capacities to the gross area shall not exceed 25 per cent. The depth of the
cavity shall not exceed 2.0mm.
The diameter to thickness ratio of the confined elastomer shall not exceed 15. The surface of the
confined elastomer shall be smooth.
A seal shall be provided to prevent extrusion of the confined elastomer between the piston and
the pot wall. The seal should stay functional under the loads and rotations acting on it.
Additional seal must slide along the wall and after its shape according to the angle of tilt. At the
same time, it must be sufficiently rigid to bridge the gap between the piston and the wall of the
post.
The hardness of the piston and pot wall at their contact region shall be minimum 350 BHN to
reduce wear. The surface finish of the post base in contact with the confined elastomer shall be
very smooth.
All bearings shall be installed with anchor and anchor screws or some similar device such that
while replacing, the bearings can be removed with minimum lifting of the superstructure.
The external surfaces of the assemblies shall be completely cleaned by sand blasting. After sane
blasting, dust shall be removed from the surface using clean and dry compressed air or a clean
brush after which suitable coating shall be applied.

Date Page 297
Pot bearings including all parts as shown on the drawings shall be fully assembled at the
manufacturer’s works to ensure proper fitting of all parts.
Materials.
The pot PTFE bearings shall be purchased through the RDSO approved suppliers / manufactures
only.
Steels.
Structural steel shall conform to IS : 2062, as applicable.
Cast steel shall conform to Gr.280-520 W of IS 1030. 00 to 0.5 per cent copper may be added to
increase the corrosion resistance properties.
Stainless steel shall conform to AISI : 304 to X04crl 8 Nilo of IS : 6911 for ordinary
applications. For applications with adverse/corrosive environment, the stainless steel shall
conform to ASISI : 316 L. Or 02Crl 17Nil 2 MO2 of IS :6911.
PTFE
PTFE (poly tetra fluoro ethylene) shall be of unfilled pure virgin quality. It shall be free
sintered. The mechanical properties of unfilled PTFE shall comply with Grade A of BS : 3784.
Elastomer.
The confined elastomer inside pot will have the following properties : (a) Hardness IRHD : IS :
3400 (Part II) 50 + 5 b ) Min tensile strength Mpa IS : 3400 (Part I) 15.5 c) Min elogation at
break,) shall be as per Table Max compression set and) “Properties of Elastomer”.
Accelerated aging.
Properties of Elastomer.
Property Unit Test method, IS Value of the
specification characteristic
reference specified
1 Maximum Per IS: 3400 (Part X) 35

Compression Cent Duration
Set CR Temperature (h)
(deg C)+0 to 24.2
100+1
2 Accelerated IS: 3400 (Part IV)

ageing CR duration
Temperature (h)
Date Page 298
(deg C 70 100 +1.
2.1 Max change in IRHD + 15

Hardness
2.2 Max Change in Per - 15

Tensile strength cent
2.3 Ma change in Per - 40

Elongation cent.
Workmanship.
Welding.
All welding shall conform to IS : 9595 with electrocuted of suitable grade as per IS: 814.
Preheating and post weld stress relieving shall be done as per IS :
9595.
Cast steel assemblies.
Cast steel for pot bearing assemblies shall conform to requirements of relevant IS. Casting shall
be true to the forms and dimensions shown on the drawings, and shall be free from pouring
faults, sponginess, cracks, below holes and other defects affecting their appearance or their
strength. Warped or distorted casting shall not be accepted . Exposed surfaces shall be smooth
and dense. All irregularities, fins or risers shall be ground off flush with the adjacent surface.
Castings with visible cracks, blow holes, or similar blemishes shall be rejected if the
imperfections are located on bearing surface or cannot be remedied to the satisfaction of the
Engineer in Charge.
Imperfections which are not located on bearings surfaces shall be cleaned out, filled with weld
metal of the appropriate composition and ground flush with adjacent surfaces.
Structural Steel Assemblies.
Defects arising from the fabrication of the steel shall be inspected by the Engineer, who will
decide whether the materials may be repaired by the Contractor or will be rejected. The cost of
repairs or replacement shall be borne by the Contractor. All steel whether fabricated or not, shall
be stored above the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, and adequately protected
against corrosion. Excessively rusted, bent or damaged steel shall be rejected. All plates shall be
rejected. All plates shall be flat and rolled bars and shapes straight before marking out or being
worked. Straightening shall be done by methods which shall not damage the material. Sharp
kinks and bends shall be the cause for rejection.

Date Page 299
Steel may be flame cut to shape and length so that a regular surface, free from excessive gouges
and striations is obtained. Flame cutting by hand shall be done only with the approval of the
Engineer in charge.
Exposed corners shall be machined or ground.
Tolerances:
I) Plan dimensions - 0 to + 5 mm
II) Overall height -0 to + 3 mm
III) Height of elastomer + 5 per cent.
IV) Height of any steel component 0 to +1mm

a) Machined Class 2 of IS : 4897
V) Stainless sliding surface 0.004L, where L=Length in

direction of measurement.
a) flatness
Ra <=0.25pm per IS:3073.
b Surface Finish
Painting:
All non-working surfaces be coated with two coats of epoxy primer and one more coat each of
epoxy intermediate and finish, total thickness <= 0.150 mm or any other painting scheme as
Silicon severs shall be cement coated at the manufacturer’s works.
Test.
Raw Materials
Necessary test certificates for all raw materials as in above shall be furnished by manufacturers,
reference may also be made to for tests on elastomers.
Test on Casting
Tests specified in IS: 1030 shall be performed. Castings shall be ultrasonically tested and
certificates submitted. Quality level of castings shall be level 3 as per IS: 9565.

Date Page 300
Testing on Welding.
All welding shall be tested by Dye Penetration method. But welding shall be tested by
Ultrasonic method. Soundness of welding shall be certificate by the manufacturer .Acceptance
test on bearings.
All bearings shall be checked for overall dimensions.
All bearings shall be load tested to 1.1 times maximum design capacity including seismic force.
Bearing tested at higher loads cannot be used.
A pair of bearing selected at random will undergo testing in order to determine the coefficient of
friction “u”. The coefficient of friction shall be < = 0.05 at the design load.
Two bearings selected at the design load.
Two bearings selected at random shall be tested for permissible rotation.
Installation of POT-cum-PTFE Bearings

General
In-Situ Casting of Superstructure.
Seating of Bearing.
Care shall be taken during installation of the bearings to permit their correct functioning in
accordance with the design scheme.
To prevent contamination, dismantling of the bearings at site shall not be done.
The total shall be transferred on to the bearings only when the bedding material has developed
sufficient strength. The props for the form work shall only be removed after lapse of appropriate
time. In special cases, this can be ensured by suitable devices like jacks, etc.
Temporary clamps and shims (introduced to maintain working clearance) shall be removed at an
appropriate time, before the bearing is required to permit movement.
Cement based non-shrink grout with air releasing additive and epoxy based grouts, whichever is
specified shall be first at the site. For the proprietary grout mixes, appropriate instruction form
the manufacturer shall be followed specially with regards of the followings.
Preparation > concrete cleaning, roughening, pre-soaking, etc.

Forms > sturdiness, leak proofing, shape, header funnel vents, etc.
Bearings Base > cleaning , etc.
Placement –curing, consistency, time period, finishing etc.,
Protection > curing, ambient temperature, etc.
Formwork around the bearing shall be carefully sealed to prevent leakage.

Date Page 301
Sliding plates shall be fully supported and care taken to prevent tilting, displacement or
distortion of the bearings under the weight of wet concrete.
Bearing shall be protected during concreting operation. Any mortar contaminating the bearing
shall be completely removed before it sets.
Using Template.
Template with required and matching holes corresponding to the base of the bearings shall be
used.
All the anchors shall be fitted to the lower face of the template using the anchor screws but with
steel washer replacing the elastomer washers. Separate screw may be used in case of
inconvenience in the length of the original anchor screws.
The template assembly shall be located with regard to level and alignment. It shall be ensured
that the tops of the anchors lie in a horizontal plane at the required elevation. The anchors shall
be tied/welded to reinforcements to avoid displacement during concreting.
Concreting of the pedestal / pier cap shall be done to a level leaving a gap of 25-50 mm below
the template.
The template and steel washers shall be removed prior to placement of the bearing assembly
with temporary clamps. The bearing assembly shall.
The gap below the bearing assembly shall be grouted with cement based grout. Reference may
be made to clause 8.17.6.1(VI).
B. Without Template with Gap.
Pockets commensurate with the sizes of the anchors shall be kept pedestals during concreting of
the same. The pedestal shall be cast approximately 25 mm short of the required finished level.
Anchors shall be fitted to the bearing bottom with elastomer washers and anchor screws. The
bearing assembly shall be seated in the location on steel chairs/packs. The anchors fitted below
the bearing shall go into pockets in the bed block. Level and alignment of the bearing shall be
checked. It shall be ensured that the bearing sits in a horizontal plane.
The gap below the bearing assembly including anchor pockets shall be grouted with cement
based grout. Reference may be made to Clause 8.17.6.1. (VI).
Without Template Without Gap.
Elongated pockets commensurate with the size of the anchors shall be kept in pedestals during
concreting of the same. The geometry and location of the anchor pockets (with tapered funnel

Date Page 302
extension, if required) shall be such that after placement of the bearing the pockets can be
successfully grouted. The pedestal shall be cast 5mm – 15mm short of the required finished
level. The required level shall be achieved by chipping before placement of the bearing. Careful
control shall be exercised to cast at the exact finished level or 1 mm-3 mm down from the
required finished level.
Seating of bearings shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions.
Inspection and Testing.
Where any patents are used, the manufacturer’s certificate with test proof shall be submitted
along with the design and got approved by the Engineer In Charge before their use in work.
Measurement for Payment.
Bearings shall be measured in numbers, according to their capacities and particular

specifications given on the drawings.
The rate given is AS per MT capacity of bearing.
The contract unit rate of bearing shall include the cost of all nuts, bolts, tests, prescribed in the
specifications and shown on the drawings.| The cost of supplying and fixing the bearings in
position complete as specified on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer in charge. The
rate shall also include the cost of samples and their testing when desired by the Engineer-In-
Charge.

Date Page 303

CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE “F”
Item No. NS/1

Supplying and applying Epoxy Paint of approved quality on surfaces…..
1. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the detailed scope of this item shall be deemed to include
the cost of the under mentioned works including cost of all epoxy paints to be supplied and
used, T&P, Equipments, contractor’s paints, consumables, labour, T&P, equipments,
scaffolding supervisors, labours, consumables, all taxes, all lead and lift etc. complete as
required for the successful completion of the work at contractor’s cost.
2. The tendered will have to make his own arrangements for supply of power, water etc., required
for the work at his own costs.
3. This item includes the application & mixing of approved epoxy painting formulation by method
of as per Manufacture’s specifications, including preparing surface, applications of paint coat,
cost of materials, equipments and labour etc. and all taxes. The work shall be carried out as per
the detailed specification of the product.
4. The surface over which epoxy is to be applied has to be dried and cleaned. It has to be made free
from oil, grease, loose materials, laitance, dust and debris. If necessary, compressed air can be
used to remove the external materials from surface.
5. The surface to be treated shall be cleaned of oil, dust, grease, chemical contamination, corrosion
deposits and loose concrete. . Prior to application of epoxy painting, water should be sprayed
and allowed to dry.
6. The following epoxy paint formulations or equivalent may be used.
i) Nitomortar S of M/s FOSROC India Ltd. or equivalent
ii) SAMMOR E of M/s SAMROCK Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent
7. Epoxy Paint Formulation: The epoxy paint formulation shall be a blend of silica aggregates with
solvent free epoxy resin supplied in three-pack system consisting of base, filler and hardener.
Table :
PROPERTIES At 20o C At 35o C
Pot Life 3hr. 1 1/2hr
Cure time 4-7hrs. 2-5hr
Time between coats 5-7hrs 3-5hrs
Initial Hardness 24hrs 18hrs
Full cure 7days 5days

Date Page 304
Note- Below 20o C these times will be increased.

8. Surface preparation: The surface to be treated shall be cleaned of all grease, oil, chemical
contamination, dust laitance and loose concrete. The surface shall be washed with clean water
and allowed to dry.
Paint as per manufacturer’s specifications shall be mixed, adding the hardener to base and shall
be applied to the concrete, and after the absorption of the resin, a second coat of paint shall be
applied.
9. Mixing Epoxy Paint Formulation: Before mixing, the content of each cane should thoroughly
stirred to disperse any settlement which may have taken place during storage. The entire content
of the smaller hardener cane should be poured into the base container and the materials
thoroughly mixed for at least 3minutes. Mechanical mixing using a slow speed (300-500rpm)
flameproof drill fitted with a mixing paddle is recommended.
10. Application of Epoxy paint: Apply the mixed paint on to the dry, prepared substrate making
sure a continuous film is achieved using a standard paint brush, good quality lamswool roller or
spray equipment.
Test certificates: Manufacturer’s test certificates for each batch shall be supplied along with the
material. Material shall not be older than 6 month from the date of manufacture.
11. Safety Measures: All the safety measures which are essentially required to be taken shall be
taken by the contractor and for any mishaps; DFCCIL/Railways shall not be responsible. The
contractor shall take all safety precautions to avoid damages to life and property and shall give
due regard to manufacturer’s recommendations for safety. The work shall be carried out in the
sequence as shown in tender drawing or as directed by the Engineer in Charge as per site
requirements.
12. Mode of Measurements & Payments: The mode of measurement shall be Sq m. The rate shall be
inclusive of all taxes, lead, lift, transportation and phase works if any.
Item No. NS/2:

Safety Screen
This item is for providing, fabricating and fixing in position safety screen conforming to IS:
800-1984 of approved quality/make including painting.
The rate quoted shall be for safety screen with all materials, labour, tools and plants etc.
including painting with one coat of red oxide and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved
make and color as directed by Engineer in charge and approved drawing.

Date Page 305
Item No. NS/3:

Providing MS Barricading
Providing, fixing and maintaining MS fabricated traffic barricading of 2.50 m height on either
side of carriage way closed to the traffic including provision of all sign board/bollards and warning
lights etc as per direction of Engineer in charge at site. Rate is inclusive of all labour, materials,
tools and plants, taxes, lead & lift and transportation, erection and dismantling etc. Nothing extra
shall be payable other than the rate quoted by the contractor.
The barricading shall be got erected just prior to commencement of the work and will remain
erected till the work is completed in all respect or as decided by Engineer in charge at site.
The length of barricading shall be decided by Engineer in charge/Site Supervisor at site and
shall be final and binding. The design of barricading shall be as approved by competent authority /
Engineer in charge.
Measurement shall be for the finished item. Nothing extra shall be payable for overlapping.
However, overlapping has to be provided so that GI sheets perfectly anchor to each other.
After completion of the work, all the material utilized in barricading shall be the contractor's
property, however, nothing extra shall be paid for transporting including loading and unloading.
Before erection, the material utilized for barricading shall be got approved by the DFCCIL
supervisor at site.
Rate is also inclusive of PCC meant for insertion of MS pipe. However, PCC shall not be done
in the grade lower than 1:2:4 mix.
Quantity shown above is approximate; however, actual length of barricading may differ as per
the site condition. Whatever length of barricading is decided by Engineer in charge/Site supervisor
shall be provided by the contractor.
Item No. NS/4

Making and supplying of check rails of 52 kg/ 60 kg rails of various lengths for
level crossing as per approval drawings.
i) The work of fabricating check rails of any length by machining shall be carried out
strictly as per the Railway’s standard drawings, instructions laid down in Indian
Railway Permanent Way Manual and the instructions of the Engineer–In–Charge
whose decisions shall be final and conclusive.

Date Page 306
ii) The work shall be carried out only under the Supervision of the Engineer–In–Charge
or his representative.
iii) The rails and other fittings will be supplied to the contractor at the nearest PWI
Depot.
iv) The quantities shown in the Schedule are approximate and Railway reserves the right
to increase/ decrease it as per Railways requirement.
v) The contractor shall be responsible for all P. Way Material supplied to him till
completion of work and properly accounted.
vi) The surplus material shall be returned in the depot in good condition and no
transportation charges either transporting it to site or returning back shall be payable.
Waste material shall also be returned.
Mode of payment:
The unit for measurement is each Level Crossing consist 2 check rails.
Payment shall be made as per actual work done at site. Nothing extra shall be paid other than the
rates accepted.
Item no. NS/5
Providing, arranging, managing and maintaining 500 sq.ft. well furnished AC

office and well equipped Laboratory with 3 tables, 10 chairs, 2 steel almirah, one
computer with printer & operator, sufficient number of display etc. to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager including Electrical, Water expenses etc. For
execution of this item the date of start shall be considered only when the
Contractor has actually rented/constructed the required premises established
the office & Laboratory as per requirement. This item shall remain valid only
for original contact period; no additional payment shall be made for whatsoever
reason even if time extension if provided or date of completion is extended. This
office and laboratory including furniture and all other equipment shall be
property of contractor after completion of Project.

Date Page 307
SITE OFFICE FOR EMPLOYER
A. The Contractor has to provide a reasonable office accommodation of suitable size at each
ROB’s site (about 500 sqft) as approved by the Engineer as far as possible close to ROB
location under this contract for supervisory staff of the Employer and Consultants. The office
accommodation shall be maintained by the contractor by providing all required furniture as
mentioned in technical specification along with a gas connection for office pantry. The
contractor will also provide round the clock watch & ward, one Messenger for communication
between site & officers and one for maintaining the pantry etc. the cost is incidental & deemed
inclusive in cost to complete the contract and no separate payment shall be made for the above
mentioned provisions except relevant SOR item. The rentals along with electrical, water supply
and other charges shall be arranged by the contractor for accommodation/s provided by the
contractor during entire contract period as directed & decided by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall take away all material, furniture & equipment provided at accommodation/s after
completion of contract but upon obtaining written approval from the Engineer and/ or as
decided by the Engineer.
B. The office, accommodation/s shall be arranged at strategically suitable location as decided by

the Engineer at each ROB site.
C. The Contractor shall arrange & provide reasonable furnished office, accommodation/s, good for
the Employer’s supervisory staff, having with required accessories and compatible UPS/
Inverter power backup. The Contractor shall provide the office accommodation within one
month from the date of LOA. The rentals for accommodation/s provided, Telephone, electric &
water charges etc. will be arranged by the contractor on time. The list of furniture and
equipments is given below, which are to be provided and maintained foe site office under this
contractor package. All Cost towards provision of stationary, photocopy, printing of drawings,
record maintenance etc. will be incurred by contractor as part of office maintenance.
D. Following furniture shall be provided and maintained by the contractor at his own cost at each
site of ROB to the satisfaction of the Engineer including Electrical, Water expenses etc. for
execution.
Sr.No Item reqd. at Specification Nos.

site office reqd.
1 Office table As approved by Engineer 3
2 Office chair As approved by Engineer 3
3 Visitor chair As approved by Engineer 4

Date Page 308
4 Ordinary chair As approved by Engineer 6
5 Stools As approved by Engineer 2
6 Steel Almirah Make- Godrej store well 1890x900x590 mm plain with 1

locker or equivalent as approved by Engineer
7 Air Conditioner As approved by Engineer 1
8 Telephone & Telephone and Fax machine with STD and internet 1
Fax Machine facility.
9 Laptop (Core- HP/HCL/DELL/SONY or equivalent including with 1

i7 ) with printer applicable soft wares as 1Auto CAD, MS Project etc.
along with one printer four in one- type print, fac scan
& photo copy
10 Refrigerator Make Godrej or equivalent 185 ltr. Minimum 1
11 Fire As per requirement for Office 1 Set

Extinguisher
E. Site office shall be furnished as per requirement of the Employer. The contractor shall supply
new furniture, equipment, pantry utensils, reasonable Crockery & Cutlery etc. as decided by the
Engineer. All the furniture etc. shall become the property of the contractor after the completion
of the contractor the same shall be taken away by the contractor as decided by the Engineer.
The cost for providing & maintenance of office, accommodation is incidental to work & no
separate payment shall be made.
Note :-
1. In the event of conflict between special condition /Technical specification /other
guidelines, (available in the tender) the decision of the DFCCIL administration is final
and binding to the contractor. No claim in this regard shall be entertained.
2. The Contractor and concerned staff, PMC shall ensure that every 1st, 3rd, 5th etc Running bill
& Final Bill shall be technically checked before making payment.
3. Earthwork register, level books, steel registers, Hrs, Test certificates where as required etc.
shall be maintained carefully and shall submit along with all Running / final bill for
technical checking

Date Page 309
- : SCHEDULE FOR TESTING OF MATERIALS :-
It. No. Brief Qty of Prescription of test Frequency at which test Total No
as per description of material which shall be shall be carried out of test to
schedule materials to be carried out be taken.
"B" tested
1] Coarse - Gradation test 1 to 100 cm 1 test

Aggregate
- Impact value 100 to 500 cm 3 test
- Flakiness and 500 to 1500 cm 5 test

elongation
1500 to 5000 cm 7 test
Minimum 1 test/
work
2] Grit - Stripping value As above
3] Granular - Gradation As above

materials
- Atterbeg limits
4] Murrum - P I Value One test per 50 cum.
5] Sand/ quarry - Silt content One test per work/ season

spall
- Gradation One test per 200 cmt.
- CBR test One test per work
6] Asphalt 1 Penetration test 1 to 10 tanker 1 test

as per IS 1203
11 to 20 tanker 2 test
2 Ductility test as
per IS 1208 21 to 50 " 3 test
3 Specific gravity 51 to 100 " 4 test

test as per IS Remaining every 1 test
1202 50"
4 Softening point
test as per IS

Date Page 310
1204
5 Viscosity test as
per IS 1206
and 8 test for larger

consignment
8] CC Cubes - Compressive 1 to 5 cms 1 No

Strength
6 to 15 cms 2 No
(I.S. 519 – 1959)
16 to 30 cms 3 No
30 to 50 cms 4 No
51 and above 4+1
(For each additional 50 m3

or part thereof)
9] Water - Chemical test Once for approval of source

of supply
10] Steel - Tensile Strength 1 test/ 40 tonnes/ per

category
- Yield Stress
- Elongation

Date Page 311
- Size
11] Bricks - Water absorption 1 test per 50,000 bricks
- Efflorence
- Size
- Compressive
Strength
12] Prime coat/ - Quality of binder Number of samples per lot

Tack coat and test as per IS:73
- Binder At regular close intervals

temperature for
application
- Rate of spread of Two test per 500 m2 and not

binder less than two test per day
13] Carpet and - Quality of binder Number of samples per lot

Seal coat mix/ and test as per IS:73
B.M/ M.S.S.
- Grading 1 test on individual contents
and mix aggregate from the
dryer for each 100 tonns of
mix subject to minimum of
two test per plant per day
- Temperature of At regular close intervals

binder
- Binder content One test for each 100 tonnes

vide 45 IMD 2172 of mix subject to mini. of
Two per day
- Rate of spread of Regular control through

mix materials checks on layer thickness
14] Granular Sub- ````` - Gradation As mentioned under serial

base number 3
- Atterberg limits As mentioned under serial

Date Page 312
number 3
- Moisture content As mentioned under serial

prior to number 3
compaction
- Density of One test per 500 m2

compacted layer
- Deleterious As required
constituents
- C.B.R. As required
15] Wet Mix - Aggregate Impact As mentioned under serial

Macadam Value number 1
- Grading As mentioned under serial

number 1
- Flakiness and As mentioned under serial

Elongation Index number 1

of portion of number 3
aggregate passing
425 micron sieve
- Density of One test per 500 m2

compacted layer
16] Water Bound - Aggregate As mentioned under serial

Macadam Impact Value number 1
- Grading
- Flakiness Index As mentioned under serial
and Elongation No.1 As mentioned under
index serial number 1
- Atterberg limits
of binding
material
of portion of
Date Page 313
aggregate number 1
passing 425
micron sieve As mentioned under serial
number 1
17] Earthwork - Sand Content 2 tests per 3000 cubic

[IS: 2720 (Part- metres of soil
4)]
- Plasticity 2 tests per 3000 cub. metres
Test[IS:2720 of soil.
(Part-5)]
- Density Test
[IS:2720 (Part-
8)] 2 tests per 3000 cubic
- Moisture Content metres of soil.
Test [IS :2720
(Part-2) ] One test for every 250 cubic
- CBR Test metres of soil.
One CBR test for every

3000 cum. at least or closer
as and when required by the
Engineer.
If directed by the Engineer in charge, the materials intended to be used for the work but not
included in the above schedule shall also be got tested at Government recognized Laboratory or
field Laboratory.

Date Page 314
MILESTONES AND TIME SCHEDULE

Date Page 315
PART-IV
CHAPTER - I
MILESTONES AND TIME SCHEDULE
4.1.1 Time Schedule:
4.1.1.1 Time of start and completion:

The time allowed for execution of the works is 20 ( Twenty months) from the date of issue
of letter of acceptance from DFCCIL.
The contractor shall be expected to mobilize to the site of works and commence execution
of the works within 10 (days) from issue of Acceptance Letter by DFCCIL.
The contractor shall be expected to complete the whole work ordered on the contractor
within 20 months (Twenty months) from the date of issue of Acceptance Letter by
DFCCIL.
If the contractor commits defaults in commencing execution of the works as afore stated,
DFCCIL shall without prejudice to any other right to remedy, be at liberty to forfeit fully
the Earnest Money Deposit and performance guarantee of the contractor.
4.1.1.2 Progress of works:

The contractor shall submit a programme of work in the form of a Bar Chart of all the
activities in consistence with milestone target envisaged below. In case this bar chart
requires to be modified, the Engineer and the contractor shall agree upon a time and
progress chart. The chart shall be prepared in direct relation to the time stated as 20
months for the completion of the works as the milestone targets specified below of these
special conditions. It shall indicate the forecast of the dates of commencement and
completion of various activities of the work and may be amended as necessary by
agreements between the Engineer and the contractor within the limitation of 20 months as
overall completion period.
4.1.2 Achievement of milestone progress:

In order to ensure progress during the execution of the work the contractor will be
expected to achieve the following milestone targets ahead of dates mentioned against each.
Failure to achieve accomplished milestone targets within allocated timeframe, save for
reason accepted as laid by the Engineer shall create and constitute the ground for failure
on the part of contractor for maintaining progress of the work as per agreed programme.

Date Page 316
Milestone Targets Time allocated within which to achieve

completion in total 20 (Twenty) months
Time
(a) Physical commencement of work D + 10 days
(b) Mobilization of equipments D + 20 days
(c) Full mobilization of plant , machinery, D + 30 days
men and material
Construction of diversion of Road D + 60 days
(d) Construction of foundation D + 150 days
(e) Construction of substructure (Abutments D+150 to D+240 days
& Piers)
(f) Construction of stair cases D + 120 to D + 270 days
(g) Fabrication and launching of steel D + 60 to D + 330 days
superstructure
(h) Construction of deck slab including foot D +330 to D + 390 days
path, crash barrier, RE wall, RCC slab/Girder,
railing, etc.
Earthwork in embankment, Asphalted D +390 to D + 450 days
road,rlling etc. complete
(i) Completion of providing & fixing of D +390 to D + 500 days
protection screens, cables, testing, etc,
Providing and fixing Road sign boards, D +500 to D + 600 days
Lighting arrangements, painting etc. final
Finishing and clearance / tidying up of site
completely.
Note: “D” is the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance by DFCCIL to the contactor.

Date Page 317
TENDER FORMS
(INCLUDING SCHEDULE OF PRICES)

Date Page 318
PART- IV
CHAPTER II
TENDER FORMS
FORM No. SUBJECT
Form No. 1 Offer Letter

Form No. 2 Tenderer’s Credentials
Form No. 2A Technical Eligibility Criteria Details
Form No. 2B Financial Eligibility Criteria Details
Form No. 2C Applicant's Party Information Form
Form No. 3 Summary of Prices
Form No. 4 Schedule of Prices and Total Prices
Form No. 5 Contract Agreement
Form No. 6 Performance Guarantee Bond
Form No. 7 Standing indemnity bond for on account payment.
Form No. 8 ECS / NEFT / RTGS
Form No. 9 Draft MOU for Joint Venture Participation
Form No.10 Draft Agreement for JV
Form No.11 Pro-forma of Participation from each partner of JV
Form No.12 Power of Attorney for authorized signatory of JV Partners
Form No.13 Power of Attorney to lead partner of JV
Form No. 14 Proforma for Time Extension
Form No. 15 Certificate of Fitness
Form No. 16 Proforma of 7 days Notice
Form No. 17 Proforma of 48 Hours Notice
Form No. 18 Proforma of Termination Notice
Form No. 19 Format of Bank Guarantee for Mobilisation Advance

Date Page 319
FORM No. 1
OFFER LETTER
Tender No: DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.214 & 220
Name of work - Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches complete in
lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa stations and L.C.
No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations of Palanpur-Ahmedabad
section of Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway.
To,
The Managing Director,
DFCCIL, New
Delhi
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding

Documents, including Addendam.
(b) We offer to execute the Works in conformity with the Bidding Documents;
(c) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the date fixed for the Bid
submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain
binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that
period;
(d) We have not been blacklisted/banned in accordance with para.1.3.13 (ii)(v)(a) of
Preamble and General Instructions to tenderers.
(e) We are neither Bankrupt/Insolvent nor in the process of winding-up nor there is a
case pending before any Court on deadline of submission of the Bid in accordance
with para. 1.3.13 (ii) (v) (b) of Preamble and General Instructions to tenderers.
(f) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Guarantee in accordance
with the Bidding Documents;
(g) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to deploy key equipment and key personnel
consistent with the requirements of the work.
(h) We understand that this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included
in your notification of award/Letter of Acceptance (LOA), shall constitute a binding
contract between us, until a formal contract is prepared and executed; and
(i) All information, statements and description in this Bid are in all respect true, correct
and complete to the best of our knowledge and belief and we have not made any
tampering or changes in the Bidding documents on which the Bid is being
submitted and if any tampering or changes/incorrect information are detected at
any stage, we understand the Bid will invite summarily rejection and forfeiture of
Bid security, the contract will be liable to be terminated along with forfeiture of
performance security, even if LOA has been issued.

Date Page 320
(j) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest Bid or any other Bid that
you may receive.
Name .....................................................................................................................
In the capacity of .................................................................................................... Signed
.................................................................................................................... Duly authorized to
sign the Bid for and on behalf of .............................................. Date
.......................................................................................................................

Date Page 321
FORM No. 2
TENDERER'S CREDENTIALS
S. No Description
1. For technical experience/competence, give details of similar completed

works during the last three financial years (i.e current Financial year
and three previous Financial Years) in the proforma given in Form-2A
2. For financial capacity and organizational resources, give details of

contractual payments received for the last three financial years (i.e
current Financial year and three previous financial years) as per
audited balance sheet certified by Chartered Accountant in the proforma given
in Form-2B
3. Give constitution of your firm. Attach certified copies of legal documents in

support thereof. Form-2C

Date Page 322
FORM No. 2A
TECHNICAL ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA DETAILS
Details of the similar works completed (as per Para 1.3.13 (i) of
Preamble and General Instructions to Tenderers)
Similar Contract No.
Contract Identification
Award date
Completion date
Prime Contractor Member in JV
Role in Contract
Total Contract Amount (Rs.)
If member in a JV , specify [insert a Total contract amount in Rs.

participation in total Contract percentage
amount amount]
Employer's Name:
Address:
Telephone/fax number
E-mail:
Description of the similarity in accordance with Criteria 1.3.13(i)(A)
The Bidder shall attach Certified completion certificates issued by the client duly
attested by Notary as per Eligibility Criteria of the tender documents.
Signature of the
Tenderer with Seal

Date Page 323
FORM No. 2B
FINANCIAL ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA DETAILS
Each Bidder or each member of JV must fill in this form separately. Name of
Bidder/JV Partner
Details of contractual payments received during the last three financial years and current
financial year
Contractual payments received
Year Value of payment received in Rs.

(Contract Receipts)
Current Year(2015-2016)
2014 - 2015
2013 - 2014
2012 - 2013
Total Contractual Payment
Note: The details should be extracted from the audited balance sheet Certified by the
Chartered Accountant or form 16-A issued by the Employer as per clause 1.3.13 of Preamble
and General Instructions to Tenderers.
The Bidder shall attach necessary documents in support of the above.
Signature of the
Tenderer with Seal

Date Page 324
FORM No. 2C
APPLICANT'S PARTY INFORMATION FORM
Applicant name:
[insert full name]

Applicant's Party name:
[insert full name of Applicant's Party]

Applicant's Party country of registration:
[indicate country of registration]

Applicant Party's year of constitution:
[indicate year of constitution]

Applicant Party's legal address in country of constitution:
[insert street/ number/ town or city/ country]

Applicant Party's authorized representative information
Name: [insert full name]
Address: [insert street/ number/ town or city/ country]
Telephone/Fax numbers: [insert telephone/fax numbers, including country and city codes]
E-mail address:
1. Attached are [indicate e-mail address]
copies of original documents of
Articles of Incorporation (or equivalent documents of constitution or association), and/or

registration documents of the legal entity named above.
In case of a Government-owned enterprise or institution, documents establishing legal

and financial autonomy, operation in accordance with commercial law, and absence of
dependent status.
2. Included are the organizational chart, a list of Board of Directors, and the beneficial
ownership.
Signature of the
Tenderer with Seal

Date Page 325
FORM No. 3
SUMMARY OF PRICES
(Summary of Prices has been separately attached in Financial Packet "B")

Date Page 326
FORM No. 4
SCHEDULE -1
SCHEDULE OF PRICES & TOTAL PRICES
(Schedule of Prices & Total Prices have been separately attached in Financial Packet "B").

Date Page 327
FORM No. 5
SAMPLE
AGREEMENT
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) is made at New Delhi on the day of

BETWEEN
(1) Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, incorporated under the laws of
India and having its principal place of business at, Pragati Maidan Metro Station Building
Complex, New Delhi, India – 110001 (hereinafter called ‘the Employer’), and ---------------------
---------------------, a company / corporation / JV incorporated under the laws of -----------
-having its principal place of business at ----------------------------------- (hereinafter called “the
Contractor”).
WHEREAS in reference to a call for Tender for Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge
including approaches complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan
and Dangarwa stations and L.C. No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan
stations of Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway as per
Tender paper ________________________ at Annexure “A” here to, the Contractor has submitted
a Tender hereto and whereas the said Tender of the contractor has been accepted for
Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214
and 220. As per copy of the Letter of Acceptance of Tender No _______________ dated
xx.xx.2016 complete with enclosure at the accepted rates and at an estimated contract value of
Rs._________(Rupees _only). Now the agreement with witnesseth to that in consideration of the
premises and the payment to be made by the Employer to the Contractor provided for herein
below the Contractor shall supply all equipments and materials and execute and perform
all works for which the said Tender of the Contractor has been accepted, strictly according to the
various provisions in Annexure ‘A’ and ‘B’ hereto and upon such supply, execution and
performance to the satisfaction of the Purchaser, the Purchaser shall pay to the contractor at the
several rates accepted as per the said Annexure ‘B’ and in terms of the provisions therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused their respective Common Seals
to be hereunto affixed/ (or have hereunto set their respective hands and seals) the day and

Date Page 328
year first above written.
For and on behalf of the Contractor For and on behalf of the Employer
Signature of the authorized official Signature of the authorized official

Name of the official Name of the official
Stamp/seal of the Contractor Stamp/Seal of the Employer
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
By the said By the said

Name
Name
on behalf of the Contractor in the on behalf of the Employer in the

presence of: presence of:
Witness Witness
Name Name
Address Address
Enclosures:-
1. Annexure ‘A’ - Tender Papers No.

2. Annexure ‘B’ - Letter of Acceptance of Tender _____________ Dated ___.___.2016
along with Summary of Prices

Date Page 329
FORM No. 6
SAMPLE
Name of the Bank
Managing Director/ DFCCIL Bank Guarantee Bond No.

Acting through (Designation Dated and address of contract signing authority)
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE BOND
In consideration of the Managing Director/ DFCCIL acting through ________________

(Designation & Address of Contract Signing Authority), Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of
India Limited, New Delhi hereinafter called “DFCCIL”) having agreed under the terms and
conditions of agreement/Contract Acceptance letter No. ___________ dated made between
________(Designation & address of contract signing Authority) and ___________(hereinafter
called “the said contractor(s)” for the work________
(hereinafter called “the said agreement”) having agreed for submission of a irrevocable
Bank Guarantee Bond for Rs.___________ (Rs. only) as a
performance security Guarantee Bond from the contractor(s) for compliance of his obligations in
accordance with the terms & conditions in the said agreement.
1. We (indicate the name of the Bank) hereinafter referred to as the Bank, undertake
to pay to the Government an amount not exceeding Rs. (Rs. only) on
demand by the Government.
2. We (indicate the name of the bank, further agree that (and promise) to
pay the amounts due and payable under this guarantee without any demur merely on a
demand from the Government through the GROUP GENERAL MANAGER/
FINANCE Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, New Delhi or
_ (Designation & Address of contract signing authority) DFCCIL,
stating that the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or would be
caused or suffered by the Government by reason of any breach by the said contractor of
any of the terms or conditions contained in the said agreement or by reason of the
contractor failure to perform the said agreement. Any such demand made on the Bank
shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under this
guarantee. However, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount
not exceeding Rs. (Rs. only)
3 (a) We, ( indicate the name of Bank ) further undertake to pay to the
Government any money so demanded notwithstanding any dispute or dispute raised by
the contractor (s) in any suit or proceeding pending before any court or Tribunal relating
to liability under this present being absolute and unequivocal.

Date Page 330
(b) The payment so made by us under this bond shall be valid discharge of our liability for
payment there under and the contractor(s) shall have no claim against us for making such
payment.
4. We, (indicate the name of bank ) to further agree that the guarantee herein
contained shall remain in full force and effect during the period that would be taken for
the performance of the said agreement and that it shall continue to be enforceable till all
the dues of the Government under or by virtue of the said agreement have been fully
paid and its claims satisfied or discharged by ___________ (Designation & Address
of contract signing authority) on behalf of the Government, certify that the terms and
conditions of the said agreement have been fully and properly carried out by the said
contractor (s) and accordingly discharges this guarantee.
5. (a) Not withstanding any thing to the contrary contained herein the liability of the bank
under this guarantee will remain in force and effect until such time as this guarantee is
discharged in writing by the Government or until ( date of validity/extended validity)
whichever is earlier and no claim shall be valid under this guarantee unless notice in
writing thereof is given by the Government within validity / extended period of
validity of guarantee from the date aforesaid.
(b) Provided always that we (indicate the name of the

Bank ) unconditionally undertakes to renew this guarantee to extend the period of
guarantee form year to year before the expiry of the period or the extended period of the
guarantee, as the case may be on being called upon to do so by the Government. If the
guarantee is not renewed or the period extended on demand, we (indicate the
name of the Bank) shall pay the Government the full amount guarantee on demand
and without demur.
6. We, (indicate the name of Bank) further agree with the Government that the
Government shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without effecting in
any manner out of obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the
said contract from time to time or to postpone for any time or from time to time any to the
powers exercisable by the Government against the said contractor (s) and to forbear or
enforce any of the terms and conditions of the said agreement and we shall not be relieved
from our liability by reason of any such variation, or extension being granted to the said
contractor (s) or for any bearance act or omission on the part of the Government or any
indulgence by the Government to the said contractor (s) or by any such matter or thing
whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties for the said reservation would relive us
from the liability.
7. This guarantee will not be discharged by any change in the constitution of the Bank or
the Contractor (s).
8. We, (indicate the name of the Bank) lastly undertake not to revoke
this guarantee except with the previous consent of the Government in writing.

Date Page 331
9. This guarantee shall be valid upto (Date of completion plus

60 days beyond that). Unless extended on demand by Government.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein before, our
liability under this guarantee is restricted to Rs. (Rs.
only) unless a demand under this guarantee is
made on us in writing on or before we, shall be
discharged from our liabilities under this guarantee thereafter.
Dated the day of for

(indicate the name of bank)
Signature of Bank Authorize official

(Name):
Designation: Full
Address.
Witness:
1.
2.

Date Page 332
FORM No. 7
SAMPLE
STANDING INDEMNITY BOND FOR “ON ACCOUNT” PAYMENTS
(On paper of requisite stamp value)
We, M/s hereby undertake that we hold at our stores

Depot/s at for and on behalf of the Managing Director/ DFCCIL acting
in the premises through the Chief Project Manager /
DFCCIL/Ahmedabad or his successor (hereinafter referred to as “The Employer”) all
materials for which “On Account” payments have been made to us against the Contract
for ( ) on the section
DFCCIL also referred to as Group/s vide letter of Acceptance of
Tender ______ dated _______ and material handed over to us by the
employer for the purpose of execution of the said contract, until such time the materials
are duly erected or otherwise handed over to him.
We shall be entirely responsible for the safe custody and protection of the said
materials against all risk till they are duly delivered as erected equipment to the
employer or as he may direct otherwise and shall indemnify the employer
against any loss /damage or deterioration whatsoever in respect of the said material
while in our possession and against disposal of surplus materials. The said materials
shall at all times be open to inspection by any officer authorized by the Chief
Project Manager/ DFCCIL/ Ahmedabad in charge of Dedicated Freight Corridor
Corporation of India Limited (Whose address will be intimated in due course).
Should any loss, damage or deterioration of materials occur or surplus material

disposed off and refund becomes due, the Employer shall be entitled to recover from us
the 85% of supply portion of Part IV, Chapter – II (Form - 4) to the Contract (as
applicable) and also compensation for such loss or damage if any long with the amount
to be refunded without prejudice to any other remedies available to him by deduction
from any sum due or any sum which at any time hereafter becomes due to us under the
said or any other Contract.
Dated this day day of 2016

for and on behalf of
M/s (Contractor)
Signature of witness
Name of witness in Block letter.
Address.

Date Page 333
FORM No. 8
ECS / NEFT / RTGS
MANDATE FORM
Date :-
To,
GM (F) / GGM (F)
DFCCIL, New Delhi.
Sub : ECS / NEFT / RTGS payments
We refer to the ECS / NEFT / RTGS set up by DFCCIL for remittance of our payments using
RBI's NEFT / RTGS scheme, our payments may be made through the above scheme to our under
noted account.
Name of Bank
Name of City
Bank Code No
Name of Bank Branch
Branch Code No
Address of Bank Branch
Telephone Number of Bank Branch
Fax No of Bank Branch
Name of customer / Tenderer as per account
Account Number of Tenderer appearing on cheque book
Type of Account (S. B. / Current / Cash credit)
IFSC code for NEFT
IFSC code for RTGS
9-Digit-code number of the bank and branch appearing on
the MICR cheque issued by the bank.
Details of Cancelled Cheque leaf
Telephone no of tenderer
Cell Phone Number of the tenderer to whom details with
regard to the status of bill submitted to Accounts Office
i.e Co6 & Co7 & Cheque Purchase Orders particulars can
be intimated through SMS
Tenderer's E - mail ID
Confirmed by Bank signature of tenderer With stamp and address

Enclose a copy of crossed cheque

Date Page 334
FORM No. 9
DRAFT MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU)For

JOINT VENTURE PARTICIPATION
BETWEEN
M/s ……………….. having its registered office at ………………… (hereinafter referred to as
…………………) acting as the Lead Partner of the first part,
and
M/s ………………………….having its registered office at ……………. (hereinafter referred
to as `……………….’) in the capacity of a Joint Partner of the other part.
and
M/s ………………………….having its registered office at ……………. (hereinafter
referred to as `……………….’) in the capacity of a Joint Partner of the other part.
The expressions of …………….. and ………….. shall wherever the context admits, mean and
include their respective legal representatives, successors-in-interest and assigns and shall
collectively be referred to as “the Parties” and individually as “ the Party”
WHEREAS:
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited (DFCCIL) [hereinafter referred to as
“Client”] has invited Bids for … “[Insert name of work]…………………...”
NOW, THEREFORE, THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

1. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as an
integral part of this MOU.
(i) Notice for Bid, and
(ii) Bidding document
(iii) Any Addendum/Corrigendum issued by Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation
of India Limited
(iv) The Bid submitted on our behalf jointly by the Lead Partner.
2. The `Parties’ have studied the documents and have agreed to participate in submitting a
`Bid’ jointly.
3. M/s ………shall be the lead member of the JV for all intents and purpose and shall
represent the Joint Venture in its dealing with the Client. For the purpose of submission of
Bid proposals, the parties agree to nominate …….. as the leader duly authorized to sign
and submit all documents and subsequent clarifications, if any, to the Client. However M/s
……… shall not submit any such proposals, clarifications or commitments before securing
the written clearance of the other partner which shall be expeditiously given by
M/s……..…….to M/s………….
4. The `Parties’ have resolved that the distribution of responsibilities and their proportionate
share in the Joint Venture is as under:
(a) Lead Partner;

Date Page 335
(i) ………
(ii) ……….
(iii) …..
(b) Joint Venture Partner
(i) ………
(ii) ……….
(iii) …..
[Similar details to be given for each partner]
5. JOINT AND SEVERAL RESPONSIBILITY

The Parties undertake that they shall be jointly and severally liable to the Client in the
discharge of all the obligations and liabilities as per the contract with the Client and for the
performance of contract awarded to their JV.
6. ASSIGNMENT AND THIRD PARTIES

The parties shall co-operate throughout the entire period of this MOU on the basis of
exclusivity and neither of the Parties shall make arrangement or enter into agreement either
directly or indirectly with any other party or group of parties on matters relating to the
Project except with prior written consent of the other party.
7. EXECUTIVE AUTHORITY
The said Joint Venture through its authorized representative shall receive instructions,
payments from the Client. The management structure for the project shall be prepared by
mutual consultations to enable completion of project to quality requirements within
permitted cost and time.
8. BID SECURITIES
Till the award of the work, JV firm/Lead Partner of JV firm shall furnish Bid Security to
the Client on behalf of the joint venture which shall be legally binding on all the members
of the Joint Venture.
9. BID SUBMISSION
Each Party shall bear its own cost and expenses for preparation and submission of the Bid
and all costs until conclusion of a contract with the Client for the Project. Common expenses
shall be shared by all the parties in the ratio of their actual participation.
10. INDEMNITY
Each party hereto agrees to indemnify the other party against its respective parts in case of
breach/default of the respective party of the contract works of any liabilities sustained by the
Joint Venture.
11. For the execution of the respective portions of works, the parties shall make their own
arrangements to bring the required finance, plants and equipment, materials, manpower and
other resources.
12. DOCUMENTS & CONFIDENTIALITY

Each Party shall maintain in confidence and not use for any purpose related to the Project
all commercial and technical information received or generated in the course of

Date Page 336
preparation and submission of the Bid.

13. ARBITRATION
Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this agreement shall be
settled in the first instance amicably between the parties. If an amicable settlement cannot
be reached as above, it will be settled by arbitration in accordance with the Indian
Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 or any amendments thereof. The venue of the
arbitration shall be Delhi.
14. VALIDITY
This Agreement shall remain in force till the occurrence of the earliest to occur of the
following, unless by mutual consent, the Parties agree in writing to extend the validity for a
further period.
a. The Bid submitted by the Joint Venture is declared unsuccessful, or

b. Cancellation/ shelving of the Project by the client for any reasons prior to award of
work
c. Execution of detailed JV agreement by the parties, setting out detailed terms
after award of work by the Client.
15. This MOU is drawn in ….. number of copies with equal legal strength and status. One copy
is held by M/s ………… and the other by M/s………….& …….M/s ……….. and a
copy submitted with the proposal.
16. This MOU shall be construed under the laws of India.
17. NOTICES
Notices shall be given in writing by fax confirmed by registered mail or commercial courier to
the following fax numbers and addresses:
Lead Partner Other Partner(s)

…………………………. …………………
(Name & Address) (Name & Address)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE PARTIES, have executed this MOU the day, month and year
first before written.
M/s…………………………….. M/s……………………….
…….…………………………… …………………………..
(Seal) (Seal)
Witness
1…………………..(Name & Address)
2………………….. (Name & Address)
Notes: (1) In case of existing joint venture, the certified copy of JV Agreement may be
furnished.

Date Page 337
FORM No. 10
DRAFT FORMAT OF JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT

To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value in accordance with
relevant Stamp Act and to be registered with appropriate authority under
Registration Act.
The JV agreement shall be structured generally as per contents list given below:
A. CONDITIONS AND TERMS OF JV AGREEMENT
1. Definitions and Interpretation

2. Joint Venture – Include Equity of members, transferability of shareholding of equity of a
partner leaving during the subsistence of the contract.
3. Proposal Submission
4. Performance – To indicate scope of responsibility of each member
5. Language and Law
6. Exclusively
7. Executive Authority
8. Documents
9. Personnel
10. Assignment and Third Parties
11. Severability
12. Member in Default
13. Duration of the Agreement
14 Liability and sharing of risks
15. Insurance
16. Sharing of Promotion and Project Costs, Profits, Losses and Remuneration
17. Financial Administration and Accounting
18. Guarantees and Bonds
19. Arbitration
20. Notices
21. Sole Agreement and Variation
B. SCHEDULES
1. Project and Agreement Particulars
2. Financial Administration Services
3. Allocation of the obligations
4. Financial Policy and Remuneration
*****

Date Page 338
FORM No. 11
PRO-FORMA LETTER OF PARTICIPATION FROM EACH PARTNER OF JOINT

VENTURE (JV)
(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value in accordance with relevant
Stamp Act and to be registered with appropriate authority under Registration Act.)
No…. Dated
From:
……………………..
………………..
To,
The Managing Director,
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited
Pragati Maidan Metro Stn. Building Complex.,
New Delhi 110001.
Gentlemen,
Re: …“[Insert name of work]…………………………………………..”.
Ref: Your notice for Invitation for Bid No. ___________________________

dated …………..
1. We wish to confirm that our company/firm has formed a Joint Venture

with(i)……………. & ii)……………….. for the purposes associated with IFB referred
to above.
(Members who are not the lead partner of the JV should add the following paragraph)*.
2. ‘The JV is led by … whom we hereby authorise to act on our behalf for the purposes of
submission of Bid for ………. and authorise to incur liabilities and receive instructions
for and on behalf of any and all the partners or constituents of the Joint Venture.’
OR
(Member(s) being the lead member of the group should add the following paragraph)*
2. ‘In this group we act as leader and, for the purposes of applying for Bid, represent the
Joint Venture:
3. In the event of our JV being awarded the contract, we agree to be jointly with i) & ii)
……… (names of other members of our JV) and severally liable to the Dedicated

Date Page 339
Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited, its successors and assigns for all
obligations, duties and responsibilities arising from or imposed by the contract
subsequently entered into between Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India
Limited and our JV.
4. *I/We, further agree that entire execution of the contract shall be carried out
exclusively through the lead partner.
Yours faithfully,
(Signature)
(Name of Signatory)………………….
(Capacity of Signatory)…………………
Company Seal * Delete as applicable
Note : In case of existing joint venture, the certified copy of JV Agreement may be furnished.

Date Page 340
FORM No. 12
FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR AUTHORISED SIGNATORY OF

JOINT VENTURE (JV) PARTNERS
POWER OF ATTORNEY*
(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of the appropriate value in accordance with
relevant stamp Act. The stamp paper to be in the name of the company who is issuing the
power of Attorney)
Know all men by these presents, we … do hereby constitute, appoint and authorise
Mr/Ms. …. who is presently employed with us and holding the position of ……as our attorney, to
do in our name and on our behalf, all such acts, deeds and things necessary in connection with
or incidental to our Bid for the work of
… Including signing and submission of all documents and providing information / responses
to Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited , representing us in all matters,
dealing with Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited in all matters in
connection with our Bid for the said project.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said attorney pursuant
to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things done by our aforesaid attorney
shall and shall always be deemed to have been done by us.
Dated this the ……… day of …………. 2016.
(Signature of authorised Signatory)
Signature of Lead Partner Signature of JV Partner(s)
……………………………………… ……………………….
(Signature and Name in Block letters of Signatory)
Seal of Company
Witness
Witness 1: Witness 2:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Occupation: Occupation:
*Notes:
i) To be executed by all the partners jointly, in case of a Joint Venture.

Date Page 341
FORM No. 13
FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY TO

LEAD PARTNER OF JOINT VENTURE (JV)
(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of the appropriate value in accordance

with relevant stamp Act. The stamp paper to be in the name of the company who is
issuing the power of Attorney)
POWER OF ATTORNEY*
Whereas Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited has invited Bids for
the work of “Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches
complete in lieu of L.C. No. 214 at IR Kms. 735/1-2 between Ambliyasan and Dangarwa
stations and L.C. No. 220, IR Kms. 743/3-4 between Dangarwa and Jhulasan stations of
Palanpur-Ahmedabad section of Ahmedabad Division of Western Railway”.
Whereas, the members of the Joint Venture comprising of M/s. …, M/s. …, M/s.
……, and M/s. …. are interested in submission of Bid for the work of …[Insert name of
work]… in accordance with the terms and conditions contained in the
Bidding documents.
Whereas, it is necessary for the members of the Joint Venture to designate one of them as the
Lead Partner, with all necessary power and authority to do, for and on behalf of the Joint
Venture, all acts, deeds and things as may be necessary in connection with the Joint
Venture's Bid for the project, as may be necessary in connection the Joint Venture's Bid for
the project.
NOW THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY WITNESSETH THAT:

We, M/s. ………………, hereby designate M/s. ………………………………, being one of
the partners of the Joint Venture, as the lead partner of the Joint Venture, to do on behalf of
the Joint Venture, all or any of the acts, deeds or things necessary or incidental to the Joint
Venture's Bid for the contract, including submission of Bid, participating in conferences,
responding to queries, submission of information/ documents and generally to represent the
Joint Venture in all its dealings with the DFCCIL or any other Government Agency or any
person, in connection with the Bid/contract for the said work until culmination of the
process of Bidding till the contract agreement if successful, is entered into with the
Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited and thereafter till the expiry
of the contract agreement.
*To be executed by all the members of the JV except the lead member.

Date Page 342
The mode of execution of the Power of Attorney should be in accordance with the procedure,
if any, laid down by the applicable law and the charter documents of the executant(s) and
when it is so required the same should be under common seal affixed in accordance with
the required procedure.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by lead member, our said
attorney, pursuant to this power of attorney and that all acts deeds and things done by our
aforesaid attorney shall and shall always be deemed to have been done by us/ Joint Venture.
Dated this the ………… Day of ……….. 2016
…………………….
(Signature)
………………………………………
(Name in Block letters of Executants) Seal
of Company
Witness 1
Name:
Address:
Occupation:
Witness 2
Name:
Address:
Occupation:

Date Page 343
FORM No. 14
Registered Acknowledgement Due
PROFORMA FOR TIME EXTENSION
No. _______________________ Dated : ____________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Sub : (i) __________________________________________________(name of work).

(ii) Acceptance letter no. __________________________________________
(iii) Understanding/Agreement no. ___________________________________
Ref: _______________________________________(Quote specific application of Contractor for

extension to the date received)________________________________
Dear Sir,
1. The stipulated date for completion of the work mentioned above is _______________.From
the progress made so far and the present rate of progress, it is unlikely that the work will be
completed by the above date (or ‘However, the work was not completed on this date’).
2. Expecting that you may be able to complete the work, if some more time is given, the
competent authority, although not bound to do so, hereby extends the time for completion
from_________________ to ___________________.
3. Please note that an amount equal to the liquidated damages for delay in the completion of the
work after the expiry of _______________________(give here the stipulated date for
completion with/without any penalty fixed earlier)will be recovered from you as mentioned in
Clause, 17-B of the Standard General Conditions of Contract for the extended period,
notwithstanding the grant of this extension. You may proceed with the work accordingly.
4. The above extension of the completion date will also be subject to the further condition that
no increase in rates on any account will be payable to you.
5. Please intimate within a week of the receipt of this letter your acceptance of the extension of
the conditions stated above.

Date Page 344
6. Please note that in the event of your declining to accept the extension on the above said
conditions or in the event of your failure after accepting or acting upto this extension to
complete the work by ______________ (here mention the extended date), further action will
be taken in terms of Clause 62 of the Standard General Conditions of Contract.
Yours faithfully
For and on behalf of the Employer

Name of the Official:-
Stamp/Seal of the Employer

Date Page 345
FORM No. 15
CERTIFICATE OF FITNESS
1. (a) Serial Number ______________

(b) Date _______________
2. Name of person examined ________________________

I certify that I have personally examined (name)_______________________
3. Father’s Name: son/daughter of _____________________________________ ,

residing at ________________________________________________________
4. Sex ___________
5. Residence: _______________________________________________
6. Date of birth, if available, and/or certified age Who is desirous of being employed
____________________________ in a factory or on a work requiring
manual labour and that his / her age
7. Physical fitness _______________________ as nearly as can be ascertained
from my examination, is _______
8. Identification marks ___________________ years and that he/she is fit for
_____________________________________ employment in a factory or on a
work requiring manual labour as an
adult/child.
9. Reasons for:
(a) refusal to grant certificate, or __________________________

(b) revoking the Certificate _________________________
____________________
Signature or Left Hand
Thumb Impression of the
person Examined
_________________________
Signature of Certifying Surgeon
Note :In case of physical disability, the exact details of the cause of the physical disability should
be clearly stated

Date Page 346
FORM No. 16
PROFORMA OF 7 DAYS NOTICE

DFCCIL
(Without Prejudice)
To
M/s _____________________________
_____________________________
Dear Sir,
Contract Agreement No. _____________________________________________

In connection with _________________________________________________
1. In spite of repeated instructions to you by the subordinate offices as well as by this office in
various letters of even no. ________________, dated __________; you have failed to start
work/show adequate progress and/or submit detailed programme for completing the work.
2. Your attention is invited to this office/Chief Engineer’s office letter no. ___________
________, dated __________ in reference to your representation, dated ____________.
3. As you have failed to aBide by the instructions issued to commence the work/to show
adequate progress of work you are hereby given 7 days’ notice in accordance with Clause 62
of Standard General Conditions of Contract to commence works / to make good the progress,
failing which further action as provided in Clause 62 of the Standard General Conditions of
Contract viz. to terminate your Contract and complete the balance work without your
participation will be taken.
Kindly acknowledge receipt.
Yours faithfully


Date Page 347
FORM No. 17
PROFORMA OF 48 HRS. NOTICE

DFCCIL
(Without Prejudice)
To
M/s _____________________________
_________________________________
Dear Sir,

1. Seven days’ notice under Clause 62 of Standard General Conditions of Contract was given to
you under this office letter of even no., dated ____________; but you have taken no action to
commence the work/show adequate progress of the work.
2. You are hereby given 48 hours’ notice in terms of Clause 62 of Standard General Conditions
of Contract to commence works / to make good the progress of works, failing which and on
expiry of this period your above contract will stand rescinded and the work under this contract
will be carried out independently without your participation and your Security Deposit shall
be forfeited and Performance Guarantee shall also be encashed and consequences which may
please be noted.
Yours faithfully


Date Page 348
FORM No. 18
PROFORMA OF TERMINATION NOTICE

DFCCIL
(Without Prejudice)
No. ________________________________ Dated ____________
To
M/s _____________________________
_________________________________
Dear Sir,

Forty eight hours (48 hrs.) notice was given to you under this office letter of even no.,
dated _______________; but you have taken no action to commence the work/show adequate
progress of the work.
Since the period of 48 hours’ notice has already expired, the above contract stands rescinded in
terms of Clause 62 of Standard General Conditions of Contract and the balance work under this
contract will be carried out independently without your participation. Your participation as well as
participation of every member/partner in any manner as an individual or a partnership firm/JV is
hereby debarred from participation in the tender for executing the balance work and your Security
Deposit shall be forfeited and Performance Guarantee shall also be encashed.
Yours faithfully


Date Page 349
FORM No. 19
SAMPLE
FORMAT OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR MOBILISATION ADVANCE
(Clause 1.5.20, Part - I, Chapter - V)
Bank guarantee made on this …………………………………. Between ………………………

(hereinafter called “the Bank”) of the One Part and Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of
India Limited. (hereinafter called “the Employer”) of the other Part.
WHEREAS Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Limited has awarded the
Contract no…………. for “………………………………….” (hereinafter called “the
Contractor”), having its registered office at ………………………………..
AND WHEREAS vide Clause 1.5.20 of Part - I, Chapter V , Special Conditions of

Contract, Mobilization Advance up to ___% (___ percent) of the original contract value of
Rs………………….. is payable to the contractor against Bank Guarantees, the contractor
hereby applies for Mobilization Advance of ___% (___ percent) amounting to
Rs……………………../- (Rupees…………………………………..) of the Contract Price,
Now, we the undersigned, Bank of …………., being fully authorized to sign and to incur
obligations for and on behalf of and in the name of Bank of ……………..hereby declare that the
said Bank will guarantee the Employer the full amount of Rs. …………………../-
(Rupees……………………………………..) as stated above.
We, Bank of ………………., do hereby unconditionally, irrevocably and without demur

guarantee and undertake to pay the Employer immediately on demand any or all money
payable by the contractor to the extent of Rs. ………………./-(Rupees………………………..)
without any demur, reservation, context, recourse or protest and/or without any reference to the
contractor. Any such demand made by the Employer on the Bank shall be conclusive and
binding notwithstanding any difference between the Employer and the contractor on any dispute
pending before any court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any other authority. We agree that the
guarantee herein contained shall be irrevocable and shall continue to be enforceable till the
Employer discharges this guarantee.
This guarantee is valid till ……………………………..
At any time during the period in which this guarantee still valid of the contractor fails to fulfil its
obligation under the Contract, it is understood that the Bank will extend this guarantee under the
same condition for the required time on demand by the Employer at the cost of the contractor.
The Guarantee hereinbefore contained shall not be affected by any change in the
constitution of the Bank or of the contractor.

Date Page 350
The neglect or forbearance of the Employer in enforcement of payment of any money, the
payment whereof is intended to be hereby secured or the giving of time by the Employer for the
payment hereof shall in no way relieve the Bank of their liability under this Deed.
The expressions “the Employer”, “the Bank” and “the contractor” hereinbefore used shall
include their respective successors and assigns.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein:
Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs………………./-
(Rupees…………….)
this bank Guarantee shall be valid up to………………….
We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only
and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before ……………(date of
expiry of Guarantee).
In witness whereof we of the Bank have signed and sealed this Guarantee on the
…………………day of ………….. being herewith duly authorized.
For and on behalf of the Bank of ..................
Signature of Authorized Bank Official
Name ............................................
Designation ............................................
Stamp/Seal of the bank .............................................
Signed, sealed and delivered for and on
Behalf of the bank by the above named
......................... in the presence of

Witness 1
Signature ........................................
Name ........................................
Address ........................................
Witness 2
Signature ........................................
Name ........................................
Address ........................................

Date Page 351
DRAWINGS

Date Page 352
PART V
DRAWINGS
5.1 General Arrangement Drawings with Key Plan:
SL. Level Chainage of Appox Rly.Span Approx. GENERAL

No. Crossing ROB configuration Approach ARRANGEMENT
No (km) (m) Span DRAWING No.
configuration
(m)
1. 214 IR Km. 735/1-2 3x36 (Composite 17x24 (RCC 1)PCE/23555/DRM/4-D
DFC Ch. 29885 Girders) Girder ) 2) Approach GAD of State Govt
2. 220 IR Km. 743/3-4 1x36+1x30+1x12 13x24 (RCC 1)PCE/23599/DRM/4-D
DFC Ch. 21650 (Composite Girders) Girder) 2) Approach GAD of State Govt
Notes:
1. General Arrangement Drawings are attached as a part of tender document.
2. These GADs are indicative and for reference only.
3. The work shall be done as per final / detailed drawings and designs.
END OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

Date Page 353

ROB Specifications PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROB Specifications PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROB Specifications PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender No. DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.

214 & 220

Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over bridge including approaches

PART/CHAPTERS DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

Chapter I Notice Inviting Tender 4

Chapter II General Information / Data sheet 8

Chapter III Preamble and General Instructions to Tenderers 9

Chapter IV General Conditions of Contract 25

Chapter V Special Conditions of Contract 75

PART - II Technical Specifications 88

PART – III (A) Additional Technical Specifications-I 166

PART – III (B) Additional Technical Specifications-II 180

PART – III (C) Additional Technical Specifications-III 185

Chapter I Milestones and Time Schedule 315

Chapter II Tender Forms (including Schedule of Prices) 318

PART - V Drawings 352

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

No: DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/ LC.NO.214&220 DATE:10.03.2016

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

National Competitive Bidding

Name of Work: Construction of 02 Nos. of Road over Bridge including approaches

S. Name of work Tender cost Earnest Completi

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

GENERAL INFORMATION / DATA SHEET

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

GENERAL INFORMATION/DATA SHEET

TENDER NOTICE NO. DFC/ADI/ENGG/ADI-PNU/ROB/LC.NO.214 & 220

(b) Completion Period 20 months

(c) Earnest Money Rs. 63,63,000/-

(f) Date and Time of On 18.04.2016 at 15:30 hrs

(h) Retention Money / 5 % of Contract Value

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

PREAMBLE & GENERAL

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

Dedicated Freight Corridor Corporation of India Ltd. (DFCCIL), a public sector

Ministry of Railways (MOR), Government of India has planned to construct Dedicated

(ii) Dedicated Freight Corridor

(iii) Scope of Work

On behalf of President of India, Chief Project Manager herein after referred to as

a) Railway Portion arrangement as per approved GAD :

SL. Level Crossing Chainage of Appox Rly.Span Approx. Approach

(h) Construction of Inspection platform, railing, ladders, etc.

(i) Construction of RCC/Steel staircases, providing and fixing of protection

(j) Construction of approaches which includes constructing of RE wall, RCC

Works are to be executed in the jurisdiction of Ahmedabad Division of Western

1.3.2(a) Tender Bid

Eligibility/Qualifying e l e m e n t of the Tender Bid along with other documents

1.3.2(b) Form of Tender

The Tender documents shall be in two separate sealed packets viz:-

Tenders not submitted in the proper Forms are liable to be rejected.

Signature of tenderer (s) For CPM/DFCCIL/ADI

(i) Documents to be enclosed with the TECHNICAL BID (Packet - A):-

(1) Offer letter complete. Form No. 1

(2) Tenderer's credentials in accordance Form No. 2A, 2B & 2C

(ii) Documents to be enclosed with the FINANCIAL BID (Packet B):-

1.3.3 Tender Document